^ 03 '5/ 7f^ Digitized by the Internet Archive in 2007 with funding from IVIicrosoft Corporation http://www.archive.org/details/frenchconversatiOOottorich )]. STANDARD EDUCATIONAL WORK'S. Borel. O'urs de Tli^mes. i2mo S^o 73 E jrel. Grammaire Fraii?ai>e. i2mo i 60 Delille. ' Condensed French Instruction. 181110 5'^ Fisher. Easy French Reading. With Vocabulary. i6mo 95 Fleurf Histoi e de France. i2mo 14° Fleury. Ancient History. Translated, with Note.*;. i2mo.. 85 Gasc. French English Dictionary. 8vo 3 75 Do do i8mo. Pocket edition, $1.40 ; 2 vols, i 60 Translator. (English into Frenci) 125 Gibert. Introductory French Manual. i2mo 85 Janes'. French Grammar. i2mo 1^5 Lacombe. Histoire liu Peuple Frangaise. 75 Le Jeu des Anteurs, (Game of Authors) ii a box i 00 Maistre (X. de). rEuvres C:omulfeie.'i 140 Ma sire (X. de ) Voyage autour de ma Chambr.i. lamo. Paper 40 Mussjt. IJn Capncp cSni'fdip. i2nio. Paper 3° Otto, p'rench Conversation Gramm.tr. ismo. Roan, ^1.60 : Key 75 Mocher's French R ader. i2nio. Roan 140 First Hook in Frenc t. i6mo. Hoards 40 I iitroductorv Frencfi I^esso is i 25 Introductory Fremih Rea er. 12010. I'.otirds 100 Pariez-vous Frdn<;ais'^r, Do \ou Spe«k Frcncii? 18m >. Hoar Is 50 Plays. CoLl'-ge Serirs of M -litrn French Plays. With Knslisli .Notes by Piof. I<6jhir. i2m->. Paper La Joie lait Feur, ,^o cents ; I,a Hat .ille des Dames. 35C-i»«9: La Miisoi es Ricochets. 25 cents ; Le Testament de Madame Patunal ; La Mademoiselle de St. Cyr, 25 cents ; La Petite Maman ; Le Hrncel^t, 25 cents ; La Loterie de Francfort ; Jeune Savante, 25 c€nts. Siudenis' ColUction of Classic Fr>'>ich Pluys. i2mo. Paper. With full Notes, by Prof. E. S Joyne. Oorneill j. Le Cid, 50 cents. Raciae. Athalie, 50 cents. Moliere. Le Misanthrope, 50 cents. The foregomg in 0!ie vol. i2mo. Cloih 1 50 Pylodet's Hcqinning French. i6mo. Hoards... 55 • Hegjnner's French Reader. With illustrations. i6mo. Hoards 55 Second French Reader. With illustrations 1 10 l..a Literature F angaise Classique i2mo \ C La Literature Fran<;a:se Coiitemporainc. i2mo i 40 Gouties de Rosie. Fren h T,yric Poetry. i8mo 65 • Mere L'Oie. lUustnittd. 8vo. Hoards 50 Riodo. Lucie. Frencli an \ EnsiH-^ 1 Conversations. i2mo : 75 Badler. Translnting I'.nEhsh into I-'rench. i2mo i 25 SauvcRir. Introduction to Teaching. i2mo. Paper 25 lOntretiens sur la Or 'mmaire. i2mo i 75 ■ Causeries avcc mcs liUeves. lamo. Illustrated - i 50 ' 2 / i/y lJla'€ ^ |\-0>\-A! 5 V C OTTO'S FRENCH READER. A Collection of Progressive Extracts from French Literature, with Annotations, by Prof. Ferdinand BocHER. 12mo. I?1.40. Although the grammatical references in this Reader arc to Otto's French Grammar, it will be found suitable for use with any system. SPECIMEN COPIES WILL BE FORWARDED TO TEACHERS FOR EXAMINATIOX, ON RECEIPT OF ONE-HALF OF THE RETAIL PRICE. HENRY HOLT & CO., Publishers, New York. *^*Avy one. dif^coveHng an error in any of Mmin'ii. Henry Holt > tin- »• in V. Ice., cU', f/ue, etc., is only soumletl en«m};h to allow the utt»'niiucof the consonant that prerede^ it. as in ^rlo/"", caX-f:, ma^/e, fatiyMf;; j is sounded ass in /*/«/. e R r erre re F f effe fe S a esse se (ze) G g g^ gueCje) T t t4 te H b ache he U u u u I i i i V V v^ ve J J ji je X X ics kso K k ka ke Y y igrec i L 1 elle le Z z zede ae M m eimne me 18 14 ..,■.■. ^ ^ \' : PRDJJtkciATlON. DIVISIOJN OF SYLLABLES. 2. Words are generally divided as in English; but whenever il possible a syllable must begin with a 'consonant. Henco, verbal Slid othor terminations beginning with a trowel must be joinjd to (he consonant that precedes ; thus ai-mer^ but ai-me-rai ; chan-ter, chan-te-^rai, chan-te-rons. 18 As to X equal to gs, cs, its compound nature prevents its separation from the vowel that precedes : hence the following division ex-em-ple. In writing, silent h apparently begins a syllable, as in in-h^-rent; but in the spoken syllables, silent h has no value whatever ; and a consonant be- tween a ^'■C'Wei and a silent h is separated from that vowel in the spoken though not in the written language ; hence the following divisions. Written. Pronounced, in-hu-main i-nhu-main in-ha-bi-le i-nha-bile in-he-rent i-nhe-rent bon-heur bo-nheur If these words were pronounced according to the written divisions, they would begin with a nasal sound ; but they do not. (See Nasal vowels, 37.) SYLLABIC ACCENT, OR STRESS. As compared with English, French is generally said to have no syllabic accent. Such a stress of voice as is heard in the words acfcent and accent does not occur iu French ; but the following rule explains the uniformity of the English accent on the last syllable in words newly introduced from the French, such as barouche, swiout, machine, fatigue, etc. 3. In French each syllable of a word must be pronounced smoothly, the voice resting upon the last, unless it ends in e mute, In which case the syllable before the last is slightly accented. Ex. constitution, indubitable. ACCENTS — SIMPLE VOWELS. 16 ACCENTS, — ORTHOGRAPHIC MARKS. 4. Three ortbographio marks, the cicute ('), the grave ('), and the circumflex (*), have received the name of accionts. These marks never affect a syllable ; they can only modify the sound of a vowel over which they are placed. Sometimes they have a mere oitho- graphic value. They must never be neglected in writing. 5. The ACUTE (') is used only over the vowel e (e), which then has the stmriil of a in dale. Ex. tie, donne, (). The (iKWE (') or open accent is used principally over e (c), which then h;is the sound of e in ehh or of e in there. Kx. five, pere. Over a and u it is only used to distinguish words otherwise similarly sjjclled, and does not affect the pronunciation. Ex. la, the ; la., there ; a, has ; a, to ; ou, or ; oii, where. 7. The CiROU.vfFLEX (") is used over all the vowels, which are then long. Ks. dife. cote, sur. The circumflex denotes that a contraction has taken place ; thus age and nir were formerly spelled aiuje and stnir. Often an s htis l)ecn dropped in modem Fren<'h which still remains in the Kn;;lish word taken from the old French. Ex. ile, ts/e; hate, /lasfe ; (ordt, furest ; t&iupdUi, tempest. 8. The Cedilla is placed under the c (9) when it has the sound of* before a, o, u. Kk. facade, (/argon, regu. 9. The DiiEKESis ( • Trema) is used over c, i, and u ; in which ease these letters do not coalesce with the preceding vowel, but be- gin a new syllable. Ex. hair, Noel, aiyu'e^ are pronounced ha-ir, No-el J ai-gu-e, (the last e is silent.) SIMPLE VOWELS. A. 10. A long has the sound of a in far. Ex. &me, soul; pftte, paste; cas, case. 11 Short a differs from long a principally in quantity. It has 16 PRONUNCIATION. tho sound of a in the Interjection ha f pronounced quick. Ek. la, the ; patte, paw. A is silent in Saone, taon, aofit, aoriste, Cura9ao. E. 12. E unaccented, wben it ends a syllable in the middle of a word, and in the raonosyllables ce, de,je, le, me, ne, que, $e and n formerly as they are pronounced : fesant^ je d^fesais, etc.; compare the future of the same verb, which iajeferai aud notjairai. AU. 27. Au and eau sound like o in note. Ex. haut, high; beau, Iiandsome. EU OEU, (ce.) 28. Eu (oeu) has no exact equivalent in English ; it is some- what like the u in fur. It is longer in joune, fast, pour, featf coeur, heart, than in jeune, young, hu.,Jire, and ceuf, eyg. CE has the sound of eu before liquid /, — as in oeil, eye. Eu, whenever it o(;curs in the cor!Ju<^ation of the verb avoir, to have, has the sound of simple French u, so that J'eus, tu cus, il cut, etc., must be pro- nounced as if written J* us, tu us, il ut, etc. OU. 29. Ou has the sound of oo in poor. Tt is long in roue, vheel ; toule, baU , short in ujju, soft; »j«>u, neck. DlPIITHONCiS 80. The vowels t, u, ou, o, preceding a vowel sound, may co- alesce with it and produce a diphthong. These vowel sounds (i, u, ou, o,) are the only ones that can be initial In NASAL VOWELS. 19 a true diphthong; i. «. one in which two vowels are heard but coalesce into une syllable. 31. In French di])hthongs the first vowel (t, m, o.<, o) is uttered quick an 3 short and the voi(*e rests upon the second vowel element. Tlie di|)thcin«yal conihinations are : i-n. i-e (i-ai), — i-o {i-au), i-eUy i ou, — o-a, o-e, <>-i ( wa ), — ou-a, our-ai, ou-e, ot*-t, — Ura, itr€, wi. 1 he e in these comhinatiouH u* not the e mute. Dy pafmg attention to the ahove remark the diphthonf^s present no dif- ficu'ty, • in English, French ^ parfum, humble, eun ) eu navsal. ( h. jcun. The nasal dijjhthongs ian, ion, are the simple sounds an, on^ preceded by a short French i ; oin is in preceded by a tr sound. All other combinations may be decomposed in the same manner, as (m-in, ou-en, etc. 36. Ien final, and in verbs in enir, is equivalent to i-in or y?w, (yan in yankee), Ex. ckieti, bleu, viendrai, tiendront ; in other cases, when followed by a consonant (not «), it is equivalent to i-an iyan) nasal, Ex. science, audience, patient, and all words in lent CONSONANTS. 21 RBKA.BK. In compound words, as bientSt, chiendent, im retains the sonnd of the primitive words bien, chien. 37. M and N are not nasal when double or when l>etween two fowels or a vowel and a silent h. Ex. annee, innocent, homme, ane, inoui, inutile, inhuraain. Exceptions. The na-^al sonnd is heard in mnui and its derivatives ; in «mmener and all words beginning in emm ; in enivrer and enorgneilUr. 38. Ent in the third person plural of verbs is silent. Ex- ila wment, they love ; ils unirent, etc. In other cases ent final ia equivalent to nasal an. Ex. content, contented ; president, presi- dent ; — while in the verbs, ils content, tfiey relate, ils president, they preside, ent is silent. 39. En and em in a few foreign names have t^e sound of t/», nasal. Ex. Benjamin, Memphis. Em final, and sometimes am and im in foreign proper names, are not nasal. Ex Jerusalem, Abraham, Selim. Urn in words that still preserve their Latin fornj is not na.sal, u having the sound of o. Ex. album, triumvir. In many other foreign words m and n final are not nasal. EjL.Eden^ Hymen^ amen^ etc. CONSONANTS GENERAL RULES. 40. Final consonants are silent except c, f, I, r. Ex. itait apres, croix, pronounced as if written etai, apre, croi. Remark. When several consonants occur at the end of a word with no vowel after them, they are all silent, except c, J", I, r. Ex. €8t,fait8, ils, dards, pronounced as if written k,/a{, il, dar. Ex JEPTION8. In foreign proper names the final consonant is generally ■oanded. Ex. BnUus, Job. 41. A double consonant is pronounced as one letter. Ex. oiW, frajyper, pronounced as if written Orbe, fra-per. 42. B, 0, d, f, 1, m. n, p, (ph,) q, v, and z aro prouounoed as in English. 22 PRONUNCIATION. Exceptions to tfia above general rules will be given under the various lot ters. 43. In English, consonants in the middle or at the beginning of words are often silent, as p and / in psalm ; g in phlegm ; I in calm. In French, consonants in a lilce position retain their proper sound. Thus in psaumey Jlegme, calme, the /), the g, and the / are fallj^ founded. SPECIAL RULES. B final is pronounced in rculoul^, mwh. C has the sound of g in second and its derivatives. 44. C is pronounced as c infm^ade. Ex. gart^on, le^on. 45. Ch has the sound of ch in machine. Ex. chaise, chercher. Ch in many words derived from the Greek and in several proper names has the sound of k. Ex. chnos, chmir, Michd-Ange. But ck has the sound of .sA in Achi/le, patriarche, archet-eque. It is silent in alinannrh. Cc before e, i, and y [^ equivalent to k-s. Ex. acces, accident. C final is silent after n. Ex. batw. It is silent in accroc, broc, clerc, estomac, lacs, tahac. D final is heard in axd. Dd. Two d's axe heard vvhen ad precedes a syllable beginning with a rf. Ex. addition. F final is silent in def, rhef'rds compounded with the Latin prepoei- CONSONANTS. 25 tion trans followed by a rowel. Ex. transitif, transition. TtTias the same Bonnd before b, d, t% and after I. Ex. preshi/tere, svelte, balsamique. As 5 initial has the hissing sound as in English, — when a word beginning with an s takes a prefix, the s, though between two vowels, retains its hiss- ing sound. Ex. vraisemblable Ccompounded of i^rai and semblaUe), mono- sylbhe. fSch is generally pronounced like $h. Ex. scMsme. It has the sound of ak in a few words. S final is sounded in words that have been taken from Greek and Latin without any change of orthography. Ex. atlas, blociis, tjratis, etc. S is also sounded in cens, en-sns, mais, moeurs, vis, Rheims. fds, sens ("in some of its meanings), lis (not in Jleur-de4is), tous (when used without a noun). T is generally sounded as in English. 58. In words corresponding in form to those in which t has in English an sh sound, it has in French the sound of ss. This occurs in tial, tiel,tier, tion, not initial or preceded by x or 8. Ex. partial^ essentiel, initier, nation. But bestial, bastion, mixtion, have the pure t sound. 59. T has also the sound of s in words in tie, that have in Eng- lish cy, or tta, in which t sounds like sh. Ex. prophetic, democror tie, minutie, initier, — also in balbutier. In other words in tie and tier, t retains the proper sound. Ex. moitie, metier. Th is never pronounced as in English, bat always like t alone, as patJuf- tique. T final is heard in brut, chut, correct, dot, direct, deficit, fat, exact, net, sus- pect, strict. In sept and huit, t is silent only when they precede a noun com- mencing with a consonant. Ex. huit gargons. In Christ, s and t are both pronounced ; but in .Ustis- Christ they arc both silent. In vingt, t is pro- nounced only in the series between 20 and 30. Ex. vingtf a sentence. a.« : — CASB. 35 The salt, pepper and vinegar, — le sd, k poivre et le mnaign. The men, women and < hildrew, — les hommes, les/einjnes et les enfastls VOCABULARY. Dieu, Grod, lafenetrey the window. le cr^teur, the creator le cmm7i, the coosin. le monde, the world la cousine, the cousin, f Vennemi, the enemy lajille, the daughter. le sommeil, sleep. la mile, the town. I'imagc, f. the image je donne., I give. lamort, death. le voisin, the neighbor. lafeuWe, the leaf. est, is. (belongs) ^ont, an a qui, to whom, whose 1 ot«', yes. non, no I'oiseau, the bird Monsieur, Sir. twfrf, your Madame, Madam. Parbre, m. the tree. Mademoiselle, Misa READING EXERCISE 3- Le pere de Tenfant La mere des enfants. La port . PREPOSITIONS. 1. The following list includes the French prepositions of most frequent occurrence. a, to, at, in. dans, in, into. par, through, by apres, after. de, of, from. parmi, among. * Tnis M — , which will always be inserted after Oi//and Non should be read Monsieur, Madame, or Mademoiselle, as the case xaay reqpdre. PREPOSmOSS. 37 avarU, before, (time). devant,hefore,(ip[sL(ie). pendant, daring. avec, with dernere, behind. pour, for. ckez, at, with, at the en, ia. sans, without. house of. entre, between sous, under. contre against envers, vers, towards, sur, on, upon. As to the contraction of a and te into au, of a and les into aux, ofde with f into du, ofde with /ej* into des, see page 34. 2. After prepositions no article is used whenever the noun is taken in a wide and indeterminate sense, and forms with the preposition a sort of ad- verbial phrase, as : avec plaisir, with pleasure ; sans crainte, without fear. 3. Chez means at the house of. It governs the noun or pro- noun as any other preposition. EIx. chez moi, at my house, (at the house of me); chez vaus, at your house ; chez mon onck, at my mclo's, (at the house of my uncle). For remarks on the employment of some prepositions, see P. ii.» L. 16 VOCABULARY. La cour, the court, yard. "^cole, f. the school. le maitre, the master, («acher. I'eau, f. the water. la main, the hand. la pluie, the rain. le toil, the roof. ok, where, ton, thy, ce, this 9. Je suis, I am. tu es, thou art. il est, he is. eOe est, she iB. PI. nous sommes, we are. vous etes, you are ilssont, they are. - tiles sont, they are la chambre, the room. l'€glise, f. the church la nuit, the night. lejour, the day. la cuisine, the kitchen. la poche, the pocket. demeure, lives, notre, our. qui, who, whom 1 Suis-je, am I ! es-tu, art thou ? est-il, is he ? est-elle, is she 1 tommes-nous, are we ? ites-voua, are you 1 $ont-ils, are they ? stou-eUcs, are thejr f 38 [V. QUATRIEMB LE^OK BEADING EXERCISE 4. Je suis dans la cour. L'oiseau est sur le toit. Es-tu au jardln (dans le jardin) ? Louis est chez mon pere. Les chevaux sont do- vant la porte. Apres la pluie. Pendant la nuit. Avant le jour. L'enfant est sous I'arbre. Parmi les enfants. Nous sommes dor liere les arbres. lis sont entre la porte et la fenetre. Ce livre est pour mon frere. Ma tante est a I'^glise. Sans argent {money,} Avee les chevaux de mon oncle. Centre I'ennemi. Notre ami demeure k Paris dans la maison de sa tante. THEME 4. 1. In the yard. 2. During the night. 3. I am before the house. 4. Louis is in the garden. 5. Are you in the yard ? 6. Before night. 7 . I speak (je parte) of the house, — of the coat, — of the flowers, — of my father, — of my mother. 8. The two knives are in my pocket. 9. Where are the cats ? 10. They are in the kitchen. 11. The bu-ds are on the roof. 12. The three children of my cousin (m.) are in (the) town. 13. Against the rain. 14. With my father. 15. Without a master. 16. Louis is in his («a) room. 17. The book is for my ^ster. 18. Between the two win- dows. 19 Under the roof of the house. 20. Are they before the door of the church ? 21. No; they are behind the church. 22. The children are at (the) school. CONVERSATION. Oh est Louis ? II est dans la cour. Oh est mon fils ? II est au jardin. Oil sont les enfants V Es jouent {play) devant la mai- son. Votre eousine es^elle a I'^cole ? Non M — , elle est k I'eglise. Rtes-vous dans le jardin ? Non M — , nous sommes dans la cour. Ton pere est-il au jardin ? Non M — . il est dans sa cbam- bro. Sont-ils k la fenetre ? Oui M — , ils sont k la fenAtre. Avez-vous vu les canards Nous avons vu les canards et les (dtieks). dans la eo«r ? oies {geese^. THE PAETITIVE ARTICLE . 39 V. CINQUIEME LEgON. THE PARTITIVE ARTICLE. 1. The partitive article answers to the English some or any^ ex- pressed in French bj du before a noun masculine beginning with a consonant, by de la before a noun feminine beginning with a conso- nant, and by de f before a noun of either gender beginning with a' vowel or an A mute. Ex. : . Du pain, some or any bread. de la biere, some beer. du vin, (some or any) wine. de La viande, some meat de VaTgent, some money (Silver). de I'huile, some oil. In the plural the partitive article is des for both genders. Ex. Des livres, (some) books. desjleurs, flowers. des enfants, children. des roses, roses. Some is not always used in English, whereas du, de la, de V, des, must always be expressed in French 2. In questions the English use any instead of some ; in French it must be hindered by the saipe article, as : — Have you any bread ? avez-vous du pain 7 Is there any water ** y a-t-U de I'eau 9 3. The partitive article must be used whenever in English some or any is expressed or understood before a substantive ; it must be repeated before every substantive in a sentence. Ex. : — Have you bread and cheese ? Avez-mus du pain et dujromagef Bring me some mustard, oil and vinegar. Appcrtez-moi dc la moutarde, de I'huile eJ du vinaigre. 4. However, when the sub.stantive is preceded by an adjective, the simple preposition de or cT takes the place of the partitive arti cle, in the singular as well as in the plural, as : — S. de bon vin, some or any good wine. de bonne viande, some w any good meat. de mauvais caf€, some or any bad coffee. ^ excellentefarine, some or any excellent flour. 40 V. CINQUIEME LEgON. PL de hons Uvre3, some or any good books. de belles fieurs, some or any beautiful flowers cT excellents vaisseaux, some or any excellent VOCABULARY. Lafartne, the flour. ^ fe^, (the) iron.*^ Pargent, m. silver.^ fe papier, the paper. ''^ Vencre, f. the ink.-^ lefromage, the cheese., legar^on,* the boy. leplomb, the lead. fe se/, the salt. - fe canard, the duck, rcew/, m. the egg. ily a, there is, there are. 8. Taurai, I shall have iu auras, thou wilt have. il aura, he will have. elle aura, she will have PI. nous aurons, we shall have. vous aurez, you will have. Usauront, they will have. dies auront, they will have le fruit, the fruit. /e Sucre, the sugar, fe ca/^, the coffee. la prune, the plum. , le beurre, the butter. K fe crayon, the penciL /e Soulier, the shoe, fe 6as, the stocking. ac/i€j;^, bought, t^ que, what, maw, but. la, there, six, six. c'est, this is, that is. Aurai-je, shall I have ? auras-tu, wilt thou ha\e? aura-t-il, will he have? aura-t-elle, will she have 1 owrons-nojis, shall we have t aurez-vous, will you have ? auront-ils, will they have? auront-elles, will they have 1 READING EXERCISE 6. J'avais de la farine et du sel. Aviez-vous aussi du sel ? Le roi a de Tor et de I'argent. II a aussi des bijoux. Tu auras du fromage. Louis a achet6 du papier et de Tencre. Nous aurons des livres, des plumes et des crayons. Avaicnt-elles dos fieurs et des fruits ? Je donne a ton cousin des noix et des pommes. Dana la cour il y a des canards. Mon cousin avait des chevaux et des ohiens. Ma cousine aura des chats, mais ma tante aura des ciseaux Dans les jordins il y a des arbres, des fruits et des fieurs. ♦ Gar^on means waiter and bachelor as well as 6oy. Petit, Bmall, is therf* rtr>re generally prefixed in speaking of a young boy. -t-t^ PREPOSmONS. THEME 0. 41 1. We had some butter and (some) cheese. 2. Yon had butter and eggs. 3. Here is (L. n.) bread. 4. There is some bread. 5. My father has bought lead and iron. 6. The child has flowers. 7. My cousin (/.) will have some flour and bread. 8. There are, eggs and fruits. 9. The man has sugar and coflTee. 10. The queen has gold and silver. 11. I give {to) the boys books, pencils and pens. 12. They will also have some paper and ink. 13. Louis has horses and dogs. 14. My sister will have shoes and stockings. 15. I give {to) the boy stockings, clothes, (habits) and hats. 16. Have you (any) friends (m). 17. They (f.) will have friends (f.). 18. At my uncle's (L. iv. 3.) house there are books and pictures. 19. Will you have (voulez-^'ous) some money? 20. No; gire me {donnez-moi) some bread. 21. Read {lisez) good books. 22. This is bad coffee. 23. We have seen beautiful roses. CONVERSATION. Avons-nous de la farine V Avons-nous aussi du sel ? Aurons-nous du beurre et du pain? Qu'avez-vous Ik {there) V A-t-elle des crayons ? Les enfants ont-ils des poires 1 Qu'as-tu sous le bras {arm) 'i Pour qui sont ces li vres ? Ta soBur a-t^lle du sucre ? Tod cousin a-t-il du papier? ^N^Jui a du fromage ? Xa-tril des fruits? ' Qu'y art-il chez mon oncle ? Nous avons de la farine. Nous avons aussi du sel. Non M — , mais vous aurez des fruits. Nous avons de h. viande et d« pain. Non M — , mais elle a des plumes. Non M — , lis ont des ponunes. J'ai des livres. lis sont pour mon maitre. Elle a du sucre et du caf^. Mon cousin a du papier, doe plumes et de I'encre. Le gargon a du fromage. Oui M — , il y a des fruits. n y a des livres et des ima^B. ▼I. 8IXIEME LEgON. VI. SIXlilME LE9ON FURTHER USE OF DE, De is used without the article. 1. After nouns expressing measure, weight, numbfr/ , jai^i : Une bouteilk de vin, a bottle of wino.' C7ne livre de sucre, a pound of siigaz Un m&rceau de pain, a piece of bread. Une paire de his, a pair of stockings 2. After adverbs of quantity. Ai^sez, enough. moins, less, fewer. beaucoup, much, many, a great many, ne — rien, nothing. a great deal. qudque chose, something. combien, how muoh, how many. trop, too, too much, too many. . ne — guere, but little, but few.^ trop peu, too little, too few. peu, little, few. tant, so much, so many. plm, more. aiitant, as much, as many. Ex. : — Assez de vin, wine enough, {assez before the noun and adjective) ConMen d'argent, how much money ? Tant dejleurs, so many flowers. Trop defautes, too many mistakes. Bbmabk. But after hien, much, many, and /a plupart, xaost, the article must be used. Ex. : — >»^ Bien des kommes, many men ^ La plupart du temp*, most of the time 3. After pas, point, jamais, rfe alone must be used instead of the partitive du, de la, des. Ex. : — Je n'aipasde sucre, I have no sugar. N^avez-vous point d'encre, have yon no ink? 4 De is used as a connective of a word denoting a material. Une bague d'or, a gold ring. Une cuiller d' argent, a sflver spoon. Une bourse de sate, a silk purse. Une table de bois, a wooden table. Un chapeau de velours, a velvet bonnet PREPOSITIONS. 43 VOCABULARY. (Jne feuHle, a sheet I'aune, f. the ell, yard. un verre, a glass. tme douzaine, a dozen. le th^, tea. In botte, the boot. une boite, a box. la personne, the person. la moiilr&, the watch . . le bois, the wood. le drap, the cloth. /^WJUA* que, than. rept^ received. bu, drank. la chaine, the chain heureux, happy READING EXERCISE 6. Voici une bouteille de vin. Nous avons trois livres do sucre. Nous auroDS aussi deux livres de caM. La reine avait beaucoup de bijoux Aviez-vous assez d 'argent? Men oncle aui*a une douzaine de bas A.vez-vous regu la boite de crayons? Vous aurez une feuille de papier * Aviez-vous assez de pain ? Les enfants avaient moins de poires que de noix. Je donne asscz d'argent k men fils. II a bu trop de vin. Nous aurons une chaine d 'argent. Vous au- rez une montre d'or. Ma mere a un chapeau de velours. La plu- part des hommes sont heureux. ^ / THEME 6. 1. I have a dozen (o/*) pens. 2. Thou wilt have h sheet of pa- per. 3. She has cheese and butter enough. 4. We had a glass of wine. 5. T shall have also a piece of meat and two glasses of wine. 6. He had. a bottle of oil. 7. We had two pounds of sugar, six poimds of coffee, and five pounds of tea. 8. You will have a great many pencils and books. 9. I have bought a dozen stockings and two pairs of shoes. 10. In this {ceite) box there are six yards of ^loth. 11. I had a silver watch and a gold ring. 12. This is a 'vooden table 13. How many persons have you seen {vuet) 'i We have seen few persons. 15. My cousin had a wooden nox It). Have you drunk a bottle of wine? 17. Give me a sheet of papei. 18. My brothet will have something. 19. My sis- ter has bought two gold rings and three silver spoons. 20. The obild haw a«? many pears as (^que de) apples. 44 n. 8IXIEME LEgon. mOD Qu'avez-vous Ik ? Qu'avcz'vous achet^ ? A.vez-vous aussi du cafe ? Avez-vous de I'argent, fils? Combien d'argent avez-vous ? Est-co assez pour vous ? Oil avez-vous vu le maitre de musique ? Avaitril des fleura ? Combien de chevaux avez-vous ? Avez-vous une paire de bottcs ? OONVEBSATION. Nous avons un verre d'eau. J'ai achet^ deux livies de sucro. Oui M — , j'ai du cafe, Oui mon pere, j'ai de I'argent. J'ai six francs. C'est assez pour moi (me). J'ai vu mon maitre de musique au jardin. Oui jM — , il avait des fruits et des fleurs. Nous avons trois chevaux. J'ai une paire de bottes et denx paires de souliers. } VII. SEPTIEME LE9ON. ^. PROPER NOUNS. A distinction must be made between names of persons and towns, and names of countries, provinces, mountains, rivers, lakes, 1. The former, as in English, take no article, such are : — CmUSTIAN NAMES. OuiUaujne, William. Henri; Henry. George, George. Jean, John. Vterme, Vienna. Gtankve, Genenra. Frangois, Francis. Elise, Eliza. Edem, Helen, Ellen. Jeanne, Jane. NAMES OF TOWNS. Lyon, Lyons. Bruxelles, Bross^. PROPEB NOUNS. 46 2. We must except from the above rule the fiames of several Italian authors before which the article is used : h TassCy Tasso (du Tasse, etc) ; VArioste, Ariosto ; le Dante, Dante ; — titles of books or plays, as : le Telemaque de Fmelon, VAthalie de Racine , etc. ; some names of towns, as : le Havre, Havre ; le Caire, Cairo ; la Nouvelle Orleans, New Orleans. 3. Before proper names of countries, provinces, rivers and moun- tains, the definite article is used in French, as : — La France, France. la Pnisse, Prussia. la Belfjiqne, Belgium. .V Europe, Europe. VAnyleterre, England. I'Afrujue, Africa. V Italic, Italy. I'Asie, Asia, '^^vil/ la Suisse, Switzerland V Amirique, America. V Allenuyjne, Germany. *; ,^ . -< • / la Seine, the Seine. VEsjHvjne, Spain. le Rliin, the Rhine. la Sued', Sweden. hs Alpes, the Alps, etc. la Russie, Kussia. EXCEPTIONS. 4. The names of countries and provinces take no article when they are preceded by the preposition en, which corresponds to both to and in. Ex.: — Je vais en ItaJie, I am going to Italy. n demeure en Allenuiffne, he lives in Germany. 5. To and at or in, before names of cities, towns, and vil- lages, are rendered by a. Ex.: — yous aVxms a Londres, it Pans, a Bade, etc. We go to London to I^aris, to Baden, etc. Mon oncle demeure a Berlin a Lyon, etc My uncle lives at (in) Berlin, at (in) Lyons, etc. (Further explanations will be given in the second part.) Most names of towns are spelled in French as in English, with a few ex- ceptions. VOCABULARY. Le cahier, the copy-book. la ville, the city, town. h carte, the map le cours, the course. la/able, the fable. k marckand, the dealer, tradeemaa. 46 VTI. 8BPTIEME LEgON. le tnanteau, the cloak. le n^gociant, the mei chant. le gant, the glove. la capitate, the capital. fejoa^s, the country ^y'^"^ donnez, give, votre, joxiT. ott, where. Zu, read. ' Aait,vfas. ^iez-vous, were yxmt READING EXERCISE 7. J'ai le cahier de Frederic. Voici les fables de La Fontaine. J 'ai vu le chateau du roi de Belgique. Donnez la boite a Sophio. Donnez la plume a Henri. Oil est Monsieur H? C'est le chs' poau de mademoiselle Elise. C'est le canif de George. Nous sommes a Paris. Etiez-vous k Vienne? Mon cousin est en Amerique. Le cours du Khin est long. Voici une carte d'Alle- magne. Louis Phillippe, roi de France, est mort (died) en Angle- terre. Voici les chevaux de Charles. Avez-vous lu les oeuvres (the works) de Comeille If Donnez ces gants k Henri. THEME 7. 1. William is my friend. 2. I am William's friend (the friend of William). 3. Here is John's brother. 4. Where is my sister Ellen ? 5. She is with Caroline. B. Where are Eliza's gloves? 7. Speak (parlez) to Henry and Francis. 8. I have received the book from Paris. 9 Brussels is the capital of Belgium. 10. Florence is a city in Italy. 11. I am going to Switzerland. 12. The merchants of New York. 13. My uncle lives in Germany. 14. Are you go- ing (allez-vous) to Berlin or to Vienna V 15 I am going tu Frankfort and to Vienna. 16. Paris is the capital of France. 17. Is your aunt in America? 18. Yes; she is in New Orleans. 19. My brother has travelled (voyage) in Russia, in Sweden, and la Germany. 20. This is John's hat. 21. I have seen Geneva, Lyons, and Rome. 22. Give me Mary's copy-book and George's pencil. 23. I have seen the apple- vender (dealer in (de) apples). OONVEESATION. Oh ^tiez-vous ? J'^tais h. Paris. Gt ton frere ou ^tait-il? H ^tait aussi k Paris. PROPER NOUNS. 47 Oil 8ont les gants d'Helene ? Quelle est la capitale do la Belgique ? Quelle est la capitalo de la Prusse? Qui est la ? A qui donnez-vous ces livres? A (jui est ce chapeau? Oil tix)uve-tron {is found) beau- coup d'or? Oil trouve-tK)ii dc bon fer? Quels pajrs avez-vous vus ? Avez-vous lu les potimes de B^ ranger ? Combion de crayons Carolino a-trclle achet^s ? Ou sont les enfants de Ma- dame L? Donnez-moi (me) mes gants b'iI vous plait ({/* you please ) . A.Te2-voua lu cette (this) fe- bk)Y Ds sont BUT la table, C'est Bruxelles. C'est Berlin. Les enfants de madame 1?. Jc les (them) doune k Marie. Co chapeau est k Guillaume. En Californie. En Suede {Sweden) et en An- gleterre. J'ai vu la Sxiisse et I'ttalie. Nun M — , mais j'ai lu les poemes de Victor Hugo. Caroline a achete quatre crayona et Jeannette a achet^ six plumes. Bs sont au jardin. Les voici, M — , (^JSere they are\ Oui M — , j'ai lu toutos (aU) lee fkbieH de La Fontaine. .% 48 Vm. HUITlftMB LE9ON. VIII.. HUITlfiME LE9ON CONJUGATION OF AVOIR, TO HAVE, — AFFIRMATIVELY. INDICATIVE MOOD. COMPOUND or TnB PRESENT. PRESENT. J'ai, I have Tuas, thou hast 11 a (elle a, on a), lie has Nous uvons, we have Vous avez. you have ihet/ have lis ont, IMPERFECT. J'avais, I had , toas having, or used to have Tu avals. thou hadst 11 avait, heliad Nous avions. we had Vous aviez. youluid they had £l8 avaient, PRBTXRITB. J'eus, I had Tu cus. thou hadst, etc. I) cut, he had Nous eflmes. we had Vous eutes, you had lis eurent. they had FUTURE. J'aurai, / shall or will have Tu auras, tftou wilt have 11 aura, h^ will have Nous aurons. we shall have Vous aurez. you will liare tney will have llsauront. CONTITIO? PRESENT. •Taorais, / shoidd have Tu auraia. thou won/dst hare 11 aurait, he would fin re Nous aurions. we shoit/d linre Vous auriez. you would hare lis auraienty they would luive J'ai eu, Tu as eu, II a eu. Nous avons eu, Vous avez en, lis ont eu. 1 have had thou hast had he Lis had we have had you have had they liave had COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. J'avais eu, / had had Tu avais eu, II avait eu. Nous avions eu, Vous aviez eu, lis avaient eu. thou hadst had he had had we had liad you had had they had had COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE. J'eus eu, / had had Tu cus eu, thou hadst had 11 eut eu, he had had Nous eflmes eu, uv hmi had Vous eiltos eu, vou had had lis eurent eu, ikey liad tiad COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. J'aurai eu, / sliall or will have had Tu auras eu, II aura cu, Nous aurons eu, Vous aurcz eu, lis auront eu. thnn wilt have had he wil! have had we shall hare, had you trill have had they will have had iL MOOD. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. J'aurais eu, / slumld hare had Tu aurais eu, thou wontdst have had II aurait imi, he n-onld hare had Nous aurions eu, we should have hul Vous auriez eu, you would hare had lis auraicnt eu, they would /lave had CONJUGATION OP AVOIR, 49 IMPERATIVE MOOD. Aie, have (thou), Ayons, let us have. Ayez, have (ye or you). SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. PBESENT. Qp.8 5 'aie, that T may Que tu aies, that ihou nutifest Qu'ii ait, thni he may Que nous avons, that ve mny Que vous aycz, that yon nitty Qu'ils aicnt, tluit lUey may IMPERFECT. Que j 'cusse, that T m ight ' Que tu casses, thai thou tniyhtest Qn'il ofit, that he iniyht Que nous cussions, iliat we miyht Que vous cussiez, that you mifjht Qu'ils cuiiSCDt, t/iat they miyht COMPOUXD OP THE PBESKNT. Quej'aiecu, that I may Que tu iiies on, that thou mayest (^u'il ait eu, that he way I « Que nous a3-ons en, that we may (^iic vous aycz cu, that yon may Qu'ils aient cu, that they may COMPOUND OF TUB IMPERFECT. g* Que j'cusse cu. Que tu cusses eu, tliat J miffht that thou miffht est Qu'il cfit cu, that he mii/ht Que nous cussions cu, that ire miyht \mi(]ht Que vous eussiez cu, that you i Qu'ils eusscnt cu, that they might Avoir, INFINITIVE MOOD. FBESENT. COMPOUND OF THE PRESEMTT. to have | Avoir eu, to have had Ayant, PARTICIPLE. COMPOUND. having \ Ayant cu, having had PAST OR PASSIVE. En, had |r. It would be a good plan to conjugate the whole verb avoir together with a noun, as; J^ai une pomme, favais une pomme, etc. — After that, with tho pronoun /' (/e), it, and les, them, as : je I'ai, I have it; tu Vas, U /'a, etc^ j( les aiirui, tu lea auras, itc. 50 Vni. HUITIEME LEgON. VOCABULARY. Le temps, time. demain, to-morrow. le courcge, the courage. I't^ncrier, m. the inkstand. le plaisir, the pleasure. la regie, the ruler, •fc-^-^^t^ la voiture, the carriage. perdu, lost, ^te, been.^-A-w^SvA^ '>V * la bourse, the purse^, t /^t; • :. . aujourd'lmi, to-daj."*!^ --^^^'ft^ Aicr, yesterday, c'esf, it is. et, and. «e, if. V'^-*- • ^^ fUi- THEME 8. Pres. 1. I have a book. 2. He Las a hat. 3. "We h&vo a house and (a) garden. >»4. They (masc.) have a horse. 5. They (^fem.) have flowers and fruit. — Impehf. 6. I had a friend. 7. Thou hadst a friend. 8. Louisa had two cats. 9. You had money enough. 10. The children had bread. — Pret. 11. He had the courage. 12. You had the pleasure. 13. The son of the king had a carnage. — Put. and Cond. 14. I shall have apples. 15. He would have seen the castle. 16. We shall have some coffee to-day. 17. We would have some sugar. 18. You will have two horses. 19. They would have an inkstand and a ruler. — Compound Tenses. 20. We have had much trouble (^peine). 21. You have had a gi-eat {grand) pleasure. 22. She has had a great many nuts. 23. They had had two copy books. 24. I shall have paper and pens. 25. You will have had my horse. 26. Charles's sisters will have many flowers. 27. \ I should have- had a great deal of (beaucoup de) trouble. 28. Thou wouldst have had more pleasure. 29. You would have had a good frieud. 30. The boy would have had a penknife. ADDITIONAL THEME UPON AVOIR. 1. My (ma) aunt has apples, I have many plums and you ha\o flowers enough (L. VI. 2). 2. Tlie merchant's cousin will have a bill to-morrow. 3. Yesterday I had money, but I have lost my puree to-day. 4. To-morrow I shall have the pleasure of seeing {de voir) my cousin, (f) my aunt and my sister ; I sliould have had the pleasure of seeing them {de les voir) yesterday if I had been in {en without article) town. 5. We shall have time enough to-mor- row. 6. We had too much time yesterday. 7. Have the poop. IDIOMATIC USB OP AVOIB. 61 age to do it (de lefaire) ; you have time enough. 8. Let us have the carriage and we shall have much pleasure. 9. Wo should have had the carriage yesterday if we had wished (^voulii). 10. Though {quoifjue) you may have had time, you have not had* the couiago. 11. Though we have (pros. Subj.) two horses, we have not (ji'avons pas) the courage to ride them (^de les morder). 12. We have money to-day, and to-morrow we shall have bread, meat, mid \^'ine. 13. It is you, who (jjui) will have the most (le plus de) pleasure. 14. I do not think (^je ne crois pas) that he would have had the ccurage. 15. During the night ^e had lost his {sa) purse, lo. If he had had an inkstand he would have had ink. 17. They will have silver spoons on the table. 18. They would have jewels if («') they had money. >" — - ^ IX. NEUVlfi ME LE9ON:. IDIOMATIC USE OF AYOIK. ^ 1. Avoir is used idiomatically with the nouns chau^, ^aijaibr*- froid, cold; /am, •hun^opq 50?/*, •,thirstM, rai5ow, v^timytortf wrong ;, joewr, t|w^; ' nante^a'dm^ envie^ (jcsh'ttj; sommetl, sleep , besoinf&ed ; as : — " v^ sommeilf sleep fj J'ai chaatJ. I am warm. J'avais froid. I was cold. II aura faira. Ho will be hungry^ EUe aurait soif. Sho would be tliirstyw Nous avons raison. AVc are right. Vous avcz tort. You are wrong. Nous avons cu pcur. Wc were (havft been) afraiJL lis ont honte. Tliov are ashamed. EUes avaicnt envie. They were desirous. Avez-vous somraeil ? Arc you sleepy 1 Nous avons besoin. We need. We wanfc. • VouB n'avcz pas eu. 52 IX. NEUVIEME LEpOK. 2. Avoir quelque chose, literally, to have something, is also jsed idiomatically in the sense of io he the matter laith ; thus : — Qn' avez-vous? What is the matter with you ? J'ai quclquc chose. Something is the matter with me. Vous avcz quelque chose. " " " " " you. II a " " ^ «* " " " «• hiia. ^^ Ellca " " " ** " " " her. Nous avions " " " wa3 the matter with us. • Vous aviez " " " *' " " " yoa. lis auront " " " will be the matter with them. Remark. The opposite of avoir quelque chose is n'avoir rien (ne before the verb and ri^n after it. Sec L. XI. 2). As : — Je n'ai ricn. Nothing is the matter with roe. Vous n'avcz rien. II n'a rien. Elle n'a rien. Nous n 'avions rien Vous n'avicz rien. lis a'auront rien. 3. Avoir Vair means to have the appearance, to look ; — avoir V intention de, to have the intention, to intend; — avoir soin de, to take care of; — avoir mal a, to have a sore, an ache, or a pain in. As; — II avait I'air content. He looked glad. Vous avez I'air heurcux. You look happy. Ilsont I'air malhcureux. They look unhappy. A-t-elle I'intcntion d'allcr en Does she intend to go to France 1 France? Non, Monsieur ; elle a I'intention No, sir ; she intends to go to Italy. d'allcr en Italic. Ayez aoin de raon chapeau. Take care of my hat. J'aurai soin de votro chapeau ct de I shall take care of your hat and cane. votre canne. j'ai inal a ia tete. I have a headache. Avez- vous mal aux dents 1 Have you the toothache ? J'avais mal au bras. I had a sore arm. II avait mal an genoxu He had a sore knee. <( a tt yuu. " him. « (( ,t " her. was the " " ns. <( <( <€ " you. will be the matter with them. /DIOMATIC USE OP AVOIR. 63 VOCABULARY. Lechien, the dog. conterU, glad, pleased. la tete, the head. vialade. sick, iD. le bras, the aJin. oiler, to go* ia (jorge, the throat. votre, your, won, my. /fl dejn.t, the tooth. fe demoiselle, the young lady, 2s manteau, the cloak- fc parapluie, the umbrella. BEADING EXERCISE 9. A-til peur? Oui Madame; U a peur. Avez-vous bonte de parler (to speak) fran(,'ais? Non, Mademoiselle; niais j'ai peur de parler fran(;ais. Aviez-vous froid hicr ? Oui, Monsieur, j'avais froid hier mais j'ai cbaud aujourd 'bui. Avez-vous cu peur du cbien ? Non, nou3 avons cu peur du cheval. Votre ami, a-t-il quelqua chose ? Oui, il a quelque chose. Qu' a-tril ? II a mal a la tete. Qu' avez-vous ? J'ai sommcil. Votre ami a-t-il besoin de moi ? Au- rez'vous soin do mon cbeval ? Oui, Monsieur j j'aurai soin de votre cbeval. Qui a besoin de rencrier? Votre cou.sine a-t-elle mal au bra,s ? Elle a mal au bras. Lc negociant a Tab: content. Mon frere a Tintention d'aller k Pai*is et k. Londi-es. Votre fr^re, qu' a-t-il ? II a honte. ,\ \y THEME 9. 1. Where do you intend to go to-morrow? 2. I intend to go and see (voir) the merchant. 3. I was wrong and you were right. 4. Was be sleepy? 5. He was sleepy. 6. Were you cold? 7. I was cold. 8. What is the matter with your father ? 9. Noth- ing is the matter with him. 10. What was the matter with that (cc) boy? 11. He was ashamed. 12. Was be afraid of the horse? 13. No, sir; be Wjis afraid of the dog. '14. Do Hook sick ? 1 5. Yes, sir ; you look sick.. - 16. Have you a headache ? 17. No, sir; I have a sore throat. -18. Has that youn^ ladj-'the tooth- ache? 19. She has the toothache. 20. Take care of my watch. 21, We shall take care of your watch, your cloak, and your um- brella. . V 64 X- DIXIEME LEgON. X. DIXIEME LE9ON. CONJUGATION OF ETRE, TO ^j^— AFFIRMATIVELY. ^■.. INDICATIVE MOOD./ FBESEKT. Je 81118, / am Tu es, thou art II est (elle est, on est), he is Nous somrnes, we are Vous etes, ye or you are lis sent, thej/ are 'EBFBCT. '. / iDos or tisedto be Viou wast he uxis we were you were they were JMtais, Tu etais, II dtait. Nous Jitions, Vons etjez, lis etaient, 'r COMPOUND OP THB PBE8EWT. J'ai etd, Tu as et4, II a et€, Nous avons 4ti, Vous avez et6*, lis ont ete. / have beer thou hast 6ft he has bet:\, we have been yon haiie been tfiey liave been^ COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT. T^ksTBBITB. Je fug, Tu fus, II fut, Nous filmM, Vous futes, lis furent. Je serai, Tu seras, II sera, Nous serons, Vous serez, Ha acront. / was thou wast he was we were you were they were PUTUBB. / shall be, will be thou wilt lie he will be we shall be you will be they tmll be J'avais ^i4, Tu avals e't^, II avail e't^. Nous avions 4x4^ Vous avie^ dt'' jj|/ NEGATIONS. 57 JS^"^ XI. ONZIEME LE9ON. NEGATIONS.— THE NEGATIVE AND INTERIIOQA. TIA^E FORMS OF THE AUXILIARIES. 1. The negation not is rendered by the two words ne . . , pas. Ne iu placed before the verb and becomes rC before a vowel or silent h ; pas is placed immediately after the verb. In compound tenses pas is placed between the auxiliary and the participle. In the mfinitiyo ne and pas generally both precede the verb. Ex. Je ne suis pas. I am not. Je n'ai pas ea. I haves not had. Ne pas etre, less frequently, n'Stre pas. Not to be. 2. The words jamais, ever, personnel person, and rien, any- thing, used with a verb preceded by ne mean respectively never^ nobody, nothing. WTion the verb is understood, as in answers, the ne is omitted, and they have none the less a negative meaning. When used with a verb not preceded by ne they are always affirma- tive. Ex. Avez-vous jamais rien vn de pareil 1 Have you ever seen anything similar 1 Je n'ai rien. I have nothing. II n'a jamais tort. He is never wrong, Pei^onne n'a somracil. Nobody is sleepy. Cost line pcrsonne qui a sorameiL It is a person that is sleepy^ Qui a sommcil ? Personne. Who is sleepy 1 Nobody. Qu' avez-vous 1 Bien. What is the matter with yon f Notli- ing. 3. The words aucun, ntd, no ; nuUement, nowise, not at all ; ni . • • ni, neither . . . nor ; guere, but little, but few ; and que in the eense of but or only ; also requure the verb to be preceded by n«, Nc (the verb) plus means, no more, not any more left. Ex. Je n'ai plus de pain. I have no more bread. II n'a ni pain ni vin. He has neither bread nor £llc n'a gucre de padeucAi 6ho has bat little patienf»« Kal n'est parfiut. ^-s 3Ho ono ia perfect 68 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. Hemark. After ni . . . ni nouns used in a partitive sense take neither preposition nor article ; as, ni pain ni vin.. For further rules on the negative see P. I. L. 33, and P. II. L. 15. 4. In interrogations the pronoun wbich is the subject of the verb is placed after it, and both are joined by a hyphen, as : aurez-vou& ? avez-vous eu f When the verb ends with a vowel, -t- is placed between the verb and i7, elle, or on, as : aurort-iU a-t-on ? See also L. I. Rem. 5. 6. AVOIB AND ]&TBE CONJUGATED NEGATIVELY. INDICATIVE MOOD. PBESENT TENSB. Je n'ai pas, / have not Tu n'as pas, thou hast not 11 n'a pas, , he lias not Nous n'avons pas, ' toe have not Vous n'avez pas, you have not lis n'ont pas, they have not Je ne suis pas, I am not Tu n'es pas, thou art not II n'est pas, he is not Nous ne sommes pas, we are not Vuus n'etes pas, you are not lis ne sont pas, they are not COMPOUND OP THE PRESENT. Je n'ai pas ea, / have not had, etc. | Je n'ai pas 6t4, I have not been, etc. IMPERFECT. Je n'avais pas, I had not or did not I Je nMtais pas, I was not, etc have, etc. ^ \ COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Je n'avais pas eu, T had not had, etc. | Je n'avais pas 4t4, I had not been, etc And thus with all compound tenses. PRETERITE. Je D*ous pas, J had not, etc. | Je ne fas pas, I vxu not, eta rUTUBB. Je n'aarai pas, etc | Je ne serai pas, etc CONDITIONAL MOOD. Je u'aurais pas, etc, | Je nc serais pas, etc. NEGATIONS. 59 Que je n'aie pas, etc Qac jo n'eusse pas, etc. N'aie pas, etc Ne pas aToir. (N'avoir pas.) BUBJUNCTTVE MOOD. PRESENT. I Que je ne sois pas, etc IMPERFECT. I Que je ne fusse pas, etc IMPERATIVE MOOD. I Ne sois pas, etc INTINITTTB MOOD. INe pas etre, (N'etre pas.) PABTICIPLE3. N'ayant pas. N'ayant pas eu. N'dtant pas. N'ayant pas ^ttf. INTERROGATIVE CONJUGATION. INDICATIVE MOOD. PRESENT TENSE. Ai-ja, ^^ ^'^ I Suis-je, As-tu, ^^ ^^o« ? Es-tu, A-t-il, A etc CONDITIONAL. I Ne serais-je pas, etc La nouveRe, the news. la lettre, the letter. le chagrin, the grief. ^ les parents, the parents. W^^Vy^^^ le tailleur, the tailor. ie bottler, the boot-maker. la cerise^ the cherry. VOCABULARY. tres, very, du tout, at aU. pauvre, poor. m^content, discontented. tfiang€, eaten. autrefois, formerly. longtemps, long, a long time ros, plural of txrfrc, your. THEME 11. 1. I havo a friend. 2. Hast thou also a friend ? 3. We havo friands. 4. Have you also friends? 5. I am happy. 6. lam not happy. 7. Are you happy? 8. Are you not happy? 9. No, we are not happy ; wo are poor.^ 10. Formerly we were very happy. 11. You are not rieh.^ 12. Thou hast been poor. 13. 8he has been rich. 14. Have you had any chenies? 15. You have been idle. 16. Hast thou been ill ? No, I have not been ill at all. 17. Thay have not received the letter. 18. Were you (have you been) at {chez) the tailor's ? 19. I have not been at the tailor's. 20. I have been at the boot-maker's; but (mais) ThGs^e adjectives take s in the plural (pauvres—Hches). NEGATI0K9. 61 he was not at borne (a la maison) . 21. How many horses had you? 22. I had two horses. 23. Chaiios would not have been ill, if he had not eaten too much (trop). 24. Be contented. 25. Take care of your books. , CONVERSATION. Quand (when) avez-vous 6i^ au spectacle (theatre) ? Charles, scras-tu content ? Avez-vous un ami ? Avez-vous re9u une lettre ? Oil ^tait ton ami Louis? Vos parents sont-ils riches ? Oil avez-vous dt6 hicr? Oil serez-vous deinain ? Ta soDur a-t-cllo ^i^ malade ? Avez-vous dcs affaires (business)^ N'etes-vous pas contents ? Pourquoi (why) etcs-vous m^- contents ? Pourquoi avez-vous du chagrin ? Berai»-tu content, si tu avais beaucoup do livrcs ? Nous avons Hi bier au spectacle. Qui, M — , jo serai content. Nous avons beaucoup d'amis. J'ai rc9u une lettre de Paris. D ^tait ^ Berlin. Non, M — , ils sent pauvres. Nous avons ^t^ h I'c^glise. Nous serons a I'ecole. Oui, ello a 6te longtcmps malado. Oui, M — , nous avons beaucoup d'affaires. Non, M — , nous sommes m^con- tcnts. Nous avons cu une triste (sad) nouvcllc. Notre mere est tres -malade. Oui, M — , je serais bien oontonfc. •bN Zn. DOUZI&ME LEgON. XII. DOUZIEMB LEgON DEMONSTRATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE ADJEC- TIVES. Adjectives in French agree in gender and number with the nouns they limit ; — form the plural according to the rules given for nouns (L. ii.) ; — form the feminine by adding c mute to the masculine. K the masculine ends in c, the feminine is the same. Irregular formations will be given in the vocabularies until the full rules are given, L. xvn. 1. The Demonstrative Adjectives are : — Ce^ fem. cefte, this, that ; plur. ces, these, those. Ce — ciy fem. cette — a, this (here) ; plur. ces — ex. Ce — /a, fem. cetU — la, that; plur. ces — la, those. * 2. As ce means either this or «Aa^ ; whenever in English the words this, that, these, those are emphatic, either ci (abbreviated form of id, here) or la (there) are appended to the noun. Ex. : — Ce chapeau, this hat. ces hommes, these men. cette ville, this town. ce meme livre, this same book. Ce gargon-ci, this boy (here). cegargon-la, that boy. cette femme-ci, this woman (here). cette feinme-la, that woman. ceihrhres-ci, these trees. ces arbres-ia, those trees. 3. Before a masculine noun which begins with a vowel or h muto. oet is used instead ce. Ex. ; — Cet arhre, this tree (instead of c« arhre.) Cet habit, this or that coat (instead of ce habit). 4. The Interrogative Adjective is, in the singular, qicel, fem, quelle; plur. queU, quelles, which or what? Ex.; — Quel livre, which book 1 plur. quels livres, which or what booka I Quelle Jieur, which or what flower 1 It answers also to the exclamative what a — / Ex. : — Quel beau tableau I what a beautiful picture I DEM0N8TRATIVB ADJECTIVES, 63 VOCABTJLART. Zfl plante, the plant. I'f^nf, m. the egg. le champ, the lield. haut, f. haute, high. la cuuleitr, the color. beau, f. heJle, beautiful. lajilie, the jcirl. jrran^, f. ffrande, large, great. 2e /xbm/", the ox. bon, f. hanne, good. /a iKirJir., the cow. trop, too. mais, but. I'ketire, f. the houT. eonnaissez-vous, do you know 1 -t i c ^ ro6e, the dress. READING EXERCISE 12. Ceverre. Cette poimne-ci. Cethomme. Cesbas. Ceshottes- ]k. Cette boite est haute. Ces enfants sont pauvres. Le fr^re da ce gar9on. Deux livres de co cafe. Je donne ces poires h cette fille-ci. La meme couleur. Nous avons achet6 Ics inemes pluraes. J'ai vu ces chiens-li. Quels chiens avez-vous vus ? Quel beau cheval I Quelle belle maison I Le fils de cet homrae-lk est tr^a grand. Quelle heure est-il ? II est trois beuros (o'cfoc^). Best une heure. THEME 12. 1. This king is rich. 2, This queen is also rich. 3. This man is poor. 4. These men are poor. 5. That child is not good (aa^e). 6. That woman is not contented. 7. This troe is very high. 8. Those trees are not very high. 9. Whose (a qui) is tbl>s pencil? 10. Whose are these pens? 11. The color of that dress is beauti- ful {belle). 12. The field of that man is large. 13. These oxen are larger {plus grands) than those cows. 14. I give the bread to this boy. 15. I give these flowers to those girls. 16. The parents of those children are very good. 17. Which boy? 18. Which apples? 19. What a beautiful picture I 20. The pleasure of those girls was not very great. 21. What o'clock is it {transL which hour is it?) 22. It is four o'clock {traml. four hoars). 23. We have read {lu) the same books. / 64 Xra. TREIZEME LBgON. CONVERSATION. A qui (whose) est ce canif ? A qui sont ces gants ? Oil est la fille de cettc fcmme? Jimalssez-vous cette flcur ? Connaissez-vous le pere do ce gar9on-la ? Quel papier voulez-vous ? Ces plumes-ci sont-elles bonnes ? Cette ^glise est-elle haute ? A qui donnez-vous ces fleurs ? A qui donnez-vous ces crayons ? Trouve-t-on de Tor dans ce pays ? Vouloz-vous (do you wish, lit- erally, wish you) ces bas-ci ou ces gants-la ? Trouvez-vous ces couleurs belles ? Quelle heure estril ? H est ^ ma soeur. lis sont h, Mademoiselle Julie. Elle est au jardin. Cost une rose. Non ]M — , mais je connais (/ know) sa mere. Donnez-moi ce papier-lk. Oui, M — , elles sont tres-bonnes* Oui, elle est tres-haute. Je Ics donne h. cette fiUe-ci. Je les donne h ce gar9on-la,. Oui, M — , ce pays-ci est riche en or. Donnez-moi ces gants-lk. Oui, ces couleurs sont tres-belles. H est quatre heures. XIII. TREIZIEME LE9OK POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 1» The Possessive Adjectives are : — mon, fem. ma, plur. mes, my, ton, " ta, " tes, thy. son, " sa, " ses, his, her, its# ruotre " rwtfe, " nos, our. votre, " v^re, " vos, your. leur, " leur, *' leurs, their. Bx- s — Mon p^, ta m^, ses frbres, notre ami, tos livres, leurs parents* P0SSE88IVE ADJECTIVES. ' 65 2. The possessive adjectives are repeated in French before each substantive, and agi'ee with it in gender and number : — Monfrere et ma saur, my brother and sister. 3. Mon, (on, son, are used instead of ma, ta, sa, before femlmno wordi he fanning with a vowel or h mute, in order to avoid the hiutus which would result from the meeting of the two vowels. Ex. : — Mon amie, xay (female) friend ; son ame, his soul. 4. Son, sa, ses, each mean his, her, and its ; they agree in gen- der with the following noun, as : — Le pare aime sonJUs, the father loves his son. La mere aime sonfds et saJUle, the mother loves her son and her daughter. 6. In French, voire is, from politeness, often preceded by the words : Monsieur, Madame, Mademoiselle ; plur. Messieurs, Mes- dames, Mesdemoiselles, which are not expressed in English, as, — Monsieur votre perc, your father. Mademoiselle votre samr, your sister. Messieurs vosfreres, your brothers. 6. In expressions such as " a friend of yours," the possessive ad- jective must be used in French, preceded by de, as, un de vos amis, une de mes tantes, an aunt of mine. 7. A posi^Ajssive adjective must always precede a noun denoting a degree of relationship when a relative or friend is addressed, though none is used in English. Ex. Bonjour ma sceur, good morning, sister; adieu, mon cousin, good-by, cousin. The words papa, maman, and a few terms of endearment are excepted, as, bonjour papa, bonsozr maman. VOCABULARY. La demoiselle, the young lady. la yrnnd'mere, the grandmother. la tante, the aunt. la jwrhe, the pocket. la canne, the cane. arrive, e, arrived. la casffxtette, the cap. parti, e, departed, gone. le ffrand-pere, the grandfather, perdu, lost. viaix, old. trouvtf, found. 6 66 Xni. TREIZIEME LE^OW. BEADING EXERCISE 13. Mon pere est bon. Ma mere est bonne. Ton frere est grand. Ta soDur n'est pas grande. Notre oncle a ete riche. Votre tante est pauvre. Leiirs parents seront contents. Mos cousins et me3 cousines sont arrives. Les peres airaent (love) leurs enfants. No- tre grand 'mere a perdu sa bourse. J'ai trouve la bourse do votro grand 'mere. Mon araie est an'iv^e. Madame votre mere est-clle ici {here) ? Non, elle n'est pas ici ; elle est h, Londres. Mesde- moiselles vos soeurs sont paities. '^ THEME 13. 1. My dog is old. 2. Thy book is good. 3. My book and (my) pen. 4. My books and pens. 6. Your garden is beautiful. 6. Your flowers are beautiful (heUes). 7. My sister has lost her watch. 8. Our sisters have found their letters. 9. These childi-en have lost their father. 10. These parents have lost their children. 11. Here is (void) thy stick. 12. Your cousins (/.) have been in our garden. 13. My soul is immortal {immortelle). 14. We have received this letter from our aunt. 15. Our uncle's horse (the horse of our uncle) is old. 16. Where is your father ? 17. Where is your sister? 18. I have found the purse of your mother. CONVERSATION. Oil est mon frere ? II est all(5 (gone) au jardio. Oil est ton livre ? Le voila sur la table. Qui a perdu sa casquette ? Charles a perdu sa casquette. Qui a trouv^ nos crayons? Henri les (them) a trouv^a. Que cherchez-vous (are you Je cherche mes plumes. looking /or) ? A qui est cette canne ? Elle est h Monsieur votre oncle. A qui sont ces gants ? lis sont h Mademoiselle votre soeur. Vculez-vous mes crayons? Non, merci (thank you). Connaissez-vous mon amie? Oui, je k connais (know her). CARDINAL NUMBERS. 67 Oh 6t3lt Monsieur votre pere ? II ^tait k Berlin. Oil as-tn trouve ta bourse? EUe etait daas ma poche. Qui est arriv^ aujourd'bui ? La dlle do mon oncle. A^cz-vous^t^ dans voire champ? Non, Monsieur, nous av»ons 4te dans notre jardin. Do qui avez-vous re5U cette belle Cost un cadeau (j)reseni) de rai canne ? grand ' mere. XIV. QUATORZIEME LE9ON. CARDINAL NUMBERS. 1, The Cardinal Numbers arc : — Un, une, one. deux, two. trois, three. quntre, four. aw/, five. nx, pix. aept, seven. hnit, eight. neuf, nine. dix, ten. onzc, eleven. douze, twelve. treize, thirteen. q^ifitnrze, liurtcen. qttinze., fifteen. seize, sixteen. dix sept, seventeen. dix-huit, eighteen. diz-nenf, nineteen. vingt, twenty. vinqt et un, twenty- one. vincft-denx, twenty- two. vivfjt-trois, twenty-three. vingt-qnaire, twcnty-fonr. tnvgt-cmq, twenty-five, etc trente, thirty. guarante, forty. cinquante, fifty. Boixante, sixty. toixante-dix, seventy. soixante-onze, seventy-one. 9oixante-douze, seventy-two. 8oixante-treize, seventy-three. soixa7ite-qu(rtorze, seventy-four. soixantc-qninze, seventy-five. Boixante sfize, seven ty-sLx. soixante-dix-f-cpt , se vcn ty-se von, soixante-iUx-huit, seventy-eight. 8oixante-/a/, the foot. vivait, lived, monrut, died. combien, how much, how many, ybwf, make, ou, or. vendue, sold. &■?< »^-€, was bom «r», in. en, of them. READING EXERCISE 1*. J'ai trois fils. Vous avez quatre fiUos. Mon oncle a eu dix en- fants. 11 a perdu ciaq fils et deux filles. Nous avons vu 35 bocufs, 42 vacbcs, 88 veaux, ct 76 coebons. Notre voisin a eu 495 brelns. Combien de lievres avcz-vous tues (killed) "I Nous avons tu^ '23 lievres et 14 cbevreuils. Sept ct buit font quinze. 24 et 3G font GO. —4 fois 8 font 32. —7 fois 9 font 03.-21 fois 32 font 072. Je suis n^ en 1814, et mon frere en 1818. Ma mere est n6e en 1829. La ville de Londres compte 10,000 rues, GOO ^glises, 249,500 maisons et plus do (more f/tan) deux millions d'habitants. Lycurguc vivait en 880 avant Jesus-Christ. Qu«I Ag3 avcz-vous? J'ai la premiere, ) le second, '\ la neconde, )- the second. le, la deuxieme, ) le troisieme, the third. le quaXrieme, the fourth. le cimjuieiiie, the fifth. U sirieme, the sixth. le gepti'eiiw., the seventh. le huitiewe, the cit;hth. le fieuvieme, the ninth. le dixicme, the tenth. U onzieme, the eleventh. le douzieme, the twelfth. le treizieme, the thirteenth. le quatorzieme, the fourteenth le quinzihne, the fifteenth. le seizieme, the 1 6 th. Ic dix-sepiieme, the 17 th. le dix-knitieme, the 1 8th. le dix-neuviesve. the 19th. le vingtet unietne, the 21st. le vingt-deuxieme, the 22d, etc le trentieme, the 30th. le quarantieme, the 40th. le cinquanti'eme, the 50tit. le soixantieme, the 60th. le soiiranfe-dixieme, the 70th. le soixante.-onzieme, the 7l8t. le soixante-floxizihnt, the 7 2d, etc. le. (fiiatre-rinffti'eme, the dOth. le qnatre-vingt-unieme, the 81 St. le quail e-vimjt-dixieme, the 90th. le centieine, the 100th. le cent et unieme, the lOlst. le cent deuxieme, the 1 02d, etc le cent vim/tieme, the 120th. le deux centieine, the 20Cth. le six cent soixante-quinzieme, the 6 7.5th. le millihne. the 1000th. le dernier, the last. 72 XV. QUINZIBMB LEpOU. 2. Unteme is used only after rnngt, trente, qiiarante, etc. ^ oai Charles est le vingt et unieme de sa classe. 3. Lays of the month (except le premier and h dernier) are expressed by cardinal numbers, as : — The first of April, le premier Avril. — But : Ihe 2d, 3(1, 4th, etc., of May, le deux, trois, qnatre, etc.. mat Cor de msi)* The eleventh of March, le onze (without apostrophe) mars. The twentieth of June, le vingt juin. The question, ** What day of the month is it to-day? " is trans- lated : Qfiel guantieme avons-nous aujourdliui ? or, Quel jour dii mots avons-nous f The English "on the sixth," etc., is rendered in French, without prepo- sition, le six Ex. : On the sixth of May, le six mai. 4. Proper names of princes, etc., take in French the cardinal numbers without the article, except the first and sometimes the sec- ond, as : — Henri premier, Henry the first. Henri second or deux, Henry the second. Henri quatre, Henri the fourth. Louis quatorze, Louis the fourteenth. Note. The German Emperor, Charles V., bears In French the name of Charles- Quint, and the Pope Sixtus V. that of Sixte- Quint, 5. Numeral adverbs are formed from ordinal numbers by adding •^ment or -ertient to the final : — Premierement, firstly. Deuociemement, secondly. Troisiemement, thirdly, etc. 6. Fractional numbers are expressed by ordinal numbers, as ia English, but only from five upwards, as : — Un dnquieme, a fifth. Un sixieme, a sixth. Un huitihne, an eighth. Un dixieme, a tenth. The others are as follows : — Half (adj.), dani. f. detnie. The half, la moiti€ (noun). A third, un tiers. A quarter or fourth, un quart. One pound and a half, ur^ livre et demie. ORDINAL NUMBEB8. 73 7. The hours of the day or night are expressed thus : — Two o'clock, deiix henres. A quarter j^ast two, detx heitres et (iin) quart. Half past two, deux henres et dcmie. A (juarter to three, trots /mires moins nn quart- At twelve o'clock (at noon), a nidi. At twelve o'clock (midnight), a mimiit 8. Proportional numbers which express a quantity muhiplied, ore: — Simple, simple. quadruple, fourfold. double, dou!)le, twofold. centuple, centuple, a hundred-fold. triple, triple, threefold. VOCABULARY. Janvier, January. Dimanche, Sunday. Fcvrier, February. Lundi, Monday. Mars, March. Mardi, Tuesday (and on Tuesday). Acril, April. Mercrcdi, Wednesday. Mai, May. Jeudi, Thursday. Jain, .Juno. Vendredi, Friday. Jnillet, July. Samadi, Saturday Aout, Aujj^ust. le siecle, the century. Septemhre, September. Vinccndie, m. a fire, conflagration. Octoi>re, October. la jHirtie, the part, portion Novcinhre, November. la place, the place. D€cemhre, December. la classe, the class. en Janvier, in January. a present, ut present. • nous viwns, we live. numero, numlicr (denoting order, as nombre, number. number of a house, of a rule, of a page). 9. Rule for il and ce as expletive subjects op ctre. Use il if the verb is followed: 1. by an adjective Wmii'ing something which coraes after it in the sentence ; 2. by temps or by the hour of the day. In all other cases use ce. Ex. Faites cela, c'est facile, do that, it is easy. But, II est facile de faire cela, it is easy to do that. II est temps de Ic faire, it is time to do it. // est six heurcs, it is six o'clock. C'est voits, ce n' est pas moi, it is you, it is liofc t. 71 XV. QUINZI^ME LEgON. READING EXERCISE 16. Je suis dans ma soixante-douzieme annee. Charles ^sst le pre- mier de sa classe. Louis est le neuvieme, Henri le dix-huitieme et Jules le dernier. Le pape ( pope) Grdgoire VII 4tait I'ennemi de Henri IV. Nuns vivons dans le dix-neuvieme siecle. Romulus hit le premier, Numa Pompilius le second roi de Rome. Pierre premier fut sumomme {was surnamed) le grand. Avril est le qiiatrieme, Juin le sixieme et Decembre le dernier mois (k I'annee. La semaine est la cinquante-deuxieme partie de I'annee. Ma soeur Elisabeth est nt^e le vingtrhuit juillet, mil huit cent trente-cinq. J'ai re9u trois Uvres et demie de cafe et cmq livres et un quart de Bucre. Charles XEL etait roi de Suede. Le 27 (de) septembre 1829, un inccndie detruisit {destroyed) k Constantinople 11,000 maisons; 700 personnes perirent {perished) dans les flammes. THEME 15. 1. A month is the twelfth part of a year. 2. What day of the month is it to-day? 3. It is the 24th [of] June. 4. I am the third, my cousin John the seventh. 5. January is the first, Febru- ary the second, March the third month of the year. 6. Napoleon died at St. Helena {Sainte-Helene) the 5th of Blay, 18217 7. My grandmother is at present in her 78th year. 8. What o'clock {quelle heure) is it now ? It is four o'clock, or half past four. 9. Louis the Sixteenth, king of {de) France, was beheaded (fut di' capite) at Paris the 21st of January, 1793. 10. Frederick the Second was king of Prussia, ir 11. Peter the Great of Russia died at St. Petersburgh {St. Petershodrg) the 8th of February, 1725, in the 53d year of his age.* 12. We have received 6} pounds of ccf fee, 11 pounds of sugar, and 2 J pounds of tea. CONVERSATION. Qnand etes-vous arrive ? Je suis arriv^ le premier jam. Quand avez-vous vu votre mere ? Hier k cinq heures. Mademoiselle Sophie est-elle la Je crois (/ think) qu'elle est la premiere ou la deuxieme ? deuxieme. * Tranalate, in his 53d year. INDEFINITfi ADJECTIVES. 75 Quel age a-t-elle ? Dans quelle ann^e est-elle n^e ? Dans quel niois? Quel jour ? De quel roi parlez-vous ? Quand raourut-il ? Quelle heure est-il ? A quelle heure etcs-vous parti ? Quel quanti^me avons-nous au- jourd'hui? Corabien d'aunes vouloz-vous? Quand mourut Charlemagne ? Quel age a votre grand-pere ? Elle a quinze ans. Elle est n^e en 1851. Au raois d'Octobre. Le onze. Nous parlons de Louis XVI. En 1793. H est sept heures et (un) quart oa sept heures et deraie Je suis parti a huit heures moinB un quart. ( Nous avons ie vingt-cinq. ) C'est le vingt-cinq. Donnez-raoi seize aunes et demie D mourut en 814, le 28 Janvier. D est h present dans sa quatre vingtieme ann^e. XVI. SEIZIEME LE9ON ^0^^^ y^ Cw» INDEFINITE ADJECTIVES. 1. The Indefinite adjectives precede the noun to which they !»• loDg, and agree with it in number and gender. They are sometiaaaa used pronominally without a no^n. They are as follows : — Chaque, m. and f. > quelques, pi. Bome. totit, f. toute, > every, aU.^ certain, e, a certain. aucun, e, ) ^^^ ^^^^ ^^ plusieurs, pi. m. and f. several nul, nvUe, ) ' divers y f. -€«, ) i ^'^ itiaint, e, many a. diff&enU, f. -te», > ™' gwc^, some, any. 7 JK»r|Js)U A " dififerenL 76 XVI. SEIZURE LEgON. Ex. Chaque mnrson, every house. quelqves pommes, some apples. ' toute ville, every tOAvn. plusieurs ecoliers, several pupils. auciin pays, no (country. certains mots, certain words, miUe rer/le, no rule. diff€n-ntrs hitreprises, different en- ma/";)/ liommti, mnny a man. terprisea. qvelque argent, sonic money. 2. Tout has the double mcr/ning of every and all or whole ; in tlic latter case it is accompanied by an article or a possessive adjec- tive, loide ville (without article) signifies ever?/ town ; touts la ville means all the town or the whole town. The plural of tout is masc. tous, fem. toutes. Ex. : Tous les kommes, all men ; touted Us lettres, all the letters ; Tous ses enfants, all his children. 3. Aucun and nul can only be used of individual things, and an- swer to the English not one. Thej require the particle ne to bo prefixed to the verb. (In most cases the English no is translated point de ov.pas de.) Ex. : — Je n'ai aiicnne faxite, I have not one mistake. Je n'ai pas de (or point de)faute, I liavc no mistake. 4. Quelconque, whatever, takes its place after the noun. Ex. Un livre quelconque, a (any) book whatever. VOCABULARY. L'^pijie, f. the thorn. mortel, -le, mortal. la chose, the thing. la few me, the woman. le temps, time, weather. le motif, the motive. la nouvdk, the news. Vennemi, m. the enemy. le nom, the name. rare, rare. h ftaysan, the peasant. froid, e, cold. prStez, lend. le vieme, the same. Ufaute, tho fatdt, uptake. depuis, since. Verreur, f. the error. aime, loves. A3 va-dcn, the translation. quelque chose, something. READING EXERCISE 16. Nallti rose n'ost sans opines. Notre maitrc de rausique donno chaqie jour -i^ Iccoiis. Plusieurs pcrsonncs sent arrivees de Vien- re. D'lvv. est le p-'jre de tous les homines. Chaque age a ses plai- sirs et ses cliagrins. Tous les hommes sont mortels. Tout ce payg est pauvre. Toute chose a son temps. Je n'ai aucune nouvelle do INDEFiNITE ADJECTIVES. 77 mon fr^re. Je connais quelques families riches dans cette villo. Nous avons ret;u aujourd'hui diverses lettres. Plusieurs bomnies 'jnr le meuifi nom. Maint paysan est tres-pauvre. On a pari^ {spoken) de differentcs entrepiises. Pretez-nioi quclques livrcs. THEME 16. 1 Every child lilies playing {Ic jeu). 2. Each town has a oh'irch. 3. You have several faults in your translation. 4. Every man is liable {sujet) to eiTor. 5. My brother has found some pen- cils, whose (a qui) are they? G. The whole house was cold {froide). 7. All the houses of this town are very high (Jiautes). 8. I do not know the names of all animals. 9. John has lost sev- eral pens. 10. The king had different motives. 11. This father has lost all his children. 12. No rule without exception (excep- tion). 13. Certain books are not good for young people (Ja jeun- esse). 14. I have not one enemy. 15. Every mother loves her children. 16. All the children love (aiment) their parents. 17. It is rare to (cT) have several good friends. ^ CONVERSATION. Ai-je des fautes dans ma ver- Oui, mon ami, vous avez plusieurs sion ? fautes. Quelles sent les fautes ? Les voici. Qui a dit cela {said so) ? Tous les enfants Tout dit. Oil trouve-t-on cette plante? On la (^it) trouve dans tous leg pays de 1' Europe. A qui sont ccs malsons? Toutes ces maisons sent k monon- cle. Quels motifs avez- vous eus? Nous avons eu divers motifs. As-tu bcaucoup de Giutcs ? Non, IM — , jc n'ai aucune fante« Qui est mortel 'I Tous les homnies sont mortels. A-t-elle trouve quelque chose? Oui, elle a trouv^ unc bourse. Ou avc^vous ete la semaino J'ai ^t^ dans plusieurs ondioits demiere? {places). A quoi {to what) lea hommes Es sont sujets ^ rerreur. eoDtrils sujeta ? XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LEQON. XVII. DIX-SEPTIEME LE9ON ADJECTIVES.— FORMATION OF THE FEMININE AND OF THE PLURAL. 1. General rule. The feminine of adjectives is formed by adding an e to the masculine termination, if this does not end in e mute. Ex. : Petit, small, little, fern, "petite ; jolij pretty, fern Jolie ; applique, diligent, appliquee, 2. . Particular rules. Adjectives which end in e mute are alike in the masculine and feminine gender : facile, easy, fem. for die ; sage, wise, fem. sage, 3. Adjectives ending in el, eil, andn, — further, monosyllableg ending in s and t, double their final consonant before e mute of the feminine, as: Cruel, cruel, fem. cruelly ; par eil, like, such, fem. pa- reiUe ; bon, good, fem. bonne ; gros, big, fem. grosse ; ba^, low, fem. basse ; sot, stupid, fem. sotte. 4. Adjectives which end in f becosie feminine by changing f into ve, as : vif quick, lively, f. vive ; neuf, new, f. neui^e ; actif^ active, f. active; bref, short, f. breve. 5. Adjectives ending in x, change this x into se, as : Heurtntx^ happy, lucky, f. heureuse ; jaloux, jealous, f. jalouse. 6. Adjectives which end in er and et, take in the feminine the grave accent, as : Leger, light, f. legere ; complet, complete, f. com' plete. Those in gu have guii in the fem. to preserve the sound of u (gee p. 17, Excep.), as: aigu, acute, f. aigu'e. 7 . Of the adjectives entling in c, three change this c into che^ viz : Blanc, white, f. blanche ; franc, frank, f. franche ; sec, dry, f. ssche. The others ending in c take -que, as : Turc, Turkish, f. turque ; public, public, f. publique ; Grec, Greek, has in the fem. grecque* ADJECTIVES. 79 8. The following adjectives do not quite agree with the foregomg rules: — Long^ long, f. longue. expris, express, f. exprftsse, * Jrais, fresh, f. Jraiche. muet, dumb, mute, f. muette» €pais, thick, f. €paisse. «M/^> subject, f. sujette. doux, sweet, soft, f. doxice, malin, wicked, f. maligne, faux, false, f.fausse. h€nin, benign, f. b€nigne. 9. The following are more irregular in the formation of their fem- inine, as : — Beau (hd), beautifal, f. belle, nouveau (nouvel), new, f. rumveUe^ mou (mol), soft, f. molle. fou (fol)y mad, foolish, i.fodt, vieux (vieil), old, f. vieille. Note. The forms in parentheses, bel, noiivd, etc., are used before mascu- line nouns beginning with a vowtl or h mute, as: unbel arbre, & fine tree; un nouvel ordre, a new order; un/ol espoir, a mad, wild hope. 1^ 10. The rules given for the plural of substantives apply also to A adjectives. Ex. : — 1 Grand, f. graitde; plur. grands, f. grandes. J appliqu€, f. appUqu€e ; plur. ajypUqu^s, f. appliqu^et. H^ gras, f. grasse, fat ; plur. gras, f. grasses. 1 roya/, f. royale, royal ; plur. royaux, f. royalea. beau, f. belle, beautiful ; plur. beaux, f. bdles. vieux, f. vieille, old , plur. vieux, f. vieiUes. Fou, mou, and bleu make in the plural fous, mous, and bleu$. 11. The adjective must agree in gender and number with dia Bobstantive which it qualifies, as : — La grande maison, the large house. La maison est grande, the house is large. La jdie rose, the pretty rose. Ces roses sont tres-jolics, these roses are very pretty. The a4Jectivo is more frequently used substantiyely in French than in Elnglish. £x. Le paresset^ the lazy (one). 80 XVn. DIX-SEPTIEME LE^ON. VOCABULARY. La m^rlecine, the medicine. agrf^able, agreeable."' Viioire, m. ivory. amer,amere, hitter, la violette, the violet. v.ur, e, ripe. la montngne, the mountain. aimable, amiable. ia ltbert(f, lil^crty. immortel, -le, immortaL la robe, the dress, gown. cher, chere, dear. Vherbe f. the grass. 6b€issani, e, obedient. wui, e true. .-, precieuz, -se, precious. • la voix, the voice. //^ corps, m. body. utile, useful. p \ oie, f. goose. j r^J^- KEADi:t;G EXERCISE 17. Get arbre est trcs-gros. Void deux gros arbres. La m^deeino n'etait pas bonne ; elle dtait tres-aniere. Nos cnfants sont heurcux. Vos fillcs ne sont pas hcureuscs; elles sont tres-malheureuses. Vous sericz aimable, si {if) vous etiez appliquee. Voici une tres- jolie maison, elle est encore neuve. Cette eglise est vicille. Vos chcvaux sont vieux. Les chateaux royaux sont tres-beaux. Los dents longues et blanches de I'elephant fournisscnt {furnish) I'ivoire. La fille de notre voisin est muctte. lis ne sont paa obcissants. J'avais une oie qui {which) etait grosse et grasse. THEME 17. 1. Tbe rose is pretty ; the violets are also pretty. 2. My room is small ; your house is large. 3. This news is not true. 4. My father is good ; my motlicr is also good. 5. These geese are big and fat. 6. What beautiful houses ! 7. Henry's books are useful n-nd agreeable. 8. Your windows are very small and low. 9. My brly is mortal but my soul is immortal. 10. Our town is very eld. 11. Ilcr sister is not handsome. 12. This house is well situated (^bien situee). 13. Tliis apple is not ripe, but these pears are too {trop) lipe. 14. Is this butter fresh ? 15. The grass is vei-y thick. }Jj. Ivory is white ; my teeth are not so {si) white. 17. Her voice h very sweet. 18. I have received a long letter from my father. 19. What a foolish (§ 9, Note) hope ! 20. That medicine was very 81 bitter. 21. Louisa's dress is beautiful, but ber bonnet is not very beautiful ^. My shoes are very old. 23. The leaf is dry. 24. My mother is happy ; my sisters are also happy. 25. Your letter was too short. 26. That girl is very foolish and idle. CONVERSAnON. L'&me de I'homme cst-elle mor- Non, elle est immortelle. telle V Qui est malade chez vous ? Prend-cUe {does she take) do la m^deeine ? Qui est arriv($ ? A-t-il apporte quclque chose ? Etes-vous heureux ? Comment trouvez-vous (how do you like) cette rose ? Votre robe est-elle vieille ou neuve ? Notre version estrelle longue ? CommgHftMuvez-vous ces deux ^fierii? Sont-ils ob^sjsants? C'est ma tante qui est malado. Oui, M — , elle prend uno m^de- cino tres-am^re. Mon oncle Richard. II a apporte un bel oiseau, un perroquet (parrot). Oh ! non» nous sommes malheu- reux! Jo la trouve tres-bolle. Elle n*est pas vieille; elle est toute neuve. Non, elle n'est pas bien longue. Us sont tres-paresseux. Non, M — , ils ne sont pas ob^is- sants. A vez'vous perdu quelque chose ? Oui, Monsieur, j*ai perdu ma* vieilie easquctte (cap)* ^ \ 82 XVm. DIX-HUITIEME LE^ON. XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE9ON. THE PLACE OF AI)JECT:IVES. 1. Genekal rule. Adjectives GENERAiltii^ follow THjnB NOUNS. ' , 2. Particular rules. substantive : . iwiiuniii^ Kcuciaijy ^i ^\, Beau, fine. bon, good. grand, great, large. gros, big. jeune, young. mauvais, l^^d. m€ckant, wicked. "^ meilleur, better. — moindre, less, least* petit, little. saint holy. vimr, old. rroi, true. Ex. : — Un beau pays, a fine country. Une gramle ville, a large town or city. t^n jmne lion, a young lion. Un mauvais lit, a had bed. Un meilleur avis, a better advice. Un vieux soldat, an old soldier, etc. Note. Grand is placed after its noun, when it signifies tall : un hommt gnmd, a tall man. N. B. It is to be observed, that substantives preceded by an adjective, when used in the partitive sense, take only de before them, instead of du, de, h,, or des. (See L. v., 4.) Ex. : De bon vin, (some) good wine; de belles Jleurs, beautiful flowers. Note. Exceptions to this rule are: du bon sens, good sense; des jeunea gms, young men ; des petitspois, green peas ; and other expressions in whic!^' the noun and adjective form really but one compound word. A^M V r 8. Monosyllabic adjectives, except those denoting some physical property (color, taste, form, eUi.), precede the noun. Ex.: Uh long discours, un fol amour. 4. Adjectives qualifying a noun followed by a limiting phrase or clause, precede th-? noun. Ex. : LHmmortel auteur du Paradis jm-da THE PLACE OP ADJECTIVES. 83 f5. Many adjectives, when taken in their literal sense, follow, when taken figuratively, prejede the substantive, as : — FIGURATIVELY. LITERALLY. Une tendre amili^, a tender friend- De la vinnde tendre, tender meat. ship. mofi pauvre en/ant, my poor chjld. un enfant pauvre, a poor (indigent) child. un prqfond sHencA, a deep silence. un foss^ profond, a deep ditch. 6 Many adjectives take their place sometimes before, sometimes after the noun, without changing their signification, simply for the sake of euphony or stress. This is mostly to be seen when the ad- jective is preceded by the definite article or by ce, cette. ■ We say, for instance : une verite affreuse, a frightful truth, but, Maffreuse Oit telle affreu9e verite: Uinjlexihle duret€ des riches. The inflexible hardness of the rich. Cett.e affligeante nouvelle se r^paiuiit dans la viUe. This afflicting news spread (soon) in the town. 7. Some adjectives have a different meaning, according as they stand before or after their noun : — Mon cher ami, my dear friend (de- Un Hvre cher, a dear book (denoting noting affection). the price). un brave homme, a worthy man. un homme brave, a brave (eourageous) man. iM honnite homme, an honest man. un fiomme honnete, a civil or polite man. 2a/ Vorfnatieaux: He npeot the last year of his life at Paris, Q passu la derniert antcU de sa vte a Paris, 84 rvm. dix-huiti^mb LEgoN. aveuffh, blind. naturd, -le, natural. la n.usiiue, the music. le sentiment, the sentiment. noir, e, black, rond, round. la fum^c, the smoke. romain, e, Roman. incroyable, incredible. I'arm^e, f. the army. V application, f. the applliitlon le malheur, misfortune. d^'a, already. le vaisseau, the vessel. nuisihle, hurtful. Note. Adjectives denoting nationality are not written with a capital Ex.: Lalanguefrangaise. READING EXERCISE 18. J'ai des' raisins doux. Ce sont des jeunes gens attentifs. La co4Mflk|^t6 est la couleur de la nature. Notre voisin a un habit bleiUHme casqucttc rouge. Voici une jeune fille avcugle. Vou- loz-^ous cette petite boite? Elle a re9u une lettre amusante do sa vieille (oW) cousine. Avez-vous de bonne encre? J'aime la musi(jue italienne. Voici deux aunes do drap vert et quatre aunea de drap noir. Les soldats remains etaicnt trcs-braves. Un ^t^ sec est tres-nuisible aux plantes. Mon maitre de musique est un brave homme. Voici de grands vaisseaux americains. Les colibris (humming birds) sont de beaux petits oiseaux. J'aime les jeunes fiUes deuces, simples ct modestes. THEME 18. 1. France is a fine country. 2. We bave a large bouse. 3. Henry has a bad pen. 4. My aunt is a virtuous woman. 6. She is al;5o very active and laborious. 6. Frank is an attentive boy. 7. Miss B. is an amiable young lady. 8. Is Mr. A. a polite man? 9. Yes, he Is very polite. 10. The wasp (la guepe) is a hurtful inspect, 11 Our neighbor has three small horses. 12. This is a natural sentiment. 1 3. The young man studies (etudie) with (an) incredible application. 14. I have bought a round table. 15. Give me some red paper and four black pencils. 16. Yesterday we had an easy translation, but our exercise for to-morrow is difficult. 17. I like the blue sky, (tlie; high trees and (the) green fields. 18. Have you ripe pears?' 19. No, sir, the pears are not yet (pcLS eneore} THE PLACE OP ADJECTTViS. 85 ripe, bat we have ripe cherries. 20. Italian music is very agreea* blc. 21. The French soldiers under N'apoleon the first were very brave. 22. Here are beautiful flowers and beautiful fruit (^pl.). 2)1 The English have large vessels. 24. The rose and [the] lily are beautiful flowers. CONVERSATION. Avez-Tous des noix mures ? Qaand seront-cllcs mures? Aimcz-vous la musique alle- raande ? Ce marchand a-t-il de bon bcuiTC ? Comment trouvez-vous ces jeunes lions? Votre theme est-il difiicile ? Combien coutc cct habit ? Oil est men cher ami Lucicn? A qui est ce livre amusant ? Qui a perdu une casque tte rouge ? Avcz-vous de bon^un et da fromage? ^ k^ ^ Ellcs ne sent pas encore mures. Dans huit jours. J'aime mieux (better) la mosiqae italienne. ^^ta» Son bcurre n^est pas ^^^pais sa crcme {cream) est n3che. lis sont tres-bcaux. Non, Monsieur, il est facile. II coiite cent francs. C'est Tin habit chcr. II est alltS au concert. II est i\ mon oncle. C'est Jules qui I'a perdue. Voici un gros morceau de pain et du firomage. 86 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEQON. XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LE9ON DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 1 . The comparative is cbrmed by placing tbe adverb plus^ more, before an adjective. Tbe superlative by placing tbe article before the comparative, as : Haut, e, high; comp. plu3 haut, higher; sup. le plus haut, the highest; fern, haute, comp. plus haute, sup. la plus haute. Mauvais, e, bad ; comp. plus mauvais, e, worse ; sup. le plus mauvais, f. la plus mauvaiser '.he worst. Rem. When a possessive adjective is placed before the superlative, tho article le, la, les, is dropped, as : Mon plus jeunefrere, my youngest brother 2. There is in French also a lower and lowest degree which is ef fected by the words moins, less, for the comparative degree, and./f moins, f. lamoins, the least", for the superlative, as: Cruel, -le, cruel ; comp. moins crud, f. moins crudle, less cruel or not 80 cruel ; sup. le moins cruel, f. la moins crueUe, the least cruel. 3. The following adjectives have an irregular comparison : Bon, f. bonne, good ; comp. meilleur, e, better ; sup. le meilleur, f. la meU< leure, the best. (Mauvais, e, in the sense of wicked^, comp. pire, worse ; sup. Upire, f. la fire, the worst. (Petit, e,) ; comp. moindre, less ; sup. le moindre, f. la moindre, the least Petit and mauvais are also regular. 4 As before an adjective is rendered aussi ; as after it, and than are both translated que. ^ Ex. : — // est aussi keureux que mot, he is as happy as I am. GJiarles est plus fort que son fr ere, Charles is-strongcr than his brother. 6. In after a superlative and before the name of a place is ren- dfereyi by de and not by dans. Ex. : Les plus belles eglises db Paris, the finest churches in Paris. DEGREES OF COMPARISON. 87 VOCABULAJIY. La HoUande, TTolland. foi-f., e, strong. ^ Vabeille, f. t])e bee. ckmid, warm. le m^al, the metal. enrore, still. V^phmit, the elephant. toHJours, always. Jiflefe, faithful. l'antre, the other. peupli. e, peopled, populooa. le tmitin, the morning. le f>at/s, the couutry. le aoir, the evening. petard, e, heavy. ...CpH^\ ^^. coan, short. READING FXERCISE 19. L'Europe est plus petite que IWsie. L'Allcmagne est pi as for- tale que la Hollande. L'abcille est I'insecte le plus utile. L'oi est le metal le plus pcsant. Ta robe est rnoins belle que la robe de ta BODur. Monsieur S est un homme tres-fort. Son frere ain^ {elder) e.-^t encore plus fort ; c'est rhomnie le plus fort que {iha£) je con- naisse. L'elephant est le plus grand de tous les anirnaux terrestres. Les livres d'Einilie sent plus aniusants que les notres {ours). Los chats sont moins fideles que ies cliiens. Ces poniines-ci sont meil- leures que vos poires. Les notres sont les meilleures. Votre tante est plus laboricuse que sa fille. Lonrlres et Paris sont les villes les plus grandes et les plus peuplees de 1' Europe. ; THEME 19. l.,The coffee wag^ warm ; the tea was still warmer. 2. This church is higher than the other. 3. Mary is the happest girl in the world. 4. She is prettier than Louisa ; she is tho prettiest of the sisters. 5. This house is not so {si) old as {que) the other. 6. This mountsdn is very high, higher than all the other mountains of this country. 7. The 22d [of] June is the longest, and the 22d of Dacember the shortest day of the year. 8. The rose is the finest of all (the) flowers. 9. This wine is worse than water. 10. Have you any {de) better wine? 11. Yes, the red wine is better. 12, My wine is the best. 13. John is my best friend. 88 XX. VINGTlfilTE LEgON. Mademoiselle Ma.ie heurcuse "i Votre voisia est-il malbeureux *? Qiifl est Ic m^tal lo plus iitllo? Quels rnetaux sont Ics plus po- sants ? Quelle est la plus attentive do toutes vos (^coliercs ? Quel est Ic plus fort dcs ani- maux terrestres. Quel est le mois le plus froid de Tannce ? Votre robe cst-olle aussi belle que la robe de Julie ? Le tigi'e est-il cruel? Oil trouve-t-on le meilleur fer ? CONVERSATION. etes-vous Ob ! oui, jo suis tres-beuieuBe, plus ncureusc que ma sosur. II est moins malhcureux que son fie re qui est en Amerique. Cost le fer. L'or, le platine et le plomb sent Ics plus pcsants. C'est Madeleine, la fiUe de Mon- sieur B. C'est r^lepliant; c'est le plus grand et lo plus fort de tous les animaux terrestres. C'est le mois de Janvier. Non, elle est moins belle. Oui, c'est le plus cruel de tousles animaux. Le meilleur fer se trouve (is found) en Suede. XX. VINGTIEME LE9ON RSGULAR VERBS. — FIRST CONJUGATION.— DONNER. 1. There lire in French three regular conju_<:^ati.ons, viz. : in er, tV, anil re. "Verjo in -olr beloni^ to the irrc.gular ones, as their root undergoes manifold changotj.* The Infinitive mood is to he considered as the radical part or ♦Only iix other verbs are conjug-ated like recevoir, which is often given as the mod^l of one conjugation. They will all be found L. XLIV. p. 189. REGULAB VERBS, 89 gronnd-fonn on which the conjugation depends. What precedes the ter- mination cr, ir, cr re, is the root, which, with regular verbs, always remaina uiialrcrcd. To this are added the different terminations, l)y which persona, tenses, and moods arc distinguished, ;«nd which arc common to all the vcibs cf tbnl bamc conjugation. FORMATION OP THE TENSES OF REGULAR VERBS. 2. There are primitive tenses and derived tenses. The primitive tenses ftjTj : tho injinitive, the participle present, the past paii.ic.iple, the present indica- tive, the preterite. 3. From the present infinitive are formed : the future, hy adding ai, and the rvnd it ional, by adding ai^r, as: Inf. donner: Fut. je donnerai, and Cond. je donnerais; finir : Fut. je finirai, Cond. je finirais. In the third conju- gation the final e is dropped : vendre: Fut. je vendrai, CoxiCi. je vendrais. 4. From the participle present are formed : the present of the subiunctive^ by changing ant into c, as : donnant: quaje donne; finissant: que je finisse; vendant : que je vende ; and the Imperfect Indicative by changing ant into ais, as : finissant: jefinissais, etc. 5. With the participle past are formed all the compound tenses, by means of the auxiliaries avoir or etre, as: Part, past; donn^, fini, vendu — : j'ai donn€, j'arais fini, j'aurai vendu, etc. 6. From iha present of the Indicative, viz. : from its 1st person singular and the 1st and 2d persons plural, the Imperative is formed, by suppress- ing the pronouns je, nous, vous, as; donne (give), donno:is, donnez; finis {&ur ish), fin issons, fin issej:, etc. 7. From the preterite is formed the Subjunctive imperfect, by changing the final ai into asse for the verbs of the first conjugation, and is into isse for the second and third conjugations. Ex.: je donnai: que je donnasse; je finis: que je finisse; ji vendis: queje vendisse. CONJUGATION OF Z)aV.V£i2, — TO GIVE. INDICATITE. PSESEXT TENSE. Jc tliinn|b, T give J nous donnfons, we give. tu (lonnlcs, thou givest. vous donnez, i/ou give. 11 donrte, he gives, ils donncnt, ( , oUe doDoe, she give*. elles donnent. f give. 90 XX. VINGTifiME LEgON. IMPERFECT. Je donnas, T gave or was giving, nous donnions, we gave. tu donnfeiis, thou gavest. vous dontiiez, you gave. il donnkit, he gave. ils donnaient, they gave. PRETERITE. Je donuai, T gave or did give. nous doniiimes, we gave. tu donnap, thou gaiwst. vous doni^fites, you gave. il donna, he gave. ils donnerent, they gave. Je doni]|eifai, I shall give. nous doniierons, we shall give. tu donr/eiias, thou wilt give. vous donnerez, you will give. il donaeira, he will gii^e. ils donneront, they will give. CONLITIONAL. Je donner^is, I should give. nous donnerions, we should give» tu donnerais, etc. vous donneriez, etc. il donnerait, ete. ils donneraient, etc. IMPERATIVE. Ponne, give. donnons, let us give. (donnes-en),*^ive {of it). donnez, give. INFINITIVE. Donner, to give. (de or k dormer), to give, SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je donnje, that I (may) give, que nous donnions, that we (may) que ^.u donnes, etc. que vous donniez, etc. [^ive. qu'il doniie, etc. qu'ils donnent, etc. * The Imperative mood of the first conjugation takes an s, !n the singular, when followed by en ^of it, of them, some) or y (to or o*" it, to them), Ex. : qfres-ea^ offer sova/t , penses^, think of it. REGULAR VERBS. 91 IMPERFECT. Qiie je donnasse, that I (mighty quo nous d'-nnaBfiiona. fj'Uo tu donnasses, etc. [give, que vous donnassiez. qu'i! donnut, etc, qu'ils dormassent. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. PABT. f)onaanf,5ritn/igr. Donn6, f. donate, given. (en doQQaaij, by or in giving, etc. COMrOUND TENSES. hi active verbs these are funned with the Part, past and the aiudliaij avoi/ to have. • INFINITIVB. Avtir donnd, to have given. INDICATITB. COMPOUND OF THE PRB8BWT. J'ai donnd, / have given. to as donno, thou hast given. U a donne, he lias given. nous avons donue, we have given^ etc. COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFBOT. J'avais donnd, / htui gii^en, etc. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITS. J>an8 donn^, / had given, etc. COMPOUND OF THE FUTURB. J'aorai donnd, / ihall haoa given, etc CONDITIONAL. J'aurais donn^, I j .f,^ j^ ^^ J'eoiMiK: donne, ) 92 XX. VINGTIEME LEiJON, 8UBJUNCTIVB. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aic donnd, that I (maij) liave given, etc. Que tu aies donne, that tltou (mai/est) have given, dc* COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse donad, that I (might) have given, fie. PARTICIPLE. Ayant donnd, e, having given. Remark 1. There is but one waj to render the expressions: I give, 1 do give, I am giving ; viz. : jc donne : — / was giving ; jc donnais, etc. *' In the interrogative and negative form the auxiliary do is not ex- pressed. (See also the ilth Lesson, 4.) Ex. : PRESENT. INTERROGATIVELY. Est-cc que jc uonnc, do I give? donnons-nous, dow€git>ef donnes-tu, dost thou give? donnez-vous, do gmi give? donne-t-il, does he give f donnent-ils, "> , , . ^ donne-t-elle, does she give ? donnent-elles, j NEGATITELY. Jc no donnc pas, / do not give. tu nc donnes pas, thou dost not give. ii nc donne pas, he docs not give, etc. NEQATIYE-TNTERROGATIVB. Est-ce que je ne donne pas, do I not give? nc donnes-tu pas, dost thou not give ? ne donnc-t-il pas, does he not give? 3. The forms donne je (acute on the e), donnais-je, donnai-je, are liltle used except in poetry and in studied prose; they are replaced by Eat re gtui (is it that) prefixed to the common form, as: est-ce que je donne., do I give; est-cp. que je donnais, did I e^ive (was I giving), etc. The future and condi lional donnerai-je, donneraisje arc more common, though est-ce (ptc may be used in all cases to form an interrogation, especially in common convcrsa- ticn. as : est-ce que je donnerai, shall I give; est-ce qu*il donne, does he give; tst-ce que vous donnez, esi-ce que tu ne do7-kt»9 ^fi^j etc REGULAR VERBS. 93 COMPODND OP THE PKE8BNT. Ai-jedonnd? as-tudoimd? a-t-il donnd? etc Je n'ai pas donnd, tu n'as pas donne, etc. N'ai-je pas donne? n'as-ta pas donne? etc. Conjugate in the same manner : parler, to speak ; porter, to carry, to take; ndmirer, to admire; aimer, to love, etc. VOCABULARY. Lt prochain, the neighbor. marjnijiqufi, magnificent apporter, to bring, to take. nuinfjer, to eat. tomber, to fall. cherr/ier^ to look for. Vescalifr, m. the stairs. tronrer,\Xi) find. la sant€, health. penscr ^to think. le carnr, the heart. jouer,j,o play, pleurer, to cry. le canlf, the penknife. arrivcr, xto arrive. Us (/ens, the people.* pn>r,no pray. la chasse, the chase. I'autre, the other. le chasseur, the hunter.* pas encore, not yet. ^ -> la poste, the post-office. /^^^^^--vW^-A^ "^^ -Zc^-n/^. ^ * READING EXERCISE 20. ^ {/^..^C-^^^Zft^ ^^^"f^ Aimez Dieu et votre prochain. Lcs parents almcnt leurs enfants. Portez cette lettre ^ la p.ste. Tu poi-tcras cette robe h ta soeur. J'apport«rai ces livrcs h mon raaitre, Apportcz-lui {Jam) aussi cette boite. L'enfant tomba de rescalier. J'ai |jen3e a raon ami. Penscz a voire cousin. Jouons. Nou.s cherchinns longteiups votre chien Vous ne le {Jam) trouverez pas. Les jeunes gens parlaient Bouvcnt de leurs amis. Les chasseurs parlerent de la chasse. Tu no mangeras pas cette poirc-ci ; elle n'est pas mure. Qui a mang6 i'autre '\ N'admirez-vous pas cette maguifir|ue couleur '\ . THEME 20. 1. I love my father. 2. Thou lovest thy mother. 3. lie lores his sister. 4. We love our parents. 5. Do you like flowers? 0. I giye an apple to my brother. 7. We were speak^£pf ybur aunt. y 8 1 arlmired thp beautiful palace of ^(^ing. SfT We played yes- terday. l^The child cried. ir:fhe children cried, 12. The 94 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. boy will look for his copy-book. 13. The boys will look for theii copy-books. 14. I have found my knife. 15. Have you found your gloves? 16. We have not found our gloves. 17. Play, my child. 18. Eat these apples. 19. Do not eat these pears ; they are not ripe. 20. She would fall. 21. We should admire your garden. 22. They would have eaten some bread and butter. 23. 1 think that our friends will amve te-day. 24. They will ar- rive to-morrow. 25. Will you/TaKe this letter to the post-office ? 20. Pray to God every morning and every evening. 27. Why do you cry 'I 28. Why have you not brought your money ? 29. I / / have not brought my purse. CONVEKSATION. Avez-vous cherch^ votre mon- tre d'or ? Qu'avez-vous apport^ ? Voulez-vous (will you) manger du pain ? Votre mere parle-trclle fran- ^ais ? Quel commandement J^susr- Chiist a-t-il donn^ ? Qui est notre prochain ? Qui prtera cette lettre k la poste, Antoine ou Theodore ? Qu'apporte le chasseur? ^ Avez-vous audsi ^t^ k la chasse ? A quoi pensez-vous ? A quel jeu jouerons-nous de- main ? Que cherchez-vous ? Qu'adniirez-vous Ik ? Jo la (it) cherche encore. J*ai apporte les gants de Ma- demoiselle Mathilde J'ai dejk mange un gros morceau de pain. Oui, elle parle fran9ais et anglaia. H a dit: Aimez Dieu et votre prochain. Tons les homraes. Ce sera Theodore. H apporte d'^ux lievres. Oui, Monsieur, nous avons ^t^ k la chasse hier. Je pense a mon theme fran^'ais. Nous jouerons h la balle (hall). Je cherche mes gants. Nous admirons ce magn^^qne vaisseau anglais. REGULAB VERBS. 95 READING LESSON. LE CHAMEAU ET LE CHAT. Le chat au chameau. Soyez le bion*veim, mon frere. Le chameau. Comment, moi (/) ton frere ! Le chat. Oui, certes. Voyez un pen {see a little) : ne pnis-j« pas {cannot /) faire une aussi jolie bosse que vous ? Le chameau. Cela pent {can) etre ; mais peut-elle aussi porter autant que la mienne {mine) ? Le chat. La sotte demande ! donnez-moi seulement {only) votre petit paquet, je le porterai, comme si ce n'etait rien. Le chameau. Mais penses-y bicn : n'est-il pas trop gros pour toi (you) ? Le chat. Ah ! quel conto ! donnez-moi, vous dis-jo, donnez. Le chameau. C'est bien ; approcho un peu, le voil^ Le chat. Ab ! quelle charge ! je suis ecrase ! Le chameau. Tu as ce que {what) tu ra^rites ! Celui qui veut entreprendre de grandcs choses, doit (^must) an- aravaat eprouver ses forces. Le chameau, the camel. y, of it Cto it). le chat, the cat. le conte, the tale."* le bien-venu, e, welcome. approcher, approach. comment, how. la charge, the weight<^ ceites, to be sure. €cnis€, cru.shed.t faire, to make. ' m€riter, to deserve. une bosse, a hump. entreprendre, to undertake, v. la demande, the question* auparavant, before. ♦ le paquet, the pack. Eprouver, to try. "^ oomme si, as if. laforce^ the strength. 96 XXI. yiNGT ET UNE^ME LEgON. XXI. VINGT ET UNlfeME LEgON, REJiIARKS ON THE ORTHOGRAPHY OF SOME VERBS OF THE FIRST CONJUGATION. Some regular verbs in -«r are, for the sake of euphony, liable to the fol lowing modifications : I. Some Verbs ending in -ter, as : jetir, to throw ; rejeter, to throw back; and those polysyllabic verbs ending in eler, as: appeler, to call; renouvder. to renew, etc.; double the t or /, when they are followed by an e mute. This is the caae in some persons of the Present, Future, and Imperative, viz.: — PRE8EKT. IMPERATIT*. PUTURB. Je je«e — nous jctons. Je«e. Je je«erai. tu JGitGB — vous jetez. pi. jetons. tujetteras. il je«e — ils jettent. jetfiz. etc. J*appe/7e — nous appelons. Appe/fe. J'appe/Zerai. tu appc//es — vous appelez. pi. appelons. tu appe//eraa. il appe/Ze — ils appe//ent appelez. etc. Except the verb acheter, to buy, and a few others that seldom occur, which never double the t, but take the grave accent i : Pres. J'achbtc, tu achetes, il achete, nous achetons, vous achetez, Us ach^tent. Fut. J'ach^terai. Imper. achate, pi. achetez. 2. iMssyllabic verbs ending in -der, as : geler, to freeze, and all others that have an e mute in the last syllable but one, such as : server, to sow ; mener, to lead ; lever to lift up, take the grave accent,^, when the final con- sonant of the root is followed by an « mute : Infinitive: Mener, to lead, to conduct. . Pres. Je m^ne, tu mfenes, Q m^ne, nous menons, vous menez, ils mteen* Imperf. Je racnais, tu menais. Fut. Je mineral, tu raeneras. Imp. m^ne, menons, m«nez. The same change takes place with tiiose verbs which have € in the last syllable but one. They, however, retain the /in the Future and Condi- laonaL OETSOGRAPHY OF SOME VEEBS. '^1 I n f i n i 1 1 V e : Esperer, to bope. Pres. tTesp^, tu esperes, il espere, nous esp^rons, vous esp^rez, Wt »■ p^nt. Imperf. J'esperais. Im^ter. Espere, esperons, esp^rez. Fut. J'esp^rerai. Verbs in ^ger retain the e, as : je protege, 8, In verbs ending in -ger, as : juger, to judge ; partager, to share, divide, the e is retained in those tenses where g is followed by the vowels a or o, in order to give the g the same soft sound as in all other tenses and persons. Ex.: Infinitive: JUaw^cr, to eat. Pres. Je mange ; pL nous mang^ons. P. pr. Mang(?ant. Imp/. Je mangcais, tu mangcais, il mangeait, nous mangions, vous man giez, ils mangcaient. Pret. Je mang«ai, tu mangeas, il mangea, nous mangeamcs, vous man- geates, ils mangbrent. Imp. Mangcons. 4. In verbs ending in -cer, as : commencer, to begin, a cedilla must be placed under the c, when this letter is followed by a or o. Ex. : — Infinitive: P/iacer, to place. Pres. Je place, tu places, etc.; pi. nous plajrons, etc. Imp/. Je plafais, tu plafais, il playait, nous placions, voua placiez, ils placaient. Imper. Plafons, etc. Pra. Je placai, tu plafas, il plafa, nous plaf times, etc. 5. Verbs ending in -ayer, -oyer, -uyer change the y into t, whenever the letter y would be immediately followed by an e mute. Such are : — Payer, to pay. <^i^i^ytV. «n/>/40^ \, Pres. J^a/e, tu paics, il paie, pi. nous payons, vous payea* fls patent Part. pr. Payant. J'emploie, tu emploies, il emploie, pi. nous employons voos em ployez, ils eraploient. P. pr. Employant. J'essuie, tu essuies, etc.; pi. ils essuient. ^Jff' Je payais, etc.; pi. nous payions, vous payiez, etc J'employais, etc.; pi. nous employ ions, etc. J'essuyais, etc.; pi. nous essuyions, etc. Fid. Je paierai, etc.; j'emploicrai, etc.; j'essuierai, etc. Imper. Paie — payez. Emploie — employez. Essuie — cssuyez. %. Verbs which in the Infinitive end in -ier, as : prier, to pray; cruTf to cry/i^ iQ some cases spelled with a doubld^it^ This takes place in the \Bi r 98 XXI. VINGT ET UNIEME LEgON. ind 2(1 persons plural of the Imperfect of the Indicatire, anri of the E*ie«nf of the Subjunctive : — I n f i nYil v e : OuhUer, to forget. Ind. Imperf. pi. nous oubluonv^FOjis oubhVez, ils oubliaient. 1. Fres. p^. que nous pntons, que vDttSs^njez. etc. VOCABULAEY. Lavertu, virtue. la force, strensrth. la beauts, beauty. le bruit, the noise. prif^rer, to prefer. la servante, the servant Vamiii^, f. friendship. la chambre, the room. U vent, the wind. le cheniin, the way, road. la pluie, the rain. nettoyer, to clean. la terre, the earth. la pierre, the stone dever, to biing up, to educate. la cuisiniere, the cook. sicker, to dry. poss^der, to possess. bien, well. lejardinier, the gardener. READING EXERCISE 21. Le sage pr^fere la vertu k la beauts. L'amiti^ se paie (is paid) par I'amitie. Les parents ^levent leurs enfants. Tl gelera cette nuit. D a geM. Elle achete iin b'vre. Les vents sechent la terre tremp^e (wet) par la pluie. Nous achetons des fruits. Vous acheteriez cette maison, si elle n'etait pas si chere Appelez Jean. Nous partageons avec nos amis tout ce que {aU that) nous avons. Ce jeune homme emploie bien son temps. Nous emploierons toutes nos forces. Cela m'effraie. Ce bruit m'a efFray^. La ser- vante nettoie les charabres. Les maitres aiment les ^coliers qui emploient bien leur temps. \ THEME 21. '^ 1. The boy throws a stone. 2. You always throw (throw al- ways) stones. 3. Call thy brother. 4. Call the servant. 6. I shall call John. 6. The cook buys eggs. 7. I buy a horse. 8. My father will also buy a horse. 9. Where dost thou taJie ^ this horse? 10. I hope to see you (votis voir) to-morrow. 11. What 1 Mener is applied to what moves of itself, porter, to what is carried by iiftliig {h)m the ground. ORTHOGRAPHY OP SOME VERBS. 99 uldr / do yon hope? 12. "We hope nothing. 13. What are you eating there (la) ? 14. The child ate an apple. 15. You ale walnuts. 16. I placed the books on the table. 17. I pay everything (tout) 18. ThOu payest nothing, 19. Let us well employ 'our ^time. 20. My .sons pay [for] what (ce oue) they buy. 21. My uncle po* Besses a large garden. 22. Tne gardener cleans the ways. 23, Wipe your tears {larmes). 24. The dog frightens the cliildren 25. We wiped the table. 26. I prefer coffee to cea {the), CONVERSATION. Ton pere a appel^. Pas encore; je les nettoierai oe soir. Dieu te prot^gera. Je nettoie toute la maison. J'appelle cela tres-cher. Je mangeais des noix. On le mene chez le mar4chal-fei^ rant {farrier). H a dejji gel^. Qui a appel^ ? Avez-vous nettoy^ les chemins ? Qui me protc^gera {protect) f Nettoies-tu la charabre ? Trouvez-vous cela cher ? Que mangeais-tu? Oil mene-t-on ce cheval? qu'il Crois-tu {do you think) gelecette nuit? Acheterez-vous du tb^ ou du cafd? Oil achetez-vous cette farine ? Qui a jet^ cette picrre ? Que fit {did — do) un jour xm pore ? Je n'airae pas le thd, j'ach^terai du cafe. Chez le meunier {miller). Je crois quo c'est Richard. D partagea ses biens entre sea ttoU fils. >c V V 100 XXn. VINGT-DEUXIEMB LEgON. XXII. VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON SECOND CONJUGATION: Fmm. INDICATIVB. PKESENT TENSB. Je fims, I finish. nous finissons, we finish. tu fi^is, thou finishest. vous finissez, you finish, m f[.mt, he finishes. ils finisscnt, ) , ys • i ^Q ^miy she finishes. elleBfinissent, ) "^ IMPERFECT. Je finissais, I finished {was fin- nous finissions, we finished. tu finissais, etc. [ishing) . vous finissiez, etc. il fimissait, etc. ils finissaient, etc. PRETERITE. Je finis, I finished (did finish), nous finimes, we finished. ta finis, etc. vous finites, etc. ilfinit, etc. ils finirent, etc. FUTURE. Je finirai, I shall finish nous finirons, we shall finish tu finiras, etc. vous fini-'ez. etc. il finj*A, et4i ils finiront, ele. CONDITIONAL. Je finirais, I should finish. nous finirions, we should finish tu finirais, etc. vous finiriez, etc. il finirait, etc, ils finiraient, etc. mriNiTivB. J'inir, to finish. de or k finir, to finish SECONJ) CieTTKiEMB LBgos. '*'«.<' fioirpi'fiioJJAtij J'anrais fini, > ^^^^^ havejinished, ^. J eusse nm, ) SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aie fini, that I (may) have finished, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j 'eusse fini, that I (might) havejinished^ etc. PARTICIPLE. Aynnt fini, hai-ing finished, etc. ^,y>^ Conjugate in tlie same manner : hatir^ to build ; choisir^ to cbooso remplir to fill, etc. Rem. 1. The verb hair, to hate, loses in the Present and Imperative sin gnlar its diaeresis. Otherwise it is quite regular and retains the two dots. Pres. Je hais, tu hais, il hait, nous haissons, vous haissez, etc. Imper. Hais ; pi. haissons, haissez. Prct. Je hais, I hated. Eem. 2. The verb y?eunr, to flourish, has a second form for the Imperfect tense : Je fiorissais ; and also a second for the Part, present : fiorissant,'e,-^ both of which are only used in a figurative sense, as : une villefiarissantei etc. ' ' VDCABULAET. Nourrir, to feed, nourish. saisir, to seize. cib^ir, to obey. rendre, to render, return. remplir, to fill, fulfil la tdche, the task. bdiir, to build. la pomme de terre, the potato. embeUir, to embellish. Voccasion, f. the opportunity. punir, to punish. saJir, to soil. le vice, vice. le palais, the palace. le devoir, the duty. choisir, to choose. lafiatlerie, flattery. la ccndeur, the color. le menteur, the liar. V READING EXERCISE 22. Le pain noijrrit \es homm^s. Les bons cnfants obt5issent h, leurs parents et h leurs raaities. Ilem|)li& ce veiTe. Rein£lisse? ces vci^ res. Qui a lempli les Louleilles ? Kojiiulus et Remus batireut SECOND CONJUGATION. 108 la ville cle Rome, Van 753 ayapt Jesus-Christ. Les flenrs e mhel- lisserit les jardins et les prairies. On puniraJes enfants qui n'oheia- sent pas h leur vnaitre. J'esp^re que vous aurez pujiLce mt^chant garr^on Le maitre a puni j e f)etit menteur. Notre voisin batit une grande maison. Nos voisins b atissent_ de grandes maisons. Je batirais, aussi, si j'avais plus d'ai-gent. Je hais le vice, j^aimerai fcoujours la vertu. Haissez le vice, il vous rend malheureux. J'ai toujours hai le vice. "NouThai'ssions la flatterie. Ne salissc^pas vos habits. Les science^ nouriissent la jeunesse et rejouissent la vieillesse. \fj J THEME 22. ySj.. I finish my exercise. 2. The pupils finish their translations. /S. We seize th6 opportunity. 4. We seized the opportunity. 5. Why have you not seized the good opporfunity ? 6. The chil- dren sojl their clothes. 7. Bread and [)otatoes nourish a great- many men. 8. Do not punish Heriry ; he has been ill. 9 Fill the glasses. 10. We should fill the bottles, if we had wine enough. 11. The king builds a new palace. 12. Will you build a house V 13. I should build a large house, if I were rich. 14. Here are two colors : choose. 15. WTiich (Jaquelle) will you choose ? 16. I shall choose the blue. 17. If I had to («) choose, I should choose the green color. 18. Obey your (a vos) parents and (your) ipaS' ters. 19. I hate nobody. 20. Hate nobody. 21. We hate vice. 22. We have always hated vice. ^ \/ (1,^^^^ '' f> ^ conversation/ ^ Voici doux coutcaux : un grand Je choisirai lo petit qui est le pljus et un petit. Lequel {which) joli. choisirez-vous ? Get homme remplit-0 sea de- Pas toujours. voirs? Avez-voos rempli toutcs les bou- Non. Monsieur, je n'avai.s pas as- tcilles V scz 'le vin pour les reraplir. 'Q,vii O&tit cette belle maisou? C'ust mon voisin qui la b^tit. 104 XXII. VINGT-DE UXl^MB LEgON. Ne batirez-vons paa aussi ? Pourquoi ne batissez-voua pas k present (jiowyt Qui a sali ce livre ? Comment as-tu fait (done) cela ? Avez-vous fini voire tli^me 'i Qui a bati la ville de Rome ? Qui a puni mon fils ? Ne trouvez-vous pas quo j'ai em- belli mon jardin ? Bfaissez-vous le vice ? Pourquoi haissez-vous votre voi- sin? Oui, je batirai ansa Taiin^ pro- chaine {next). Je batirais encore cette ann^e, ai j'avais assez d'argent. C'est Martin. La plume est tomb^e dessus {up- on it). Nous finirons notre theme ce soir. Romulus et R^mus. Le maitre de musique. Certainement, ce jet d'eau (foun- tain) embellit beaucoup votre jardin. Oui, je hais tons les vices. Je ne le (him) hais pas; je hais seulement ses flatteries. BEADING LESSON. LB MOINEAU ET SES PETTES. Un moineau avait plac^ son nid dans le trou d'un mur. H ^levait tranquillement sa famille. II aurait et^ bien heureux, si ses petits eussent voulu I'^couter : mais k chaque instant ils venaient Bur le bord du nid. Le pauvre oiseau trerablait dans la crainte de les voir tomber. II leur disait de rester dans le fond du nid, mais ils ne le voulaient point (would not do so.) Un jour qu'il ^tait sorti, ils profiterent de son absence et s'avan- G^rcnt tant qu'ils tomberent k terre. lis n'avaient pas encore de plumes aux ailes ; ainsi ils ne purent (could not) se sauver. Un gios chat, qui passait par-Ik, les vit (saw them); il n'avait pas din^, il les saisit et les mangea sur-le-champ. C'est ainsi qu'ils f'urant 2}U7ii9 de (for) leur desobeissance. THIBD CONJUGATION. 106 Ia nuinsaut the sparrow. les petits, the young ones. U nid, the nest. U froty the hole. ie mur, the wall. tranquillement. quietly. stouter, to listen, obey. Vinstant, m. the moment U$ venaietU, they came. la crainte, the fear. rester, to remain. ' lefond, the bottom. tant, so much. I'aile, f. the wing. • iauver, to save ; «c— , to fly away, passer, to pass by. par-la, there. rfiner, to dine. sur^e-champ, at once, imracjdiately. la d^ob^issance, disobedience. '4«^ XXIII. VINGT-TROISlfiMB I^EgON ^^j^P' • THIRD CONJUGATION: VEN^E, INDICATIVE. FBESSNT TENSB. Je vend^, IteU. tu vcnd^, thou seUest. il vend, he sells. nous ven^ns, we sell. vous vendpz, you sell. ils ventqsnt, ello (on) vend, she (one) sells, elles vendent>> f they sell. IHPEBFECT. Je vendjais, Isold (was selling), nous ven(^ons, we sold. tu vcndais, thou soldst. vous vencliez, you sold. U vendait, he sold. ils venciiient, Mey sold. PBETEBITB. Je vendis, /#oW (did seH). nous vendjmes, trc sold. ta ven*s, c^c. vous vendhes, etc. il Ten<$t, fte. ils vendtrent, eio^ 106 XXIIl. VINGT-TROISr^ME LEgOK. Je vend^ai, I shall sell. nous vencfrons, we skaU sell. tu ven(]|'as, etc. vous venc^ez, etc. il vencn-a, etc. ils vcntfront, etc. CONDITIONAL. Je vcnarais, I should sell. nous ventjrions, we should seU tu venlrais, etc. vous vencpiez, etc. il vencfrait, etc. ils vent|(i-aicnt, etc. IMPEIIATIVE. Vendt, sell. voncf)ns, let us seU. vendjez, sell. SUBJUNCTIYE. PRESENT. Que je vendb, that I (may) sell, que n. veuc|ipns, that weimay)seV. que tu vendifcs, etc. que vous vcncyez, etc. qu'il vend^, etc. qu'ils vcndint, etc. IMPEKFECT. Que je vendfisse, that I might sell, que nous venc^ssions. que tu VGndjisses. etc. que vous vcndlssiez. qu'il venoit, etc. qu'ils vendlssent. PARTICIPLES. PRESENT. PAST. Vendant, selling. Vendu, f. vendue, sold. on vendapt, by selling. COMTOUKD TENSES. INFINITIVE. Avoir vendu, to have sold. INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PBEFr!:^T. J'ai vendu, / have sold. tu as vendu, thou hast sold. il a vendu, he has sold. nous avous veudu, we have sold, eie. * THIRD CONJUGATION. 107 '' COMPOUND OF THP IMPERFECT. J'avais vendu, / had sold, etc. COMPOUND OF THE FRETEKITB. J'eos vendu, / had sold, etc, COMPOUND OF THE FUTURE. J'aurai vendu, / sliall have sold^ etc. CONDITIONAL. J'anrais vendu, ) ^ , , , . , , T'««oo« .r^r^,^ ., f ^ sfioiUd kuve sold, etc. J eusse vendu, ) ' PARTICIPLE. Ajant vendu, having sold. 8UBJUNCTIVB. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Que j'aio vendu, that J (may) have sold, etc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j 'eusse vendu, that I (might) have soid, etc. Conjugate after this model: perdre, to lose; attendre, to wait, to expect; r^pondre, to answer, etc. Rem. 1. The verb Ixittre, to beat, is regularly conjugated, except that in the singular of the Present Indicative and in the fmf>eratire it loses one t. Prcs. Je bats, tu bats, il bat^^ous buttons, vous buttez, etc. Imp. bats, Part, battu. Rem. 2. The verb rompre, to break, is conjugated in the Pres. Indicative as follows : Je romps, tu romps, U rompt, nous roinpons, etc. (All the rest is regular.) Rem. 3. The verb rire, to laugh, is of the 3d conjugation : Pres. Je ris, bx vis, il rit, nons rions, etc. But the Pait. /Hist is n, and the Pret. Je ris, tu ria, il rit, nous rimes, vous rites, ils rirent. Put. Je rirai, etc. Rem 4. Condure, to conclude, is regular, as : Pres. Je conclus, tu con^ dus, il conclut, ttous cimcluons, etc\j Put. Je conclur^i. Except that in the Pnierite, it has j 8. c'est moi, it is I. * PI. c'est nous, it is we. c'esi toi, it is thou. c'est i^ous, it is you. c'est Ini, it is he. ce sont eux, } .. . .■.— c est elle, Jt is slje. ce sout eties, ) The verb etre followinj^ ce is put in the plural only when the pronoun oi Qoun which follows that Vterb is in the third person plural: c'^aient mes amit ce sont eux, but, c'est nous. 4. Soi is only used of mankind in a general sense, and of inanimate oh jocts in the singular. Ex.: — Doit'On toujours penser a soi, ought one always to think of one's self ? VOCAUDLABY. Inconfnant, inconstant la balle, the ball. ressembler, to resemble. venez, come. envoyer, to send. casser, to break. demevrer, to live. sorti, gone out. la corheille, the basket. dg€, old. Vaima.nt, ra. the loadstone ni — hi, neither, nor QSHrtBTt to attract. 4 112 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRI^ME LEgON. READING EXERCISE 24. Qui difc (says) cela ? Moi, — lui, — elle, — eux-mSmes, — ellefr mfemes. Penses-tu k moi ? Je pensc h. toi. Je pense k vous, — k elles, — k eux. Je n'ai pas pense a toi, mon pauvre enfant. L'homme inconstant ne^rCssettihlfi^ jamais k lui-meme. Nous nous souvcnons (we remember) de vous, — do lui^ — d'elles, — d'eux. Envoyez- moi de rargont. Sans moi, ello serait torab^e. Je suis plus grand que toi, — que lui, — qu'elle. Qui a 4t4 ici, lui ou elle I Venez avec moi, — avec nous. Joue avec lui. Joucz avec elles. On parle de nous. Tu paries de lui et d'elle. Nous parlons souvent (often) de vous. Je defends mon honneur moi-meme. L'aimant attixe le fer k soi. Nous nous moquons (we mock at) d'eux. Ah I vous vous moquez de nous I THEME 24. / 1. My brother and I (we) have heard the noise. 2. Who will have the ball, thou or he ? 3. Who has broken the stick ? 4. Not I ! 5. You and he, (you) were not attentive. 6. She and Emily have t gone out. 7. Who hast gone out with them ? 8. Come with me. 9. Gome to om house (chez nous) . 10. Who speaks of me ? 11. I speak of you. 12. You speak of her and of her sister. 13. For whom is the medicine? 14. It (elle) is for yourself. 15. Does she live with you ? 16. She lives with us. 17. He is older than I. 18. I think of (a) you. • 19. You do not think of me. 20. You always* think of yourself. 21. One must not (tl ne favt pas) always think of one's self. 22. Have you brought the book yourself? 23. Yes, I myself. 24. Does she play with us? 26. She plays with them (m.) 26. Is it himself? 27. Yes, it ib him- self. 28. It is I ; it is not he. 4 CONTEKSATTON. Qui a dit cela ? Moi. — Lui. — Ello. " QuivientR? C 'est nous. Pensez-vous k vos amis ? Je pense souvent ^ enx. * £|» Vtvaab, tbA adrexb aaaally follows tbe Tttl)» t son^ X «fii. DISJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 113 Est-elle tomb^e ? ; Pour qui sont ces bottes ? A qui penscz-vous V De qui parle-t-on ? Quia apport^ cette corbeille '' Qui a fait cela ? Est-elle arriveo seule ? Qui a ^crit (written) cette lettre ? Que fait I'airaant? Qm a battu cet enfant ? Qui est venu avec toi ? Oil demeure-t-il ? Est-ce vous qui avez perdu cet «^' argent? Heureuscraent non ! mais gans moi elle serai t tomb^e. Elles sont pour moi. Je pense a vous et a votre mere. On parle d'^eux, — d'ellea. Ma soeur elle-meme. Ni lui, ni elle, ni nous, ni eux. Non, elle est arrivee avec moi. Mou pere -lui-meme. H attire lo fer k soi. Ce n'est pas moi, c'est Leopold. Mon ami Jules. H demeure chez son oncle. Non, ce n'est pas moi, c'est raa cousine Emilie. READING LESSON. LB RtilE*. (The rose-bush.) " Qui vent (wiU) me donner un petit arbre potir men jardin?" disait Frederic k ses freres et h sa socur. Leur pere leur (Jthem) avait donnd h. chacun un petit coin de terre k planter. " Ce n'est pas moi ! " dit Augusto. — " Ni moi I " s'^cria Louia. — ** Ce sera moi ! " dit la bonne . Charlotte ; *' de quelle espece le (i() veux-tu?" " Je voudrais (/ should like) avoir un rosier," r^pondit Fre- deric ; " le mien est tout jauni." " C'est bon," r^pliqua Charlotte Puis elle prit (then the took) one pelle et alia (went) le retirer de terre. " Que vois-je (what do I see) ?" dit Frederic, " tu u'en as toi- mlme que (only) deux, et encore (besides) il y en a un si petit I Du moins ne me donne pas le plus grand." 114 XT7. VINGT-CINQUIEME LE^ON. "Non, Tion ! " s'ecria sa socur, " il pourrait encore (could arfiin) se secher; je puis jouir du pkisir de le voir flcurir dans ton jardin.'^ (To he continued.) CJiocun, e, each. puis, then. un petit coin de terrey a comer of land, la peJle, the spade. ni moi, nor I either. retirer, to take out. s'^rier, to call out, to cry. du moins, at least. Vespece, f. the sort, kind. s€cher, to dry. le mien, mine, tout, quite. se s€cher, to get dry, to wither- jauni, e, yellow, withered. je. puis, I can (from pouvoir). r^pliquer, to reply. jouir, to enjoy, voir, to c^'^ijott.r .> XXY. YINGT-CINQUIEME LECON. 5^ I CONJUNCTR^E PERSONAL PRONOUNS. These areyc (I), nous (we), in (thou), vous (you), il (he), plu. lis (they, m.), elle (she), plu. elks (they, f.).* Unlike the disjunctive personal pronouns, these, except vous and nous, vary to express different cases. Je has me when used either as the dii'cct or indirect object of the verb : tu has te in the same cases Of him, of her, of thera, of it (ra. or f.), are each represented ty the pronoun en, generally referring to things : to him, to her, each by lui: to them (m. or f.), by leur. The objective case (direct object) of i7, is le (him), and of c^e, is la, (her): les (them) is the obj. plu. of both genders. POSITION OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. Genihral Rule. Conjunctive pronouns precede the verb except in the Imperative affirmative. In the interrogative ^rm the subject comes after the verb. * For on, of wblch se is used aa the object and soi as the disjunctive, see Part xi hiXIU CONJUNCTIVB PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 115 SPECIAL RULES. A. WITH ONE PROXOTTN. 1. Tho nOTuinative cases je, tu, il, die, nous, vous, ih, or eHes^ osually precede the verb (if vJbicb tbcy are the subject : in an inter- rogative scDtence, however, they arc placed immediately after the ferb. Ex. : — Je pense, I think. nous parlous, vrc spcafc. tu esperes, thou hopcst. vous jouez, you play. Irierrogative: FimS'tn, dost thou finish 1 Ment-dle, docs she come? 2^ Jho^ect and indirect objects are placed immediately- before theJeroVp a simple tense, and ^Jbefore tho auxiliary in a compound one.\ Ex. : — ' Tu me d'ls, you tell me. Je vous flonne, I j;ivc you. Elle Jii'a r(fpomlu, she has answered me. Charles nous a dit, Charles has told us. 3. If tho sentence is negative, ne is put directly after tho subject, before the governed pronoun, as : Je ne vous donne pas, I do not give yon. Vous tie les airez pas vus, you liavo not seen them. Elle ne m'a pas r€j>ondu, she has not .mswercd me. Charles ne nous avail pas dit, Charles had not told us. 4. In the interrogative form, the object begins the sentence, then follows the verb with its subject. K the question is a negative one, ne begms the sentence : Me connniss^vovs, do yon know me 1 Me bhime't-il, docs he hlanie rae? Les vois-tu, do you sec them ? Vous a-t'il r^jiomlu, has he answered you? A'ie vous aA-il pas r€pondu, has he not answered you? 6. When the verb is in tho Imperative affirmative, the governed pronouns are put after it, in French as in English. In this case 7M 116 XXV. vingt-cinquiSme LEgON. and te ai*e changed into moi and toi for the direct and indirect objects. Ex. : — Donnez-moi, give me. Apportez-lui, bring (to) him. Mangez-Us, eat tliem. Parlez-leur, speak to them. 6. But when the Imperative is negative, the governed pronooQ precedes the verb. Ex. : — Ne me donnezpas, do not give me. Ne lui apportez pas, do not bring him. Ne les mangez pas, do not eat them. Ne leur parlez pas, do not speak to them. B. WITH TWO PRONOUS'S. 1. When a verb, which is not in the Imperative affirmative, governs two pronouns, thej are both placed immediately before the verb, so that the indirect object comes first, and the direct follows. Ex.: — Je te le donne, I give it to thee (you). Vous Vapporte-t-dle, does she bring it to yon 1 Ne nous Vapportera-t-il pas, will he not bring it to as ? On vous le dira, they will tell (it) yon. On ne vous le dira pas, they will not tell (it to) you. 2. An exception to the foregoing rule are the two indirect objects, lui (to him, to her), and leur (to them), which always follow the other governed pronoun. Ex. : — Je le lui donne, I give it to hira or her. Je ne le lui donne pas, I do not give it him. La lui donne-t-dk, does she give it hira % La leur donnera-t-il, will he give it to them? Je ne la leur ai pas donn^, I have not given it to them. Ne le lui donnez pas, do not give it hira. Pourquoi ne la leur pretez-vous pas, why do yon not lend it to them "? 3. Of two personal pronouns governed by the Imperative. affinna* dve the indirect object always stands last ; Donnez-le-nwi, give it me. Apportez-les4ui (leur), bring them to him (to them). 4. If the Imperative is negative, both of them precede the verb CONJUNCTIVE PERSONAL PBONOtJNB. 117 according to § 6, and lui and leur follow the direct object, according toB, §2. Ex. : — Ne me le donnez pas, do not give it me. Ne la lui apportez pas, do not bring it to him. Ne Us leur entxxyez pas, do not send them to them. VOCABULARY. . Pardonner (k),* to pardon. tailler, to cnt, mend. preter (k), to lend. loiter, to praise; to let. r^compenser, to reward. accompagner, to accompanj. eorriger, to correct. je promets, I promise. icouter, to listen to. I'histoire,/. history. la v&iU, the truth. vdontiers, willinjEfly. RPADINQ EXERCISE 25. Je vous cntends. E me pardonnora. Elle m'a pardonn^. Al- fred m'a pret^ un livre amusant. Pretcz-moi votre livre. Je vous le preterai. II me le donne. Tu me I'as donn^. Elle me les don- nerait, si elle les avait encore. Vous a-t-il pardonne ? Lui aa-tu dit {told) cela? Je le lui ai dit. Lour a-Jt-on rdpondu"? Appelea ces ^coliers. Je les rdcompcnserai ; je leur donnerai de belles images. Tu les leur donneras domain. Ne te loue pas toi-m§me. On ne se loue pas soi-meme. Elle ne voUs dcoute pas. Elle ne m'a pas ^cout^. Nous ^coutera-t-il ? Vous ne me dites pas la v^rite. Je vous la dis. Cctle plume est Irop molle j voulcz-vous avoir la bont^ {kindness) de me la tailler ? Je vous la taillerai vo- lontiers. niEME 25. _ praise thee. 2. Thou praiscst me. 3. Do yon play? 4. y d6 you hear? 5. Do you hear me? 6. I hear you. 7. I do not Bell my house. 8. I do not sell it. 9. Do you sell your horses ? 10. I do not sell them. 11. We hear thee. 12. I call him. 13. f Will you accompany me? 14. My father will accompany you * Thli mark (h) deuotes that the verb after which it is placed takes an iruUreat per$onal otOect 2^ 118 XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LEgON. 15. Have you mended my pen? 16. I have mended it. 17. Lend mo a pencil .j!/'^l 8. Lend him a pen. 19. Do not give him my book. 20. Do not give it him. 21. I promise you. 22. I promise it [to] you. 23. Tell {dites-) him (to him). 24. Tell them. 25. Tell it him. 26. Do not tell it [to] them. 27. I should give you some money, if you were more industrious 28. lias she given him the gloves? 29. She has given them to him-. 30. She has not given them to him ; she has given them to his brother. 31. Your translation is badly done (malfaite) ; correct it {fem.y 32. Pardon (me) my mistakes. 33. Have you cor- rected them? 34. Yes, I have (corrected them). ^ -% CONVERSATION. , M'entendez-vous ? Qui, je vous entends. Ne m'entendcz-vous pas? Je ne vous ai pas entendu. Me pardonnerez-vous ? Je ne vous pardonnerai pas De qui avez-vous reju ce livre C'est Alfred qui me I'a pret^. amusant ? Voulez-vous preter ce livre h Je le lui preterai volontiers. ma socur ? Qui veut cette plume ? Donnez-la-moi, s'il vous plait {if you please) . Les airaez-vous ? , Oui, je Ics aiiiie beaucoup. Dites-vous la verite ? Je la dis toujours. Qui vous accompagnera ? Mon cousin m'accoinpagnera jus qu'a (as far as) Bmxellcs. Vous a-t-on racont6 (told) une Oui, notre grand 'mere nous a n- bistoire ? " cont^ une tres-belle histoire. READING LESSON. SUITE DU RO SI^R, Frederic, transporte de joie, emporta le rosier; et Charlotfd le suivit plus joycuse encore que lui. Lt jardiuicr avait vu le trait d*amiti^ de la petit6 filld. D. &Ila cliercher (he w&rdfof) un beau Bureau d'Espagne. DEMONSinATIYB PRONOUNS. 119 " Voulez-vous que je mette (^puf) ceci a la place de votre rosier? " demanda-tril k Charlotte. ** Si vous n'en avez pas besoin." " Non," rejK)ndit-iI, " je n'en ai pas besoin." — H le planta. Le mois do Mai suivant, Ic rosier do Frederic porta les plus belles roses, et tous les matins, Chai'lotte rccevait un bouton h. moitie ou- Tert, pour le mctti-e dans ses chevcux. Ijc Bureau prit (took) racine aussi et devint (became) biontok si grand et si <5pais que Cbai'lotte y trouva de I'ombrage dans la grande chaleur du jour. Transports, enraptured. emporter, to carry off. lesuivit, followed him. joyeiix, joyful. le trait, the trait. Vamiti€, friendship. un tureaa (TEspayne, a lilac-tree. ceci, this. demander, to ask. un houton, a bud. la moitie, half. ouvert, open, opened- la racine, the root. bientot, soon. I'oijihra^je, the shade. la chaleur, the heat. XXYI. VINGT-SIXIEME LE9ON* DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, .. These are: masculine. feminine. Celuf, pi. ceux\ celle, tlnit. cel/es, those. celui-ci, celle-ci, this, the latter^ pi. ceiix-ci, ce/les-ci, these. ' celui-la, celle-la, that (one), the foTmer> pi. ceux-la, celks-ia, those. 2. The pronouns he, she, they, preceding a relative, must be translated by celui, celle, ceux, celles. Ex. : celui qui, he who; celle qui, fthe who ; cetix qui, celles qui, they who^ 120 XXVI. VINGT-SIXIEME LE^ON. 3. Gelui, ceUe, ceux, celles, are used with the preposition cfe, in- stead of the English possessive case, when the goveniing noun is not expressed. Ex. : mon chapeau et celui de monfrere, my hat and my brother's ; ma plume et celle de ma sceur, my pen and my sister's. KfiMARK. Cdui, ceUe, ^c, are used only before a relative or the prcpo sition de; in all other cases celui-ci, celle-ci, celui-la, celle4a, ^c, must be nsed. Ex. : J' at celui-ci, je n'ai pas celui-la, I have this one, I have noi that one. 4. Ce which we have seen as an adjective, is also a pronoun. It is then invariable, meaning this, that, it. — It is used before the relative, as : ce qui (subj,), ce que (obj.), that which (what) ; ce do-fit, that of which. For the use of ce or // l)efore the verb to be, see Rule after the vocabulary of Lesson xv. See also Lesson xxiv. 3. 5. The compounds of ce, ceci, this, and ceki, that, are used abso- lutely, without reference to any particular noun. Ex. : Je ne veux pas ceci, je veux cela. I do not want this, 1 want that. Ce queje dis, what I say. Que dites-vous de cela, what do you say of that I Est-ce Id voire plume, is this your pen 1 C'est ma plume, that is my pen. Sont-ce la vos gants, are these your gloves 1 Ce sont mes yonts, these are my gloves. 6» In place of de and a with ce, ceci, cela, ceux-ci, and ceitx-la, two other conjunctive pronouns are used, viz. : en and y. En is rendered in English by some, of it, of them, about it, aboM them etc. T corresponds to the English to it, to them, in it, in ih&ik there, therein, etc. Ex. : — t Void du jamhon : en voulez-vous f Here is ham, will you have some i J* en prendrai un petit viorceau, I shall^ take a little piece of it* ' Votre pere est-il au jardin f Om, tl y ed, Ic yom fathei in the garden 1 Yes, he \a thane* N8TRATIYE PRONOUNS. Ty vais aussi, I am going there also. Doruiez-m'en — donnez-fui-en. Give me some — givii him some. Y penses-tu, do you tfank of that 1 Je lui en ai donn€, I have given him some of them (it). 121 teporte-feuUle, the pocket-book Japeur, fear. I'dme^ the soul. la nofilesse, nobility. U corps, the body. commode, comfortable. U conqit^mnl, tlic conqueror. jaune, yellow. joli, e, nice, pretty. le commerce, the commerce. VOCABULART. la recompense, the reward. b€nir, to bless. pers^citter, to persecute. sonfiaiter, to wish. etiriihir, to enrich. V agriculture, f. agriculture. ^(/a/ement, equally. tout de suite, directly, promet, pr<>iuise8. READING EXXBCI8E 26. Voici mon porte-feuille et celui de mon p^ere. Voici mes gaDts et ceux de ma socur. Voulez-vous ceux-ci ou ceux-li ? Celui qui reniplit ses devoiis est un honuete homme. Voultr-z-vous red ou cela? Ceux qui 8ont conteuts, sont toujours heureux. Heu- reux celui qui trouve un vriii ami ! Je prefere la nobleSse do I'ame a celle «le la naissaucc (birth). On croit (believes) ce qu'on esj>ere. Ce tjue vous dites me Aiit peur. Qui vieiit la ? C'est moi. — Ce sont eux. Ce (jui est beau n'est pas toujours utile. Ne parlez pas de ce qui ne vous .regarde {concern) pas. Alex- andre-le-Gran THEME 26, ^X\. -^ 1. Here is your hat and your brother's. 2. I shall sell my LoTise and my uncle's. 3. We speak of these, you speak of those. 4. Give me that one. 5. This is my pen. 6. These (ce) are your penoila. 7. Is this the garden of your aunt? 8. Are these the shoes 122 xxvn. vingt-septiMe le^on. of your sister ? 9. No, these are the shoes of my cousin Eliza. 10. Ill is ink {cette encre-ci) is blacker than that. 11. These gloves are white, those are yellow. 12. I prefer the beauty of the soul to that (/.) of the body. 13. Agriculture and commerce are equally use- ful to man; the former nourishes us, the latter enriches us. 14. Mj mother prefers this house to that ; this is smaller, but that is more comfortable. 15. Have you (any) butter? 16. Yes, I have Borao. 17. Give me some. 18. Here is black cloth. 19. I shall take ten yards of it (^fen prendrai . . .). 20. Were you at the theatre yesterday? 21. Yes, I was there. 22. Is your master in that room ? 23. Yes, he is there. i .-4 IV VINGT-SEPTI^ME LEgON. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. They are : I. lequel f. laquelh, which (of) ? 2. qui, who? qtte and quoi, ^hat ? 1. Lequel^ when not used alone, is separated by de from the noun with which it agrees in gender. When the pronoun which is used interrogatively, it is always expresged by lequel, Icujuelle, etc, as : — Void deux appartementSy lequel choisirez-vous 7 Here are two apartments, which will you choose 1 Une de ses somrs est mari€e, Laqndle est-ce f One of his sisters is man-icd. \Vhich is it 1 LnqneUe de vos €coUeres est malade f Which of your pupils is ill ? The same contractions take place in the article le compounded with qud, as when used by itself: thus, by contraction with the propositions a and de^ aru formed auquel, auxquels, auxqudles, duquel, desqueis, and degquel!e$. INTEREOGATTVE PRONOUNS. 123 2. The interrogative pronoun qui^ is only used of pei"80iis. Ex.: — Qui est la, who is tl.ere? A qui pretez-voxts c(Ja, to whom do yoti lend this I Qui cherchez-vous, whom are you looking fori Pour qui est ce crayon, for whom is this pencil ? 3. WJiose, wben used interrogatively, must be rendered in French by a qui. Ex. : — Whose book is this ? a qui est ce livre f 4. Que and quoi arc neuter.* Quoi, what, is disjunctive, and used either by itself or after a preposition, as : — De quoi parlez-rous, of what are yon speaking 1 Sur quoi, upon what? Avec quoi, with whati 5. Que, what, is conjunctive, and is only used before verbs : it never follows a preposition. Ex. : — Que voulez-vous, what do you wish or want I Que dit-on, what do people say ? Que demarule-t-il, what docs he ask 1 * VOCABULARY. Mari^, e, married. le rahier, the copy-hooV/ fci'/, got up, risen. la niece, the niece. Jrapper, to strike, to beat. le porte-plume, the penholder. READING EXEPXISE 27. Lequel de vos fils est malade ? Laquelle do vos soeurs est ma- rine ? Lesquels de vos dcoliers n'ont pas fait leurs themes ? Voici plusieurs canifs : lequel voulcz-vous acheter ? Qui est arriv^ ? Qui a trouv^ ma bourse ? De qui avez-vous parl6 ? A qui est la grara- maire que vous avez h la main ? Que souhaitez-vous, Monsieur ? Qu'avcz-vous port^ h la poste ? Quoi ! vous etes dej^ lev6 ! A quoi pensez-vous done ? Auquel de ces ^coliers avez-vous promis une recompense ? • The neuter gender 1b recognized as existing In French only by very few gram, m&rians. But qtie and gtioi, the pronoun ce, and sometimes te, axe certainly neither masculine nor feminine. 124 XXVn. VINGT-SEPTlfiME LEgON. THESIE 27. 1. Whicb of your horses have you sold? 2. Which of these col- ors is the finest? 3. Which of my copy-books will you have? 4. To which of your nieces do you write {ecrwez-vous) a letter? 5. \^'hich of your pupils are the most diligent? 6. Here are several pi'^'tures, which will you choose? 7. Who is at (a) the door? 8. Whom do you love most {le mieux) ? 9. From whom have you received this ring? 10. To whom do you speak? 11. To whom will you give this nice pen-holder? 12. WTiat do yo« carry under your arm (bras) ? 13. With what has he beaten the dog ? 14. What ! are you still {encore) in bed (au lit) ? CONVERSATION. Lequel de ces deux porte-feuil- les est k vous ? Laquelle de ces deux robes prefercz-vous ? Est-ce la votre bague ? Sont-ce la vos gants 1 Avcz-vous regu ma Icttre ? Le commerce est-il utile aux borames ? Quelle maison vendez-vous ? A qui donnerez-vous ce canif ? Voici du jambon et du pain, en voulez-vous ? Avez-vous apporte les verres ? Madame votre mere est-elle k la maison (or chez elle) ? Celui que vous avez ^ la main. Je prdfere celle-ci k celle-la. Oui, M — , c'est ma bague d'or. Non, J\I — , ce ne sont pas mes gants, ce sont ceux de ma cou- sine. Je n'ai re^u ni la v6tre {yours) ni celle de votre pere. Oui, tres-utile ; 11 les enrichit. J'ai deux maisons k vendre, celle de roon oncle et celle de men grand-pere. Je le donnerai a Guillaume. Merci, nous en avons dejk. Non, M — , je n'y ai pas pens^. Oui, M — , elle y est. K> POSSESSIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 125 ;\ XXVIII. VINGT-HUITIEME LEgON POSSESSIVE AND RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 1 The |X)sscssiYe pronouns aift*fewwdp^MM>Aa pnnnnrniFn n i ij> t ' tI»M» w i jiij, t un, Mil, u <<. They are : — 8INO. Masc. le mien, le tien, le sien, le notre, le votre, le leur. Fern. la mienne, la tienne, la sienne, la notre, la vdtre, la leur, Masc. les miens, les tiens, les siens. PLUK. Fern. les micnnes, les tiennes, les siennes. les notres, les votresj les leurs, mine.' thine, ^ ^ his, hers, «te. ours, yours, theirs. These are not, as in English, of the same gender as the possessor.. They agree in gender and nurabef with the ob ject p ossessed. Ex. : — ' ^ Cette dame aunon crayon et le sien. That lady h^ my pencil and hers. Avez-vons nia montre ou la votre t Have you my watch or yours 1 J^ai la mienne, I have mine. Ala sceur a la sienne, my sister has hers. 2. The interrogative pronouns qui, qiioi, and lequel, serve at the same time as relative pronouns, when they have a reference to some other noun or pronoun preceding. 3. As a relative qui is a subject and que the direct object. Qui and que are ased for persons and things of both genders and num- , bcrs. Ex. : — Un enfaM qui pleure, a child that cries. • Laporte qui est ouverte, the door which is open. Le vcyageur qiw. fai qnitt^, the traveller whom I have left. Lechapeauquej'ai ac/iet^, the hat (which) I have bought. Les maisons que vous avez vues, the houses (which) you have The relative que, whom, which, or that, is sometimes understood in Eng»- lish, but it must always bo expressed in French. O ^■A 126 XXVm. VINGT-HTJITIEME LEgOIf. 4. Dont, whose, of which, is used for persons and things of both genders and numbers ; but de qui, from whom or of whom, which is sometimes requu-ed instead of dont, has only reference to persons. Remark. When dont signifies whose the nonn which it limits must be preceded by the article ; if the noun is the object of a verb it must come after that verb, and not immediately after dont as in English. Ex. : — Je connais lafemme dont vous avez regit la lettre. I know the woman whose letter you have received. Je connais lafemme de qui vous avez regu la lettre. I know the woman from whom you have received the lett». L'homme — les Jiommes dont vous parlez. The man — the men of whom you speak. La lettre — les lettres dont vous parlez. The letter — the letters of which you speak. 5. After prepositions, qui, refers to persons, lequel, to things and animals. Ex. : — Le marchand avec qui fai voyag€. The merchant with whom I travelled. But J Uarhre sur lequel (not sur qui) je montai, x The tree upon which I climbed. La clef avec laquelle on ouvrit la parte. The key with which they opened the door, Voila Vhomme a qui fai pret€ mon livre. There is the man to whom I have lent my book« C*est le chien auqud vous avez donn€ a manger. That is the dog to which you gave to eat. 6. Lequel, laquelle, etc., must also be used instead of qui m thd Nominative, when the relative is separated from its noun by another substantive to which it might seem to relate. Ex. ; — Im tante de mon ami laquelle demeure a Paris* My friend's aunt who lives at Paris. (qui demeure a Paris might relate to mon ami.) 7. TTiai which, and whal, meaning the thing whi4ih% are ex- POSSESSIVE AND aELATIVE PRONOUNS. 127 pressed by ce qui for the Nominative, and ce que for the Objective, AU that is rendered: Nom. tout ce qui, Obj. tout ce que. Ex. : — What renders men miserable, is cupidity. Ce qui rend les hommes mis&ables, c'est la cupidity, I like all that is fine, faime tout ce qui est beau. Do what I teU jon,faites ce queje vous dis. VOCABtU^RY. V^gr^mt, m. the comfort, inviter, to invite. pleasure. chatier, to chastise* le tigre, the tiger. demeurer, to live. le talent, the talent. vanter, to praise. I'amiral, the admiral. fertiUser, to fertilize. la victoire, the victory. d€chirer, to tear. le propriaaire, the owner. gagner, to win, gain. Us mceurs, f. the manners. s'appelle, is called. le repas, the meal. ' tout, adv. quite. c^ebre, celebrated. trop, adv. too much. amsi, as. maintenant, — a present, now. n^ligeTf to neglect. READING EXERCISE 28. ]\Ion fr^re est aussi grand que le ticn. IMa socur est du merce fige que la votre. Vos roses sonu tres-belles, mais ellcs sent moins belles que les micnnes. Nos chicns sent aussi fidelcs que les leurs. Chaque plante a sa propriete {peculiarity^ ; la violctto a la sicnne, les roses ont les leurs. Le petit gar(;on dont le pcre est mort, do- meure maintonant chez nous. Les raoours des anciens peuples etaient tr(is-diffurcntes des nOtrcSi La ville a ses agrdmcnts, et la campagne a les sicns. Le marcliand que vous avez vu hier chee moi, et chez qui demeuro mon ami R., est parti pour Paris. THEME 28. 1. Your house is finer than mine, but my garden is finer than yours. 2. I have read (Ju) your letter and his. 3. Do you prefer your Tcnife to mine ? 4. Yes, I prefer mine to yours. 5. Which bonnet is thine ? 6. Your rooms are more spacious (j^andei) than 128 XXVm. VINGT-HUTTI^ME LEgON. OUTS, but ours are higher. 7. I think (trouve) your garden very small. 8. I beg your pardon (^je vous demande pardori). Sir, it is not smaller than yours; it is quite as (aussi) large as that of my rtigh- bor. 9. Where is your pen and where is mine? 10. Which one? 11. That which I have made {tailUe) this morning. 12. The man of whom you are speaking, is dead (morf). 13. Is this the book (which) you have lost? 14. No, it was a French book. 15. You speak of the lady whose husband {le man) has been so ill. 16. The horse to which you have given some drink (a hoire) is mine, 17. The window upon which you lean (yous vous appuyez) is broken. COI^VERSATION. Trouvez-vous mon jardin plus grand que le v6tre? Est-il aussi plus petit que celui de votre tante ? Comment s'appelle cet amiral qui a remport^ la victoire do Trafalgar? Que fait le tigre ? Ta soeur est-elle plus ^g^e quo la mienne ? Quel age a-t~elle done ? Avec quoi le voleur a-t-il ouvert (opened) la porte ? Comment s'appelle le fleuve dont les eaux fertilisent I'Egypte? Avez-vous r^ellement une bonno intention? Au contraire, je le trouve p\ua pe- tit que le mien. Non, le sien est moins grand. Le nom de ce c^lebre amiral an- glais est Nelson. n d^chire la main qui le chatio. Elle est plus jeune que la votre. Elle a onze ans et demi. D I'a ouverte avec une fausse clef. Ce fleuve s'appelle le Nil. Je vous assure que mon intention est aussi bonne que la vdtro. A^n' 6, INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 129 XXIX. VIXGT.NEUYIEME LEgON. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 1. These are used by themselves, without a noun. They are : — On or Von, one, they, people. Chacun, f. cJiaaine, each, every-one. Aucun, f. aucune (with ne), none, not one. Quelqu'un, f. quelfpi'tine, Bome one, eonnjbody, anybody, pi. qadqw^* uns^ f. quciques-unes, eoniQ. Personm, (with ne), nobody. L*un, e — I'a'Ure, the one — the other. pL let utu (unea) — lea autres, the one« — the others. L'un (I'une) ft Vantre, both. JJun (I'une) cu I'autre, either. JVit l'un (I'une) ni I'autre, neither. L'un (I'une) I'autre, — pi. lea una (lea unea) lea oUtTta, each Other, One another. Un autre, f. une autre, another. Lfautres, pi. others, other people. Autrui, others, another. Tel, f. telle, many a man. J^lusieurs, several. Xa plupart, most, followed by de with the def. arf., aff: la /^upaTf cle6 fwnimes, most men. Qtticonque, wh(x;ver. Tout, f. toute, all, everything, pi. tous, t&utea, all. Quelque chose, f. something, anything : when followed by cle and aa adj. it is masc. Bien (with ne), nothing. Le, la mime, the same. 2. L^on is used for euphony instead of on after e(, ou, oil, st, unless the next word begins with / ; also after que if the next word begins with a c or ^. Ex. : si Von voit, if one sees ; et Von dit, and they say. But : ti on le voit, not si Von le voit. L'on is also sometimes nsed after maia, ni, qui, and other vowel sonit^^f ^ 130 XXIX. VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON. 3. Several of the indefinite adjectives have been enumerated here, again among the indefinite pronouns, because they may be used aa such, viz. : aucun, plusieurs, touty and le meme. Ex. : — Combien de plumes avez-vous, how many pens have you ? Je n'en ai aucune, I have none. J^en ai plusieurs, I have several. Avez-vous appeU tons les en/ants, have you called all the children f Out, je les ai appel^s tons, yes, I have called them all. 4. When persorine and Hen are used by themselves, they do not take ne, but they retain their negative meaning, as : Qui avez-vous rencontr€f Personne. Whom have you met 1 ]Soi)ody. VOCABULARY. ! Le d(ffaut, the fault. duxnter, to sing. ' le verbe, the verb. bldiner, to blame. le camaradf; the comrade. nVe, to laugh. ; la conjiance, the confidence. arriver, to arrive. jT venu, come (part. p.). gdter, to spoil. ** m^chant, e, naughty. secourir, to assist. jaloux, -se, jealous. nuire, to hurt, injtiro- r^gvlier, -ere, regular, je veux, I will. i V rencontrer, to meet. poum, e, rotten. READING EXERCISE 29. On chante, on joue et Ton danse. Tout le monde vent (wislies) §tre heureux. Chacun veut avoir raison. L'un ^tait riche, I'autro ^tait pauvre ; l'un et I'autre ^talent malheureux. Los unes dan- saient, les autres jouaient. Ne blamez pas les travaux d'autrui. Avez-vous vu quelc|>u'un? Je n'ai vu porsonne. Nous avona quelque chose de meilleur. Tel rit aujourd'hui qui ne rira plus de- main. Chacun a ses defauts. Tout le monde {everybody^ a son faible (weakness). La plupart de ces pommes sont pourries. Ne gavez-vous (do you knotv) rion de nouveau? Nous ne savons (Imow) i-ien. Nous n'avons rencontr^ personne. Quiconquo salira Bcs cahiers, sera puni. Donnez-moi quelquos-unes de vos belles poires. Quelques-uns de mes camarades sont malades. / INDEFTNITE PE0N0UN3. THEME 29. 131 1. One is happy when one is contented. 2. Tliey speak cf peace {de la paix). 3. They say so (/e). 4. Everyhody likes him. 5. Evei-y one thinks of himself (rt 50?'). 6. Evoryboflj has bid [own] faults. 7. Somebody has told {dit) it to me. 8. Those apples are fine, I will take some. 9. WTjoever knows (co»- nait) this man, has little {peu de^ confidence in him. 10. No- body knows that woman. 11. Henry thinks of (a) nobody. 12. (The) one arrives, the other sets out (^pctrt ). 13. These two girls love one another. 14. I do not know them all, but I know several of them (en). 15. Most verbs are regular. 16. The princes were jealous of one another. 17. Will you have anything t 18. I thank you, I will have (je ne vetix) nothing. 19. These people (gens) speak ill (mal) of one another (i. e. the one of the other). Tj^y CONVERSATION. Quefait-onl^? Qui a dit cela ? Qui veut ce papier? Vos deux neveux sont-ils riches ? As-tu vu quolqu'un dans ce jardin ? Qa y a-t-il de nouveau? Ou flont vos deux fils? Voulez-vous quel que chose ? Avez-vous retrouv6 los lettres perdues 1 Avec qui etes-vous venu ? Quiestlji? Avez-vous touteg les boites ? On joue et Ton danse. Tout le monde le dit. Chacun le veut. L'un est richo, I'autre est panvre. Non, jo n*y ai vu personne. Jo ne sais (know) rien du tout {at all). lis sont partis tous les deux. (Ha sont partis Tun et I'autre.) Non, raerci ; je ne veux rien. J*en ai retrouv^ quelqucs-unes;« la plupart sont perdues. Je ne suis venu avec personne^, Personne. Je n'on ai auoonow ^:^ 132 XXIX. VINGT-NEUVIEME LEgON. Comment ^tsdent les princes ? Avez-vous d'autres plumes ? Avez-vous rencontr^ quel- qu'un ? lis ^tazent jaloux I'un de Tautre (or les uns des autres.) Non, ce sont encore les m^mes. Je n'ai rencontr^ personne. READING LESSON. PUISSANCE DE LA CONCORDE. Ud homme qui avait douze fils, les fit (had them) rassembler au- tour de son lit de mort, et comme (as) ils attendaient sa demiere benediction, il leur montra un faisceau de fleches et ordonna k cha- cun d'essayer de les rompre ainsi liees, toutes k la fois. Aucun d'eux ne put (could) y parvenir. H leur dit ensuite de faire le meine essai, en les prenant (h/ taking them) I'une apres I'autre. Us les rompirent de cette maniere avec facility. Le pere les rendit alors attentifs a cet embleme du pouvoir de la Concorde. " Ob- eervez, mes enfants," leur dit-il, "qu'aussi longtemps que voua resterez unis, personne ne pourra (will be able) vous vaincre.'* Le pouvoir, the power, might. rassembler, to assemble. autour de, round, about. le lit de mort, the death-bed. la benediction, the blessing. un faisceau, a bundle. lafieche, the arrow. rompre, to break. nitm lie, thus bound together* a la fois, at once. parvenir, to succeed. ensuite, at length, finally. Vessai, the attempt. la facility, (the) easiness. alors, then. I'embleme, the emblem. unir, to unite. vaincre, to conquer, Tanqaidftj PASSIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. 133 XXX. TRENTIEME LEgON m^ ^M^ (/ PASSIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. 1. Passive verbs are formed, in French as in English, by joining the Participle past of an active verb to the auxiliary verb etre, to be ; for instance, of the verb donner^ the passive voice is etre donne, to be given; of Jinir: etre Jini, to be finished, etc. The Participle past varies according to the gender and number of the noun or pro- noun which stands as the nominative to the verb. CONJUGATION OF A PASSIVE VERB. INFINITIVE. Etre hue J to be praised. INDICATIVB. PRESENT TEN8K. Je 8ni8 lon^ or louee, / am praised. tti es loue or louee, thou art praised, il est loue, he is praised. elle est louee, she is praised. nous somracs louc's or loue'es, toe are praueiL V0U8 Stes louds or loue'es, you ire praitecL ils sont loucs, elles sont louces j'ea p% «^« P^«*»«'' IMPERFECT. vT^taifl \ou4 or \ou6e, I voas praised, ete. PRETERITB. Je fciB lon^ or Ioa€e. / teas praised, etc, FUTURE. Je serai loue or louee, 1 shall he pnaUed, etc. 134 XXX. TRENTlfiME LEgON. CONDITIONAL. Je serais loutf or louee, 1 should be praised^ etc IMPERATIVE. Sois loud or lou(^e, be praised. soyons loues or louees, let us be praised, soyez loues or louees, be praised. SUBJUNCTIVE. PRESENT. Que je sois loud or loude, that I (may) be praised^ tic IMPERFECT. Que je fusse loud or loude, that I (might) be prahed, eto» PARTICIPLE. Etantloud or loude, being praised, COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITIVE. Avoir ^t^ lou^, e, to have been praised. INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OP THE PRESENT. J'ai 6t4 loud, e, / have been praised, etc. COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT. J'avais dtd loud, e, / had been praised, etc. COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITH. J'eus dtd loud, e, / Iiad been praised, etc, COMPOUND OP THE FUTURE. J'aurai dtd loud, e, I shall have been praised, eto. CONDITIONAL. J'aurais dtd loud, e, 7 ^ ^ , ^ _ , , , . • » ^« ,,, / y I should or T frould hftve been praixM, ft4:. J'eusse dtd loud, e, ) PASSIVB^ND NEUTER VERBS. 136 ] COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Qne j'aie dte loue, e, that I [may) have been praised^ dc. COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que j'eusse dte loue, e, that I (miyht) have been prained. PARTICIPLE. Ayant 6td lou6, e, having been praised. 2. The English preposition hy, with the passive va*ce,^is to be rendered by de, when the verb denotes a sentiment or an inward act of soul, and by par, when it expresses an outward action. Ex. : He is esteemed by everybody, II est estime de tout le monde ; the city of Troy was taken by the Greeks, La ville de Troie Jut prise par les Grecs. NEUTER VERBS. 3. There are about six hundred neuter verbs in French, of which about five hundred and fifty are conjugated with avoir in the com- pound tenses. Of the remainder, some take eitlier etre or avoir^ according as,the idea expressed is condition or state, or action. 4 The following neuter verbs invariably require etre : Alter, to go. venir, to come. arriver, to arrive, to happen. devenir, to become. choir, to fall (rarely used). ititervenir, to intervene. d^^der, to decease. parvenir, to succeed. Colore, to hatch. provenir, to arise. mourir, to die. revenir, to come back. naitre, to be bom. sttrvenir, to happen. tombeTy to fall. Eramples: COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Je Buis arrivd or arriv4e, / have (am) arrived, tn es arrive or arrivee, etc. COMPOUND OF TITB IMPEBFBOT. J'^taia arriv^ or arriv^, / had arrived, cfc 136 XXX. TRENTIEME LEgON. COMPOUND OF THE FUTUKB. Je serai arrive or arrivee, / shall Jiave arrived, etc, CONDITIONAL. Je serais arriv^ or arrivee, / should have arrived, etc, 5 A^courir, cesser, croitre, dechoir, degcn(?rer, descendre, disparaitre, ^r;happer, ^choir, empirer, entrer, grandir, monter, partir, passer, pcrir, Tester, sortir, vieillir, and a few others, are conjugated with avoir when it is the action or fact, with etre when it is the state or condition expressed by the verb, which is uppermost in the mind. Ex. : La riviere a mont^ rapidement, the river has risen rapidly. II est mont€, he has (is) gone up. VOCABULARY. La hataiTle, the battle. offenser, to offend. la loi, law. envoyer, to send. le voleur, the thief. mordre, to bite. le voyageur, the traveller. blesser, to wound. lejiatteur, the flatterer. d^molir, to demolish. la la7igue, the language. rehdtir, to rebuild. la cour, the court. tnaltraiter, to treat ill, abuse. le chemin, the road. enlever, to take away vertneux, -se, virtuous. sauver, to save. inconnu, unknown. attaquer, to attack. tester, to remain. assassin^, murdered. ttier, to kill. parce que, because. enra^€, mad. READING EXERCISE 30. Men fils Theodore est aim^ et loue de ses maitres, parce qn'il est appliqu^ et attentif. Gustave Adolphe, roi de Suede, fut tu^ a la bataille de Lutzen, h. I'age de trente-sept ans. Si vous ^tes ver- tneux, vous serez aim^s et estiraes de tout le monde. Ayez soin que le3 lois soicnt ponctuelloment observees. Quiconque les ^rans- gresse, sera puni. Le soldat qui a (^te blesse, est mort. La mai- eon qui a ^t^ demolie, a et^ rebatie. Ce pauvre chien est bien maltraite par son maitre. Hier je fus attaque par un voleur. Mon argent, ma montre, tout me fut enleve. Deux des voyageurs sont rest^ en chemin ; ils ne sont pas encore arrives. PASSIVE AND NEUTER VERBS. 137 THEME 30. 1. T am loved by my parents. 2. Mr. Bell is esteemed by everybody. 3., The French language is spoken in all the courts of Europe. 4. Charles was bitten by a mad dog. 5. Tliat dog must (rfo/V) be killed. 6. This ring was given me by my grandfather. 7. By whom was this letter written (^ecrite)'i 8. It was written by a little boy. 9. Frederic has been punished by his teacher. 10. Have you been invited to the ball? 11. No, sir, I have not been invited. 12. I shall perhaps (^peut-etre) be invited to-monow. 13. This letter must be sent to the post-office. 14. Flatterers are not esteemed. 15. The child has not been saved. 16. It would have been saved, if it had cried for help {au secours). 17. The castle was built in the year 1620. 18. Those brave soldiers will be praised and rewarded. 19. Will jMr. B.'s garden be sold? 20. It is already sold. y CONVERSATION. \ I I I Etes-vous aim^s de vos amis ? Nous avons toujours ^t^ aim^s de tons nos amis. Croyez-vous que mcs ordres Je ne le crois pas. 1 soient executes ? nPar qui as-tu ^t6 offens^ ? Par un homme inconnu. / Les bons rois sontrils aim^s ? Us sent toujours aim^s et es- tim^s. Ces objets seront-ils vendus ? Non, 31 — , ils ne seront pas ven- dus. Par qui Henri IV fut-il assas- H fut assassin^ par Ravaillac. sine {murdered) ? Dnns quelle annee ? Henri IV. fut assassin^ en 1610. Quel fut le sort de Charles X *? Ce roi fut exil^ {banished) de France en 1830. Par qui ces jeunes gens ont-ila Je crois qu'ils ont ^t^ blames par ^t^ blames? leur m:utre. 138 XXXI. TRENTE ET UNTEME LEgON. La bataille de Leipsic fiitrelle sanglanto {bloody) ? Voyez cette pauvre fille ! Qu'a- t-elle done ? N'a-t-on pas tu^ ce chien? Qae va-fron (are they going) faire de cette vicille maison ? A-vez-vous bien dormi ? Tr^s-sanglante. Boaucx)Tip de soldats et d^officiers furent tu^s, et encore {still) un plus grand nomlire furent blesses. Elle a ete mordue par un chien enrage. On ne Fa pas encore tue, mais il sera tue tout de suite. Elle sera demolie et puis rebatie h. neuf {anew). Non, je n'ai pas bien dormi. -^ XXXI. TRENTE ET UNI^ME LE9ON REFLECTIVE VERBS. Some verbs are called reflective, because tbeir subject and object are the same person or thing, so that the subject acts upon itself, and is, at the same time, the agent and the object of the action. Reflective verbs, therefore, have always, besides the subject, another personal pronoun, viz. : me, te, se, myself, thyself, himself, herself, itself, for the singular ; nous^ vous, se, ourselves, youi'selves, them- selves, for the plural. But it frequently happens that in Elnglish the second pronoun is only implied, whereas it must be expressed in French. Ex. : to repent, se repentir ; Pres. I repent, je im repent, etc. Observe that all reflective verbs, without exception, are conjugat- ed with the auxiliary etre, as : I have hurt myself, je me suis Hesse, and notje m'ai hlesse. The conjugation of the following verb may serve as a model foT all the reflective verbs. Kliaj'LECTIVE VEKU3. 139 Se rejouir, to rejoice. INDICATIVK. PRESENT TENSE. Je me r^jouis, / rejoice. tu te rejouis, thou rejoicest. il (ellc) BC rcjouit, fie (she) rejoices* nous nous rojouissons, we rejoice. vous vous rejouisscz, you rejoice. ils (eilcs) sc rcjouisscnt, tliey rejoice. IMPERFECT* Je me n^ooissais, / rejoiced, etc. PRETERITE. Je me rejouis, / rejoiced, etc. FUTURE. Jd me r^ouirai, / shall rejoice, eto. ^ CONDITIONAL. Je me rc^otiirais, / sixould rejoice, etc. IMPERATIVE. R^ouis-toi, rejoice. n?jouissons-noiis, let us rejoice, r^jouissez-vous, rejcice. 8UBJDNCTIVB. PRESENT. Que je me rc^oubse, that I {may) rejoice, etc. IMPERFECT. Que je me rc^ouisse, that I (might) rejoice, etc, PARTICIPLE. Se (me, te, etc.) rc^ouissant, rejoicing, COMPOUND TENSES. INFINITrVJfc 8'#tre r^joui, e, to have rpjoired. 140 XXXI. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEQOS; INDICATIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT* Je me suis rejoui, e, / have rejoiced, tu t'es rejoui, e, thou hast rejoiced, fl s'est rejoui, he has rejoiced. elle s'est rejouie, she has rejoiced. nous nous sommes rejouis, ies, we have rejoiced. Tous vous etes rejoui(s), ie(s^, you haverejoicedt ils se son t rejouis, ) eUes 86 sont rejouies, \ '^^^ '^""^ ^^^'^^^^^ COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Je m'^tais rejoui, e, / had rejoiced. ta t'etais rejoui, e, thou hadst rejoiced, etc, COMPOUND OF THE PRETERITE* Je me fus rejoui, e, I had rejoiced. ta te f us rejoui, e, etc. COMPOUND OP THE FUTURE. Je me serai rejoui, e, / shall have rejoicedm ta te seras rdjoui, e, etc CONDITIONAL* Je me serais rejoui, e, I should have rejoiced, ta te serais rejoui, e, etc, SUBJUNCTIVE. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT* Que je me sois rejoui, e, that I (■may) have rejoioei, que tu te sois rejoui, e, etc. qu'il se soit rejoui, (qu'elle se soit rejouie), etc, COMPOUND OF THE IMPERFECT. Que je me fusse rejoui, e, that I (might) h&ve rejoiced* que tu te fusses rejoui, e, etc. PARTICIPLE. SMtant (m'^tant, etc.) r^oui, e, having rejoiced. REFLECTIVE VERBS. 141 WITH INTERROGATION. PRlsSENT. (Me r^ouis-je), better: est-ce que je me r^ouis, do T rejoice? te rejouis-tu (or est-ce que tu te rejouis), dost thou rejoice f Be rejouit-il [or est-ce qu'il se rejouit) 3 etc, nous rejouissons-nous 1 etc. vous rejouissez-vous ? etew se r€jouissent-ils (elles) 1 eftr, COMPOUND OP THE PRESENT. Me suis-je n^oui, e, have T rejoiced f t'es-tu rejoin, e, hast ifiou rejoiced f B'cst-il rcjoui, has he rejoiced f s'esi-clle rcjouic, has she rejoiced 1 nous sommes-uous rcjouis, ics, have we rejoiced? WITU NEGATION. PRESENT. Je ne me n^ouis pas, / do not rejoice^ tn ne te rejouis pas, etc, il (elle) ne se rejouit pas, etc. nous ne nous r^jouissons pas, e/c. COMPODND OF THE PRESENT* Je ne me suis pas rc^joui, e, / have not rejoioei» tu ne t'es pas rdjoui, e, etc, il (elle) ne s'est pas rcjoui, e, etc, nous ne nous sommes pas nfjouis, ies, etc^ IJIPERATIVK. Ne te rcfjouis pas, do not rejoice. ne nous rdjouissons pas, lei us not rejoice, ne vous rejouisscz ])us, do not rejoice* INFINITIVE. Ne pas se rdjouir, not to rejoice. ne pas s'ctre rcjoui, e, ncd to have rejoiced* WITH NEGATION AND INTEnKOQATION" PRESENT. Est-ce que je ne me rcjouis pas, do f not rejoioa? ne te rejouis-tu pas, (lost thou not rejoice t ne se r^jouit-il pas, doe» he not rtjoicei etc. 142 XXXI. TRENTE ET UNIEME LEgON. COMPOUND OF THE PRESENT. Ne me suis-je pas rejoui, e, have I not rejoiced f ne t'es-tu pas rejoui, e 1 etc. ne s'est-il (-cUc) pas rejoui, e? etc. ne nous somnies-nous pas rcjouis, ies ? etc. Many verbs, neuter or passive in English, have in French the reflective forni. The principal are : — S'affliger, to be sorry. s'aperccvoir, to perceive. s'approclier, to come near. s'arreter, to stop. s'asseoir, to sit duion. 'se baisser, to stoop. EC coucher, to go to bed. 86 dcpecher, to make haste. s'ecrier, to exclaim, cry out. a'en aller, to go axvay. e'endormir, to fall asleep. e'enrhumer, to catch cold. 8*entretenir, to discourse with. s'etonner, to wonder. s'dvciller, to awake. Be fier, to trust. I to fancy, f to make haste. se figurer, s'imaginer, Be hater, Be depecher. Be lever, to rise, to get up. 8C marier, to marry. Be moquer, to mock, scoff. Be plaindre, to complain. Be proraecfcr, to UJce a walk, se repentir, to repent. Be reposer, to rest. Be soumettre, to submit. Be souvenir, to remember Be taire, to be silent. Be tromper, to be mistaheiu se vanter, to boast. Ex. — I rise, I get up, /e me leve. I have risen or got up, je me suis lev^. We have perceived, nous tious sommes aperpa, etc. Observe also these expressions : — How are you, comment vous portez-vous 1 I am well, je me parte bien. I am mistaken, je me trompe. I have been mistaken, je me suis tromp€. He is silent, il se tait. VOCABULARY, La conduite, the behavior. la foret, the forest. U boulet, the ball. te titre, the right. la Boheme, Bohemia. vaillamment, bravely. r fondre, to cast, . - •'^^ -' - ^ bien, well ; mieux, better. se venger de, to revenge on. Be conduirCf to behave. ^ li u '' REFLECTIVE VERBS. tard, late. se distingxier, to distinguish. le mal, the evil. en/ermer, to shut in. se rendre, to surrender. aauver, to save. se coucher, to go to bed. READING EXERCISE 31. Vous vous trompez, Monsieur. Je me suis tromp^ aussj. H y i (it is) tres-Iongtemps que nous lie "nous (each other) somraes vns. Le general Ostennann s^est distingud beaucoup a Faffaire (battle) de Culm. S'il ne s'^tait pas defendu si vaillamment, Tar- mde alliee aurait ^te enforme^e dans les montagnes de la Boheme, Dan^iine bataille ou les .boulets ennemis volaient (fleio) autour de lui, Napoleon s'ecria: Le boulet qui doit (is to) me t^er, n'est pas encore fondu (cast) . Pourquoi vous eteS*-vous leve si tard ? Je me suis levd k sept beures. Ne vous affligez pas tant, mes amis'; habituez-vous h. souflfrir' avec courage les maux 'de la vie. VoUs auriez et^ sauve, si vous vous etiez refugid au camp. THEME 31. 1. I rejoice greatly (heaucoup) to see you (de vous voir). 2. Charles has wounded himself with a penknife. 3. The enemies have surrendered. 4. A good Christian does not revenge himself on (de) his enemy. 5. The soldier has distinguished hunself ; he will be rewarded. 6. Get up I 7. I shall get up directly. 8. Has my brother got ug? 9. H^ (has) got up at six o'clock.] 10. Be not sorry, children, exclaimed he, we shall all be saved ! 11. You are mistaken. Sir. 12. Yes, it i§ true (vrai), I have been mista- ken. 13. Why do you rejoice at the (du) misfortune of others ? 14. When do you go to bed? 15. I go to bed at eleven o'clock; but yesterday I went (have gone) to bed at ten o'clQck. 16. Make '^ haste ! 17. Where is your mother? 18. She is not at home (a la maison) ; she is taking a walk. 19. I have taken a walk this morning. 20. When will you take a walk? 21. I shall take a walk this evening.. 22.*^ How are you to-day? 23. I am well, but my brother is not well. 24. I (have) sto'ffpcd at the gate (porte), 25. Rest a little, -^4 <50Die near the fire (du feu). 144 XXXI, TEKNTE ET DKIEMB LEgOK. OONYERSATION. Vons vons ^tcs troinp6, mou ami, n'est-ce pas ? Quand vous couchcrez-YOUs, mes enf ants ? A quelle heure yous €tes-YOUS couch ^ liicr ? EtYotrefi-ere? Monsieur Yotre pSre est-il d6j^ lev6? Oh ctes-vous done restSs si long- temps ? Ta soeur s'est-elle la^Se (washed) ? Qui s'est lav6 dans cette eau ? Pourquoi vous gtes-vous levCs si tard? Qui veut se promener avec moi ? Vous 6tes-Yous bien amus6 ? Je ne me suis pas tromp6. Nous nous coucherons tout de suite. Je me suis coucli6 ^ dix heures. Mon fr6re s'est coucliG d onze heures. Oui, il s'est lev6 aujourd'hui de bonne heure {early). Nous nous sommes ^garSs (went . astray) dans la foret. Je crois qu'elle ne s'est pas en- core lav6e. Moi. Nous ne nous sommes pas Sveil- 16s plus tot {earlifir). Ma soeur et moi. Oui, assez (pretty) bien. BEADING LESSON. LB SANSONNET. Levieux chasseur Maurice avait dans sa chambre un sansonnet qu'il avait 61ev6, et qui avait appris (learned) si articuler qualques mots. Quand il disait par exemple : " Sansonnet, o\X es-tu ? " I'oi- scau r^pondait tou jours : " Me voild ! " Le petit Charles, fils du voisin, aimait beaucoup I'oiseau et lui iaisait (jyaid) sou vent des visites. Un jour il vint voir le sansonnet pendant que le chassem 6tait absent; il s'empara bien vite de I'oi- Beau, le mit (put it) dans sa poche et voulait s'esquiver avec son larcin. Mais dans ce moment le chasseur entra chez Ijgj^^ II crut (thought) TMPESSONAL VERBS. 14S fkire plaiar an petit gaicpn en demandant (ty ashing) comme de coutume : ** Sansonnet, ou es-tu ? " — " Me voilk ! " cria de toutes ses forces (Aw might) I'oiseau qui ^ait cach4 dans la poche du petit garden. C'est ainsi que le petit voleur fiit trahi. Le sansonnet, the starling. vite, quick. fe mot, the word. la poche, the pocket. me voila, here I am. s^esquiver, to run away, U vint, he came. le larcin, the larceny. pendant que, whilst. de coutume, as he used to ^t s'emparer, to lay hold of trahir, to betray. N XXXII. TRBNTE-DEUXIEME LE9ON, IMPERSONAL VERBS. 1. Verbs which are always impersonal form their compound tenses by means of the auxiliary avoir. The principal are : Netger, to snow ; Pros, il neige, it snows. pleuvoir, to rain ; il pleut, it rains. greler, to hail ; i7 grele, it hails. tanner, to thunder ; t7 tonne, it thunders. /aire des Eclairs, to lighten ; il fait, des Eclairs, it lightens. geler, to frcei^e ; U gele, it freezes. d€geler, to thaw ; tV d^gele, it thaws. importer, to matter ; il imporie, it matters. Third singular negative is n*importe, no matter. 2 Other verbs may become impersonal. Ex. : J7 stiffit, it suffices. il convient, it is convcnienf. il semble, it seems. U arrive, it happens (takes itre). t2 v^a^mieux, it is better. il g'agit, it is the question, etc. U me tarde, I long. U rette^ there remains. 10 1 146 xxxii. tbente-deuxiMb LEgoir. MODELS OF CONJUGATION. 1, Neiger, to snow. INDICATIVE, , 8UBJTJNCa!rVE Present. Tl neige. Qu'il ndge. Imperfect, 77 neigeait. qu'il neigedt. Preterite. Tl neigea. Future. 77 neigtra. Comp. of Pres. 77 a nAg€. qu'il ait neig€. " " Imp. 77 avail neig^. qu'il cut neigf. " " Pret. 77 mt neig^. " " Fut. 77 aura neig€. Interrogatively: Neige-t-ilf neigeait-Uf Ort-Undgii etc CONDITIONAL. Pros. Uneigerait. Comp. E aurcUt neigf. PARTICIPLE. Ftes. Neigeant. Comp. Ayant neig€. 2. D y a, there is, there are. INFINITIVE MOOD. Y avoir, there to be. Ikdio. Present. II y a, there is, there are. Imperfect. 77 v avail, > ^, ■D \ -^ Tl . f there was, there were. Preterite. llyeut, ) Future. 77^ a\ira, there will be. Comp. of Pres. 77 y a eii, there has or have been. " Imp. 77 tl avail m, } , . , , .< T> * n . r there had been. " Pret. flyeuleu, ) COND. Present. 77 y aurait, there would be. Comp. 77 y aurait eu, there would have beon. Interrogatively : V a-t-il, is there ? are there ? Negatively : 77 n'y a pas, there is or are not. Negat. interrogat. : N'y a-t-il pas, is or are there not ? SUBJ. Present. Qu'il y ait, that there (may) be. Imperfect. Qu'il y eut, that there (might) be. Comp. of Pres. Qu'il y ait eu, that there (may) have been. " Imp. Qu'U yeuieu, that there (might) have been. IMPERSONAL VERBS. 147 Note 1. This verb in English is used in the plural, when followed by a plural substantive; in French, it remains always in the singrdar; as, There are birds which, etc. ; il y a des oiseanx qui, etc. Note 2. It often happens* that the verb il y a is rendered ago, these, or for these. Ex. : I saw him two months ago. Je I'ai vu d y a deux mois. • II y a hult jours que je suis malcuh. I have been ill these eight days. Ilest ia also used impersonally, particularly in poetry, in the senm of ily a. 3. // fait froid. Present, // fait froid, it is cold. Imperfect. // faisait froid, \ . r. •. /; .-. X- -1 (It was cold. Preterite. // Jit fruid, ) Future. // fern froid, it will be cold, etc. Comp. of Pres. // a fait froid, it has been cold, etc. Thus other expressions denoting the state of the weather : 77 fait beauy it is fine weather; d fait chaud, it is warm ; d fait jour, it is daylight, etc. The English " it is said " is rendered in French, on dit. 4. Ilfaut. INFTNITITE I Falloir, to be needful, necessary. Indio. Present. // faut, it is necessary. Imperfect. 11 falldit, ) .. ^^„„ „„««eoo«r _ ' ,, .' yii was necessary. Preterite. II fa/lat, ) Future. 77 faudra, it will be necessary. Comp. of Present. 77 a fallu, it has been necessary. " " Imperfect. 7/ avait fdlu. > j^ ,^^^j ,^^^^ necessary. " " Preterite. 11 eut fallu, i '* " Future. 77 aura fallu', it will have been necessary. COND Present. 11 fnut^ait, it would be necessary, ( . . . ought to). Comp. // aurait fallu, it would have been necessary. INTEKROQATIVELY. Faut-Uf fallait-il? fallut'U? a-t-d fallu ? (is it necessary ? was it necessa- ry 1 has it been necessary ? ) ScBJ. Present. Qu'd faiVr, that it (may) be necessary. Imperfect. Qu'd fall if, that \t (might) be necessary. Comp. of Present. Qu'd aitfdlu, that it (may) have been necessajy. " " Imperfect. Qu'il eitt fallu, that it (might) have been necessary. 148 XXXII. TRENTE-DEUXIEME LEgON. PARTICIPLE. Present, wanting. Compound. Ayant faUu. Eeji. 1. The Tcrb falloir is absolutely, impeisonal throughout all its tenses. When its subject is a p(^onal pronoun, as : / must, you must, etc., we may add, for the first person me, for the second te, for the third /«?, in the plural nous, vous, leur. More frequently, however, que with the Sub- (imotive mood is prefcn*ed. Ex. : — I must read : il mefaut lire, or {/ faut queje Use. thou must read : il te faut lire, or il faut que tu Uses. he must read : ] { il faut qu'il Use. she must read : ) '^ ^"'>"^ ^^''' «^ | il faut qu'elle Use. we must read : il nous faut lire, or il faut que nous lisions. you must read : il vous faut lire, or ilfaut que vous lisiez. they must read ■ U leur faut lire, or il faut qu'ils Usent. I have been obliged to read : il m'a fallu lire, etc. 2. When the subject is a noun, que with the Subjunctive mood must be ased. It must further be o])ScrA-cd that, when the verb falloir is used in the Present or Future tense, the following verb must be put in the Present of the Subjunctive ; but when it is in the Imperfect, Preterite or Conditional, the verb following it must be rendered by the Imperfect of the Subjunctive. Ex.: — The boy must work, il faut que le gargon travaille. The boy will be obliged to work. II faudra que le gargon travaille. The soldiers were obliged to retire. 77 fallait or il fallut que les soldats se rettrassent. 3. When the verb il faut is followed immediately by a noun substantive, it signifies to want ; here also one of the pronouns me, te, lui, nous, vou&, leur, according to the person, must be inserted. Ex. : — I want (must have) a hat, il me faut un chapeau. lie wants some money, il lui faut de I'argent. We want some bread, il nou^s faut du pain. Did you want some books, vous fcUait-il des tivres f VOCABULARY. Le cmipte, the account, bill la chaise, the chair. la rethrigote, the coat. cesser, to leave off, to ceaso k depart, the departure. quitter, to leave. V ^ IMPEESONAL VERBS. 149 la rue, the street. dessiner, to draw. le sort, (the) fato. partir, to set out, depart. la chambre, the room. honnete, hoQcst. manquer, to be wanting. m^conient, e, discontented. gouvemer, to govern. sageinent, adv. wisely. READING EXERCISE 82. II plent. Je crois qu'il pleuvra demain. J'entcnds tonner. H raut mieux (it is better) qu'il pleuvo. II a neIg(S toute la nuit. U y a des horames qui sonfc toujours m^contents. II fait chaud j II. faisait trop chaud dans votre chambre. II n'y avait ni horames, ni ferames, ni enfants; II faut partir. II vous faut partir. II fallait venir plus tot (earlier). No faudj:a-l>il pas lui pardonner ? II faut que Charles reste h. la maison. II fallut que Charles rest^t k la maison. II me fallut lui pardonner. H y aura cette ann^e beaucoup de cerises. II faut que les enfants obi^issent h I'instant (instantly) . II y a eu de (at) tout temps des flatteurs. H a fallu qu'elle payat son compte. II y a un Dieu qui -gouverne tout sagement. Qu'est-ce qu'il vous faut ? II me faut une autre cham- bre. THEME 82. ^ 1. Does it snow? 2. No, it does not snow, it rains. 3. It is cold to-day. 4. I shall not leave the room. 6. Yesterday it was (has been) ver;^ cold, and it (has) srtowcd a great deal (beatccoup). 6. It thunders and lightens. 7. TIiotc are too many chairs in this room. 8.. There was nfuch wine on the table. 9. Is there money in the pur^? 10. There are six francs (francs) in it. 11 There will be a great many nuts this yeai*. 12. There are streets ha London, which are very long. 13. It is necessary to begin. 14. It was necessary to set out. / 15. You must begin. 10. Ho must read. 17. We were obliged to set out. 18. He has been obliged to speak. 19. The boy must work. 20. The gu:ls must draw. 21. My father has been obliged to go to Paris. 22. Your uncle will be obliged to leave London. 23. The soldiers were obliged to leave the town. 24. I want a good pen. 25. Do you want an- 150 XXXII. TRENTE-DEUXifiME LEgON. other room? 26. Yes, I want a larger room. 27- What do yon want? 28. I want or I must have {Ionsieur II. est-il fach^ ? Pourquoi estril fuche V Comment fjiut-il agir ? (^IIow must people act?) Charles, tu es malade ; qu'as-tu ? Vous ^tes probablement le frere de Monsieur Kichard ? n parle tres-eloquemnaenl et tres-franchement. D m'ecrit {writes) rareraenl Ileureusement jc sais (know) par un de ses amis qu'il se porte bien. n a probablement perdu unt- parti e de sa fortune. Oui, il est extrempment fuch^. II est fTich^ centre son fils qui a ^te mochant. n faut toujours agir prudem ment et honnet'^ment. J'ai mal a la tete {head-ache) ; mais heureu.sement ce n'est pas grand'choee {conse- quence) . Non, Madame, mais ju sois son cousin. ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF TIME. 166 Comment ce g(5n^ral a-t-il agi en- II a agi tres-g(5n^reusement. vers ses ennemis ? Pourquoi marchez-vous si lente-, J'ai mal au pi6d, ment? Cette loi eslrelle observee V Ella est ponctuellement obser- vee de tout le ^onde. V KXXIV. TRENTE-QUATRIEME LE9ON ADVERBS OF PLACE AND OF yiME. 1. The principal adverbs of place are : Oh, where ? whither ? par oiu, which wny ? ici, here, d'ici, hence, /a, there, de la, thence. Vi-^Kts, llU' t TJ I JUlUW, yuilfl cr. y, there, therein. par ici, this way. par la, that way. par-ci, pa r-la, hei'e and th ere. ~fa el la, to anl^ ^]im nidi pres, au})ris, near. proche, close by. alentour, round, about. /mill 11^, ||\i ijjiiihiimi " "nulle part, nowhere. justpt'll, as far as. jus(pt'ou, how far? loinjJaXf SMt oi Fr ' are: un j'ot/r, one day. autrefois, jadis, formerly. auparavant, previously, beforo, alors, puis, then. aprh», after, afterwards. 156 XXXIV. TRENTE-QTTATRlfiME LEgO^ aprha^emain, the day after to-mor- jusqu'a, until. row. ensuite, afterwards. enjiri, at last, at lcnp:th. a present, \ ,., 7 .... . > now, at present. tot, soon, plus tot, sooner. maintenant, ) bientot, soon, trop tot, too soon. qnehfOFfois, someumes "Taiitot, by and bj. souvent, often. aussitot, directly. longteinps, long. tare/, late. toujours, always. d'abord, at first. deniih iiUimt ■**"""""' {he'^forth. '^^"^'•''' lately, of late. dor€navant, ) deja, already. des-lors, from then. em>re^jiiill,..yot^ depuis, since. jamais, everj^ ne jamais, never JFAen and /« toAic/i are rendered by ou, after a noun signifying time or place. PLACE OP ADVERBS. Rem. 1. In the simple tenses, the adverb is generally placed immediately sifter the verb which it modifies : She always cries, die pleure toujours. I often take a walk with my friend. Je me promene souvent avec nion ami. Rem. 2. When the verb is in a compound tense, the adverb generally comes between the auxiliary and the participle ; as, Je I'ai toujavcTS respects, I have always esteemed him. Je me suis souvent promen€ avec mon maiti'e. I have often taken a walk'with my master. N. B. — IJier, avant-hier, aujourd'hui, demain, apres-deinain, tantdt, t6t, and uird, always follow the participle, unless placed before the auxiliary. VOCABULARY. Le temps, the weather. le hrou'dlard, the fog, wS&t, le village, the village. I'ouvrage, m. the work. la grammaire, the grammar. diner, to dine. content, satisfied. venir, to come. le chevf,in de fer, the railroad. laisser, to leave. ^ READING EXERCISE 34. Le temps estbiendoux aujourd'hiii. Mon cousiu est enfin arriv^ L'autre jour je me suis ^gar6 dans la foret. Travaillez d'ubord ei ADTEEBS Ot PLACE AND OP TIME. 157 ensuite joucz. Avez-vous jamais vu un enfant comme celui-lk ? En effet, iJ est extremement gros. Le brouillard aura bientot dispani. D'ou vonez-vous niaintcnant, et oil avez-vous ete hior ? Voyez-voug CO village LVbas ? Eh bien (well) , j'y ai ete bier et aujourd'huL J'y vais quelquefois. M'avez-vous apporte la grammaire dout jfl vous aj parle ? Voulez-vous venir diner avec nous demain "i De- main jc ne serai pas iei, mais apres-demain ou plus tard. Enfir. men ouvra^e est fini. / THEME 34. 1. Where is my brother? 2. He is not here ; he is elsewhere, he is perhaps yonder. 3. I will go (^firai) that way. 4. Carry all that up stairs. 5. How far did you go yesterday? 6. I went as far as London. 7. I shall go nowhere to-day. 8. That village is not far ; do you see (voyez-vous) it yonder ? 9. Where is my srammar? 10. I have left it somewhere. 11. Is Edward here? 12. No; he is below. 13. My friend will not stay here long. 14. I saw (have seen) your sister yesterday at the play (aw spectacle) . 15. He will always be satisfied. 16. Come back (^revenez) soon. 17. Did you know [have you known (conim)'\ him .formerly ? 18. Yes, I have known him long. 10. Whence does the letter come? 20. It comes firom America. 21. Your, dog is out of doors. 22. How is {se porte) your aunt to-day ? 23. She is better to-day than [she was] yesterday. 24. I hope you will dine with us to-morrow. 25. I shall go soon into the country (a la campagne'). 26. We expected him the day before yesterday. 27. Formerly there were no railroads. 28. Henceforth I shall be very diligent. L snaji oe ve ry oi Til U 158 XXXV. TEENTE'CINQUlfiME LEgON. KXXy . TRENTE-CINQUIEME LE9ON ADVERBS OF NUMBER, OF QUANTITY, NEGATION, ETC. The adverbs of 9nmber are : OF Premierement, firstly. deuxiemement, \ ,, (■ secondly. secondemeM, > troisiemement, thirdly. qiiatriemeinent, fourthly. cinquiemement, fifthly. The piincipal adverbs of quantity and comparison are sixiemement, sixth'.y, etc. combien ^e fois, how often ? une fois, once. deux fois, twice. trois fois, three times, etc about. at most. Comment, how"? combien, how much ? how many? beaucoup, much, many. bien (with du, de I', des following) a great deal or many. trop, too much, too many. tant, so much, so 'many. assez,* enough, pretty. peu, little, un peu, a little. ne — giiere, hardly. bien, \ tres, > very. fort,) ' . plus, more. davantage, still mor^ mmn;, less. tout, tout a fait, The adverbs of aflfirmation and negation are : Out, yes. «', yes. ne — pflw, not. certes, certainly. ne — plus, no more. peut-etre, perhaps. non ptus, nor — either. * Assez precedes in Frenob the noon or adjective It limits. Ex. : Assec de vln asaez bon. Bee p. 32. presqxie, almost. environ, a pen pres, si, so. ainsi, thus. aussi, as. €gcdement, likewise.' autnnt,'SiS much, as many. d'autant plus, so much the moie plutot, rather. surtout, above all. * { au plus, \ tout^ au plus, du mains, au moins, at Iea£t. seulement, } . only. quite, wholly, entirely. ne — que meme, even. pas meme, pas seulement, not even. ADVERBS OP NUMBER, OP QUANTITT, ETC. 159 certainement, I ^ . . , ne — point, not (at all). ^ ' ( certainly, to be sure. » . . . cusur^ment, » pas du tout, ( .. . , ( not at all. non, no. p juoique (with the Sabj.), ihongh. cq^eruLint, f ^^owever. 1. Among these simple conjunctions, only one governs the Sul> junctivc mood, viz. : quoique, though or although. Ex. : qtmque je 8ois mdlade, though I am ill. For the Subjunctive after qtie, see P. II. L. 19. 2. Si denotes a condition or supposition : «'*7 vient, if he comes ; «' vous voulez, if you like. When si is followed by an Imperfect or Pluperfect, those tenses are always in the Indicative mood. (See P. n. L. 19.) If I had, si f avals ; If I were, si f^ais / If I had seen him, si je Vavais vu. NoTB. The t in n is cut off before U and tZs, but nowhere else, as : t^H avail, but si die avait^ etc. 3. The conjunction ni — ni requires ne before its verb, and the noun which follows it takes no article, if used in the partitive sense, as: — Je n*ai ni pire ni mhe, I have neither father nor mother. 4. The conjunction que serves to connect two ideas so as to form of the two one sentence, as : Je crois que vous avez raison, I believe you are right. In English the conjunction that is almost always understood, nrhereu Ttie is not only always expressed in French, but repeated before each mem- ber of the proposition, as : — Je crois que vous avez raison et que vous r€ussirez. I think you are right and that you will succeed. 5. ^Vhen a conjunction governs several verbs, it is placed before the first verb only, and qiie is used before the other verbs. Ex. : As he is diligent and takes pains, comme il est ajyplique et quHl prend de la peine. 164 XXXVI. THENTE-SIXIEME LEgON. 6. Done is often used like the English auxiliary cfo, to urge or incite. Ex., Taisez^vous done, do be silent. It is also used interrogatively : Cert done votes qui avez fait celaf VOCABULARY. Piter, to bend. le bien, the good. lever, to lift up. phis — plus, the more — ihe more. raoile, f. the star. plus — mains, the more — the leas. ^mV, e, exhausted. mains — ma/ns, the less — the less. ayare, avaricious. soit — swf , be it -^ or. savant, learned. tantot — tantdt, sometimes — some- rompre, to break. times, now — then. habiter, to inhabit. ni — nan plus, nor — either. READIN6 EXERCISE 36. L'ambition et I'avarice sont deux grandes sources du malheur hu- main. Les discours irapies (impious') gfitent k la fois Tesprit et le coeur. Cette eau est froide comme de la glace. Votre tableau est pr^cieux, mais il ne me plait (please) pas. II arriva comme je sortais. Elle n'est ni laide ni belle. Vous vous arausez, et cepen- dant le temps fiiit (flies). Cet homme est tres-fort, et pourtant il ne peut pas lever ce fardeau (weight). Ou vous me paierez, ou vous irez en prison. Donnez-moi de I'eau, s'il vous plait. Martin est encore bien jeune, n^anmoins il est fort sage. Bienheureux sont coux qui airaent la paix, car ils seront appeles les enfants de Dieu. Vous ne le savez pas ? Ni moi non plus. Tantdt il veut une chose, tantot il en veut une autre. THEME 30. 1. Gold and silver are metals. 2. Silver is less useful than iron. 3- Mr. A. is very inconsistent (inconsequent) ; he is sometimes of one opinion (avis, m.) and sometimes of another. 4. I like you, as I know (sais) that you are always attentive. 5. This man is es- teemed by everybody, even by his enemies. 6. I am very glad to see that you do pot love flattery. 7. Some one has done it, either you or your brother. 8. The more you will work, the more you will gain. 9. This horse may be very strong, nevertiheless it does not ^ CONJUNCTIONS. 105 pleafie me 10. The longer the days (are) (constr. the more the d. are long), the shorter (are) the nights. 11. Though he said (dtt) (that) he had no appetite, yet he ate all the meat and bread. 12. Nobody knows whether the stars are inhabited or not. 1 13. The reed bends, but does not break. 14. Do aot bend the bow too much, jotherwise it will break. 15. The more I sang, the less em- barrassed I was. 16. If you do (fakes) it, you will be punished. 17. He appeared (pamissaiC) very modest, although he was vfery learned. 18. In order to be learned, you must study much. 19. I punish him as he deserves (>t)- 20. You must stay at home, since you are not quite well. ' 21. When he had done speaking (Jini de parler), he was quite exhausted. 22. If I had had faith- ful friends, I should not be so unhappy. 23. You will be happy, if you do your duty (devoir). 24. I was sleeping when your se^ vant entered (enira). CQNVEESATIOJf. X vous heureux, men ami ? Je le serais, si j'avais de livres. Si ce n'est que cela, je peux Je vou en serais tr^s-obligd. vous en douner. En voulez- vous? Quelles sont les deux grandes L'ambition et ravarice. sources du malheur dea hommes ? Que faitK)n souvent, quand on On fait souvent des sottises. est jeune ? Que dit J^sus-Christ de ceux II dit qu'ils seront appel^s **en qui aiment la paix ? fants de Dieu." Que veut cet enfant ? E vcut tantot ceci, tantot cela. Comment trouvez-vous cette Elle n'est ni belle ni laide. demoiselle ? Ne pouve2-vous pas lever cette Je ne peux pas la lever, quoique piexre ? je sols tres-fort. ■\ J 166 XXXVI. TRENTE-SIXIEME LE^ON. Comment Dieu traite-t-il les H les traite comme un pere traite hommes ? ses enfants. Quelle propridt^ a le roseau? H (se) plie et ne rompt pas. Quand faut-il forger le fer ? Quand 11 est cbaud. READING LESSON. LAFITTB. Lorsque Jacques Lafitte vint (came) k Paris, il se pr^senta chez M. Perregaux dans I'esperance d'obtenir une place ; mais le banqriier lui annon^a qu'il ^tait dans rimpossibilit^ de satisfaire k sa demande, puisque les bureaux etaient au complet. Lafitte, d^courage par ce refus, s'eloignait tristement, lorsqu'en traversant la cour de T hotel, il apcr9ut k terre une ^pingle ; il la rar massa et la piqua sur sa manche. M. Perregaux ayant vu Taction du jeune solliciteur, en fut frapp4 {struck) , et pensa qu'il devait etre dou^ d'un esprit d'ordre et d'^conomie. II le fit rappeler et lui dit qu'il pouvait compter sur une place dans sa maison. En effet, pen de jours apres, le jeune Bayonnais entra chez le riche banquier, et chacun salt que, plus tard, il est devenu un homme riche et c^le- bre. Ves.pcrance, hope. ramasser, to pick up. le bureau, the office. la manche, the sleeve. s'f.Iolgner, to retire. doue, endowed. une cpingle, a pin. en effet, indeed. i^ii. COKJUNCTTTK PHRASES. 167 XXYII. TRENTE-SEPTIEME LEQON. CONJUNCTIVE PITRASES. of these are adverbs or yrne require tbe following verb the Jnjinilive, and others again 1. Conjunctive phrases with Ou bien, or, else. ni — non plus, neither, nor either. au contraire, on the contrary. non texdeinent — mai* encore^ not only — but also. de plus, moreover. autant que, as much aa. apres que, after, after that. qxiaixd meme, although. « toutefois, if however. c'est-h-dire, namely ^est que, parce que tandis qtie, whereas. pendant que, while, whilst tant qtije, as long as. propositions united with que or dc. in the Indicative nioodf otherg in in the Subjunctive. the Indicative : — as soon as. 1 as. J because. Aussi bien que, as well aussitot que^ ) des que, ) de mime que. ainsi que, au teste, ) rfu r«f«, r °^«^"- de la, hence it follows. h peine — que, scarcely — aa. c'est jxmrquoi, therefore. par consequent, consequently. comme si, as if. de mime, thus, in the same waj. tans cela, otherwise, elsfli depuis que, since. tout — que, however 2. With the Infinitive mood: AJln de, in order to, to. a moins de, unless. am»i c/«, before. , au Ueu de, insteai^ of. 3. With the Subjunctive mood: — ^ \ depeurde, >. . . decraintede,\^'''^^''^' loin de, far from. ptutot que de, rather thaiL that, in order that AJin que ' pour que [avant que, before. h moins que, t > , r unless, till. que non que, not that. nonobstant que, notwithstanding, that. pour peu que, however little. pourvu que, provided (that). lose marked wUb a f require ne before the following verb. l68 XXXVII. TBENTE-SEPTlfiME htqO^. Hen que, ") though, quelque — que, however — thoTigh. quoique, > althongh. sans que, without that. jusqu'a ce que, till/untU. si ce n'est qxie, unless, till. toin gue, ias irom. «oz7 (j-tic, whether — or. 4. Besides the above-mentioned conjunctions, there are other con junctive expressions (locutions conjonctives), which have been borrowed from other classes of words, and to which the conjiinctici] que is added. Such are : A condition que, on condition that de peur que,* t ) ^^^^^ de crainte que,*^ ) * de maniere que, ) ^ ^, ^ ^ ^ SO as to, so that de or en sorie que, ) au cos que, in case that.* .... suppose que, supposing that.* .... mJcdgr€ que, for all that, notwithstanding.* txmtes les fois que, as often as. peut-etre que, perhaps that attendu que, considering that a ce que, according as, as far as, etc. HT. B. — Those marked with an * govern the subjunctive, VOCABULARY. La suite, the consequence. pret, ready. la machine a vapeur, the engine. la princesse, the princesb la mimoire, the memory. la guerre, war. occuper, to occupy. amhitieux, ambitious. mettre, to put, place. V€ducation, f. education. preserver, to preserve. regarder, to look at. READING EXERCISE 37. Aussitot que la machine h vapenr fut construite (built), elle fof noise en mouvement (put in motion), pour Fessayer. Quelque grande que soit cette fante, 11 faut cependant la pardonner. Des qu'il me vit (saw) il courut (ran) k raoi. Pendant que nous etions occup^s k faire notre tache, on cria au feu (fire) I ■ La m<^moire de Henri IV. sera toujours chere aux Fran9ais parce qu'il mettait sa gloire k les rendre beurpn-? Que le ciel vous preserve d'un pare'l ■ r^ r CONJUNCTIVE PHRASE^. 169 (jucK) malheur ! Le malado ne boit (drinks) ni ne mange. Tan? que ma mfcre sera k la campagne, je resterai avec elle. Tandis qm nous parlons, le temps fuit. Depuis que j'ai perdu mon pere, toui me manque. THEME 37. 1. I am not sony, on the contrary, I am very glad (hien ahe) to {de) have done it. * 2. I will play, as soon as I (shall) have finished my exercise. 3. There wQl always be wars among men, as long as they are ambitious. 4. After (that) you were gone (sorti), I began writing (a ecrire). 5, As soon as my education is finished, I shall go to, Italy. 6. In order to learn well, we must (on doit) study with a great' deal of attention. 7. In order to have friends, we must be honest. 8. It will_ be impossible to learn French, unless vou be (Inf.) diligent. 9. Let us pray, before we begin {Inf)mlO. Bather than study, he loses his time. I 11. Far from blaming you, I praised you. 12. Come here, that I may speak .to you. 13. Send me your book, {in order) that I may read it. 14. I will be ready before they come. 15. Unless you accom- pany me, I will not take a walk. 16. Cato killed himself, lest he shouM fall into (entre) the hands of Caesar. VlT. Tliough that young man is not very diligent, [yet] he improves. 18. Before you begin an action, consider well its consequences^ 19. You will uever be respected unless you fulfil yqur duties: - 20. He viVA givij it to you, on condition that you give it back to him. 4t.>. They Ix-at him so that they almost killed him. -^ 170 XXXVIII. TRENTE-HUITIEME LEgON. XXXVIII. TRENTE-HUITlfeME LE90N. IRREGULAR VERBS. — FIRST CLASS. Those verbs are commonly called irregular which deviate from the thru regular conjugations. This deviation is of three kinds. 1. Such verbs as take the termination i»rresponding to the ending of their Infinitive mood, but change their root. Ex. : Of the verb cmidre, CO sew, the radical is cond-, this final d is,, in some persons and tenses, changed into s, for instance in the plural : nous coiis-ons, we sew. These are the least difficult, and are therefore put in the first class. 2. Verbs which preserve their radical syllable throughout unchanged, but take flexions that do not accord with the ending of their Infinitive' For instance, the verb cour-ir, to run, ending in -ir, ought to take the flex- ions of the second conjugation (Jinir). But this is not the case; it takes the flexions of the third conjugation (vendre) ; the Present is not je courts, tu couris, etc., but je cours, tu cours, etc. ; P. p. couru like vendu. Verbs of this kind we assign to the second class. 3. A certain n amber of verbs offer both these anomalies at the same time ; i. e. they undergo some changes in their root, and are conjugated with other flexions than those corresponding with the ending of their Infin- itive. For instance, the verb mourir, to die, ought, according to its Infini- tive termination, -ir, to take the flexions of Jinir. This is not the case; it is, in most tenses, conjugated like vendre; and, besides, its root mour- is, in certain tenses and persons, changed into meur-, as : Pres. je meurs, tu meurs, etc. Such verbs, among which are included those ending in -oir, consti- tute the third class. To facilitate the study of the irregular verbs, it is essential to dis- tinguish the primitive tenses from the derived ones. The latter have'^ generally a regular inflexion, whereas the former alone are subject to IfTegularity. As already mentioned, the primitive tenses are: 1. The Infinitive mood, yf^^^^ • ^- ^^-'*^ i^'^ - . 2. The Participle present, tf^i^{ ^^ ^ ^ XT^^i f 3. The Participle past. aj£ ifJ-'-^Lft . ^w^' 4. The Present of the Indicative mood, ^'(U . - J ,. ne Preterite. Xyj.^. . ., ^^^^^ IRREGULAR VERBS. 171 From these the other tenses and moods are derived, as it is explained, L XX. The derivative tenses are formed regularly, and therefore seldoiD mentioned in the following list. To aid the pupil's memory, the following hints will prove useful : 1. The Present of the Subjunctive may b*^ found by dropping the final nt of the third person plural Indicative, as : from Us icrivent — qut j'€cnvf from Us prennent — que je }rrenne; from Us Ix.went — que je boive. 2. The plural of the Present Indicative, the Participle Present and tht Imperfect of the Indicative have the same radical, as : notis mourons, we die; P. pr. mourartt; Imperf. je moumis; — nous craignons ; P. pr. craignant; Impcrf. ^e craignais; — nous allons ; P. pr. allant; Imperf. fallais, etc. 3. The Future and Conditional are formed from the Infinitive; the fol lowing, however, have an irregular formation, — je courrai (instead of eourirai), je mourrai, je verrai, j'enverrai, j'acquerrai, je pounai, je saurai, je voudrai, U faudra, je viendrai, je tiendrxi, je ferai, and j'irai. 4. When the Participle past ends with the sound of i (i, is, it,) the Pre- terite generally ends in is. Ex. : Part. p. sorti, gone out; Pret. je sortis; — Part. p. dit, said ; Pret. Jc dis; — Part. p. pris, taken ; Pret.y« pris, etc. 5. But when the Participle past ends in u, the Preterite usually ends in us. Ex. : P. p. cru, believed ; Pret.jc crus; P. p, lu, read; Pret. je lus; — P. p. connu, known ; Pret. je connus, etc. A LIST OF ALL THE IRREGULAR VERBS ACCORD ING TO THE THREE CLASSES OF IRREGULARITY. FIRST CLASS. Containing the verbs in -re which take the terminations of the third conjugation, but whose radical is somewhat changed. o. (1 — 7. Insertion of an s.) 1. Lu^g, to shine. Part. pres. luisant. Part, poit, \Mi. Pres. Je luis, tu luis, il luit, nous luisons, Voua luisez, ils luisent Suhj. Pres. Que je lui^e. Imperj. Je luisais. Pret. wanting. Fui. Je luirai. Conjugate in the same manner : Rduire, to glitter. 2. Suffire, to suffice. P. pr. suffisant. P. p. suffi, Pres. Je mi^s, tu suffis, il suffit, nous suffi^ons, etc. t 172 XXXVm. TEENTB-HUITI^ME LE^ON. Subj. Pros. Que je suffice. Tfnperf. Je suffi«ais.^ Pret. Je suffis, tu suffis, il suffit, nous suflfimes, etc. FuL Je suflSbrai. In the same manner : Confire^ to presence, to pickle ; and circonctre^ to ■'ircumcise, except in the Pan. past. Tlie Participle of tlie former is con% jf tht> latter circoncis. 3. Nuire, to hurt.. P. pr. nuisant. P. p. nm. Pres. Je uuis, tu nuis, il nuit, nousnui^ons, vous nubez, ils nui sent. Sulj. Pres. Que je nuise. Iniperf. Je nuisais. tC jSh Pret. Je nuisis. Fut. Je nuii-ai. ^.ifhJ^^' ^*'**^^' ^^ ^o^» ^ ^^^® (bread). P. pr. cuisanfc. P^ p. - — ISf^t. "^ Pres. Je cuis, tu cuis, il cuit, nous cuisons, etc. .^^^ Pret. Je cuisis. Fut. Je cuirai. n , / / •< • t Thus also : Recuire, to boil once more. 57 Conduire, to conduct, to lead. Se conduire, to behave. P. pr. conduisant. P. p. conduit Pres. Je conduis, tu conduis, il conduit, nous condui«ons, etc. Pret. Je conduisis. Fut. Je conduirai. Thus : Reconduire, to reconduct, to see home ; d^didre, to deduct ; enduire. to plaster; indnire, to lead into; in trooMi re, to introduce; pr^duire, to pro- duce; reprodiiire, to produce again frMuire, to reduce; s€duire, to seduce j iraduire, to translate. 6. Ins truJTCf^ . to instrect. P. pr. instruisant. P. p. instruii. Pres, J'instruis, tu instruis, il instruit, nous instruisons, vous in- "truisez, ils instruisent. Pret. J'instmisis. Fut. J'instruirai. » In the same njanncr : Consiruire, to build ; d^ruire, to destroy. 7. Dire, to ^ay, to tell. P. pr. di^ant. P. p. di^ Pres. Je dis, tU dis, il dit, nous disons, vous dites, ils disent. Subj. Pres: Que je disc. Pret. Je dis, tu dis, il dit, nous dimes, vous dltes, ils dirent Imperf. Subj. Que je disse. FtJft. Je djxai . Imper. Dis, dwons, iiif.e» X IBREGULAR VERBS. 173 Conjugate in the same manner : redire, to say again, to object. A8 for the oth>ir compounds of dire, viz. : Contrcdire, to contradict ; d^ dircy to unsay ; and se d^dire, to retract ; interdire/^ forbid ; m€dire, to slan- der ; and pr€dire, to foretoll, they do not form their second person plural of the Present Indicative with the termination -tes, but -sez, as : vous contrB' disez, vous in€disez, vous interdisez, etc. — Maudire, to curse, takes s$ in the fol- lowing forms : Pros. plur. nous maudissons, vous maudissez, ils maudis9^A Part, pr* maudissant. Imperf. je maudissais. VOCABULARY. i Le soleil, the snn. modeme, modem. | \ un rayon, a ray. la peche, the peach. ( \Pespoir, m. hope. la v€rit€, the truth. V J!a ^^ 29. Prendre, to take. P. pr. prewant. P. p. pm. * For tile pronimciatioii of faisara and its deziyfttires see p. IB. fREEGULAB VERBS. 181 Pres. Je prends, tn prends, il prend, nous prenons, vons prenei, [Is prennent. Pres. Subj. Que je prewwe, que tu prennes, qu'il pre7ine, que nous prewions, que vQus prewiez, qu'ils pre»»ent hnperf. Je prenais. Pret. Je pris, tu pris, il prit, nous primes, vous prites, ils pri- rcnt. Imperf. Subj. Que je prisse. Fut. Je prondrai Imper. Prends, prewons, prenez. Conjugate in the same manner the compounds of prendre: Apprendre, to learn ; d^sapprendre, to unlearn ; rapprendre, to learn over again ; compren- dre, to undersland ; entreprendre, to undertake ; m(f]>rendre, to mistake ; re- prendre, to take again, to reply, to chide; surprendre, to surprise. 30. NcStre* to bo bom. f. pr. nmsskni. \ P. p. ne. ^Pres. Je nais, tu nais, il nait, nous naissous, vous nais«ez, ila Qai<«ent. Imperf: Je nais«ais. ^ Pret. Je naquis (I was bom), tu naquis^ il naquit, nous naqut- mes, vous naquites, ils naquirent. i. Fvi. Je naitrai, tu naitras, etc.^ X rw^JJl/ \>JL \r4'VV^ Thus also : Renaitre, to be bom again. Remark. When the person used as subject of the verb is living, the present instead of the past of the auxiliary is used with the past participle. Ex. : Mon pere est n€ en Anglet&re, My father (still living) was bom in England. 31. VivrCy to live. P. pr. vivant. P. p. vecu. Pres. Je vis, tu vis, il vit, nous vivons, vous vivez, ils vivent. Subj. Que je vive ; /lence the expressions : Vive ! pi. vivent ! lortrj live / ^ Imper. Vis, vivons, vivez. Imperf. Je vivais. Pret. Je vectis, tu vecus, il vecut, nous vecum^s, etc. FtU. Je vivrai. Thus also : Survivre (o qn.), to survive; revivre, to live again. •■ Verbs marked tTms •take itre for an aaxUiary, mstead of cmoir. 182 XLI. QUARANTE ET UNIEME LEgON. VOCABULARY. Vapixmidi, f. the afternoon. une ligne, a line. le ruhan, the ribbon. un comptignoti de voyage, a feDow une fois, once. traveller. paten, pa|2:an» la decision, the decision. d6sormais, henceforward. I'abondance, f. abundance ob^issant, obedient THEME 41. '' 1, What are you doing there V 2. I am writing my exoroise 3. Have you written it? 4, Yes, I have written it. 5. Charles will write it this afternoon. 6. These pupils make a great many mistakes in their exercises. 7. Put this book on the table. 8. Where have you put your penknife V 9. I have put it in my drawer {firoir, m.). 10. Did your father permit you to go to the theatre? 11. Yes, he has allowed it. 12. He allows me to go there (d'y aller) once a {par) week. 13. The servant promised hence- forward to be faithful and obedient. 14. All the children began to cry. 15. I take medicine. 16. He takes coffee. 17. We take tea. 18. The children take milk. 19. I took a pen and wrote a few lines to ray father. 20. Who has taken ray pencil? 21. 1 have not tiiken it. 22. Tiike mine. 23. Do not take this chau:; it is broken (cassee). 24. Do 3'ou understand what I say? 25. I understand every word. 26. I should undeitake that journey, if I had a fellow-traveller. 27. We submit ourselves to your decision. 28. Formerly we lived in the country, but for {depuis) severaJ years we have lived {Pres. tense) in Geneva (^Geneve). 29. Many rich people live in abundance. / mnEGULAR VEEBS. 183 XLII. QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LE5ON IRREGULAR VERBS. — SECOND CLASS. (32 — 41. Verbs ending in ir, having the flexions of the Third Conjugation.) 32. Fuir, to shun, to flee. P. pr. fuyant. P. p. fai. Pres. Je fuLs, tu fuis, il fuit, nous fuyons, vous fuyez, ils fuiont Imperf. Je fuyais. Pret. Je fuis. Fut. Je fiiirai. Conjugate in the same manner : S^enfuir, to run away. Pres. Je m'et^^ /uis. Comp. of the Pres. Je me suis enfui, I have run away. 33. Vetir, to clothe. P. pr. vetant. P. p. wetu. Pres. Je vets, tu vets, il vet, nous vetons, etc. Pret. Je vetis. Fut. Je vetirai. Thus also : D€vitir, to divest ; revetir, to invest. 34. Servir (qn.), to serve, to help. P. pr. servant. P, p. scnri. Pre*. Je scrs, tu sers, il sert, nous servons, vous servez, ils ser- vent Subj. Que je serve. Pret. Jo servis. Fut. Je servirai. Thus also : Desservir, to clear the table ; se servir de, to make n«e of, to use. 35. Dormir, to sleep. P. pr dormant. P. p. dormi. Pres. Je dors, tu dors, il dort,. nous dormous, vous dormez, '{\b domient. Subj. Que je dorme. Pret. Jo dormis, etc., like servir » Thus : Endormir, to lull asleep ; s*er.dormir, to fall asleep ; se rendormlr, to fall asleep again. 36. Partir, to set out, to leave P. pr. partant. P. p. parti, Pres. Je pars, tu pars, il part, nou8 partons, etc., like servir. Thus: Repartir, to set pff again, to reply. Not to be confounded wilJi r^xutir, to distribute, which is regular 184 XLn. QUARANTE-DEUXIEME LE^ON. 37. Mentir, to lie. P. pr. mentant. P. p. raenti. Pres. Je mens, tu mens, il ment, nous mentons, etc., like sermr Thus also : D^mentir, to give the lie. 38. Sentir, to feel, to smell. P. pr. sentant, P. p. sent!. J\€S Je sens, tu seiis, il sent, nous sentons, etc., like servir. Thus : Consentir, to consent ; pressentir, to foresee ; ressentir, to feel. 39. /Se repentir de qcb., to repent. P. />r. se repentant. P.p. repenti. Pres. Je rao repens, I repent, etc., like sentir. ^^ 40. iSbr^iV, to go out. P. ^r. sortant. P. j9. sorti. -Pres. Jc sors, tu 5or5, il 50r^, etc., like servir. Thus : Ressortir, to go out again. Ressortir, to resort, and assorHty to assort, are rc^ukirly conjugated like Jinir. " ^ 41. Courir, to run. P. J9r. courant. P. jo. courw. Pres. Je cours, tu cours, il court, nous courons, vous courez, ils courcnt. Subj. Que je couro. Pret. Je courts, tu courus, il courut, nous courumes, vous cou- rutes, ils coui'urcnt. Fut. Je cowrrai, tu courras, il courra, nous courrons, vous cour- rez, ils courront.. Imper. Cours, coui'ons, courez. Thus : Acrourir, to run to ; concourir, to compete ; discourir, to dis- course ; encourir, to incur ; parcourir, to run over ; recourir, to have ro- course ; secourir, to relieve, to assist. ^.^--''^ 42. GueilUr, to gather. P. pr. cucillant. P. p. cueiUi. Pres. Je cuoille, tu cucilles, il cueille, nous cueilions, vous oueil- iez, ils cueillcnt. Suhj. Que je cueille. Pret. Je cueillis. Imper. Cueille, cueilions, cueillez. Fut. J3 cucillerai. Thus : Accueillir, to receive ; recudlUr, to gather. /43. Offrir, to offer. P. pr. offraut. P. p. offert. Pres. J'offr/?, tu offres, il nffre, nous offi-ons, etc. K ftet. J'offris Imper. Ofire, offirons, o£&ez. Fvi. J'oi9Birm 44. Souffnr, to suffer. P. pr. soufirant. P. p. souffert, Pres. Je souSre, tu souffi-es, etc., like qffrir. 45 Ouvrir, to open. P. pr. ouvrant. P. p. ouvert. Pres. J'ouvre, etc., like offrir. Thus : Rour^rir, to open again ; entr'ouvrir, to open a little. 4G. Couvrir, to cover. P. pr. couvranb. P. p. convert Thas; D/coMn-jV, to discover; recournV, to cover over. 47. Tressaillir, to start, to tremble. P. pr. tressaillanf /' ^. tressailli. Pres. Je tressaille, tu tressaillw, il tressaillc, etc. Pret. Je tressaillis, etc. Fut. Jc trcssaillerai and je tressalllirai. Thus : AssailUr, to assault. 48. Saillir, to put out, project. P. pr. saillant. P. p. sailli. Pres. third person,^ saille, pi. Us saillent. Like tressaiUir ; but it is used only in the third person singular and plural. Saillir ( =jaillir), to gush, is regular. / VOCABULARY. Du numton, mutton. fatigv€, tired. la t}oiturt, the coach. la violdte, the violet j / m^priser, to dsspisa. la livre, the pound. 1/ THEME 42. 1. The enemy flee. 2. Let us shun those places. 3. We clothe the poor, 4. The young girl was clud in black. 5. I cannot meet him ; ho shuns rae. 6. Avoid bad company. 7.. Your friend, Mr. A., does not servo me well. 8. I made use of your do^ch.. 9, Tell me what he has done to you ; but, above all (mrtout), do not lie. VO lie wbo lies deserves to be despised. 11. Igo out every day. 12. Do not go out, Robert; it is too cold. 13. K I wero 88 iU as you, I would not go out of ray room. 14. I feel the cold. 4 15. Do not make any {de) noise, for my mother is asleep (sleeps) ' 16. I hope she will sleep better to-night (cette nuit). 17. Tf I do 186 XLHI. QUARANTE-TEOISIEIIE LE^ON. not walk a little, T shall fall asleep. 18. Do you not repent ol wbat (^de ce que) you have done? 19. I always repent when I have done wrong (mat). 20. Do not run so fast {vite), you will be tiled. 21. They always run when they go to see their aunt 22. I ran faster than you. 23. Lf she is unhappy, I shall relieve her' 24. For whom are you gaihei-ing these, violets? 25. I gather thoTit for my mother. 26. The young lady has been received with t.he greatest kindness. 27. I always offer hira,„;n]iy services. 28. He offered me a hundi-ed pounds for my gar(Mi. 20. What are you doing there ? 30. I cover the plants with {de) snow. V XLIII. QUARANTE-TROISIEME LE^ON. IRREGULAR VERBS.— THIRD CLASS. (49 — 53. Verbs in ir changing their radical vowel and taking the flexions of the third Conjugation.) 49, Mourir* to die. P. pr. mourant. P. p. mort. Pres. Je meurs, tu meurs, il mdirt, nous ^ourons, vous mourez, lis meuT^nt. SubJ. Que je meure, que tu meures, qu'il meure, que nous m(%rions, que vous mouricz, qu'ils meureni. K [mpeK Meurs, mourons, mourez. p'" PrM. Si mourns, tu mourns, il morygt, nous mouriimes, voa^ nwWIrtl, ib moururont. Fui. Je mourrai, tu mourras, il moi Thus also : Sc mourir, to be near dying, to be fainting. Pres. Je m* metirs, etc. 50. BouiUir, to boil, neut. v. P. pr. bouillant. P. p. bouilli, Pres. Je bous. tu boits, il bout, nous bouillons, vous bonillez, ils bouiUent. Siibj. Que je bouille. IRREGULAB VERBS. 187 Pret. Je bouillis. FiU. Je bouilli'rai. To boil, as an active verb, is rendered ^/r« louiUir, as : To boil potatoes, fbire bouillir des pomrnes de tare. 51. Venir* to come. P. pr. venant. P. p. venw. Pres. Je viens, tu viVns, il vicnt, nous venons, vous venez, ils vtcnncnt. Pres. Subj. Que jc vrenne, que tu viennes, qu'il vtenne, que nous venions, que voui veniez, qu'ils vzennent. Imperf. Je venais. Pret. Je vins, tu vins, il vint, nous vznmes, vous vmtes, ils vin- rent. Imperf. Suhj. Quo je vinsse, que tu vinsses, qu'il vint, que nous vinssions, etc. Fut. Je viendrai, tu vicndras, etc. Co»^1J4. Devoir, to owe, (ought to), P. pr. devant. P. p. du. Pres. Je dois* tu dots, il doit, nous devons, vous devez, }\e doivent. Pres. Subj. Que jo doive. Pret. Je dus, tu dus, il dut, nous dumes, vous dutes, ils durent. Imperf. Subj. Que je dusse. Fitt. Je devrai, tu devras, etc. Cond. Je devrais.* Thus also : redevoir. ^ 55. Recevoir, to receive. P. pr. recevant. P. p. regu. Pres. Je regois, tu regois, il regoit, nous recevons, vous recevez, ils re90ivent. Pret. Je^ re^iw, tu loqus, il icqut, nous le^umes, vous requtes, ils re(iurent. Fut Je recevrai, tu rccevras, etc. Thus also : D^cevoir, to deceive ; apercevoir, to perceive ; concevoir, to con- ceive ; percevoir, to collect. .56. Vechoir, to fall, to decay. (No^i^^r.) P. p. dechu. Pres. Je dechois, tu Aochois, il dcchoit, nous d^chqyons, vous i^choi/ez, ils deKboient. /Subj. Que je dechoie. Pret. Je dcchu^tu Jfteclius, il dechut, nous d^chumes, vous d(^- chutes, ils dechurcnt. Fut. Je decherrail tvN^herras, ils ddcherra, nous d^cherrorui, vous d^aherrez, ils decherrow? \ Thus : Echoir, to fall to, to expire ; P. pr. €ch€ant ; P. p. €chu. It is now \>nly used in the third pcrs. sing.: il or -elle €choit, il €chut, etc. Choir is only used in the Infinitive mood. • Je dole, followed by a verb, correspondB to the English -, lamto I must. J« 4eTX'al5| 1 ought to, J akould. too XLIT. QUAEANTE-QUATBIBMB liEQON. 67. F«/7o?r^be^necessary, is an impersonal verb, the conjngar tion of which has been given p. 147. Pres. II faut. Imperf. II fallait, etc. 58. Mouvoir, to move. P. pr. raouvant. P. p. mu. Pres. Je meits, tu meus, il meut, nous mouvons, vous mouvez, Qg meuvent. Subj. Que je mewve, que tu mewves, qu'il mewve, quo nous mouvions, que vous mouviez, qu'ils me?^vent. • Pret. Je mus, tu mus, il mut, nous mumes, vous mutes, Us murent. Fut. Je mouvrai. Thus also : ^mouvoir, to move, to excite, stir up ; s'^mmivoir^ to be moved, affected. 59. Pleuvoir, to rain (impers.). P.pr. pleuvant. P. p. plu. Pres. II pleut. Subj. Qu'il plcuve. Imperf. II plcuvait. Pret. II plut. Subj. Imperf. Qu'il plut. Fut. H pleuvrav 60. Pourvoir* to provide. P. pr. pourvoyant. P. p. pourvu. Ve5. Je pourvois, tu pourvois, il pourvoit, nous pourvoyons, vous pourvo^cz, ils jx)urvoicnt. Pret. Je pourvus. Fut. Je pourvoirai. Thus : Pr^ooir, to foresee, which makes in the Pret. je pr^ms. 61. Pouvoir, to be able. P.pr. pouvant. P p. pu. Pres. Je peux (or je puis), tu peux, Upeut, nous pouvons, vous pouvez, ils peuvent. Pres. Subj. Que je puisse, que tn puisses, qu'il puisse, que nous puissions, que vous puissiez, qu'ils puissent. Impf. Je pouvais. Pre<. Je pus, tu pus, il put, nous pumes, vous putes, ils purent. Imperf. Subj. Que ^q pusse. Fut. Je pourrai, tu pourras, il pourra, nous pourrons, vous pourrez, ils pourront. Cond. Je pourrais. Note. May, expressing a wish, is rendered by the Present tense of the Subjunctive. Ex.: Puisse-t-il etre heureux, may he be happy 1 * Lik« 66— Voir, except the Pret. and FiU. mBEGULAB VERBS. 191 -" 62. Savoiry to know. P. pr. sacAant. , P. p. iu. Pres. Je sais, tu sais. il sait, nous savons, vous savez, ils savent. 3ubf. Que je sache, que tu sacAes, qu'il sacAe, que nous sacAions, que vous sac/nez, qu'ils sacAent. Imperf, Je savais, tu savais, etc. Pret. Je sus, tu sus, il sut, nous suoies, vous sutes, ils sui-ent Fui: Je sawrai, tu saMras, etc. Imper. Sache, saehons, sachez. When the word can means to know how, it is rendered in French by savoir, instead of pouvoir. Ex.: Savezrvous parler frangais? Can you speak French ? Note. There is also an old form of the Pres. Ind. Je sache. The Cond. Je ne saurals (without pas) signifies, I cannot, as : Je ne saurais vous dire, I cannot tell you. — 63. Vahir, to be worth. P. pr. valant. P. p. valu. Pres. Je vaux, tu vaux, il vaiU, nous valons, vous valez, ils va- lent. Subj. Que je vaille, que tu vailles, qu'il vaiUcy que nous valions, que vous valiez, qu'ils vaillent. Imperf. Je valais. Pret. Je valus, tu valus, il valut, nous valiimes, eto. Fvt. Je vaudrai, tu vaudras, eto. Gond. Je vaudrais. Observe the expression : // vaut mieux, it is better, etc. Conjugate in the same manner : pr^valoir, to prevail ; but it makes the Subj. pres.: Que je prtfvale (not prdvaille), que tupr^vales, qu'il pr€vale, que nous pr^valions, que vous pr^valiez, qu'ils pr€val&vt. -— 64. Vouloir, to be willing. P. pr. voulant. P. p. voulu. Pres. Je veux, tu veux, il veut, nous voulons, vous voulez, ils vevleiU. Subj. Que je veuille, que tu veuilles, qu'il veuille, que ttoufl voulions, que vous vouliez, qu'ils veuiUent. Imper. ( Veuille)^ veuilkz, be so kind as. Imperf. Je voulais. Pret. Jo voulus, tu voulus, il voulut, nous voulfimes, eto. J'ut. Je voudrai, tu voudras, eto. Cond. Je voudrais, I should like to. ^ 192 XLrV. QUARANTE-QUATRreMB LBgON. The firat person, Je veux, is mostly used to imply authority, command. Je desire is substituted as a more polite expression for the affirmative. Je ne veux pas, is used, hpwevcr, for the neg ative. 65. Voir, to see. P. pr. volant. P. p. vu. Pres, Je voiSf tu vois, il voit, nous voyons, vous voyez, Us voient. Tmperf. Je voyais, tu voyais, etc. Pret. Je vis, tu vis, il vit, nous vimes, vous vites, etc. Fut. Je verrai, tu verras, il verra, etc. Imper. Vois, voyons, voyez. Thus : Revoir, to see again ; entrevoir, to have a glimpse of. For pour- voir and pr€voir see No. 60. ARer voir and venir voir qn. are rendered : to call upon a person. GQ^^^asseoir, to sit down. P. pr. s'asseyant. P. p. cusis. Pres. Je m^assieds, tu tassiedn, il H^asmd, uuua iibiSS^sseyons, vous vous asseyez, ils s'asseient. Or, jo m'assois, etc. Imperf. Je m'asseyais. Or, je m'assoyais, etc. Pret. Je m'assis, tu t'assis, il s'assit, nous nous assimes, vous vous assites, ils s'assirent. PtU. Je massieraiy tu Vassieras, il s'assiera, etc. Or, je mW eeierai, tu Vasseieras, il s^asseiera, etc. Imper.- Assieds-toiy aBsepons-nons, ass«y«?-vous. VOCABULABT. Un panier, a basket. ^a?s, thick. le danger, the danger. I'herbe, f. the grasi. fe ressort, the spring. humide, damp. le beau-frere, the brother-in-law. /e bruit, la noiwdle, the repOift r€p€t€r, to repeat. arreter, to stop. coupable, criminal. Vadresse, f. the direction. 2a ^/ace, the looking-glass. THEME 44. 1» I am to copy my exercise. 2. We must set out. 3. Yoa ougbt to come at two o'clock. 4. I receive a letter every day. 5. We receive our money from the banker (du hanquier). 6. My j&iend received a basket filled with, grapes {de raisins), 7. The IRREGULAR TERES. i^t hunter perceived a bird on a tree. 8. They did not perceive the danger. 9. The spring which moves the whole machine is very ingenious (ingenieux). 10. Doea it rain? 11. No, it does not rain ; but it will rain this evening./^ 12. K men do not provide for it (y), God will provide for it. 13. Before he left (avant de par- ii'r), hQ provided for (a) all. 14". Can you coipe? 15. I cannot oome, but my brother qan (com0) . 16.. We could see nothing, for it was dark (il faisait nuit)'. 17. I could do it myself, if I had time. 18. May you be happy I I could do no better. 19.~I know that he is your friend, but I did not know that he was your brother- in-law 20. Do you know why he has (is) not come? 21. No, I do noflinow (it). 22. When you know (Fut.) your lesson, come and repeat it to me. 23. These pens are worth nothing. 24. It is (vaut) better to bo unfortimate than gtiilty. 25. Can't you see that star? 26. I do not see it. 27. Sit down there a minute. 28. Whjrdo not you sit down? 29. Let ua sTt upon thr grass. 30. I would sit-down u{)on the grass, if it were not so damp. ^3|l. Can you speak French ? 3^. I can read, but I cannot speak [it], ^S^ Is this report tpie? 3^. I cannot ( Cond.) tell (it) you. 35. He does not choose-to (vill not) eat. 36. If I chose (would), I should tell you where he lives. 37.""Vhat would you have me do (that I should do) (Imperf. Suhj.) ? 36^. We could have stepped him, if we had chosen. 39. I send you herewith' (a'^/oiW) the direction of Mr, L. ^0. I have found the ring which my cousin has lost, and I shall sand it to her.W 194 XLV. QUARANTE-CINQUIEME LEgON. XLV. QUARANTE-CINQUlfiME LE9ON. IRREGULAR VERBS.— THIRD CLASS CONTINUED. 67. Hire, to la;igh. P. pr. riant. P.p. ri. Pres, Je ris. Imperf. Je rials. Pret. Je ris, tu ris, il rit, etc. Fut. Je rirai. 68. Envoyer, to send. P. pr. envoyant. P. p. envoy^. Pres. J'envoie. Imperf. J'envoyais. Pret. J'envoyai. Fut. J^euYerrai, tu enverros, etc. Cond. J'enverrais. 69. AUer* to go. P. pr. allant. P. p. all^. Pres. Je vais, tu vas, il va, nous allons, vous allez, ils tyont. Pres. Subf. Que yaiUe, que tu aiUes, qu'il aiUe, que nous alliens, que vous alliez, qu'ils aiUent. Imperf. J'allais, tu allais, il allait, etc. Pret. J'allai, tu alias, il alia, nous aMmes, vous allates, ils allerent. Imperf StibJ. Que j'allasse, que tu allasses, etc. Imper. Va, allons, allez. Perf Je suis all^, I have gone. FtU. J'irai {I shall go), tu iras, il ira, nous irons, vous irez. ila iront. Oond. J'irais, tu irais, etc. Conjugation of S'en aUer^ to go away. We give the reflective verb S*en aller, to go away, at fall length, because its conjugation is rather difficult on account of its two pronouns. Observe that en is never separated from the objective w*, t', s', nous, etc. ; hence it follows, tliat the compound or Perfect must not be written : Je me mis en oMf but je m'en suis alii, tu t'en es cdl^, etc. INDICATIVB MOOD. PRE8BNT TENSB. Je m'en vais, I go away. nous nous en allons,tre go away. tu t'en vas, etc. vous vous en allez, etc. il s'en va, eto. ils s'en vont, eto. IBBEGULAB VERBS. 195 Keg. Je ne m'en vais p£is. tu ne t'en vas pas, etc. M'en vais-je, do I go awagf etc. Ne m*en vais-je pas ? etc. IMPERFECT. Je m*en allais, tu t'en allais. M*en allais-je, did I go away Jo ne m^en allais pas. Je m'en allai. Je ne m'en allai pas. Je m*en irai. Je ne m'en irai pas ▲VFIBMATIVB. Va.t*en. (qu'il s*en aille). allons-nous^n. allez-vou&^n. (qu'ils 8*en aillent). Ne m*en allais-je pas ? FRETEBITB. M'en allai-je ? Ne m'en allai-je pas ? TUTURB. M'en irai-je ? Ne m'en irai-je pas V OCPERATITB. ITEOATZTB. Ne t'en va pas. (qu'il ne s'en aille pas), ne nous en allons pas. ne vous en allez pas. (qu'ils ne s'en aillent pas). COMPOUND OP THE PRESENT. Je m'en suis all^, IJiave gone away, nous nous en sommes all^. tu t'en es all^. il s'en est all^. elle s'en est all^. Je ne m'en suis pas all^. ta ne t'en es pas all^. il ne s^en est pas all^ vous vous en Stes all^(s). ils s'en sent all^s. elles s'en sont allies. NBQATrVELT. nous ne nous en sommes pas all^s. vous ne vous en Stes pas all^(s). ils ne s'en sont pas all^. 196 XLV. QUARANTE-CINQUlfiME LEgON. INTERROaATIVELY. M'en suis-je all^ ? nous en sommes-nous all^s ? t'en es-tu all^? vous en etes-vous alle(B) ? s'en est-il all^ ? s'en sont ils alles ? NEGATIVE-INTERROaATIVE. Ne m'en suis-je pas all^ ? ne nous en sommes-nous p. all^ ? ne t'en es-tu pas alle ? ne vous en etes-vous pas all^sl ne s'en estril pas all4? ne s'en sont-ils pas all^s? COMPOUND OP THE IMPERFECT. Je m'en ^tais all^. M'en ^tais-je all^ ? Je ne m'en ^tais pas aU4. Nc m'en ^tais-je pas all^ ? 8UBJUNCTIVB. PRESENT. que nous nous en aOions. que vous vous en allien, qu'ils s'en aillent. PERFECT. Que je m'en sois aJW. PLUPERFECT. Que je m'en fusse all^ INFINITIVE. S'en etre all^. PARTICIPLES. S'en ^tant allt^. Que je m'en idlle. que tu t'en allies, qu'il s'en aille. IMPERFECT. Que je m'en allasse. que tu t'en allasses. qu'il s'en allat, etc. S'en aller. S'en allant VOCABULAKT. Oblige, obliged. sonner, to strike. Jeudi dernier, last Thursday. la sant€, health. la musique, music. importuner, to importimai. U pauillon, the flag. kiss^, hoisted. DEPECTIVB VERBS. 197 THEME 45. 1. I go to London. 2. Tbou goest to Paris. 3. He goes U> Berlin. 4. My brother has also gone to Berlin. 5 Where are you going? 6. I am going to the play {au spectacle). 7. I would go with you, if I had tune. 8. Why are they going away so soon ? 9. They are obliged to go away, 10. Will not your mother be angry (fdchee), if you go away before her ? 11. I told her that I would go away before her, and she has permitted (it to) me. 12. My sister and I (we) went to the concert last Thursday. 13. K you had gone (there, y) uiso, you would have heard fine music./ 14. These men went yesterday from house to {en) house 15. At what o'clock will you go (away) ? 16. I should have already gone, if it bad not rained so fast (fort). 17. Is he really gone (away)? Yes, he went (has gone) away this morning. 18. Let us go (away), it is going to (i7 va) strike three o'clock. 19. How is (ya) your health? 20. Thank you, it is not very good. 21. I wish (shoidd like that) the boy would go (away) (Imperf. Suhj.). 22. I wish they would go away. 23. Begone (go away), you importune me. XLVI. QUARANTE-SIXifiME LE^ON DEFECTIVE VERBS. Verbs whereof some tenses or persons are wanting are def<^T« verbs. They are as follows : — 70. Braire, to bray. Pres. D brait, Us braient. Fut. H braira. Cond, n brairait. 71. Druire, to roar. P. pr. bray ant. Imperf. 11 bruyait, pi. ils bruyaient 72. CAotr, tofaU. P. j>. chu. 198 ' XLVi. QUARANTK-SIXIfiME LEgON. 73. Clore, to close. P. p. clos. Pres. Je clos, tu clos, il clot. Fut. Je clorai, tu cloras, etc. Cond. Je clorais. 74. Eclore* to be hatched. P. p. ^clos. Pres. D ^clot, pi. Hs 4closent. Sulj. Qu'il ^close, pL qa'ils Absent. i^M«. H ^clora, pi. ils ecloront. Its compound tenses are formed with etre, 75. FailUr, to fail. P. pr. (faillant.) P. p. failli. Pres. n faut. * ^^ Pret. Je faillis, tu faillis, il faillit, nous faillimes, vous faillltes, ils faillirent. Perf. J'ai failli, I had nearly. Thus : D^faillir, to faint. 76. Ferir is used only in the expression: Sans coup ferir, without striking a blow. 77. Frire, to fry. P. pr. wanting. P. p. fnt. Pres. Je fris, tu fris, il frit. Plur» wanting. Fvt. Je frirai. Cond. Je frirais. Perf. J'ai frit, etc. 78. Gesir, to lie. P. pr. gisant. Pres. cigit, here lies; pi. ci-gisent (used on tombstones). Fur ther : nous gisons, vous gisez, ils gisent. Imperf. ci-gisait; pi. ci-gisaient. 79. Issir, to be bom, is used only in the P. p. issu. 80. Ouir, to hear. P. p. oui. Pret. J'ouis, tu oms, etc. Imperf. Suhj. Que j'ouisse, etc. Further the compound tenses, as : Tai out, etc. 81. Sourdre, to rush out of the ground, as water, baa only the Infinitive and the Present, elle sourd, elks sourdent. 82. Seoir, to fit. P. pr. seant. P. p. sis. Jhd. pres. II sied. Fut. II siera. Cond^ II a^rait. 83. Surseoir, to put off, P. p. sursis. Pres. Je surseois. Pret. Je sursis. Note. — Moat of Uir«» w«.rb8 ar«- not much In ase. IBBEGULAB AND DEFECTTTB VEBBS. 199 AN ALPHABETICAL LIST OF ALL THE FRENCH IRREGULAR AND DEFECTIVE VERBS.* CONTAINING THEIR PIVB PRIMITIYE TENSES. Injinitiv Absoudre Acqu^rir AUer I Assaillir »^ S'assebir Atteindre Battre, see L. Boixe Bouillir Braire Bruire Ceindre !. Pres. j'absouB j'acquiers je vais j'assaiUe je m'assieds j'atteins XXIII., Rem. 1. je bois je bous D brait Imp. il bruyait Ceindre je ceins Choir, see d<^choir Circoncire Clore Conclure Concevoir Conduire Confire Coniudtre Coudre Courir Couvrir CraiDdre Croire Croitre Cueillir Cuire D^choir DeToir Dire Dormir je circoncis je clos je conclus je con9oi8 je conduis je confis je connais je coudfl je cours je couvre je crains je crois je crois je caeille je cols je di^choiB je dois je dis je dors Part. pr. absolvant acqu^rant allant assaillaut s'asseyant atteignant buvant booillant bruyant ceigoant concluant concevant conduisant confisant connaissant cousant courant couvrant craignant croyant croissant caeillant coisant devant disant dormant P.p. absous, te acquis, e aU^, e assailli, e assis, e atteint, e bu, e bouilli, e loanting Prd. voanting j 'acquis j'allai j'assailliB je m'assis j'atteignis jebus je bouillis toanting ceint, e je ceignis circoncis clos conclu, e con9u, e conduit, e confit, e connu, e cousu, e couru, e convert, e craint, e era, e crti, e cueilli, e cuit, e d^chu, e dfl dit, e dormi je circoEcis je concltM je con9U8 je conduisis je confis je connus je cousis je courus je couvris je craignis je eras je crlis je cuellis je cuisis je dachas je dus je dis je dormis No, 13. 53. 69. 47. 66. 14. 19. 50. 70. 71. 14. 56. 2. 73. L.23, 53. 5. 2. 26. 11. 41. 46. 15. 20. 21. 43. 4. 56. 54. 7. 35. * Tbe derivativeB which are uot in this table will be found with the primitives^ onder tlwlr respective namber- 200 XLTI. QUABANTE-BIXI^MB USgOH. Echoir a €clioit €ch^ant ^chu il^chm 36. Eclore il ^clot — ^clos — 74. Ecrire j'^cris ^crivant ^crit, e j'^crivis 17. Envoyer j'envoie envoyant envoyd j'cnvoyai 68. Faire jefais faisant fait, e jefis 27. Faillir faillant failU je faillis 75. Falloir nfaut — fallu il fallut 57. Feindre je feins feignant feint, je feignis 14.i F<5rir — — — — 76. Frire jefris — frit, e ■ — 77. Fuir jefuis fuyant ftii je fills 32. Gesir il git gisant — — 78. Joindre je joins joignant joint, e je joignis 16. Issir — — issu, e — 79. Instruire j'instruifl instruisant instruit, e j'instmisis 6. Lire jelis lisant lu, e jeloB 18. Luire jeluis loisant lui — 1. Mentir je mens mentant menti je mentis 37. Mettre je mets mettant mis, e je mis 28. Moudre je mouds moulant moulu, e je moulus 12. Mourir je meurs mourant mort, e je mourns 49. Mouvoir je mens mouvant mu, e je mu8 58. Naltre je naia naissant n^, e je naquis SO. Nuire je nuis nuisant nui je nuisis 3. Offrir j'ofli© offrant offert, e j'offris 43. Oindr© j'oing — oint j'oignis 16. Ouir — — GUI J'OUM 80. Ouvrir j'ouvre onrrant ouvert, e j'ouvris 45. Paitre jepais paissant pu — 25. Paraitre je parais paraissant pam je parus 24. Paitir jepare partant parti je partis 36. Peindre je peins peignant peint je peignis 14. Plaindre je plains plaignant plaint je plaignis 15. Plaire je plaifl plaisant plu je plus 22. Pleuvoir il pleut pleuvant plu ilplut 59. Prendre je prends prenant prifl jepris 29. Poindre je poins poignant (point) (je poignis ) 16. Pourvoir je pourvois pourvoyant pourvu, e pourvus 60. Poavoir jepeux(puis) pouvant pu jepus 61. Repentir, se je me repens repentant repenti je me repeutis 39. Restreindre je restreins — restreint je restreignifl 14. Rire je lis riiuU Si jeris 67 SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. 201 Rompre, tee L. XXIII., Rem. 2. Salllir il saille saillant sailli Usaiilit 48. Savoir je sais sachant su, e je BUS 62, Sentir je sens sentant senti, je sentis 38. Seoir flsied sdant sis, e — 82. Serrir je scrs servant servi, e je servifl S4. Sortir je sors sortant sorti je sortis 40. Souffrir je soufFre Bcutfrant soufFcrt, e jesouflOis 44. Sourdre clle sourd je Buis — — — 81. Suivre «uivant suivi, e je suivii 9. Suffire je suffis suflBsant suffi je suffis 2. Surseoir je surseois sursoyant Bursis jesursis 83. Tairo je tais taisant tu, e jotus 23. Teindre je teins teignant teint, e je teignis 14. Tenir je tiens tenant tenu, e je tins 52. Traire je trab tray ant trait — 8. Tressaillir je trcssaiUe tressaillaiit tressailli je tressaillis 47. Valoir je vaux valant valu je valus 63. Vaincro je vainca vainqaant vaincu, e je vainqnis 10. Venir je vieoa Tenant venu, e je vins 51. Vetir je vgts v^taot v§tu je v^tis 33. Vivre je vis vivant v^cu je v^cus 31. Voir je vols voyant vu, e je vis 65. Vouloir je veua Toolo, e ]9 voolns 64. XLVII. QUARANTE-SEPTlilME LEgON. HOW TO RENDER BO, DTD, SHALL, WILL, ETC -- SUPPLE.A1ENTARY TENSES. Tho auxiliaries rfo, will, shall, etc., in answers, are often used in English in an elliptical manner, when in French the principal verb must be repeated, and a noun or pronoun supplied. Si, " yes/* is generally used in answers instead of out in replying to a question in which there is a negation, or in contradiction to a negative statfimoiit. 202 XLVn. QUARANTE-SEPTIEME LEgON. EXAMPLES : Avez-voas du pain 1 Oui, fen ai A.vez-vous r(?pondtt ? Oui, j'ai r^- pondu f Acheteront-ils ce bearre? Oui, ils I'achet&i'ont. Voulez vous le lui demander ? Oui, je veux Men. Etes-vous Anglais ? Non je ne le suis pas. Avez-vous ete a Rome ? Non, je n*y ai pas €t€. Est-ce vous qui etes venu hier soir ? Non, ce n'est pas moi. Ce n'est pas ce peintre qui a fail votre portrait 1 Si, c'est lui. Lui rendrez-vous son portrait ? Cela ca sans dire. Partira-t-il 1 Oui, il partira. Iriez vous s'il y allait f Mais oui, je le/erais. Est-ce la mode? Oui, c'est la mode. Pourquci vous plaignez-vous 1 Je ne me plains pas ; c'est mon frere qui se plaint. II se plaint ! Oui, vraiment, et il y a longtemps qu'il se plaint. J'ai faim. Vraiment ? Oui, bien faim. Doit-elle venir ce soir 1 Oui, elle doit venir. Have you any bread ? Yes^ I have. Have you answered? Yes, I have. Will they buy ikat butter? Yes^thq will. Will you ask him for it ? Yes, I will Are you an EngliskTnan ? No, I am not. Have you been in Rome ? No, I havo not. Was it you who came last night ? No, it was not I. That painter did not take your like- ness, did he. ? Yes, he did. Will you return her likeness to her? Of course I will. Will he set out ? Yes, he will. Should you go there if he did ? Why, yes, I should. Is it the fashion 1 Yes, it is. Why do you complain? I do not complain; my brother does. — Does he? Indeed he does, and he has complained for a long time. I am hungry. Are you? Yes, very. Does she intend to come this even- ing ? Yes, she does. In exclamations the auxiliary must be translated by some words expressive of the meaning implied by the English ellipsis. Ex. : — Son associd est revenu des Indes. His partner has returned from IndiA. Est-ce possible, vous me sur- Has he ? prenez, or simply, Ah ! vraiment ! J'ai sommeil. Ah! vraiment? or, 1 am sleepy. Are you! Allons done, vous plaisantez. SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. 208 SUPPLEMENTARY TENSES. The A.RT II. ELISION. The vowels a, «, t, when final, are sometimes elided before a word beginning with a vowel or h mute ; thus : VdmCy Phommef sHl, in* ?tead of la dme, le homme, si il. Elision of a. A is elided only in the word la. Ex. : Vamitie. EliSion of e. E is elided in the nine monosyllables je, me, te, fe, dCf ne, ce, te and que. Ex.: faime; c'est Vhomme ruHl rCestime pas. ExcKPTiONS. — 1. The vowels of the pronouns le, la, je, and ce are never elided wnen they come after the verb. Ex. : Ai-je un livre ; est-ce elle. The e in je and ce is not pronounced, however, though the e and a of le and la are in voyez-la aujounVhui, voyez-le aujourtThui. 2. Before out and onze no elision takes place : je crois que out; le onze. The E is elided in lorsque, when ; puisque, since ; quoiquB^ though, only before il, elle, on and un. Ex.: lorsquHU puisqu^on^ etc. In qu^lqu^ the e is elided only before un, une, and autre. Ex.: quelqu'un ; qu^lqu autre. In entre and presque, e is elided only when they form part of a compound word. Ex.: entr^acte presqu^tle. Elision op i. I is elided only in the conjunction si before H and iU. Ex.: s'il, s'iU, 206 I. PBEMIEBE LEgOK. I. PREMIERE LEgON. ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. L RULES ON THE GENDER OF SIMPLE NOUNS. $1. MASCULINE BY THEIR SIGNIFICATION AKE : 1 . The names of all masculine beings, as : Henri, Henry ; Vem- pereur, the emperor ; le maitre, the master ; h Frangais, the Frenchman; U taureau, the bull, elc. 2. The names of metals, trees, shrubs, seasons, months, and days, as : le fer, iron ; le chene, the oak ; le printempSy spring ; le jcli Mai, (the) fine May ; (le) lundi, Monday, etc 3. All words that are made substantive by prefixing the article, as: k vert, the green (color); le Men, the good; le hoire et le manger, drinking and eating ; le oui et le non, the yes and no. 4. Nouns expressing professions, titles, or qualities which belong generally to men : philosophe, orateur, etc. 5. The names generally used in natural history to designate the different species of animals : un quadrupede, un mammifere, un herbivore, etc. 6. The names employed in Chemistry to designate simple bodies and most of their compounds : /'or, le cuivre, Vhydrogene, Voxy- 7. The names of the decimal nomenclature : le metre, le franc, le centime^ etc. 52. MASCULINE BY TERMINATION: 1 . Nouns ending in a consonant (except those in aison, iojiy and eiMr). 2. Nouns endhag in any vowel except e mute and e preceded by t or ti. 3. Nouns ending m e mute preceded by 6, g, I (not double), w, ON THE GENDER OP SUBSTANTIVES. 207 r (except rr not preceded by m), «, t (not double), ortf (except those in iqva). To any rules far terminations, there will be found many exceptions. These roles are general. Most of the exceptions in common use, the pu- pil will learn as they occur in thic grammar. $3. FEMININE BY SIGNIFICATION: 1 . All names of female persons and animals, as : Ma-ne^ Mary j hx reine, the queen ; la file, the girl ; la jument, the mare, etc. 2. The names of fruits, flowers, and herbs, as : la poire, the pear ; la pomme, the apple ; la rose, the rose ; Vherbe, the gi*ass. Except: Le marron, the chestnut; le citron, the lemon; le raisin, the grape ; un abricot, an apricot ; tin ceillet, a pink ; le lis, the lily, and a few more, on account of their masculine termination. 3. The names of countries, places, and rivers ending in e mute, as : la France, la Prusse, Vancienne Rome, la Loire, la Seine, etc. Except : Le Ha/wvre, le Mexique, le Danube, le RhSne, $ 4. FEMININE BY TEEMINATION: 1. Nouns ending, with e mute, not included in the masculine ter- minations, as : la vie, life ; Vepee, the sword. 2. Those ending in arson, ion, and eur, as: 'la maison, the house ; la religion, la grandeur. 3. Those ending in e preceded by t or ti, as : la beaut e, beauty. 4. These five words ending in i are feminine : la foi, faith ; la hi, law ; la fourmi, the ant ; la merci,- mercy ; Vapres-midi. 5. Most nouns endiag; in oire (not oir) are feminine, as : la gloire, glory ; Vhistoire, history ; la victoire, victory ; la mackoire, the jaw. 6. Gens. This word presents an anomaly in gender. It is masculine, but when an adjective precedes it, that adjective takes the feminine form, if its termination is not e mute. If a definitive, as tout or certain, precedes this adjective, the definitive jilso taJses 208 I. PREMIERE LEgON. the fe minin e form. In all other cases, gens takes a masculine adjective, as: Toutes les vieilles gens sont soupgonneux, all old people are suspicious. But, Tons les jeunes gens, n. GE]!n)ER OF COMPOUND SUBSTANTIVES. This depends upon the manner of their composition. 1. When the first component is a noun, it detennines the gender «>f the whole, as : Le chou-fleur, the cauliflower ; un arc-en-cieij a rainbow ; la fete Dieu. 2. When they consist of a preposition or an adjective and a noun, the gender of the noun remains for the whole, as : Le contre-coup, the counter-buff; Vavant-bras, m. the fore-arm. 3. Those nouns compounded with a verb and noun are always of the masculine gender, as ; Le portemanteau, the portmanteau : le tire-houchon, the corkscrew ; le porte-feuUUy the portfolio (though feuille is feminine) . THEME 1. Indicate the gender of the following nouns, by placing an article, either the definite or the indefinite, before them : The horse, — cheval. The pear, — poire. The metal, — metal. A winter, — hiver. Italy, — Italie. The cheny, — cerise. The cherry-tree, — cerisier. The house, — maison. The vapor, — vapeur. The walnut, — ?ioix. A leaf, — feuille. The truth, — verite. The van-guard, — avant-garde. The cart, — charette. The work, — travail. The shell, — coquille. The hat, — cha- peau. The shoe, — Soulier. The honey, — miel. The carpenter, — charpentier. The nurse, — nourrice. The sun, — soleil. The earth, — terre. A year, — annee. The life, — vie. The feast, — fete. The beauty, — heaute. The master-key, — passe-partout. The spit, — tourne-hroche. Christianity, — christianisme. in. DOUBLE GENDER OF SOME NOUNS. 1. The following nouns have a double gender : Vaidcy m. the assistant. Uaide, f. the help, support. Vo^kf m. the eagle. Vaigle^ f. the 8tancUu:4' ON THE GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 209 I'aune, m, the alder-tree. Vaune, f. the ell, yard. un couple, a cou])le, husband and wife, une couple, a brace, two of a sort un enscigne, an ensign. une enseigne, a sign. le garde, the keeper. la garde, the guard, watch. fc guidt, the guide. la guide, the rein in driving* le livre, the book. la livre, the pound. fe manche, the handle. la manche, the sleeve. Ic m^moire, the memorandum. la mtfmoire, the memory. le mousse, the cabin-boy. la moicsse, the moss. Vorgue, m. sing, the organ. les orgues, pi. organ, or organs. fe page, the page (of a prince). la page, the page (of a book). un padlasse, a merry andrew. une paillasse, a straw-bed. Pdques, pi. m. Easter. la pdque, the Passover. /c poSle, the stove. /a poc/e, the frying-pan. le poste, the post, military post. la poste, the post-offce. un somme, a nap, slumf^er. la sornme, the sum. le tour, the trick, turn. la tour, the tower. le trompette, the trumpeter. /a trompette, the trumpet. ttn m/e, a veil. une voik, a sail. 2. There are in French some nouns which have no paiiiculai form for the feminine, and remain always masculine, even when applied to a woman. Such are : Un auteur, ) _ . ■rr ^ . . yrn. and f. an author, a writer. Un ecrivam, ) Un orateur, m. and f. an orator. Un peiiitre, m. and f. a painter. Un sculpteur, m. and f. a sculptor. Un t€moin, m. and f. a witness. Note. Sometimes the word fcrtime may precede, as : Une femrne out put, les femmcs pokes. 3. On the contrary, there are a few feminine nouns which ajiply also to male individuals : La caution, the bail. la basse, the base. la pratique, the customer. la sentineUe, the sentry. IV. FORMATION OF FEMININE APPELLATIONS. 1. Male appellations which are originally adjectives, form theii feminine according to the rules on the adjectives (see Part I., L XVIL), as: 14 210 L PEEMI^RE LEgON. MASCULINE. FEMININB. Li Frangais, the Frenchman. La Frangaise, the Frenchwoman. un Russe, a Russian. une Russe, a Russian lady, tin Juif, a Jew. une Juive, a Jewess. r^poux, the husband. I'^pouse, the wife. fe veuf, the widower. la veuve, the widow. 2. Those ending in one of the nasal sounds an, on, ten (not in) and those in t double their n or t before the feminine e, as : Le paysan, the peasant. La paysanne, a peasant woman. le lion, \ ae lion. la lionne, the lioness. le chr^tien, the Christian. /a chr^tienne, the Christian woman, fe baron, the baron. Za baronne, the baroness. 3. Many nouns ending in e mute form their feminine in essCy as Le comte, the count. Za comtesse, the countess. ic ne^rre, the negro. la n€gresse, the negress. le maitre, the master. • la mmtresse,ihe mistress. le prince, the prince. la princesse, the princess. 4. Those in -eur change this termination into -euse : Le danseur, the dancer. La danseuse, the dancer, y*. le chasseur, the hunter. la cliasseuse,* the huntress. "'^-'-. 5. Many in -teur change it into 4nce, as : L*acteur, the actor. L'actrice, the actress. le bienfaiteur, the benefactor. la bienfaitrice, the benefactress. le tuteur, the guardian. la tutrice, the guardian, /. 6. The following nouns form their feminine in an irregular way : Le dieii, the god. La d€esse, the goddess. le due, the duke. la duckesse, the duchess. Vetnpereur, the emperor. Vimp&atrice, the empress. le roi, the king. la reine, the queen. /« floras, the hero. V heroine, the heroine. fe gouvemeur, the tutor. /a gouvemante, the governess, /e serviteur, the man-servant. Za servante, the maid-servant, fe p^cheur, the sinner. Za p^cheresse, the sinner ^. fc cy. 'pagnon, the companion. fo compagne, the compamon / Ze fo?//), the hc-wolf. Za /ourv, the she-wolf. & mulet, the mule. /a mw/e, the mule /. l^ dindon, the turk^-cock. la dinde, the turkey-hwi. ♦ Chasseresse Is a poetical form. ON THE GENDER OP SUBSTANTIVES. 211 THEME 2. Form and "write the feminine of the following masculine nouns, according to the above rules : The neighbor, le voisin; f. — . The hunter, le chasseur; f. — . The dwarf, le nain ; f. — . The talker, le havard; f. — . The prisoner, le prisonnier ; f. — . The dumb man, le muet ; f. — . The teacher, Vinstituteur ; f. — . The patient, le malade ; f. — . The husband, Vepottx ; f. — . The master, le maitre ; f. — . A musician, un musicien; f. — . The founder, le fonda- teur ; f. — . The Englishman, V Anglais ; f. — . The German, VAUemand; f. — . The actor, Vacteur; f. — -. The inventor, Vinventeur ; f. — . The liar, le menteu/r (root ment-, termination -eur) ; f. — . The traitor, le trattre ; f. — . The singer, le chan- teur ; f. — . The idler, h paresseux ; f. — . The lionj le lion ; f. - — . The tiger, le tigre ; f. — . READING LESSON. Un honn^te p^re de famille, charg^^ de biens et d'ann^es, voulut r^glet .d'avance^ sa succession entre ses trois fils, et leur partager ses biens, le fruit de ses travaux et de son industrie. II en fit trois portions ^gales, et assigna k chacun son lot. — Puis il leur dit : *' II me reste encore un diamant de grand prix ; jo le destine k celui de vous qui saura le mieux le m^riter par quelque action noble et g6- n^reuse, et je vous donne trois mois pour vous mettre en ^tat de Vobtenir." Aussit6t les trois fils se dispersent, mais lis se rassemblent an temps present.' lis se pr^sentent devant leur juge^ et voici ce que raoonte I'ain^* : " Mon pere, un Stranger s'est trouv(5 dans des cir- Constances qui Font oblige de me confier'^ toute sa fortune : il n'avait de moi aucune surety, par ^crit,* et n'aurait pu produire centre moi aucune preuve du d^pot ; mais je lui ai tout remis fidelement. Cette fid^lit^ n'est^Ue pas quelque chose de louable^? " ** Tu as fiut, mon fils," lui r^pondit le vieillard," ce que tu devais faire. H Berait honteux d'en agir autrement, car la probity est un devoir.'* 1. Laden. 2. Beforehand. 8. Prescribed, appointed. 4. The eldest. 6, To 6. In writing. 7. Laudable. 212 1. PitEMlfiRE LEgON. CONVERSATION. Qui voulut r^gler sa succession ? Que fitril k cet effet (^for this pur- pose) ? Que lui restait-il? A qui le destinart-il ? Combien de temps leur donna-fc-D pour cela ? Que firent ensuite les fils ? Quelle av^t ^t^ Taction de I'dn^ ? Que Im dit le vieillard ? Un honnete perfe de famille. II partagea ses biens entre ses trois fils. Un diamant de grand prix. A celui d'entre eux qui ferait une action noble et g^n^- reuse. H leur donna trois mois pour obteiiir ce prix. Ds se disperserent, mais au bout du temps present, iis revin- rent k la maison. D avait remis fidelement k un Stranger la fortune que ce- lui-ci lui avait confiee sans reQU (receipt). Tu n'as fait, mon fils, que oe que tu devais faire. VIN. Le second fils plaida^ sa cause k son tour, k pen pres en ces termes : *' Je me suis trouv^, pendant mon voyage, sur le bord d'un lac ; un enfant venait^ imprudemment de s'y kisser^ tomber ; il al- lait se noyer f je Ten ai tir^, et je lui ai sauv^ la vie, aux yeux des habitants d'un village situ^ au bord de ce lac ; ils pourront attester la v^rit4 du fait."* — "A la bonne heure," interrompit'^ le pere . " mais il n'y a point encore de noblesse dans cette action ; il n'y a que de rhumanit^.'* Enfin, le dernier des trois freres prit la parole. '* Mon pere," dit-il, ** j'ai trouve mon ennemi mortel, qui, s'^tant 4gar^. la nuit, s'^tait endormi, sans le savoir, sur le penchant* d'un abime f le moindre mouvement qu'il eut fait, aa moment de son r^veil,' ne ON THE GENDER OP SUBSTANnVBS. 213 pouvait manqner* de le precipiter ; sa vie ^tait entre mes mains ; j'ai pris soin de reveiller^^ aveo les precautions sonvenables, et Tai tire de cet endroit^^ fatal." " Ah ! mon fils," s'ecria le bon pere aveo transport, et en Fem- brassant tendrement, " e'est a toi, sans contredit," que la bague^ est dae." 1. To plead. 2. Had Just fallen. 3. To be drowned. 4. The fact. 6. To Inter rupt. 6. The slope. 7. Abyss. 8. Of his awakening. 9. Fail. 10. To wake 11. Place, ipot. 12. Without doubt. 13. The ring. CONVEBSATION. Qu'avait fait le second fils ? Qui avfdt vu cela ? Enfin, quelle avait ^t^ Taction du dernier des trois fr^res ? Laquelle de ces trois actions ^tait la plus noble ? Les actions des deux autres n'^taient-elles pas nobles et g^n^reuses ? Kt qn'estrc© que lui dit le p6re ? II avait sauve un enfant qui allait se noyer. Les habitants d'un village situ^ an bord du lao. D avait retir^ son ennemi endormi au botd d'un abime, oti le moindro mouvement Teut pr^- cipito. Celle du plus jeune fils. Non, la premiere ^tait une actioD de justice, la secondo une action d'humanite. n s'^cria avec transport : *' Mod fils, c'est k toi, sans contredit, que la bague est due," 214 n. DEUXifiME LEgOK. II. DEUXIEME LE9ON PLURAL OF NOUNS. (See Part I. Lesson 2, p. 30.) The general rules'on this subject have already been given in the second lesson of Part I. We have to add here the following particularg. 1. Nouns of two and more syllables, ending in -ant and -ent, are spelled by some French writers in the plural -ens and -ans, instead of -ents and -ants, as : momens for moments, enfans for enfanis. This orthography, however, is not to be recommended. 2. The following nouns in al and ail do not form their plural in %vXy but take an s. Le bed, the ball. V ^entail, m. the fan. le cal, callus. I'^pouvantail, m. the scarecrow. le Tiarval, the narwhal. un portail, a portal, front gate. le camaval, the carnival. le poitrail, the poitrel. le r€galy the regale, treat. le serail, the seraglio. U ddlail, the particulars. I'ail, garlic (has in Plur. both lei le gouvemail, the helm, rudder. ails and les aidx). Plural : Les bals, les cals, les d&.ails, les ^ventaih, etc. Note. JLe Mail, cattle, makes in the plural les bestiaux. 3. The usual plural of ciel is cieuXy the heavens ; there is, how- ever, a regular plural, les dels, meaning: 1, the testers; 2, the cli- mats ; 3, the skies of pictures. 4. L^ml, the eye, has in the plural les yetix. Des mis de hceuf are oval or round windows. Aieul, has aieuls when it means grand- &tbers, andai'eiw; in the sense of ancestors. 5. How compound words' form their plural : — 1. When a word is composed of a substantive and an adjective, or of two robstantives, both take the mark of the plural Ex.: — FLTJRAI, OF Noima. 215 LeA htavcx-frlrts, the brothers-in-law. Jjes belles-sceurs, the sisters-in-law. Les choux-Jleurs, the cauliflowers. Les chefs-lieux, the chief-towns (of counties). 2. But when a word is composed of two substantives separated by a pre- position, the first alone takes the plural termination. Ex.: — L^s chefs-d'oeuvre, the masterpieces. Ij€s arc3-en-ciel, the rainbows. 3. When a word consists of a substantive and a verb or preposition, the substantive alone can take the sign of the plural, if required bj the seme. Ex.: — Les tire-bottes, the boot-jacks. Les essuie-mains, the towels. Les garde-fous, the balusters. 4. When there is no substantive in the compound word, none of the components can take the mark of the plural. Ex.: — Les passe-partout {not jxisse-partouts) , the master-keys. L>es forte-piano, the pianos. 5. The words : la grand'mere, the grandmother ; la grand'tante^ grand- aunt; la grand'rue, the main street ; la grand'route, the highway, — hare, in the plural, les grand' meres, les grand'tantes, etc. 6. The following nouns take in tho plural another meaning than in the singular : — SINOULAB. PLTjnAI,. Le ciseau, the chisel. les ciseaux, the scissors. la lunette, the telescope. les lunettes, the spectacles. le fer, iron. les fers, the fetters, chains. la grace, grace, pardon. les graces, grace, charms. U gage, the pawn, pledge. • les gages, the wages. la mesure, the measure. les mesures, the measures. la viande, meat. les viandes, food. la troupe, the troop. les troupes, the troops. la luiniere, the light. les lutnieres, knowledge. Vaboi, the barking. les abois, agony* la defense, the defence. les defenses, the tusks, fangfS 7. Substantives which have no singular in French t — Les annaJcs, f. annals. ^5 gens, m. people 2a6 aticetres, m. ancestors. k» hardeSf f« cloUieA. ^16 n. DEUXIEME LE9OS. le$ alentovn, m. ) . lee gens, m. people. Us environs, m. > *^® environs. ^ math^matigues, f. matheroaticft les broussaiUes, f. brashwood. les mat€riaux, niaterials. les d^combres, m. rubbish. les moeurs, f. the manners. les d^ris, m. the remains les mouchettes, f. the snuffers. les d(fpens, m. cost. des mouchettes, a pair oi snoffers. lea entrailles, f. the entrails les pleurs, f. the tears. leM Jrais, m. expenses. les Unhbres, f. darkness. lea fun€raUles, f. funeral rites. les vivres, m. Tictuals. THEME 8. 1. We had many balls last winter.^ 2. Are these fans dear! 3. No, they are not dear. 4. The heavens declare' the gbry of Gk>d. 5. The great portals of those churches are beautiful. ^. Wo honor' the virtues of our ancesters. 7. The eyes of {de T) man are the mirror* of his soul. 8. The eyes of a mother watch" over her child's life. 9. I have two brothers-in-law and three sistei-s-in- law. 10. Those pictures are masterpieces. 11. I want® two or three towels. 12. These master-keys must be very old. 13. Both my (mes detix) grandaunts are dead ; but my grandmothers are stiU alive (en vie). 14. Lend me your scissors, if you please. 15. The fetters are made of iron. 16. Do you know the environ^ of London? 17. Yes, I know them. 18. Bring me a pair of snuffers. 19. Do you like vegetables ? 20. I hke them, when they afe dry. 21. I found this ring' under the rubbish in my garden. 22. The Httle hummmg-birds {oiseatix-mouches) are the jewels' of nature* (Def. art). 23. I study^ mathematics. 1. Use the article, see Lesson 3. 2. To declare — Annoncer. 3. ffonoror. 4. Mi- rdr, m. 5. VeUler. 6. II me faut (see Part 1. p. 148, 3). 7. Baguey f. 8. Bioou, m. 9. t:tudier. READING LESSON. LB CASTOR. The Beaver. Dans le nord de TAm^rique, sur les bords des €6111^8 et des grands lacs du Canada, loin des grand'routes, habite le castor. Lb * In these Tbomes, words, the last letter of which ia printed In itaUoa, tare tbz same in Frenoh and English PLtJBAL Of Kotms. 217 partie la pliw singuliere de son corps est sa qnette.* Ses pattcs de devant {fore-feef) sont des especes de mains, dont il se sort fort adroitement^. Les castors entreprennent des travaux tres-consid»- rablcs pour se construire des habitations solides et commodes. Ce sont des cabanes (huts) ou plutot des especes de maisonnettes b&- fcies dans I'eau, avec deux issues, Tune pour aller k terre, I'autre jour se Jeter k I'eau. La forme de cet Edifice' est presque toujours ovale ou ronde ; il y en a depuis quatre ou cinq pieds jusqu'k huit ou dix de diametre et de deux ou trois (Stages.* Les murailles* onfc jusqu'k deux pieds d'^paisseur;* elles sont elevdes k plorab' sur un pilotis,* qui sert en meme temps de fondement et de plancher k la maison. Les castors aiment k ronger* continuellement de I'^corce {harTc)^ et lis en font ample provision pour se nounir pendant I'hiver. Chaque cabana a son magasin, et ils ne vont jamais piller^** leurs voisins Ces cabanes contiennent quelquefois jusqu'k trente castors, qui vivent toujours en paix ensemble. Si quelque castor apcr9oit UD ennemi, il donne un grand coup, de sa queue, sur I'eau. A ce signal, tons les autres plongent dans I'eau, ou se r^fugient dans les cabanes. 1. Tall. 2. Sldlftilly. 3. Building. 4. Floor, story. 6. The waUs. 6. Thiofc ness. 7. Perpendicularly. 8. Tale, post. 9. To gpiaw. 10. To plunder. CX)NVERSATION. Ob habite le castor 11 habito dans le nord de I'Am^ rique, sur les bords des fleuvei et des lacs. Quelle est la partie la plus re- C'est sa queue. marquable de son corps ? Comment sont ses pattes de de- Ce sont des especes de mains dont vant? il se sert fort adroitemcnt. LcB castors que fontrils de cu- Ds batissent des cabanes dans rioux ? Teau. 218 in. TBOISIEME LEgON. De quelle niani^re les batissent- as? Quelle est la forme de ces mai- sonnettes ? Y a-fc-il plusieurs Stages ? Les murailles sont-elles solides ? Y a-t-il plusieurs castors dans nn tel Edifice ? Que fontrils quand on ennemi apprpche ? Us font deux issues, Tune pour aller h terre, I'autre pour se Je- ter a I'eau. La forme en est ordinairemen\ ronde ou ovale. Oui, les cabanes sont de deux ou trois Stages. Tres-solides ; elles ont jusqu'k deux pieds d'epaisseur. Ces cabanes contiennent quelque- fois jusqu'k trente castors qui vivent ensemble en paix. lis se jettent tons dans I'eau, ou se refugient dans les cabanes. Ill, TROISIEME LE9ON USB OP THE ARTICLE. I. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE IS USED IN FRENCH AND NOT IN ENGLISH : 1. Before abstract nouns, when taken in their whole extent, as L'amiti€, f. friendship. la paresse, idleness. I'amour, m. love. la vieUlesse, old age. la hont€, goodness. V occupation, f. employment. la patience, patience. la jeunesse, joath. Examples: — Le tanps est pr^cieux, time is precious. Le vice est odieux, vice is odious. La modestie est une belle vertu, modesty is a fine virtae. Jj occupation est le meiUeur remede centre Vennui. Occupfttion is the best remedy against wearisomen«ii« USE OP THE ABTICLE. 219 2. Before collective names of corporations, bodies, govemmentB, sciences, religious creeds, seasons, metals, etc., as: La noblesse, nobility. le chrisiianisme, Christiamty. le gouvemement, (government. le judaisme, Judaism. la monarchie, monarchy, Vhiver, m. winter. I'histoire, f. history. Vor, m. gold. la gfygraphie, geography. le fer, iron. 3. Before words which represent a whole genus or speoifis, ms t L'homme est mortel, man is mortal. Les voix des animaux sont tres-diff€rentes. The voices of animals are very different. 4. Before the following and other nouns taken in a general sense : L'homme, man. la hi, la\r. les hommes, men. le son, fate. le del, heaven. Vusage, la coutume, custom. la terre, earth. les mceurs, manners. la vie, life. la /aim, hunger. la mort, dcttth. la soif, tliirst. le temps, time. le diner, dinner. le malheur, misfortune. le dejeuner, breakfast. 5. When particular parts or qualities of an organic body are mentioned, as : Ce gar<^on a la tete trh-petite. This boy has a very little head. Cette femme a la bouche petite et les yeux bleu$. This woman has a little mouth and blue eyes. Le loup a la tete longue, le nez effi.l€ et les oreilles Uroitet. The wolf has a long head, a thin nose, and small care. La Jille aux yeux Ueus, the blue-eyed girl. 6. When in English the possessive case is used, as: My father's house, la maison de mon pert. The king's palace, le palais du roi. 7. Before adjectives used substantively* as : J*aime le vert, I am fond of green. L^es riches nn donnent pas toujours. Rich men do not always givA. 220 m. TROISIEME LEgON. 8. Before proper names of countries, provinces, rivers, monn tains, and winds, as : • L' Angleterre est riche, England is ricli. Le mont V€suve, Mount Vesuvius. La France est plus grande que Vltalie. France is larger than Italy. Note. Further particulars on proper names will be found in the sixth Lesson. 9. Before nouns of dignity, and titles, followed by proper names, Admiral Nelson, Vamiral Nelson. Professor A., le pro/esseur A. 10. The definite aiticle replaces the English indefinite artiol©? when the price of things is indicated, as : Three francs a pound, trois francs la livre. Five francs a yard, cinq francs le metre. 11. In the following phrases the definite article is used : A l'€cole — a l*€glise, at or to school ; at or to chorch. It s'est cuss€ la jambe, he has broken his leg. L'^p€e a la main, a sword in his hand. Je vous souhaite le ban jour, I wish you good morning Jt n'ai pas le temps, I have not time. H n'a pas le sou, he has not a farthing. J^ai mal a la tele, I have a headache. %Pai mal aux dents, I have a toothache. Soyez le bienvenu, — la bienvenue, etc., be welcome. La semaine pass^e (derniere), last week. 12. After dont between nouns, as : Un homme dont la reputation est perdue, est malkeureuxt A man whose good reputation is lost is unhappy. n. REPETITION OF THE ARTICLE. The article must be repeated in French before every substantive. Examples : The mind and heart, l*espnt et le cceur* The shoemaker, hatter, and tailor. Lie bottier, le chapelier, et le tailleur, I have bought meat, cheese, and fruits. J'oi achei^ de la tnomie, du froma^ et dea Jrui^ USB OP THE ARTICLE. 221 1. "Vlrtne is tbc highest^ good (Men, m.). 2. Men are mortaL 3. Modesty adorns'' youth. 4. Human life is short. 5. Man is liable^ to a variety of (a bien des) changes.* 6. Gold and silver cannot render* man happy. 7. Men of (d\in) real genius® are scarce. 8. Black and white are two opposite^ colors. 9. Beauty and wit® are valuable® endowments {avaiitages), when heightened sTeleves) by modesty. 10. Iron and steel are more useful than gold and silver. 11. How much a pound ? 12. The love of glory {Def. art\), the fear of shame,^** are often the cause of great deeds. ^" 13. Summer is warm, but winter is cold. 14. The instruction* of adversity are wholesome (salutaires) , though unpleasing;" the lea- eons of prosperity are pleasing, but often pernicious. 15. Geogra" phy is a very useful science. 16. Painting,^ sculpture, and poe- try^^ belong to the imagination. 17. Good and bad seem to bo blended (meles) together through all nature. 18. Hypocrisy is an homage which vice pays {rend) to virtue. 19. Do you know Gen- eral Knox? 20. Yes, I know him. 21. White garments" are the symbol of innocence. 22. The knife and fork are broken. 23. Let us go to church. 24. The boys were at school this morning. 25. Fear^* and ignorance are the sources of superstition. 2G Good wine is sold (jse vend) [for] four shillings a bottle. 1. Grand. 2. Omer. 3. Si{jet. 4. Changement, m. 6. Ecndre. 6. Vrai g^nte. 7. Oppos6, 8. Esprit. 9. Pr6cieux. 10. La honte. 11. Desagriable. 12. La peinture. 13. La poisie. 14. Fttements. 16. Feur, f. 16. Action^ f. m. THE DEFINITE ARTICLE 13 OMITTED I 1 . Before the cardinal numbers which come after the names of sovereigns, as; Henry the Fourth, Henri quatre. Louis the Eighteenth, Low's XVJII {dix^huit). Greorge the Third, Georcje trois. 2. Before the cardinal numbers used in quotations, as: Book the first, chapter the fifth t4vre premier f chapiire cii^. 222 in. TROISdlME LEgON. 3. Before plm, used in the sense of the more. Ex. : Plus je la vois, plus je I'aime, the more I see her, the more I love her. IV. TUB INDEFINITE ARTICLE IS OMITTED IN FRENCH I 1. Before national and professional names, when the subjeci ia i noun or personal pronoun, as : Je 8uis Anglais, I am an Englishman. ^f(m pere €tait m€decin, my father was a physician. Note. But it is expressed after c'est and void or voUa, and also when the noun is qualified. C'est un Amjlais, he is an Englishman. Void un offider, here is an officer. M. Dubois €tait un m€dedn distingu€, Mr. Dubois was a distinguished phy sician. 2. It is also omitted in appositioas, that is, when a substantive is used to qualify another, as : L'avare, comidie par AfoUere, the Miser, a comedy by Moli^re. Auguste, Jils dt M. S., Augustus, a son of Mr. S. Munich, ville d' Allemagne, Munich, a city of Germany. 3. In the title of a book : A French grammar, Grammaire fran^aise. A history of England, Uistoire d' Angleterre. 4. After the word quel, used to express surprise : What a noise you make ! quel bmit vous faites ! 5. Before the words, quantite, a quantity; nomhre^ a number; force, a great number, when they are used adverbially. Ex. : Je I'ai vu nombre de fois, I have seen him many tmies. n m'a donn€ quantity de jolies chases. He gave me a great many pretty things. 6. The indefinite article is left out in French and supplied by par, before substantives that denote time, or in mentioning what if paid for salary, wages, etc. : Five guineas a month, cinq guin€espar moU, So much a lesson, tant par legon. 7. Sometimes after jamais, never, as : Jamais g^n^ral ne s'est plus distingu^. JBifaver has a general distinguished himself mort. USB OP THE ABTICLIL 223 8. In the following and other expressions, in which the noun and verb are inseparably connnected : Trouver moyen, to find (a) means. Faire signe, to make a sign. Faire present, to make a present. Mettre Jin, to put an end or stop. Litter bataille, to fight a battle. Prendre exemple, to take an example. Rendre service, to render a service. Ne dire mot, to sslj not a word. THEM9 "^ 1. Book the tenth, chapter the third. 2. Charle* the Second. king of (rf') Spain, son of Philip the Fourth, left his kingdom (roy- aume) to Philip the Fifth 3. William the Third, king of Eng- land, married (epousa) the princess Mary, daughter of James (^Jacques) the Second. 4. Apelle* was a painter.^ 5. Socrates' was a philosopher, Cicero' an orator (^teur). 6. Is your father a physician? 7. No, sir; he is a lawyer (avocat). 8. Henry's uncle is a skilful^ physician. 9. Who is that gentleman ?' 10. He is {cest^ an oflBcer. 11. How much do you charge {demandez- voiis) for your lessons? 12. I charge ten franc* a lesson. 13. A German Grammar. 14. A Roman history, from the foundation* of Rom« to (Jusqu'ci) the destruction of the Roman empire. 16. What an unhappy situation ! 16. How much does the bookseller' pay you for your novels?' 17. He pays me five crowns (ecus) a sheet.* 18. We went to Caen, a large town of Normandy.^® 19. The Duke of York, a prince of the blood royal. 20. I am read- ing the '* Misanthrope," a comedy by Moliere. 21. I shall find a means to satisfy" him. 22. He said not a word. 23. Our neigh- bor made us a sign to leave" the room. 1. Peintrt. 2. Socrate. 3. Ciciron. 4. Habile. 6. Montieur, fl. Fondation^ 7. Libraire. 8. Moman, m. 9. Feuille. 10. De Normandie. 11. Satitfak-e, 12. 22^ * in. TEOISIEMB LEgON. V. THE ARTICLE IS OMITTED IN BOTH . LANQUAajaS : — 1. In many proverbs, as : Contentement passe richesse, content surpasses wealth. Pauvret€ n'est pas vice, poverty is no disgrace. Mauvaise herbe croit toujours. 2. In enumerating several substantives in the partitive sense, when summed up by tons or rien, as : Hommes, femmes, enfants, tons voulaieni le voir. Men, women, children, all wished to see him. 3. After ni — «i, €-?■-: — :vti, when the nouns are taken in the partitive sense, as : Ni or ni argent, neither gold nor silver. Ni pr teres, ni menaces ne pouvaient ['engager a, etc. Neither prayers nor threats could induce him to, etc. Soil crainte, soil ignorance, it ne voulait rien dire. Be it fear or ignorance, he would say nothing. 4. The partitive article is further omitted after prepositions wheo the noun following forms with them an adverbial phrase, as : Avec plaisir, with pleasure. par jour, daily, a day. avec patience, with patience. par an, yearly, a year. avec soin, with care. par mois, monthly, a month. avec €leqance, elegantly. sur mer, ) , ", . . yhj water, by sea. sans argent, without money. par mer, ) •' "' sans facons, without ceremonies. sur terre, > , , , ... , , ?■ by land. sans peine, without trouble. par terre, ) sans peril, without danger. sous peine de mort, on pain of death 6. No article is used before a substantive which is repeated with a preposition, as : Promesses sur promesses, promises upon promises. De temps en temps, from time to time. De siecle en siecle, from age to age. 6. In the following expressions, where the noun forms but one idea with the verb antecedent, as : Avoir /aim, to be hungry. prendre patience, to have patience avoir totf, to be thirs^. prendre soin, to take can. USB OP 7flE ARTICLE. 225 axyyir soin, to take care. /aire grace, to grant pardon. amir peur, to be afraid. /aire attention, to pay attention. avoir bonne mine, to look "well. Jaire grand cos, to value. avoir piti€, to have pity. fj-ire peur, to frighten. avoir honte, to be ashamed. faire mention, to mention. avoir raison, to be right. faire fortune, to make one's fortune. avoir tor*, to be wrong. rendre compte, ^ "~ account for. avoir sujet, to have occasion for. rendre raison, avoir den'iein, to intend. rendre visite, to visit. avoir envie, to have a desire, a mind. porter envie, to envy. avoir besoin, to want. courir risque, to run risk. avoir coutume, to be in the habit, to demander pardon, to beg one's par* use. don. prendre part, to jom. demander grace, to beg for grace. prendre garde, to take care. ajouier foi, to give credit. prendre cong€, to take leave. 7. Further, after many verbs which are followed by cfo, a, or m. asi — Combler de bienfaitH, to load with benefits. Vivre de pain, to live upon bread. Monter a nheval, to mount (get) on horseback. Monter en voiture, to enter a carriage. Tomber de chevul, to fall from horseback. Descendre de cheval, to alight. Se mfftre a table, to go to dinner. Se lever de tul>le, to rise from dinner. Perdre de vue, to lose sight of. Mount de faim, to die of hunger. Monrir de froid, to die of cold, to freeze. Trembler de peur, to tremble with fear. Etre maladt de chagrin, to be ill with grief. THEME 6. 1, Charity* begins at home ( par soi^meme). 2. Necessity baa no law (loi) 3. Games,^ conversation, tbecitre, nothing diverts (distrait) him. 4. Nobody was satisfied ; father, uncles, aunts and brothers, all thought themselves {se crurent) neglected.' 5. This man has neither vice« nor vutues ; neither talents nor defects.^ 6. 226 m. THOISIEME LEgON. We expected our friend from day to day. 7. It does not suffice to heap (d'entasser') facts* upon facts, to load® your memory; you must exercise' also your judgment.® 8. I shall do it with pleasure. 9. One florin a day. 10. Ten pounds a year, 11. The poor woman was starving with hunger and (with) cold. 12. You are always right J I have been wrong. 13. Have pity on (de) my wealiness.' 14. The least noise^** frightens me. 15. Those who speak without reflection, are exposed to many (« hien des) errors. 16. I mupt take leave of you. 17. Many poor people live on {de) bread and potatoes only. 1. Chariti. 2. Jifu, m. 3. N'dgligis. 4. I)mmer. 2. Shrill. S. Lungs. 4. Shoulder. 5. To hi8s. 6. In spite of. 7. To manage. 8. The waves. 9. Noise. 10. To deliver. 11. To climb. 12. To force. 13. Subterranean. 14. To shave. l[. A sword. 16. To sting. 17. Con tinned. IS. Century. CONVERSATION. La nature avjut-elle favorise Au contraire, elle semblait lui Demosthcne? avoir refus^ tous les moyene de devenir orateur. Quels d^fauts avait-il done ? II begayait et ne pouvait pronon- cer la lottre r. .^^omment dtait sa voix ? , ^j^lo-^tait desagr^able et glapis- v^ sante. Comment s'cn tira-t-ijl lorslju'il II s'en tira si mal qu'il fut siffl^ prononga son dRmicr dis- . {hissed). cours? ^f ^ Fut-il decourag^ par co resul- Non, il ne pcrdit pas courage ; au tat? ^ contrau-e, il pcrsista dans son ^ ' desscin. Ek (y)minent s'y prit-il ? II s'exer^ait continuellement et de differentee maoi^ret} 228 IV. QUATBTftME LEgON. Dites-moi comment. Bstrce qu'il i^ussit dans ses ef- forts? Ses harangues existentrclles en- oore? H mettait de petits caillonx dans sa bouche pour se defaire (rid of ) de I'habitude de begayer. II r^ussit si parfaiteraent qu'il de- vint k la fin le plus grand ora- teur qui ait exists. Oui, elles ont ^t^ conserv^es, et elles sont encore aujourd'hui ad- mirees comme des chefe-d'oeuYre d'^loquence. IV. QUATRlfeME LE9ON. SPECIAL USE OF DE AND A. In general we may say de is used when made of, composed of, coming from, belonging to, can be understood ,* whereas a is employed when for the purpose ofm meant. I. DE IS USED : — 1. After adverbs of quantity, as : heaucoup, pen, plus, moitUy tarU, etc. (See Part I. L. 6, p. 42.) 2. Before a limiting word which follows a noun used partitively and preceded by a word denoting quantity. Ex.: — II y eut deux hommes db tu^s, there were two men killed. Void quelque chose de plus, here is something more. Void un homme de trop, here is a man too many. J^ai deux chambres de budes, I have two rooms let. Note. The noun may be understood. Ex.: J'en ai une delouie. Or rien or personne may supply the place of the noun and its preceding word. Ex.: // n'y a personne de malade chez nous, there is no one sick at oar hooM. Rien de bon, nothing good. SPECIAL USB OP DE AND A. 229 i>. As ifl English, r/^r nouns txpressing quantity, numbert '•i^asure, rjeight, etc., ill . — Une quaruit^de nuix, a quaatity of walnuts. Une paire de bos, a pair ol stockings. Une livT« de beurre, a poa'il of butter. Une piiiX de toile, a piftije r f linen. Un morcMu de froinafj^, <> piece of cheese. Une main de papier, a (rare of 'paper. Une bouteille de vin, & 'i> r.tle of wine. 4. Afbcr adjec'J ;.'/• ienoting dimension or age, as : — A wall irrzz'cj feet rj^~ : un mur haut de vingt pieds or un mur qui a vingl pieds DE hai'2 or iiTt h luteur. A uoy ten yiiejB oVl, un (petit) gar^on de dix ans. A table siz. tyA, long, une table tongue de six pieds or de six pieds de longy.ieur. NoTK. It m'jL-f be observed here that with adjectives of dimension, the verb to he may be rendered in French by avoir, as : — This tower is 120 feet high. Cett^, tour ▲ cent vingt pieds DE hauteur. 5. When an English adjective is rendered in French by a noun, the order of the substautives is inverted in English. In French the latter is preceded by de. Ex.: — A witty man, un homme d'esprit. A gold watch, une montre d'or. Silk stockings, des bos de soie. The Russian Ambassador, Vamhassadeur de Russie. Irish linen, la toile d'lrlande. Spanish wool, la laine d'Espagne. Burgundy wine, U vin de Bourgogne. 6. De is used, as in English, after a common noun followed by its proper name. Ex. : — Le royaume d'Espagne, the kingdom of Spain. L'ile de Make, the island of Malta. La ville de Londres, the city of London. Lelacde Geneve, the lake of Geneva. Except the combinations with mont, rue. place, and ^glise, as: le MxML Blanc, U Moot Etna, rue Richelieu, place Venddme, I'^liae Saint-Sulpiee, «te. 230 IV. QUATBIEME LEgON. 7. After many adjectives it takes the place of the English unthy from, of, by, in, etc. (See L. 8, compl. of adj. 1.) Ex.: — Fall of ardor, plein de feu. Greedy after money, avide d'argaU. Dressed in black, vetu de noir. I am pleased with my situation. .Te suis content de ma position. I am deprired of everything, je suisjfriv€de tout. 8. De m used for than, instead of que, after pliLs, more, and moins, less, when these adverbs are followed by a numeral adjective or substantive : — n a plus de sir ans, he is more than six years old. 9. For in, after a superlative, before the name of a place : — Une des meilleures institutions db Boston, one of the best in«titutionfl in Boston. » Le premier de notre €coh, the first in our school. TRENCH COMPOUND NOUNS WITH DB. 10. English nouns compounded with two substantives are gener- ally rendered in French by two separate substantives joined by de, when one expresses the nature, species, or quality of the other. (Compare p. 240, 2.) In French the order must be altered, the last coming first, and a preposition inserted. Westminster bridge, for instance, must be translated as if it were bridge of Westminster : le font de Westminster. \. Deia used when coming Jrom, belonging to, made of can be understood, tis: — A toothache, un mal de dents. A headache, un mal de tite. The town-hall, l*h6td de ville. A sea-fish, un poisson de mer. A feather-bed, un lit de plumes. A holiday, an jour de fete, A gold mine, une mine d'or. The moon-light, le clair de tune. A masterpiece, un dief-Wcetivre. SPECIAL USE OP DE AUD A. 231 2. When in the English word the second component den'^tes a poison ot an animal, in French de is always used, as : — A schoolmaster, un maitre d Vco/«. A chambermaid, une femme de ciambrt. The dancing-master, le maitre de danse. The music-mistress, la maitresse de musiqrte, A iciddle-horse, un cheval de selle. A sea-fish^ un poisson de mar. THEME 7. 1. Give me much bread and little me it. 2. You must use more prudence. 3. I have bought a quantity of apples and pears. 4. You make too much noise. 5. How many children has your aunt t 6. She has four children. 7. You have eaten too many cherries. 8. We have not bread enough.* 9. Mr. Henry has a groat many friends. 10. We had a great deal of pleasure, 11. I bought a pound of cheese. 12. We want a dozen pens, a bottle of ink, and two quires of paper. 13. A great number of friends remained attached* to me. 14. They have built a wall eighty feet long and ten feet high. 15. How many boys were there killed ? 16. Tbere were six killed (see § 2). 17. IIow many soldiers yrere there wounded? 18. There were six books lost. 19. How many were there found? 20. How many rooms are there let in that house? 21. Have you anything good? 22. I have nothing bad. 23. When my sister was a girl of seven years, she lived with my mother in Italy. 24. Have you a gold or a silver watch ? 25. My watch is of gold. 26. Irish linen is as'' good as Dutch' linen. 27. I prefer Burgundy wine to Spanish wine. 28. The kingdom of Spain is larger than the kingdom of Portuga/. 29. The city of Pari* is older than the city of Berlin. 30. Is that gentleman* your music- master? 31. No ; he is my writmg*-master. 1« AUachit. 2. Justi. 8. D'Hollande. 4. Monsieur. 5. ^crUure,t. *A$H»t enonfli, li placed «(Ur the substantiT* la Engllih, and alwaya before in 232 IV. QUATRIEMB LEgON. THEME 8. 1. To-morrow is (c'est) a LoliMay; it will bo a day of happi- ness.^ 2. Human life is full of disappointments.' 3. Mr. B. is a young man endowed* with (c?') wit* and judgment. 4. Wf» were very much pleased with his behavior.® 5. I was in England, but I have not seen Westminster bridge. 6. Burgundy wine is rery dear. 7. Spanish wool is better than German wool. 8. I have sold my gold watch. 9. Mr. B. always wears^ silk stockings. 10. My sisters and I (we) have taken* a walk by (aw) moonlight. 11. The battle-field was covered mth the dead and dying. 12. This girl is the chambermaid of the Duchess of L. 13. Who are these gentlemen ? 14. One is my music-master, and the other is my sister's dancing-master. 15. Let us go to gallons dans) the dining-room; dinner is served {servi). 16. I shall not dine to- day ; I have a bad" headache. 1. FHe. 2. Bonheur. 3. Revers. 4. Doui. 6. Esprit, 6. ConduUe^ t. 7, Por- ter. 8. To take a walk = se promener, 9. Violent, n. SPECIAL USB OP a. 1. The preposition a alone (without article) is used after a verb in the following expressions : Condamner a mort, to condemn to death. Fermer a clef, to lock. Timber a terre, to fall to the floor or grotmd. AUer a pied, to go on foot, to walk. AUer a cheval, to ride, to go on horseback. Monter a cheval, to get or mount on horseback. Tomber a qenoux, ) , , , , „ r >■ to kneel down. ce mettre a genoux, > Se mettre a table, to sit down to dinner. 2. When two substantives make a compound word in English, their order is inverted in French, and the prepc sition a intervenes, when the one expresses the use of the other, or when for the pun pose of, by means of may be understood : T^e ulk-wonn, lever "h $oie* SPECIAL USE OP DE AND A. 238 A milk-pot, vn jwt a laiL* A teacup^ une tasse a thg. A repeater, une montre a r^pHition. A windmill, an moulin a vent. A paper-mill, un moulin a papier. A powder-mill (a mill for powder), un moulin h poudre. Gunpowder, de la poudre a canon. A dining-room, une salle a manger. A bedroom, une chavibre a coucher. A wineglass, un vene a vin.* A coffee-cup, une tasse a caf6. A steam-engine, une machine a vapeur. A steamboat, un bateau a vapeur. Fire-arms, des armes a feu. 3. If the second word be^ns with a vowel or // mute, the artiole is commonly inserted, as : An ink-bottle, une bouteille k Vencre Cor a encre). A water-jug (pitcher), une cruche ^ Veau (or a eauf. 4. When the compound word denotes a place where certain things aio sold or kept in quantities, the article is also used with a, as : The horse-market, le march€ aux chevaux. The fish-market, le march€ aux poissom. The corn-market, la halle aux bl^s. 5. A together with the article is further used to call a dish or di-ink after its principal ingredient, as : A milk-soup, une soujie au lait. Coffee with milk, du caf€ au lait. A cream- tart, une tarte a la crime. A pancake with herbs, une omelette dux Jines herbes. NoTB. But wc say du si/rop de groseille, not syrop a gro$eille, cnitant synip, because this is made entirely of currants. 6. To denote the difierent kinds of hunting, shooting, etc., afi : A deer-hunt, la chasse aux chevreuih. Fox-hunting, la chasse aux renards. 7. A 13 generally employed to translate expressions in which 7ffi(h * Un pot de lait, wi verre de vin, signify a pot of milk, a glaaa of wine ; pot cut lait refers both to the Yessel and to its contents. 234 IV. QUATRlfiMB LSgOH. is expressed or could be employed, or wHen having oonld be osecL Ex.: Unc maison a deux dagrs, a two-story hotise. Vn chapeau a grands bords, a broad-brimmed hat. Une voiture a deux places, a double-seated carriage. THEME 9. 1. I have bought six teficups ; take^ them into the dining-room, 2. Where is the oiP-hottle f 3. Who has broken this flower-pot ? 4. Bring me a wineglass and two teaspoons. 5. Why has he been condemned to death ? 6. He has committed^ a murder.^ 7. Your room is locked. 8. Is this an ink-bottle f 9. No ; it is a vinegar^-hottle. 10. Let us sit down {rnettons-nous) to dinner. 11. Did you observe* that man with^ black hair ? 12. You must buy another milk-pot. 13. Is this the corn-market? 14. I always keep (keep always) fire-arms in my bedroom for my safety' during . the night ; but I have no gunpowder at present, thus {ainsi) my fire-arms are useless.' l.Portez. 2. Huile,t. Z. Commis, P.p. of commettre. i, Vinaigre. 5. Eemar- quer. 6. Aux, pi. 7. Suret6, f. 8. Inutile. 9. Meurtre, m THEME 10. 1. Whom have you called? 2, I have been to the fish-market; however I have bought no fish, because it was too dear.^ 3. I went fox-hunting yesterday, and to-morrow I shall see a deer-hunt. 4. What had you for dessert ? 5. We had cherry-pie^ and a cream? tar*,} 6. Can you tell me where the hay-store is? 7. It is near the horse-market. 8. Who invented gunpov)der? 9. Ber- (hold ScQwarz, a German monk * 10. The poor girl has broken s milk-pot, two wineglasses, and several teacups. 11. The Qreal Eastern is the largest steamship in the {au) world. 12. Call th« milk-woman ;• I must buy a pot of milk. L CIm, 'i, Qdkau. 3. Crinu, f. 4. TourU^ f. 5. MoiM, 0. Laitikn' Hames op countries, towns, etc. 235 V. CINQUlfiME LEgON. PECULIARITIES IN THE USE OF NAIMES OF COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. (See Part L.L.VII.) 1. Afl mentioned in the First Part (7th lesson), the definite ar tide is put before the names of countries, provinces, rivers, and mountains. But the names of countries and islands, which have the same name as cities cituated in them, such as Naples, Bade, Genes (Genoa), Malts, Candle, etc., are used without the article. Eixcept, however: le Hanovre and le Luxemlxmrg. 2. Further, the definite article is always retained with names of countries which are only used in the plural, and in those which are compounded with an adjective. Ex.: — The productions of India, les productions de» Indet. The governor of the Netherlands. Le gouvemeur des Pays-bas. The queen of Great Britain. La reine de la Grande-Bretagne. 3. In the following cases de only, without the article, is used be fore names of countries ; — 1. When sovereigns, courts, and titles are spoken of. Ex.: — La reine d' Angleterre, the queen of England. Le Grand-due de Bade, the grand-duke of Baden. NoTB. With the names of some countries that are not Earcpaan, the ■rticle is generally used, as : — L'empereur de la Chine, du Br^sU, etc. The emperor of China, of Brazil, etc. -* However, with Persia, la Perse, and Egypt, VEgyjpte, only de is used » — Lsrcide Peru, the king of Persia. 286 ^. ciNQmfiME Lfegos. 2. Wiere the names of countries have the meaning of an adjective (S6t« alsoL. IV. 4), as: — L'argent de France, French money. La sole (Vltalie, the silk of Italy. Du fromage de Suisse, Swiss cheese {de may be omitted). 3. After the verbs : venir^ to come ; revenir, to come back, to return ; at- river, to arrive, and the noun le retour, if the name of the country is femi nine, as : — II est venu de France, he has come from France. Lorsqite j'e '^evins d'Espagne, when I returned from Spain. A mon retour d' Italic, on my return from Italy. But if the same is masculine, the definite article is used, as:-^ tParrive du Tyrol, du Mexique, du Portugal, etc. 4. After words, such as empire, royaume (kingdom), diuJi^, vUle, Ue (isle), as in English (see L. IV. 6) : — U empire d'Autriche, the Empire of Austria. La ville de Paris, the city of Paris. 4. Both to and in used after a word signifying going, coming, sending, living, being, etc., before names of countries in the singu- lar, must be rendered in French by the preposition en, without any article. Ex. : — We are going to America, nous allons en Am&ique. He is to go back to Belgium, {/ doit retoumer en Belgique. I send him to Switzerland, je I'envoie en Suisse. My brother is in America, mon frere est en Am€rique. Kouen is in France, Rouen est situ€e en France, 5. If the name of the country be accompanied by an adjective, dans with the definite article must be used : Dans la Suisse fran^aise, in French Switzerland. Dans I'Allemagne m&idionale, in southern Germany. 6. The article is omitted before names of towns, villages, etc., as: — Anvers, Antwerp. Livoume, Leghorn. AthcneSf Athens. Lishonne, Lisbon. BruxeUes, Brussels. Londres, London. thuvres, Dover. Lyon, Lyons. Geti^e, /Jeneva. Venise, Venice. NAMES OP COUNTRIES, TOWNS, ETC. 2St NoTB. A few names of towns are preceded by the article : — Le Havre, Harre. la Rochelle, Rochelle. la Haie, the Hague. le Caire, Cairo, etc. 7. The names of rivers and m/3untams are preceded by the definite article, as in English : La Seine, the Seine. le Tihre, the Tiber. le iiJtdne, tlie Rlione. le Danube, the Danube. le Rhin, tiie Rl'.ine. h, Moselle, the Moselle. le» Alpes, the Alps. fe Riyhi, the Righi. 8. Both to and at or in before names of places are rendered by a, Ex. : — Are you going to Brussels," aZZer-wMS a Bruxellesf He was at Rome and Naples, il ^lait a Rome et a Naples. 9. After partir^ to set out, to leave, the preposition pour must be used before names of countries with the article, before names of cities without it : — Nous pariirons pour I'Espagne et le Portugal. We will set out {or leave) for Spain and Portugal. Elle est partie pour Paris et Lyon, She left for Paris and Lyons. THEME 11. 1. I prefer the wines of Germany to the wines of Spain. 2. We shall soon go to Switzerland and Italy. 3. Naples may ( petU) be called a paradise,^ from its (a cause de so) beauty and fertility.^ 4. This merchant has bought Italian, silk, Spanish wool, and French wines. 5. My grandfather lives in the West Indies.' 6. I set out for Egypt to-morrow. 7. This cheese comes from Switzerland. 8. Cologne is situated* on {sur) the Rhine. 9. The Alps are higher than the Pyrenees. 10. The emperor of Russia, Peter* the Great, died at St. Petersburgh in the year {en) 1725. 11. Sicily is the granary* of (§ 1) Italy, and Italy the garden of Europe. 1. Paradis, m. 2. FerttiiU, 8, Le$ Jnde* occidentaUs, 4. SW«^. 5. I^arrt. %t Grenkr ym. 238 V. CINQUIEME LEgON. BEADING LESSON. CHARLES XII. (Dome.) Charles XII, roi de Suede, naquit^ h Stockholm le 27 Juin 1682. n perdit sa mere dan3 sa onzieme ann^e, at avait a peine quinze ans lorsqne son pere mourut. Selon^ le testament du feu^ roi, il ne de- vait etre majeur* qu'apres avoir pass(5 sa dix-huitieme ann^e, mais 8ur la proposition du ministre Piper, les ^tats lui defererent* le gouvemement dej^ en 1697. L'an 1700, Pierre I, empereur de Russie, Frederic IV, roi de Danemaik, et Auguste, ^lecteur de Saxe, lui declar^rent la guerre. II les attaqua I'un apres Tautre et remporta d'abord^ des victoires eclatantes,' entre autres celle de Narva, ou il defit* avec moins de' 8,000 Suedois, quatre-vingt mille Russes, dont il resta plus de vingt mille sur le champ de bataille, tandis qu'il ne perdait que six cents hommcs. Mais plus tard, lorsqu'il penetra en Russie, il perdit la bataille decisive de Pultawa, et fut contraint de se refugier sur le territoire turc avec une faible escorte de deux cent cinquante Suedois. 1. Was bom. 2. According to. 3. Late. 4. Of age. 6. To traxufer. 6. At drat. 7. Splendid. 8. To defeat. 9. Than. CONVERSATION. Oh naquit Charles XII ? Ce roi naquit k Stockholm. Dans quelle anaee ? En 1682, le 27 Juin. Perdit-il ses parents de bonne Oui, il perdit sa mere, qnand il heure ? avait 11 ans, et son pere, quand il avait 15 ans. Quand fut-il ddclar^ majeur ? En 1697, h I'age de quinze ans et demi. Qu'arriva-t-il trois ans apres? Pierre I, empereur de Russie, Frederic IV, roi de Danemark, et Auguste, ^Iccteur de Saxe, lui declaiercnt la guerre. Que fit Charles XII ? II les attaqua Tun apres I'autre et les deat. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 239 Quelle est sa plus ^clatante victoire ? Avait-il bcaucoup de soldats ? Y eutril beaucoup de tues ? A t-il toujours ^t^ heureux dans 868 bataillcs? A quoi futril contraint ? Cclle de Narva, oh il battit 80,000 Russes. H n'avait que 8,000 Suddois. Les Russes perdirent plus de vingt mille hommes, les Su^dois h peine six cents. Non, il perdit la bataille de Pul- tawa. D fut contraint de se r^fugier sur le territoire turo, avec une faible esoorte. -•♦>- VI. SIXifeME LE9ON* POSSESSIVE ADJECTTVES. (See the First Part, L. XII.) 1. Possessive adjectives must be repeated : — 1 . Before every noun of the same sentence, as : — • My brothers and sisters have arrived. , Mes freres et ines sceurs sont arrives. 2. Before two or three adjectives qualifying different things s— I love your great and your little children. .Paiine vos grands et vos petits en/ants. Note. But when the two substantives relate to the same person, and when the two or three adjectives are of the like signification* and qualiQr the same object, the possessive adjective is not repeated. Ex.: — My teacher and friend, mon pr€cepteur et ami. His good and useful advice, scs bons et utiles conseits, • irthey have a contrary signification, tho possessive a^Jectlre most berepeatedy U i 3€S bonnes et set mauvaises pensies (tiioughtfi). 240 VI. SIXIEME LEgON. 2. Custom requires the use of tbc possessive adjective before the names of relations in addressing them or speaking of them. Ex.: — Aunt, when do you leave 1 Ma tante, quand partez-vous f Cousin, will you go with me? Mon cousin (ma cousine), voulez-vous aller avec moi f Father is not at home, mon pere n'est pas a la maison. 3. "WTien in English the possessive pronouns mine, thine, hiSy hers, etc., preceded by the preposition of, are placed after a noun to which they relate, they are rendered in French by mes, ies, vet, etc., before the noun, which is put in the plural. Ex.: — A book of mine, un de mes Itvres. A friend of yours, un de vos amis. 4. When the verb to be is found before a possessive adjective fol- lowed by a noun in the possessive case, and signifies to belong, in French a must be used. Ex.: — This book is my father's, ce litre est h, mon pere. That house is our uncle's, cette maison-la est a notre oncle. 5. When parts of the body, or physical and intellectual faculties arc spoken of, the French generally use the definite article where in English the possessive adjective is used (see L. IH. 6.) Ex.: — I have a pain in my head, fai mal a la tete. He has lost his senses, il a perdu Vesprit. Note 1% If, however, there were an ambiguity to be feared, the posses- sive adjective should be used in French as in English. Note 2. When a habitual complaint is spoken of, the possessive ad joctive is also properly used. Ex.: — His headache has returned, sa migraine Va repris. 6. After the verbs changer and redoubler the possessive adjeo- tave is dropped and replaced by the prepobition (fo, as : — He has changed his religion, il a chang€de religion^ We have changed our opinion. Nous avons change d'opiiiion or d'avis. They redoubled their activity, ils redaublhent d*activit€. P08SES8ITE ADJECTITE8. 241 THEME 12. 1. My father, mother and sisters are in the country. 2. BSs ancle and aunt know it. 3. I thank you for {de) your good and useful services. 4. He is a friend of mine. 5. I found a pencil of yours. 6. Where are you, daughter? 7. Here I am, mother. 8. Come, friend, let us work. 9. He will never betray^ me, for he is my friend and protector.^ 10. We changed oiu* mind' when we hoard that news. 11. He tells* a falsehood* as often as {toutes les fois qu*) he opens his mouth. 12. A cousin of ours came yes- terday to see us. 13. Give me my dictionary and grammar.* 14. My mother has a pain in (a) her head. 15. I have a pain in my ear.* 16. The man who fell from the roof of our house, dislo- cated (se demit) his wrist.' 17. In («) the last battle* our gen- eral lost his right leg, and I was wounded^*' in mi/ shoulder." 1. TYahir, 2. Protecteur. 8. Avis, m. 4. Dire un mensonge. 6. Orammair€^ t 6. Oreille. 7. Toil, m. t. Poignet,m. 9. Jiataille,t. 10. £les8er,Teg.y. 11. EpatUe,t, 7. When in English the word ovm is found alone, i. e. without a noun, after a possessive adjective, the latter is rendered by a pos- sessive pronoun : le mien, le tien, le sien {propre), etc., or in the feminine by la mienne, la tienne, la sienne (^propre), etc. Ex.: — The daughter of his friend and his own. La Jille de son ami et la sienne (propre), 8. The indefinite pronoun one's denoting a possession js trans- lated in French son, sa, ses. Ex.: — One is glad to find one's money again. On est content de retrouver son argent. 9. When its and their refer to a thing which is not the subject of a proposition they are rendered by en unless preceded by a prop- osition, in which case son, sa, ses, leur, leurs must be used. Ex.: — I like this country, its air (Norn.) is healthy, its soil fruitfiil, etc Taime ce pays ; fair en est sain, le sol en est fertile. What plant is this ? — I do not know its name. Quelle est cette plantel — Je n'en connaispa$le nom, U 242 VI. sixiiSme LEgo». Look at these trees ; what is their height? Vo^ez ces arbres ; quelle en est la hauteur (not Uur A.) 1 But we must say : Paris a ses heaut€s. Paris has its beauties. iPadinire la grandeur de ses rues. I admire the size of its streets. Ces arbres sont remarquables par leur hauteur. These trees are remarkable for their height. 10. Observe the following gallicisms : — Let me soon hear of you. Donnez-moi bientot de vos nouvelles. I shall go to meet you, j'irai a voire rencontre. They are cousins of mine, ce sont de mes cousins. With regard to me, — to you, — to us. A mon €gard, a votre €gard, a noire €gard. THEME 13. 1. He has worked much more for our good^ than for his own. 2. Paris is a large city, its streets are too naiTOw.* 3. I particularly* admire (I adra. p.) its rich stores.* 4. Windsor is a fine town ; I admire its situatio/i, walks* and streets. 6. London has its beau- ties. 6. I like the size® of its streets. 7. This illncjss^ is danger- ous ; I know its origin* and effects." 8. This is (void) a fine treo ; its fruit is delicious.^® 9. Every science has its principles. 10. An illustrious ( — tre) birth" receives from virtue its most shining*" lustre. 11. Mr Dubois has sold his father's house and his own. 1. Le Men. 2. Etroit, e. 3. Surtout. 4. Magasin. m. 6. Promenade, f. 6. Grandeur, f. 7. Maladie, f. 8. Origine, f. 9. j^e/, m. 10. Dilideux. 11. Naisaance^f. 12. Beau. BEADINQ LESSON. EUDAMIDAS. Eudamidas de Corinthe fit, en raourant, un testament qui semble- rait ridicule h. tout autre qu'k iin ami. D touohait ^ sa demi^ro POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 243 heure, et laissjdt sa mere et sa fille expos^cs h la plus cnielle indi- gence, n'ayant pour tout bien que deux fideles amis, Carix^ne et Ai'^thus. Eudaraidas ne fut point alarm^ ; il jugea des coeurs de Bes auiis par le sien propre, et il fit ce testament qui ne doit jamais etre oubli^. *' Je legue^ k Are thus le soin de nourrir ma mere, et de I'entretenir dans sa vieillesse ; k Carixene le soin de marier ma fille, et de lui donner une dot* convcnable." Carixene etant mort quclque temps apres, Ar^thus ex^cuta la commission de tons les deux; et, pour rendre son action plus il- lustre, il maria la fille de son ami et la sicnne en un me me jour, et leur donna a toutes deux une merae dot. Quant k {as to) la mere, il la nourrit jusqu'^ la mort. Si la g^ndrosit^ d'Ar<5thus est digne d 'admiration, la noble hardiesse' et la confiance du testateur* Test encore davantage; car celui qui a la resolution de faire un semblable* testament, est capable non-seuleraent de I'ex^cuter, mais de quclque chose encore de plus, et il n'est pas douteux qu'il n'eut nourri la mere de son ami, et mari(S sa fille, aussi bien que la sienne propre, meme sans en etre pri^. 1. I bequeath. 2. Dowry, portion. 3. Boldness. 4. Testator. 6. Such, similar. COJ^VERSATION. Que fit Eudamidas de Corinthe H fit un testament remarqnable. en mourant? Etait-il riche ? Au contraire, il ^tait tr^s-pauvre, mais il avait deux fiddles amis. Que l<5gua-t-il done k ses amis ? II legua k son ami Ardthus le soin de nourrir sa vieille mere, et k Carixene le soin de marier sa fille. Devai1>il la marier sans dot ? Non, avcc une dot convenable. Les deux amis ex^cuterent-ils L'un d'eux, Carixene, monrni CO que le testament leur im- quclque temps apr^s. posa? Et Tautie que fit-il ? Ar^thus exdcuta la commission de tous les deuj 244 Vn. SEPTlfiMB LEgON. De quelle mani^re Tcx^cu- II maria la fille de son ami et la ta-t-il ? . sienne en un meme jour, et leur donna k toutes deux une dot egale. Et comment agit-il envers la H la nourrit jusqu'k la mort. mere d'Eudamidas ? Comment trouvcz-vous la gdn^- Elle est digne d'admiration. losit^ d'Ar^tiius ? VII. SEPTIEME LE9ON. NUMERALS. (See the Firs^ Part, L. XIV.) 1. When the cardinal numbers are used substantively they take the masculine article, as : Un un, a one. Le trois, the three. Ce huit est mal fait, this eight is badly made. 2. A and one before hundred and thousand are not translated Ex.: A hundred and twenty horses, cent vingt chevanx. In the year one thousand one hundred and sixty. L'an (or simply en) mil cent soixante. 3. Observe the following expressions with numerals : Un a un, one by one. Deux a deux, two by two. L'un apres Cautre, one after the other. Vera six hemes or vers les six heures, by, about six o'clock. Vers midi or vers le midi, towards (by) twelve o'clock. Une heure et demie, one hour and a half or half-past one. Deux heures moins un quwt, a quarter to two. TroU heures (et) un quart, a quarter past thiea' NUHEBALS. 245 Tous leg detiz joiirs, erery otter daj. D'aujonrd'Iiui en huit, to-day week. jynujourcrhui en quinze, to-day fortmght. Dans (piinze jours, in a fortnight. U }/ a huit jours, a week ago. n y a un an, 9. year or a twelvemonth ago. 4. More than, and less than, before numbers are rendered plus dt and moins de, instead of plus que and moins que. Ex. : I have spent more than a huntlred francs. J'ai d«fpcns€ plus de cent francs. Yea have not less than ten mistakes in your exercise. Vous n'avez pas moins de dix faults dans votre theme. 6. Nearly, before a number, is translated pres de. Elx. : It is nearly five o'clock, il est prh de cinq heures. THEME 11. 1. This six is well made, but this nine is badly made. 2. Hemy the Fourth was one of the greatest kings of France. 3. Numa was one of the seven kings of Rome. 4. America was discovered' in the year one thousand four hundred and ninety-two. 5. The shepherd^ has sold a huncbrcd sheep. 6. When do you dine? 7. I dine at twelve o'clock, sometimes at one o'clock. 8. I sup' at half-past eight, and I go to bed* at midnight. 9. Is it four o'clock? 10. No, sir ; it is a quarter Ko four. 11. I must go out at a quar- ter past four. '12. We went in (enframes) one by one. 13. My brother will set out this day week, and will come back in a fortmght. 14. lias Mr. L. three children?. 15. No; he has (en a) more than thi'ce : he has four or five. 16. This book costs less than ten francs. 17. How old is your son Charles? 18. He is ni?arly tourteen years old. 19. I have a French lesson* every other day. L Fui dicouverU. 2. Le berger, 8. Souper, 4. Se ooucher, 6. Um legM io franqtds. 240 Tin. HUITlfiMB LEgOH. VIII. HUITIEME LECON, ADJECTIVES. See Part I., Lesson XVII. AGREEMENT OF THE ADJECTIVE WITO THE NOUN. I. In French, the adjective agrees in gender and number witt tlio noun to which it relates : Une feuille verte, a green leaf. * De bona amis, good friends. Lei prunes sont murca, the plums are ripe. 1 . If it belongs to two or more nouns in the singular, it most be in the plural : Le pauvre et le riche sont €gaux devant Dim. The poor and the rich are alike before Grod. J'ai trouv€ la porte et la fenetre fenn€es. I found the door and the window shut. La demence el la majesty €taient peintes sur son front. Clemency and majesty were imprinted on his brow. 2. K the substantives are of different genders, and Joined by et, and, the adjectives must be in the masculine plural ; Mon frere et ma soeur sont tres-heitreux. My brother and sister arc very happy. 3. When the two nouns are joined by ou, or, or when the conjunction is left out, the adjective agi*ees ouly with the latter noun : Un chateau ou une maison ruin^e. A ruined castle or house. Le fer, la Jlamme ^ait toute prete. The sword, the flame was quite ready. 2. The adjectives demt, half ; nu, bare ; excepte, except ; y com pris, included; suppose, supposed; ci-Joint, inclosed, annexed. are invariable when they precede the noun ; demi and nu are then joined with their noun by a hyphen. Ex. : l/tie demi-heurej half an hour. ADJEcnvBs. 247 Marcher nu-pietJs, to walk bftrcfooted. Marcher nu-tete, to walk bareheaded. Excq)t^ les deux jrremieres pages. Except the two first pages. y comftrjs la somme de ceid Jranes. The sura of a hundred francs included. Suppose ces fails, these facts supposed. But they must agree with their noun when they follow it, as: Une fieure ct demic, an hour and a half. A voir les jambes nwes, to have bare legs. Les deux premieres par/es except ^cs. The two first pages excepted. Copie de ina lettre est ci-jointa. A copy of my letter is annexed. 3. Feu, late, is invariable, like the preceding ones, when it. is before the article or pos.sessive pronoun ; when it follows, it varies, as : Feu la reine or la feue reine, the late queen. Feu mes tantes or mes feues taiU.es, my late aunts. 4. Some adjectives, as bon, vite, bos, etc., may be used adverb* ially ; then, of course, they are invariable. Ex. : Ces roses sentent tres-bon (not bonnes). These roses smell very sweet. Lfcs cer/s courent tres-vite, the stags run very fast. 5. If the expression avoir Vair, to look, is followed by an adjec- tive, this latter remains unchanged when a moral or intellectual quahty is spoken of, as : Ces dames ont I'air bon. These ladies look good-natured. But if a bodily or organic quality is mentioned, or when the adjec- tive refers rather to the subject than to the word air, the adjective agrees with the subject of the sentence. In this latter case, the verb etre is understood, as : Ces pierres ont I'air tres-dures. These stones seem to be very hard. Madame F. a I'air mecontente (i. e. d'etre mAontente). Mrs. F. appears to be discontented. 6. If a noun is accompanied by an adjective in the superlative. M8 vm. HUiTifiim le^ow. the latter always agrees with it in gender and nmnber. When the superlative follows, the article must be repeated : La plus belle fernme, the handsomest woman. Let gens Us plus riches, the richest people. THEME 15. I. I have a good friend. 2. The leaves are green. 3. These pears are riper than those apples. 4. His brother and cousin have arrived. 5. Charles and Louisa are very industrious. 6. Men and women are mortal. 7. My son and daughter are happy, 8. His uncle and aunt are dead. 9. Louis XIV. had in France an absolute' powcr^ and authority (autorite). 10. She left her room and her trunk' open. 11. I found the windows and the shutters^ shut. 12. Give these presents to the most industrious pupils. 13. Miss Emma is the daughter of the richest man in {de) this town. 14. I remained there {y^ for half an hour. 15. The child slept two hours and a half. 16. I have read the whole book, ex- cept the two last chapters.* 17. The late queen was opposed" to that measure.' 18. ^\Tiy do you go barefooted ? 19. These pears appear to be ripe. 1. Absolu. 2, Pouvoir, m. S. Coffre, m. 4. Volet, m. 6. Chapitre, m. 6. SPopposait. 7. Mesure. B. PLACE OF TUB ADJECTIVE. The principal rules have already been given in the eighteenth Lesson of Part I. We have to add here only the following. Whan two adjectives refer to the same noun, we should examine what kind of adjectives they are. 1. If both of them are such as precede, when smgle, they may both remain before the noun if one of them forms with the noun, as it were, but one idea. Ex. : Une jolie petite Jille* a pretty little girl. Un beau jeune homme,\ a handsome young man. • In Latin filiola. f Youth Ouvenis). ADJECTIVES. 249 2. If both preceding adjectives are taken in their foil sense, they must be joined by et, and, as : Un grand et beau jardin, a large, beautiful garden. 8. An adjective usually placed before the noun, when connected by a conjunction with another adjective which is to be put after it is itself placed after the noun. Ex. : Une action belie* et courageuse. A fine, courageous action. Une feinme petite, mais bien faite. A short but well-mado woman. 4. In English, two or more adjectives may qualify a substantive, without a conjunction ; but in French, et (or sometimes mat's) is always placed before the last of the adjectives, if these foUaw their noun. Ex. : Utie dame riche, jeune et aimable. A young, rich, aniiuble lady. Un homme instruit, mcuJMte et estim€ de tout le monde. A well-instructed, modest, and generally -esteemed man. lUEME 18. 1. Charles is a handsome young man. 2. Henry is a pretty little boy. 3. This is a long (and) tedious^ book. 4. My friend is an amiable and virtuous man. 5. He has a large and beautiful house. 6. This Ls a drowned' man or woman. 7. For tliis place I want an aged man or woman. 8. Is it the elder brother or sister? 9. The savage lived in a large, damp' cavern. 10. Spain is a fertile country, but badly cultivated.* 11. A plain," simDlc, and natural style is the only one to be recommended} 12. Brav* and trust/ men are generally humane® and merciful.' 13. This is an interesting^*^ and instructive study. ^^ 1. Ennuymux. 2. Noyi e. 3. Flumide. 4. CuUivi e. 6. Uni, 8, Recommandahle. 7. OonUmU. 8. Humain, 9. Misericordieux. 10. Jnt^restant. 11. Mude^ f. • << A flne^aotlon " would be, Une beUe action* 250 Vm. HUITIEMB LEgON. 0, COMPLEMENT OP ADJECTIVES. The complement of an adjective is either a substantive or a verb, preceded by one of the prepositions de, a, en, etc. 1. Adjectives and participles which denote plenty, desire, scan city or want, and most of those followed in English by of, with and ^ow, govern in French by means of the preposition de, aa : La vie est pleine de miseres, life is full of miseries. Le jnine hoinme fut comU€ d'/ionneurs, (loaded with honors). 2. The following adjectives govern also by means of de : Capable, capable. las, tired, wearied. content, contented, pleased. libre, free. digne, worthy. niicontent, discontented. exempt, free. satis/ait, satisfied. hcnteux, ashamed. »iir, sure, etc. jaioux, jealous. Ex. : II est digne de recompense, he is worthy of reward. 3.* Adjectives denoting fitness, unfitness, disposition, inclination, readiness, or any habit, require a before the object. Ex. : n est propre It tout, he is fit for anything. Le cheval est utile h. I'homme, the horse is useful to man. NoTB- 1. The following adjectives are followed by a in French and of in English : Attentifa, heedful of; sensible a, sensible of; insensible a, insensible of or to. Ex. : Soyez attentifs au danger, be heedful of (the) danger. Je suis sensible k votre bont€, I am sensible of your kindness. NoTB 2. Some adjectives are followed in French by the preposition a and in English by in ; such are : Habile a, skilful in. patient a, patient in. exact a, punctual in. impatient a, impatient in. Ex. : II est Iiabile II tout, he is skilful in doing all. EUe est exacte k *•.,■• ) J ai vingt ans. (The latter is much preferred.) 6. The word bg, which is sometimes used in English after a com- parative, to denote how much a thing exceeds another, is rendered by de, not by par. Ex. : Charles is taller than I by three inches. Charles est plus grand que moi de trois pouces. ADJECTIVES. 253 TTTE^kTE 18. 1. I have seen a tree ninety feet high. 2 We have a honse eighty feet long and forty-five high. 3. This stick is three feet long. 4. This plank^ is two inches' thick.* 5. This tree is fifty feet high. 6. London bridge* is nine hundred and twenty feet long, fifty-five high, and fifty-six wide.* 7. The monument of Lon- don stands {est place) on a pedestal* twenty feet high. 8. This ditch is twelve feet deep.' 9. The famous mine of Potosi in {dans !e) Peru is more than (de) fifteen hundred feet deep.' 10. My room is forty feet long and thirty wide. 11. The walls of Algiers' are fourteen foot thick and thirty feet high. 12. King Street* is about^^ a mile" and a half long and sixty-five feet wide. 13. My brother is elder than I by two years. 14. I am taller than Robert by seven inches. 15. Westminster bridge is forty-four feet broad / the free-way^^ under the arche* of this bridge is eight h'lndred and seventy feet ; it consists^' of fourteen piers,** thirteen large archer, and two small ones ; the two middle" piers are each (chacun) sev- enteen feet wide, and contain two hundred tons^' of solid stones. 1. Planche, t. 2. Pouce, m, 3. Epais, ipaisae. 4. Le pont de Londres. 6. Large or —largeur. 6. Piedestal. 7. Pro/oruleur. S.Alger. 9. La rue royale. . 10. Environ. 11. ArUle, m. 12. The free-way =/< i)il par jour ? D'ou vient l'ivoire ? PEHSONAL PR0N0UN3. 256 IX. NEUYIEME LE^ON I. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. (See Part I., L. XXIV.) 1 Conjunctive pronouns, in the first and second persons, should be repeated before every verb in a simple tense. Ex.: — . Je vous aime et je vous aimerai toujours. I love you and (I) shall always love yon. Vous dites et voiis direz toujours. You say and (you) will always say. Je le mis et je I'entends. I see and hear it. H nous ennuie et nous obskde sans cesse. He wearies (us) and besets us unceasingly. Note. With a compound tense, or when the pronouns are in the third person, they are rarely repeated, though more frequently than in English, as: — Je I'ai vu et entendu. I have seen and heard it. n (fcoute et ne peut comprendre, etc. He listens and cannot conceive, etc. 2. When an emphasis is laid upon the personal pronoun, it must be repeated in French, but then, the first is disjunctive. Very of- ten it is then preceded by c^est, or for the third person plural, by ce eont. Ex.: — ( moi, je le dis. ^ ^^^'''ic'estnun,quilediB. (■ lui, U a pr^endu cda. He has pretended this, -j ^,^^ ^^ . ^,^ . ^ ^^^^^^^ ^^j^ (nous n'avons pas dit cela, ncnu We have not said so, ) ^^^^ „^,^ ^,^^^ ^ ^ .^ ^^^ Jt is not we who said so, ( ^e „'«,« ;h« nou* qui awns dit cela 256 IX. NEUTIEME LEgOIT. (■ eux, lis I'ont fait. They hare done it, | ^^ ^^„^ ^^^^ ^^ . ^,^^ ^^^.^^ Note. Observe that in such cases the -serb is put in ihe same nmnbei and person as the pronoun which is the antecedent of the relative qui, as : — Is it I who told this news 1 Est-ce moi qui ai dit cette nouvelle f 3. When a verb relates to subjects of different persons, it is put in tha plural with nous, if one of the several subjects is in the first person, — or with vous, if the subjects are in the second and third persons. ' Ex.: — My brother and / shall go into the country. Mon frere et moi, nous irons a la campagne, or, Nous irons a la campagne, mon frere et moi. I told you and him or both you and him. Je vous I'ai dit a toi et a lui. You and your friend will come with me. Vous et votre ami, vous viendrez avec moi. 4. When the verb governs two pronouns (both being persons) one in the Direct Objective, the other in the Indirect, the Indirect is a disjunctive (see p. 110). Ex.: — Je vais vous pr€senter a lui. I am going to introduce you to him. 6. A personal pronoun, used as subject, may follow the verb after aussi, peut-etre, encore, toujours, en vain, du moins, or au moins. THEME 19. 1. I believe and shall always believe that you were {avez eu) wrong. 2, He says so, but he does not believe it. 3. I honor and respect him, but I do not love him. 4. We come and go. 5. A passionate^ temper^ renders a man unfit' for business,* deprives* him of his reason, and makes him unfit (makes that he is not fit) (^propre) for society.* 6. I have always loved and esteemed her. 7. They (on) flattpr" and praise us. 8. It is I who have wiitten it PEHSONAL PRONOUNS. 257 9. It is they who have s^cn it. 10. They end my brother have come. ] 1 You like the town and I the country. L Passionni. 2. Caradire. 3. Inepte. 4. Put the definite article. 6. I*river. 6, Flatter, 0. "When two personal pronouns lunit a verb, both should be dis junctive, and therefore after the verb. Ex.: — I forgive both you and her. Je pardonne a vous et h. die.* 1 speak to hira and not to yon. Je parle k hi et non ^ vous. 7. The pronouns himself, herself, themselves, when with a re- dective verb, are expressed in French by se ; otherwise by lui-nieme, elle-meme, etix-memes, elles-memes. Ex.: — Ho (she) docs not know himself (herself). // {die) ne se connait pas. They highly distinguished themselves. Us (dies) se distingueretit beaucoup. But: Has he done it himself? Yes, himself. L'a-t-U fail lui-meme t Oui, lui-mime. 8. Soi, self, is of both genders, and is used of things as well as of persons. Ex.: — n est sage de parler rarement de soi. It is wise to talk seldom of one's self. 9. The pronoun itself, preceded by a preposition and relating to an inanimate object, is expressed by soi, when the antecedent noun is taken in an abstract sense. Ex.: — Uaimant attire le fer a soi. The loadstone attracts iron to itself. La vertu est aimable en soi. Virtuo is amiable in itself. • This sentence may better be translated thus : Je vous pardonnR ainti qu^d, eOa ^jid the ioUowiu^, c''est ^ , , ; - ^ what IS that? Qu est-ce que c est que cela ? y Qu'est-ce que la vie? ) ,,.,.-« ^ , , 1 . ^y what IS hfe 1 Qu est qWest-ce qu U y a de nouveau S IKTERROGATIYB PRONOUNS. 266 6. Que, what ? as the conjunctive foiin, can only be used before the verb or in close connection with it; but the disjunctive form quoi, what ? stands either alone or after a preposition, or is even used as an interjection. Ex. : — Voxis cherchez quelque chose ; quoi done f You are looking for something; what is it! A quoi pense-t-il, of what does he think ? De quoi parle-t-on, of what do people talk ? Quoi I votis eies mari€! what you are married I Note. Quoi is also used instead of qu'y a-t-il, as : — Quoi de plus magnijique qu'une belle nuit d'€l€l (instead of qu*y a-t-il de plus magnijique ! ) What is there more splendid than a beautiful summer's night 1 7. In autithetical questions with or (as you or /?), the French usage departs very widely from the English, inasmuch as the con- trasted persons or objects, instead of standing in the Nominative as in English, usually follow de, Ex. :^ Qui de ixnis ou de moi reinportera le prix f Who will lake the prize, you or I ? Qui a €t€ le plus a}>}>itqu€ de toi ou d'Emile T or Qui de toi ou d'Emile a A^ le plus aj>pliqu€f Who has been the most diligent, you or Emile? 8. De may be omitted, liowever, when two or more om's occur, and also when de or des with lequel precedes. Ex. : — L/iquelle de^ deux nations ^ait la plus vertueuse, les Grecs ou les Romains f Which of the two nations was the more virtuous, the Greeks or the Romans ? THEIIE 23. 1. Which of your brothers is married ? 2. "Which of your sisters has (est) gone to lOngland ? 3. Of all these pictures, which should you like best ? * 4. Which of your daughters learns Italian ? * 5. Here are two pencils ; which will you take ? 6. What countries did Alexander the Great con(iuer ? ' 7. What are your terms ? * 8. Who goes there ? 9. To whom do you speak ? 10. For whom does a miser* hoard '^ riclies ? ' 11. "Who will be bold ^ euouirh to attack turn i' 12. Who are these women ? 13. Whose ^ gloves are these ? 266 X. DiXIEME LE?OlI. 14. Here are two grammars ; to which do you give the preferenw 1 15 Who sustains^'' this globe in the air? 16. What is more pleas- ant than to do good?" 17. What is human life? 18. What should prevent^^ your father from buying (d'acheter) this house 'r 19. A little more fame,^^ a little more wealth, — what does all this signify?" 20. What are you speaking of? 21. Of what do you accuse me ? 22. On {sur) what will you interrogate" him ? 23. What ! Charles has been arrested ! ^® 24. Which of you has been sick, Emily or Emma ? 25. Which was the greatest man, Alexan- der, Caesar, or Napoleon the First ? 1. Le mieux. 2. Put the article. 3. Put has conquered, a conquis. 4. CondUi(m, f. 5. L'avare, m. 6. Amasser. 7. Richesse. 8. Ilardi. 9. See p 2&1, $ 2, 2, A qui, 10. SoxUenir. 11. Du bien. 12. Empecher. 13. Gloire. M. Signifler. 15. Inter- Toger. 16. Arriti. BEADING LESSON.* SEETILIUS SB Dl^FEND DEVANT LB PEUPLB. " Si Ton m'a fait venir ici pour me demander compte^ de ce qui s*est pass^ dans la demiere bataille ou je commandais, je suis pr§t k vous en instruire ; mais si ce n'est qu'un pretexte pour me faire p^rir, comme je le soup^onne,* dpargnez-moi* des paroles inutiles : voila mon corps et ma vie que je vous abandonne, vous pouvez en disposer. **Quel Gst done mon crime? Quelle faute ai-je coramise jus- qu'ici? On m'accuse d 'avoir perdu beaucoup de monde dans lo der- nier combat. Mais quel est le general qui puisse livrer des ba- tailles centre une nation agucrrie,* qui se defend courageusement, sans qu'il y ait de part et d'autre* du sang de repandu ? Quelle di- vinity s'est engag^e envers le peuple remain, h lui faire remporter des victoires sans aucune perte ? ® A qui fera-t-on croire que la gloire s'acquiert' autrement que par de grands perils ? J'en suis * The Conyersation ou this Beading Lesson will be found at the end of the fol- lowing lesson, RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 267 Venn aux mains avec des troupes plus nombreuses que celles que vous m'aviez confiees ; j'ai mis en deroute leiu-s l(:gions, qui, k la fin, oat pris la foite. Que me rcstait-il a faire ? Qui d'entre vous eiit pu se refuser ^ la victoire qui marchait devant moi ? Etait-il merae® en mon pouvoir do retenir vos soldats, que leur coui'age eni- portait, et qui poursuivaient avec ardeur un ennemi eflfray^ ? Que dis-je? Si j'avais fait sonner* la retraite, si j'avais ramen^ nog soldats dans leur camp, de quoi ne m'accuserait-on pas aujourd'hui? Lequel de vos tribuns aurait approuvr^ ma conduite ? Ne m'acou- Bcraient-ils pas d'intelligence avec les ennerais ? " 1. Account. 2. Suspect. 3. Spare. 4. Warlike. 6. On both sides. 6. Loss. 7. Can be gained. 8. Even. 9. To sound. XI. ONZIEME LEgON. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. (SeePartL, L. XXIV.) 1. The relative pronouns who, which and that are rendered by qui, when they are in the Nominative case, whether they refer to persons or things, as : — The man who works, I'homme qui travaille. The pen which is on the table. La plume qui est sur la table. 2. The same pronouns when in the Du-ect Objective, whom which, that, are expressed by que, as : — The man whom you know, Vhomme que vous connaissez. The book which I have lost, le livre que j'ai perdu. Note. Sometimes, however, lequel must oe employed instead of qui or que, when by the use of the latter an ambij^uity might arise. In such a rase as this for instance : Le frert de Madame Lefmiu qui habite Paris, wfyare two persons being mentioned, it would be doubtful wheth^ we mean 268 XI. oirzifiirE LEgoN. to say that tlie brother or the lady lives in Paris. In the first case, vn must say : — Le frere de Mad. Leibeau lequel liahite Paris, or if the lady is meant : Le frere de Mad. Leheau laquelle or qui hahite Paris. For the latter of the two persons qui can generally be used. 3. When the relative pronouns whom or which follow a prepobi- tion, they are usually expressed by qui'in speaking of persona,* and by lequel or laquelle (pi. lesquels, lesquelles) in speaking of animals and things, as : — The little boy to whom I give the book, is diligent. Le petit gargon a qui je donne le livre, est appliqu€. The Englishman with whom I travelled. L' Anglais avec qui j'ai voijag€. The glory to which heroes sacrifice, etc. La gloire a laquelle les h€ros sacrijient, etc. The cane with which he struck me, etc. La canne avec laquelle ii m'afrapp^, etc. 4. The relative pronouns whose, of whom or of which are com- monly expressed in French by do?it, both for persons and for ob- jects, as : — The Frenchman whose brother arrived yesterday. L>e f'rangais dont le frere est. arrive hier (see L. III., 12). I have seen the garden of which you speak. J^ai vu le jardin dont i-ous parlez. 5. Bui lequel must be employed when the noun wbich followB whose is governed by a preposition. We can consequently say : — . The man whose merits are known. L'homme dont les m€rites (Nom.) sont connus. The author whose works you have read. * After entre, between, and parmi, among, we must always write lesquels or j9» ffU^Ues whether persons or thiii|;s be spoken of. EELITITB PRONOUNS. 269 L'auteurdont vous avez lu lea ouvrages (Dir. Obj.)«* But we must say: The man of whose modesty people talk so much. L'homme de la modcstie duquel on parle tant. The friend to whose honesty I have trusted, has deceived mo. L'ami a la probity duquel je me suis Ji€, m'a tromp€. 0, The relative pronouns whom, which, and that, are often left out in English, but in French qui and que are never omitted. Example : — The boy I saw with you yesterday. Le gargon que j'ai vu hier avec vous. I shall send you the books you have chosen. Je vous enverrai Us livres que vous avez choisis. THEME 24. 1. The man who has done this is generally* esteemed. 2. The flocks* which graze' in those meadows* are mine (a mot). 3. The watch which I had is broken. 4. The books which you read are good, but difficult* to be understood. 5. The sister of my friend who ar- rived here last week, is very ill. 6. The physician's daughter of whom I spoke to you the other day, has married ]Mr. B. 7. A bird whose wings have been clipped,* cannot fly any more. 8. Bees' among which we find such admu-able order,® are very useful insects. 9. The professor* to whom I write, is very learned. 10. The man you respect is my friend. 11. Idleness is a vice to which young people are much inclined. 12. The country we inhabit ^° is beauti- fill and fruitful. 13. The reasons upon which I rely,^^ are unan- swerable.** 14. Mr. B. is a man to whose discretion I dare" not trust. 15. He who gets" riches, knows not for whom he gets them. IG. The daughter of Minos gave a thread" to Theseus,^® by means (au moyen) of which he went out^ of the labyrinth {le labyrinthe), ♦Observe here the position of the nonn. If the word depending; upon dont if • Direct Ot^ective, it amat 8*.eud qfter the active verl). 270 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. I. Giniralement. 2. Troupeau, m. 3. Paitre, fsee p. 178, No. 25). 4. PratrtA r. 5. Difflciles h comprendre. 6. Rognis. 7. Us abellles. 8. Ordre, ra. 9 Pro- fesseur. 10. Habiter. n. Je me fonde. 12. Sans replique. IZ. Je n^ose me fier. H. Amasser. 15. Un fil. 16. TAes^. 17. Sortir. 7. ^woe, what, is also used as a relative, but only in connectioD with a preposition. It is generally used absolutely; and when the noun to which it refers has been expressed the use of hquel^ laquelle, &c., is preferable. Savez-voiis a quoi il s'ocatpe a present f Do you know what he busies himself with now ? Apres quoi, after which. Sans quoi, otherwise. C est pour quoi, on that account, therefore. 8. The adverbs of place oil, cCou and par ©«, are also ofien employed instead of the relative pronouns dans lequel^ duquely par lequel, etc., when things are spoken of, as: — L'embarras oil (for dans lequel) se trouve man pere. The embarrassment in which my father finds himself. Le village par oil (for par lequel) nous venons de passer. The village through which we have just passed. 9. The correlative pronouns he who, fem. she who, pi. they wht or those who, are rendered by celui qui, fem. celle qui, pi. masc. ceux qui, pi. fem. celles qui. Ex.; — He who is contented, is happy. Cdui qui est content est heureux. They (or those) who are discontented, are unhappy. Ceux qui sont m€contents, sont malheureux. Note 1. Both or either may vary according to the verb they depend oai, {cdui qui, celui que, etc. ) as : — I shall give it to him whom I love most Je le donnerai a cdui que j'aime le mieux. Note 2. In French both pronouns must be joined, and no inversion cac take place as in English. Ex.: — He is a bad citizen who rebels against his country. Cdui qui se revoke contre sa patrie est un mauvais citoyen. JO. The English what, when not an interro^tive pronoun, biit a BELATIVE PRONOUNS. 271 ooraponnd relative in the sense of that which, is translated l)y ce qui for the Nominative, ce que for the Direct Objective, and by ce dont, when the verb takes the preposition de, as : — What is fine, is not always good. Ce qui est beau n'est pas tottjours bon. I shall do what I have promised. Je ferai ce que j'ai promis. I have sent him what he needed. Je lui ai envoys ce dont U avail besoin. 11. When ce qui, ce que or ce dont begins the sentence, c^est must be placed before the second clause, except (as in the first sen- tence above) when an adjective or a participle follows, as : — Ce que vous pouvez faire de mieux, c'est de pariir tout de suite. The best thing for you to do, is to leave immediately. Ce qui me chagrine, c'est la perte de mon domestique. What grieves me, is the loss of my servant. 12. Proverbial and general expressions usually commence with qui, whoever, instead of celui qui. Ex.: — Qui court deux lievres, n'en prend aucun. He who chases two hares catches none. Qiti casse les verres, les paie. Who (ever) breaks the glasses must pay for them. Sauve qui peut I let him save himself who can I THEME 25. 1. This is the object^ at which he aims.* 2. The study to which I am devoted,* gives me great pleasure. 3. Nature, whose beauty we daily* admire, is an inexhaustible* source of enjoyment* for us. 4. Your pupil's mother, with whom I was speaking yesterday, left' this morning. 5. What sort of a book is that in which you are reading? 6. It is a Roman History. 7. There is nothing, upon («) which I think more frequently* than the sad fate' of my poor friend. 8. What is true is also good. 9 Vu:tue and freedom - are the conditions without which we cannot be happy. 10. Is the booae in which you live on the highway?^ 11. No, it is tolerably 272 XI. ONZIEME LEgON. far" from it (en). 12. That is the thing about which 1 would Bpeak with you. 13. The thing the miser thinks least about (a) is to aid^^ the poor. 14. That is the thing with which he struck me. 15. It is an illness to the progress ^^ of which (§5) one cannot ap- ply^* too prompt remedies.^* 16. He who cannot keep a secret, is mcaj)able of governing.^* 17. That which most deserves our respect is virtue. 18. What I most wish, is to see you happy. 19. What I like most, is to be alone. 1. Le hut. 2. Tendre. 3. DivoiU. 4. JoumeUement. 5. Inipuisahle. 6. I> plaisir. 7. Est partie. 8. Souvent. 9. Le sort. 10. La route. U. Assez ^loigni, 12. Assister. 13. Progre», m, 14. Apporter. 15. De trap prompts remedes. 10, De gouvemer. READING LESSON. SUITE DE "SERVILIUS." "Si vog enncmis se sont rallies, s'ils ont 6t4> soutcnus par un corps de troupes qui s'avan9ait k lour secours ; enfin, s'il a fallu recom- mencer tout de nouveau le combat, et si, dans cette derniere action, j'ai perdu quclques soldats, n'est-ce pas le sort^ ordinaire de la guerre ? Trouverez-vous des gdneraux qui veuillent se charger du commandement de vos armees, h condition de ramener h Rome toua les soldats qui en seraient sortis sous leur conduite ? N'examinez done point si, k la fin d'une bataille, j'ai perdu quclques soldats, mais jugez de ma conduite par ma victoire. "S'il est vrai que j'ai chasse^ les ennemis de votre territoire, que je leur ai tu^ beaucoup de monde dans deux combats, que j'ai forc^ les debris^ de leurs armdes de s'enfermer dans leurs places,* que j'ai enrichi Rome et vos soldats du butin* qu'ils ont fait dans le pays enncmi : que (let) vos tribuns s'elevent, et qu'ils me reprochent en quoi j'ai manque® centre les devoirs' d'un bon general. *' Mais ce n'est pas ce que je crains : ces accusations iie servent que de pr^texte pour pouvoir exercer iinpun(^mcnt leur haine® et leur animosite centre le senat et centre I'ordre des patriciens. Fautril que vous ne demandiez jamais rien au s^aat qui ne soit pr^udioiable BELATTTB PBONOUNS. 273 an "bien commtin de la patrie, et que vous ne lo dcinandicz que pai des seditions ? Si un s^nateur ose* vous reprdscnter Tinjustice de vos pretentions, si un consul ne parle pas le language seditieux de vos tribuns ; s'il defend avec courage la souveraine puissance dont il ost revetu, on crie au tyran.*" A peine est-il sort! do charge, qu'il se trouvo accabl^ d 'accusations. C'est ainsi que, par votrc injuste plebiscite, vous avez ote la vie k Mendnius, aussi grand capitaine quo bon citoyen. Ne devricz-vous pas mourir de honte d' avoir per- secute si cruellement le fils de ce Mendnius Agrippa, k qui vous devez vos tribuns et ce pouvoir qui vous rend k present si furieux? ** On m'en voudra peut-etre de la liberte avec laquelle je vous parle dans I'^tat oil je me trouve k present ; mais je ne crains point la mort : condamnez-moi, si vous I'osez ; la vie ne pent etre qu'k charge k un g^ndral qui est reduit k se justifier de ses victoircs. Apres tout, un sort pareil k celui de M^nenius ne pent mo desho- norcr." 1. The fate. 2. Driven out. 8. Remains. 4. Fortresses. 6. Booty. 0. To Udl. 7. Duties. 8. Hatred. 0. Dare. 10. Behold the tyrant. CONVEESATION. Qui etjut Servilius ? Un fameux gdndral romain. Pourquoi I'a-t-on fait venir k Pour se justifier dcvant le peu- Rome V pie. De quoi I'avait-on accus^? On I'avait accusd d'avoir perdu trop do soldats dans un com- bat. Est-U possible de livrcr (une) Non, ce n'est pas possible. II bataille, sans qu'il y ait du doit y avoir de part et d'au- sang de r^pandu ? tre du sang de r^pandu. Peut-on rem porter une victoire H est impossible de defairo un sans aucuuc pcilc ? ennemi nombreux et aguerri sans pordre du monde. Comment se justifia Servilius du II rappcla aux Remains qu'il reproche qu'on lui faisait? avait remportd une victoire decisive, et mis en deroutse ^ lee hS^ojis des ennemLi. 274 Xn. DOUZIEME LEgON. Etait-il en son pouvoir de retenir ses soldats ? Avaitril manqu^ centre les devoirs d'un bon general? Si Servilius avait fait sonner la retraite, de quoi raurait-on ac- cuse? Quels services avait-il rendus k (to) Rome? Qnand un senateur etait sorti de charge, que faisaient les tribuns du peuple ? Quel exemple dMnjustice leur reprocha-t-il ? Servilius s'uttendaitril k un sort semblable k celui deM^ndnius? Non, lour courtgo les empoi'tait^ et ils poursuivaient avec ar- deur rennerai eflfray^. Non, on ne lui put rien ro- procher. Les tribuns du peuple I'auraient accuse d' intelligence avec les ennemis. II avait chass^ les ennemis du territoire romain et enrichi Rome du butin qu'Ll rappoi> tait du pays enncmi. Us I'accablaient d' accusations. Celui de Men^nius. Oui, mais jl dit qu'un sort pa^ reil a celui de Menenius n€ pourrait le deshonorer. XII. DOUZIEME LE(?ON INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. In regard to the indefinite pronouns treated of in Lesson XXIX., Part L, the following peculiarities are to be observed: — 1. The word on derived from homme, man (Latin homo), serves to render all vague and general repcirts expressed in English by they say, people sar, it is said, we say, etc. The verb which follows L- always in the third person singular, as ; — INDEPINITB PRONOUNS. 27^ People say, it is said, on dit. One cannot have everything, on ne pent pets avoir taut. Note 1. When in English the passive voice is used in this sen-ie, the verb must be changed in French into the active voice with on, as : — It is said, on dit. It is believed, on croit. I was told, 071 m'a dit. I am deceived, on me trompe. Lette-:8 have been received, on a regu des lettres. Note 2. For the cases where I'on is used instead of on, see Lesson XXIX., 2. 2. Chacun, e, each, has for the English his, her, or tte, which follows it, son, sa, ses, and leur, leurs, for their, as : — Put these books each in its place. Remettez ces litres chacun a sa place. The judges have given sentence each according to his conscienoe. Les juges ont opine's chacun selon sa conscience. The bees build each their cells. ' Les abeilles bdtissent chacune leur cellule. When chacun means every one, everybody (including all), it is always mas- culine. Example : Chacun a son tour. But when used relatively, i. o., in reference to a part of mankind, it may be feminine. Example : Cfiacune de nous (/emmes) se pr€lendait sup&ieure aux autres. 3. Aucun, per Sonne, and rien do not require ne before the verb, in a sentence interrogative or of doubt : aiicun then stands for any, personne for anybody, and rien for anything. Ex. : — Je ne crois pas qu'il y ait aucun homme sans d€faut. I do not think there is any man without a fault. Je doute qu'il y ait rien de plus beau. I doubt whether there is anything more beautiful. Note. Aucun and nul are not used in the plural, except before nouns which have no singular, or which are used in a different sense in the plural. 4. When, however, these three pronouns serve to answer a ques- tion without repeating the verb used by the inquirer, they retain their negative meaning, as : — Qu'avez vous f Rien. Rien du tout. What 19 the matter with yon ? Nothing. Nothing at alL 5. None, not one, are rendered by attcun ne and pas un ne. lixampleB : — 276 xn. DOUzifiMB le^on. None of you were there, attcun de vous n'y €tait. I have four sisters ; none (not one) of them ig maxried. J^ai quatre soeurs, aucune or pas une n'est mari€e. 6. Somebody, some one, anybody, and any one, are ezpressed by quelqu^un singular and masculine. Ex. : — Somebody told me so, quelqu'un me I'a dit. Do you know any one here ? Connaissez-votts quelqu'un id f 7. La plupart, most, is properly a collective noun, and like most other collective nouns takes the plural after it. This requires the verb and attribute which follow to be put in the plural. Ex. : — La plupart de ces pommes ne sont pas encore mures. Most of these apples are not yet ripe. 8. Another is usually expressed by un autre, Bud others (Nom and Direct Obj.) by d^autres or les autres. Ex. : — Another would not have acted so. Un autre n'aurait pas agi ainsi. Charity is contented that others be preferred. La charity est contente que les autres soient pT(f€r€s. Buy some others, achetez-en d'autres. 9. AiUrui, others, only applies to persons ; it is, however, also taken as a singular in the sense of another. It is employed only after a preposition. Consequently, when in English the indefinite pronoun others occurs in the Nom. or Dir. Obj., it must not be translated by autrui, but by d'autres or les autres (§ 8). Ex. : — Charity rejoices in the happiness of others. La charity se r€jouit da bonheur d'autrui. Attendez d'autrui ce que vous faites a autrui. Expect from others the same treatment which you give them. 10. When, however, the verb in the latter clause governs the Dir Obj., en is used instead of sow or ses. Ex.: — Souvent nous bldmons les d€fauts d'autrui sans en reconnaitre les bonnes quor UtA (without acknowledging their good ([ualities). 11. Tei \uiti two significadons : wch and manjf a (man). In the UTOEFINITB PRONOUlfS. 277 fiwiner, it is an adjective and agrees with its noun, in the latter it is often a pronoun, i. e. is used without a substantive. Ex. : — Telle €tait la difficult du terrain que, etc. 8ach was the difficulty of the ground, etc. Tel park de choses qu'il n'entend pas. Manj a man speaks of things which he does not anderstand. 12. Such a must be rendered by un tel, une teUe. Ex.: — Vn id komme, such a man. Une telle femine, such a woman. Un tcl has also the meaning of so and so, as : — Chez Monsieur un tel ; Madame une telle. 13. Tel que has the meaning such as or jmt (W, and agrees in gender and number with the noun to which it refers. Ex.: — Telles que vous les voyez, such as you see them (fern.). 14. Notice also the expression : U n^y a rien de tel que ... or il n'est rien tel que . . ., there is nothing Uke. Ex.: — 72 n'y a rien de tel que d^avoir une bonne conscience. There is nothing like having a good conscience. THEilE 25. 1. They speak of peace. 2. People are not always fortunate. 3. French is spoken here. 4. The invention of gunpowder is air tributed^ to to Berthold Schwarz of Friburg.* 5. It is said that the queen is in London. 6. Everybody has his faults. 7. What is the price of each of those medals?' 8. My children have each a good place. 9. Every one has his [own] manner of thinking* and acting. 10. I do not know any of his friends. 11. Would any- body dare" dcny^ it? 12. None of the judges were against you. 13. Of all the nations of the earth, there is none (not one) but has (qui n'ait) an idea' of God. 14. I expect somebody. 15. Those apples are fine, I will take some. 16. When we are in (en) town, we have almost eveiy day somebody to dine® with ua. 17. I have lo6t my stick, I must buy another. 18. Most of my books an 278 Xm. TREIZlfiME LEgON- ncw. 19. Do not speak ill {maT) of others. 20. Do not nnto (ff) others what thou wouldst not they should^ do unto thee. 21. Many a man sows^" who does not reap." 22. There is nothing like being {que d'etre) an honest man. 23. You must take them such as tlioy are. 1. Attribuer. 2 Fribourg. 3. Mddaille,f. i. De penser et (Pagir. 5. Oai»r 6. Nier. 7, Idie,t 8. A diner. 0. QuHls te fissent '^ vendre dier, to sell dear. /xz^w comptant, to pay cash. seniir bon, to smell sweet. marcher droit, to walk straight. sentir mauvais, to smell badly. chxnter jus e, to sing correctly. trouver bon, to approve. chanter faux, to sing false. trouver mauvais, to take iU. parler haut, to speak loud. voir clair, to see clearly. parler has, to speak low. tenir ferme, to hold fast. faire expres, to do on purpose. 3. The adjectives in this case remain, of course, unchanged. Examples : — Cette montre coute trop cher (not chhe). This watch is too dear. Les enfants parlent trop haut (not hauts). The childixin speak too loud. La chanteuse a chants faux (not fansu). The songstress has sung false. Note 1. In speaking of the state of the healtli, however, the adverb Wen or ?/ia/ is employed. Ex. : — Je suis bien, I am well. EUe se trouve mal, she finds herself ill. Note 2. Obscr\'e also the expressions, EUe est bien, she is pretty ; and aSe n'est pas mal, she is not bad-looking. 4. Some adverbs take after them an object with de or «, in case the adjective from which they are derived also takes one. Ex : — Conform'^ment a vos ordres. In conformity with your orders. Ird^peiidamment de mes instructions. Indepcndenrly of my instructions Cette riviere coule parol! element a la Vlstule. That river flows parallel with the Vbtula. THEirE 29. 1. Do not go so fast. 2. The night is approaching ; I no longer (j)lus) sec clearly. 3. The rose smells sweet, but the pink^ smells 2^6 XIV. QUAIOR^I^MB LEgON. better. 4. Do not speak low (in a whisper) in the presence of others. 6. How docs the singer^ sing? 6. She sings false (incor- rectly). 7. Do not speak so low ; speak louder, so that you can' be understood. 8. You do not read well, and you write no {pas) better. 9. To-day I am not very well. 10. Do not eat so fast. 11. This merchant sells his goods* very dear. 12. It is dark ; I do not see clearly. 13. I have distributed* the money according to (in conformity with) your orders. 1, Uoeillet. 2. La chanteuse. 3. Qu'on puisse vous comprendre. 4. Mar(^Mn- di8€9. 6. Bistributr, ADVERBS OF TIME, ETC. 1. Observe the distinction between the following adverbs : — 1. Plutot means rather (of inclination) ; plus tot, sooner (of time). 2. Tout a coup means at once, suddenly, unexpectedly ; tovl (Tun coup means at once, i. e., at one time; a la /ois means altogether. 3. Immediately is translated by tout de suite, tout a Vheure, and also by sans delai. De suite means successively, one after the other. 4. V autre jour means the other day, lately, synonymous with dernier ement. On the next day is le lendemain. 5. A little while ago is tantot ; just is expressed by the verb venir (see Part I. Lesson XL VIL). Ex.: — He has just gone out, il vient de sortir. 2. Tres, fort, and bien, all mean veiy^ right ; and whether one or the other is to be used before the adjective depends upon euphony alone. Very much, with verbs is generally translated by beaucoup, and sometimes also by bien ; but never by tres or tres beaucoup. Bien, with a noun in the sense of much or a great many, must be followed by de with the definite article (see Lesson IV., § 1). 8. WJien, in inteiTOgative phrases, is rendered by quand. Id other cases, quand refers to a possible, probable fact ; lorsque to a positive, real fact. Quand is vague ; lorsque is precise, as its etj* mology shows, alorsquc, i. e., a Vheure que. ADVERBS. 28? 4. Plus and davantage both mean more. The latter always stands at the end of a sentence, and consequently can bo followed neither by a noun nor by a comparison with than. Than after plui and moins is usually que, but before a numeral it is translated by de 5. Adverbs follow the simple verb. Do not say, Ma soeiir rate- mcnt sort le matin ; but, ma sceur sort rarement le matin, my sis- ter scklom goes out in the morning. Je pensc souvent a vouSf 1 often tLink of you. In connection with the compound tenses of the verb, the adverb is generally placed between the auxiliary and the Participle Past. Ex. : Jl/a S(n(r a Ixaucoup voyngi. My sister has travelled a great deal. 6. But adverbs of time can also be placed at the beginning of the sentence, when an emphasis it laid upon them. Ex. : — Bienldt je Le vis reparnUre, 1 saw him soon reappear. THEME 30. 1. We often pnt off' till the next day what wo onght to do at once. 2. Fortune is so fickle^ that she often suddenly deserts' those tliat she has favored* the most. 3. A single* drop of vinegar con- tains more than a hundi-cd animalculae.' 4. This man has a great many faults. 5. Children must obey immediately. 6. This man has been very much regretted.' 7. One does not arrive at once at the highest pinnacle' of fume. 8. Mr. M. (has) won a thousand dol- lar« at one time. 9. He undertakes too many things at once. 10. Did you believe this manV 11. At first {d'abord) I was not will- ing to believe him. 12. Good taste* is rather a gift^'* of nature, than an acquirement" of ar^ 13. How nmch money have you lent him ? 14. 1 have lent hhn more than eighty floiin*. 1. Renvoyer or dijfdrer 2, Inconstant. 3 Abandonner, 4. FavoHsi8, 6. Una tenlt goutte. 6. AuimaictUe, m. 7, Regrttter, 8. IJegri, m. 9. Oout, m. Id Don, m. 11. AcquiMiiony f. r- 288 XIV. QtATORZIEME LEgON. BEADING LESSON. Lb CONNfTABLB DE BoUUBON ET BaTAKD. (Dialogue.) Le Connetdble. N*est-ce pas le pauvre Bayard que je voia au pied de cet arbre, ^tendu sur Therbe,^ et perc4 d'un grand coup^ Oui, c'cst lui-meme. Ilelas ! je le plains. En voilh deux qui pd- rissent aujoard'hui par nos armes : Vandenesse et lui. Ces deux Fran9ais etaient deux oraements de leur nation par leur courage. Je sens que mon coeur est encore touchy pour sa patrie. iMais avan- 90ns pour lui parler. Ah ! mon pauvre Bayard, c'est avec douleur que je te vois en cet etat. Bayard. C'est avec douleur que je vous vois aussi. Le Con. Je comprends bien que tu es fach^ de te voir dans mes mains par le sort^ de la guerre ; mais je ne veux point te traiter en prisonnier, je te veux garder comme un bon ami, et prendre soin de ta gu^rison,'' comme si tu ^tais mon propre frere. Ainsi tu ne dois point etre fach^ de me voir. Bay. He ! croyez-vous que je ne sois point f^h^ d 'avoir obli- gation au plus grand ennerai de la France ? Ce n'est point de ma captivite, ni de ma blessure,* que je suis en peine ; * je meurs dans un moment, la raort va me delivrer de vos mains. Le Con. Non, mon cher Bayard, j'espere que nos soins r^ussi- ront a te gudrir. Bay. Ce n'est point U ce que je cberche, et je suis content de mourir. (7b be continued.) 1. Grass 2. Fate. 3. Recovery 4. Woimd. 5. Sony. SYirrAX Of NEGATIONS. 286 XV. QUINZIEME LE9ON. SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. (See P. I., L. XXXII.) 1 . It is necessary in the first place to distinguisb wbether the ne« galion belongs to a verb or not ; if not, the negative particle stands without ne. Not, without a verb, before nouns, is translated by non or non pas. Ex. : — His cnielty and not his pride. Sa cruaul€et non (oT non pas) son orgueil. Not in connection with other words is simply pas : — Not much, pas beaucoup. Not I, pas moi. Not so much, pas tant. Why not, pourquoi pas. Not at all, pas du tout or point du tout. N. B. Observe the following expressions: — Not (nor) — either, non pins. Nor his brother either, ni son frere non plus. Nor I cither, ni moi non plus. Not only — but, non-se^ilement — mais. ( See § 4. ) 2. But if the negation belongs to the verb the negative particle, whatever it may bo, is invariably accompanied by ne. Ex.: — Ne lui parlez pas, do not apeak to him. Jc n'ai rien vu, I liave seen nothing. Je ne I'ai plus, I have it no more. Aucun de vous n'y €tait, none of you were there. Le pauvre homme n'a point d' argent. The poor man has no money. Je ne ronnais personne iri, I know nobody here. Ni prieres ni * menaces ne purent I'attendrir. Neither prayers nor threatenings could move him. • If neiiJier — nor comv before two verbs Intlie Indicative mood, tbe formerfB ex- pressed Himply by ne bt-fore the first, and nor by ni ne before the second. Ex. :- I neither praise nor blame him. Jenele loue^ ninele hi^mc, " :, 290 XV. QUINZIEME LEgOH. // ne sait ni lire ni €cr{re. H« knows neither how to read nor write. Nous n'approuvons nullement votre desseih. We by no means approve of your design. Note. When the verb is in the simple Infinitive ne pas or ne point (b\bo fu ya>7L2w) are not separated, as : — Not to study, ne pas €ludicr or ne point dudier. But when it is in the compound Infinitive it is optional to separate theic or not, as: — ( ne pas (point) avoir €tvuii€. Not to have Studied, -s , /■ • ^\ ^ i-^ ' i n' avoir pas (point) €ludi€. 3. The words no more or not any more (meaning not more) are expressed by ne before the verb and pas plus afler, when mxyre is followed by than : — lie is no more than fifteen years of age. n n'a pas plus de quinze ans. But they are rendered by ne — plus without pas, when more is not fol- lowed by than. Ex.: — I shall read no more (no longer), je ne lirai plus. 4. iVbw seulement, not only, takes no ne with the verb. Ex.: — Je Vai fait non seulement pour lui, mats aussi pour ses enfants. I have done it not only for his sake, bat also for his children's. THEME 31. 1. I do not speak. 2. I have not spoken. 3. Have yon bought this book ? 4. No, sir, I have not (P. I., L. XLVII.). 5. It is your friendship which I seek, not my interest.^ 6. Not I. 7. Not we. 8. Are you tired? 9. Not at all. 10. I was not there ; nor my sister cither. 11 . This peasant^ can neither read nor write. 12. The boy has neither paper* nor pens. 13. I have never had such a (un si) good book. 14. We have no desire at all* to do it. 15. The speaker* has convinced® not only his fiiends but also his adversaries. 16. Chai'les XII. persisted in' never Bpeaking (never to speak) French. 17. I have no more hope. 1. Intirety m. 2. Paysan, m. 3. See p. 224, J 3. 4. NuUcment envie, 6. Vor» tewr» 6. Ccmvaincre. 7. S'obstinait, BYJSTTAX OP NEGATIONS. 291 NE USED ALONE WITHOUT PAS. 5. Tho negative not is expressed by ne without pas ot, point with the three verbs : cesser, to cease ; oser, to dare ; pouvoir, to be able ; when followed by an Infinitive, as : — Elle ne cesse de plenrer, she docs not cease crying. 77 n'ose revenir, he dares not come back. Je ne puis le croire, I cannot believe it. Note 1. Cesser takes pas, however, when a time is specified, as ; — n ne cesse pas de travaiUer avant huit heures du soir. NoTB 2. la regard to pouvoir, use in the first person of the Prosanl tense cither: — Je ne puis {without pas), or : Jene peux pas. 6. When the negative use of savoir means to be uncertain, i. e. in doubt, it does not take pas. In the same way pas is always omitted in the expression je ne saurais, I cannot. Ex.: — Je ne savais que dire, I did not know what to say Je ne saurais voiis donner une garantie. I cannot give you a security. But if " not know " has the signification of not to have learned, not to know (a language, etc.), then saro/r always takes ne and pas. Ex.: — Je ne sais pas nager, I cannot swim. Ne savez'vous pas I'allemand, do you not know German 1 7. In sentences depending upon prendre garde, to take care, there is no pas. Ex.; — Prenez garde qu'il ne vous trompe. Pas is used however if an infinitive follows. Ex.: — Prenez garde de ne pas tomber. 8. Of two negative sentences standing in immediate connoction with each other, the latter loses its pas. Ex.: — ^ Je ne connais pei'sonne qui ne fasse quelqnefois des fautes. NoTB 1 . Also peu and sans arc here regarded as a negation, as : -rr Pen s'en faui qu'il ne soil tomh€, he was very near falling. ^fw nen /aire, without doing anything. 292 AV. QTHNZIEME LEgON. Note 2. The former sentence may also be interrogative if only the idea of negation be contained in it, as : — Ya-t-il (or est-il) un homme qui ne croie en Dieu f 9. Do not put pas after que ne, when used instead ot pourquoi pas. Ex.: — )Si vous avez froid, que ne mettez-vous voire manteau f If you are cold, why not put on your cloak ? 10. Nor after voila, il y a and depuis que, when the verb which has the idea of negation is in the compound of the Present or iu the compound of the Imperfect. Ex. ; — H y a deux mois que je ne lui ai parl€. II a lien chamj^ depuis que je ne I'ai vu. 11. Pas is not used when ne is connected with cT autre followed by que, as : — Je n'ai d'autre ambition que de vous rendre heureux. I have no other ambition than to make you happy. 12. Further in the following idioms : — N'avoir garde, to take care not to, to be on one's guard. N^importe, it does not matter. Ne voir goutte, to see nothing (at all). Ne dire mot, to say not a word. a Dieu neplaise que, etc., God forbid, etc. 13. A moins que and conjunctions expressing fear, take ne before the following verb (in the subjunctive). Ex.: — A moins que vous ne le fassiez, Unless you do it. THEME 32. 1. Alcibiades could not suffer that his country should obey* a rival.^ 2. I dare not enter^ his room. 3. It is no more than a sveok* since I saw {que fai vu) your uncle ; he has gone to Amer- ica, you will see him no more. 4. I cannot (§6) tell you whether (si) my father is at home or not {non)-, I have not seen him thi^• njoming. 5. Take c^e lest {que, § 7) he steal your money. 6. BTNTAX OF NEGATIONS. 293 Take care not to. be (to come) too late. 7. We dare not tell him this news. 8. There is no enemy who is (soit) not able* to injure. ** 9. God forbid that I should betray' your secret. 1. Impcrf. Subj. 2. A une rivale, 3. Entrer dans. 4. HuU Jours. 6. En Hat. 6. Dt nuire, 7. Trahir, NEGATION USED IN FRENCH, AND NOT IN ENGLISH* 14. Ne is moreover often employed in French when in English no thought of negation is to be discovered. This is the case : — Witb the affirmative verb of a comparative clause introduced by que, than, when the verb closely follows que. Also after verbs, nouns, and conjunctions expressing fear and apprehension. Ex.: — // est plus ag€ que je ne croyais. He i» older than I thought. Je crains qu'il ne vienne. I fear ho may come. 7? parle autrement rpi'il n'agit. He speaks otherwise than ho acts. A moins que vous ne le fassiez. Unless you should do it. NoTB. But if the first clause of the sentence be negative, que of the la^ ter clause is not followed by n«, if the compared action is not doubtful, as : // n'€crit pas mieux qu'il parle. 15. The verbs douter, to doubt ; nier and disconvenir, to deny . contester, to contest, require ne before the verb (in the Subjunctive) of the dc|)ondcnt sentence, yet only when these verbs themselves are used simply negatively or simply interrogatively. Ex.: — Je ne doiite pas > Doutez.vous \ ^"^ ^^« "« *^*' '"'''*• (^> I do not doubt (do you doubt) that this is true. Je ne nie pas\'J^'^'^ '^^ ^^P^' (^) Do you deny (I do not deny) that he is guilty? • The pupil should learn, in connection with this lesson, $ 6, L. XJX. p. 33Q, 294 XV. QUINZIEME LCgON. 16. But when these verbs arc affirmative, or ncgative-mterrogar fcive, ne is not inserted in tlie second clause. Also when ne pas douier has the force of etre sur. Ex.: — Je doute que cda soil vrai (without ne). Ne niez-vous pas qu'il soit coupaUe f 17. If the dependent sentence in English is negative, it takes of course, ne — pas. Ex. : — I fear he will nqt come, je crains qu'il ne vlenne pas. They fear the fortress will not have ammunition enough. On craint que la forteresse n'ait pas assez cle munition. 18. Empecher, to prevent, to hinder, requires ne before the fol lowing verb in the Subjunctive mood, as : — Tempicherai qu'il ne sorte. I will hinder him from going out. Empechera-t-il 1 II n'empeckera pas I ^"^ ^* "* ^« /^««- Will he prevent you (he will not prevent you) from doing it 1 THEME 33. 1. He is more wicked than I thought. 2. Henry is stronger jthan ho was last year. 3. Ireland is more powerful, at present, than were the three kingdoms at (a) the death of queen Elizabeth, 4. A traveller often relates' things otherwise than they are. 5. I fear lest (que) some misfortune has befallen'* my son. 6. I fear our master will come; do you not fear he will come? 7. He denies that his brother is mixed up^ in that affair. 8. The city of Paris has become much more beautiful since ^ you saw (have seen) it. 9. Do you fear ho will write to your father? 10. I do not fear it, 11. We do not fear that the lattle is lo.st. 12. Do you deny that you have procured [for] him the moans of flight?' 13. I do not deny that I have given him some clothes anTl some money. 14, I will hinder him from coming back. 15. I doubt whether the letter has been sent to him (see p. 275, § 1, Note 1). 16. I cannot prevent him from loving (that he loves) pleasure*' better than work.* 1. Rapporter. 2. Etre arrivi d. 8. Jiieler. 4. £>^puis que, 6. ^htiie, t, 5» fut tiui dcf. article. 8YKTAX OF NEGATIONS. 206 reading lesson. Lb Conn^table db Bourbon et Batard. (Suite.) he Con. Qu'as-tn done '( Estrcc quo tu ne saurais te consolei d'aToir 6t^ vaincu ct fait prisonnicr dans la rctraite dp Bonnivct? Ce n'cst pas ta faute, c'cst la sicnnc : Ics arracs sent journaliores (^changing). Ta gloire est assez bicn ^tablio par tint de belles ac- tions. Les Impdriaux^ ne pourront jamais oublier cetto vigoureuse defense do MiSzieres contrc cux. J^at/. Pour moi, je no puis jamais oublier que vous etes ce grand connetable, ce prince du plus noble sang qu'il y ait dans le monde, et qui travaille h dechircr^ do ses propres mains sa patric et Ic loyaume de ses ancetres. Le Con. Quoi ! Bayard, jo to lone, et tu me condamncs I Je te plains, ct tu m'insultcs I Bat/. Si vous me plaignez, jo vous plains aussi; et jo voua trouve bien plus 2t plaindre que moi. Jo sors de la vie sans tache ; j'ai sacrifie la micnne h mon devoir, jo meurs pour mon pays, pour mon roi, estim^ des cnncmis de la France, ct regietti3'b^eak. 3. ^Tanner and instrument : — a la node, in fashion, fashionably. a pied, on foot, a cheval, on horseback. a bras ouverts, with open arms. travaiUer h I'aiffuilie, to work widi the needle. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 297 peindre a Vhuile, to paint in oil nussurer a I'aune, to measure by the eU (yard). deux a deux, two and two. goutte a gontte, drop by drop. a bort marchi, cheap. a cinq jx>ur cent, at five per cent. a I'anglaise, after the English style. 4. Destination : — Une cuiller a th^, a teaspoon. Une montre a r€p€lition, a repeater Cwatch). 5. Direction, especially with the verb aUer or se rcndre, to go (the English to) : — AUer a Vienne, to go to Vienna. Nous allons a la campagne, we are going into the country. AUer au theatre, to go to the theatre. Alter a la chasse, to go hunting, etc. Dans, en. Dans means both in and into a (closed) place ; it is used in a more determinate sense than en, and is always followed by the iirticle or another determinate word (such as, this, my, which, etc.). Ex. :— Dans la (ma, voire) chambre, in the (my, your) room. Dans ma poche, in my pocket. Dans I'liiver de 1850, in the winter of 1850. Dans une colere affreuse, in a dreadful passion. // esi dans La prison, he is in (the) prison (of that place). Eire dans la vil/e, to be within the town (not in the country). Observe also the difference in the following expressions : — n est au jardin and it est dans son jardin. Je 8uis a (a maison (at home) and je suis dans ma maison. En is used in a more vague sense, and is followed by no article. Il is used for in or to before the name of a kingdom, republic, country, oounty, or province. Ex. : — En liberty, in liberty. En colere, in a paflsion. En France, in or to France. En Avril or au mois d' avril, in Ay ril. En Ai, in summer. En hiver, in winter. 298 XVI. SEIZIEMB LEgON. En atitomne, in antnmTi (Tint au printemps, in spring.) Eire en voi/age, to travel about. En ces tennes, in these words. Vivre en paix, to live in peace. Eire en vi/le, to 1)C out, to be from home. II est en prison, he is in prison (he is a prisoner). Note. There are a few expressions in which the article is retained aftei- en; such are, en ['absence, in the absence; en I'honneur, in honor. Only F and la ore thus found after en, never le. Dans and en, relating to time, are differently used. Dans de- notes the point of time, en the duration. Ex. : — Dans dix minutes, ten minutes hence. En dix minutes, within the space of ten minutes. Jt partirai dans huit jours, I shall set out in a week. M. 13. reviendra dans deux inois, Mr. B. will return in two months. J^ai appris le fran^ais en dix mois, I learned French in ten months. Entre, parmi. Entre answers in general to the English between, betwixt, and \& ■aid of two objects only. Ex. : — Entre la porte et la fenetre, between the door and the window. Entre autres, among others. La mere tenait I'enfant entre ses bras. The mother held her child in her arms. Parmi is said of several objects, as : — Parmi les rochers, among the rocks. Votre grammaire se trouva jxirmi mes Hares. Your grammar was found among my books. Devant, avant. Devant is a local preposition, and is also used for in presence of, as: — Nous jouerons devant la maison, we will play before the house. H a paru devant le juge, he appeared before the judge. Sur le devant, in the front ; la porte de deoant, the front door. Avant denotes priority of time and order, as ; — Je suis amv€ avant vous, I arrived before you. i L'article se met avant le nom, the article is put before the noon. nSMAHES ON SOME PEEPOSinONS. 299 Avcmt tatd, nbove all. Avant is also used before an infinidve with de: — AlxuU de partir, before leaving. EnverSy vers. E?ivers, towards, to, is used for with regard to, in a moral sense^ as: — Soyez charitaUes envert lea pauvres, be charitable tovrards the poor. Ccmportez-vous bien envers lui, behave well towards him (with regard to tiim). Vers expresses motion and is put before names i)f |»lace8 and persons ; — Vers la cdline, towards the liilL n s'avanfa vers moi, he advanced towar«i!> me Chez. Chez might be rendered in English by at tht hoti9e of, wtth^ among, etc. Ex. : — Chez votre pere, at your father's. Chez les Romahis, aoiong the Romans. Chacun est maitre chez ^oi, everybody is master in his own boose. Je viens de chez vous, I come from your house. Ebrs de, hors. 1. Hors de denotes an exclusion from a place, out of, outside of without. Ex. : — Sors de la maison, out of the house. Hon da royaume, out of the kingdom. KoTE. In this signification de may be left out, as : Hors la maison, hors la barriere, etc. 2. Hors de is also used in a figurative or temporal sense, as : — /? est hors de danyer, he is out of danger. Hors d'dat, out of condition, unable. 3. Hors (without de) signifies except, besides : — Hors cela nous sommes d' accord, with the exception of that we are agreed. Note. In this senco hormis is sometimes used for hors, more frequently 300 Xn. SEIZIEME LEgON. D^avec, (Tentre, de dessoiis, etc. Some prepositions are preceded by de, which serves to indicate fche point from which an action proceeds, aa : — Ma separation d'avec mon pere. 'iA.j separation from my father. On arracha l^enfant d'entre les bras de sa mere. They tore the child from the arms of its mother. On le lira de dessous le lit. They drew him from under the bed. Sans. Sans, without, is sometimes expressed in English by but for Elxample : — Sans lui, je serai mort de /aim. But for him, I should have starved. ^. This word is a contraction for en les. It is used for university degrees. Ex. : — Bachelier es lettres, bachelor of arta. THEME 34. 1. Where are you going? 2. I am going into the country. 3. My friend arrived in the beginning of summer ; he was received with open arms. 4. Is this book to (a) your taste ?^ 5. No, I do not like it. (^It does not please me). 6. I met that gentleman on my journey in Italy. 7. Is Mr. A. at home? 8. Yes, sir; he is in the garden. 9. In the absence of the king, who is now m Italy, these afikirs must be suspended.' 10. The poor man had to choose between slavery^ and death. 11. Wliy has she been so anjust towards her parents? 12. Did you arrive before or after four o'clock ? 13. Before the church there are three high poplars.* 14. My neighbor was kindly disposed towards me. 15. I found this letter among ray papers. 16. Brandy (J eau-de-vie) is the Bource of great evils among that people. 1. Gout, ta. 2. Suspendre. 3. L'esclavagey m. 4. PenptUr, m. REMARK8 ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 301 THEME 35. 1. They (on) told me amongst other things, that the ship had been taken by the enemy (pL). 2. The old man was unable {not in a condition) to do anything for her. 3. He has sold all his horses, except one or two. 4. Now we turn to (towards) the south. 5. Among the merchants in London, there are many beneficent' men. 6. He lives with his brother. 7. The tailor will come to vour house to-raoiTOw. 8. Where do you come from '( 9. I come &T)m my aunt's. 10. The wooden horse was outside the walls^ of Troy. 11. The patient' is at present out of danger. 12. Nobody besides myself was present. 13. Out of (swr) sixty soldiers who tried the attack, twenty-five fell into {entre) the hands of the enemy (jo/.). 14, One must distinguish true friendship from {d'avec) (the) false. 15. The dog sprang out* from under the table. 1. Bienfaisant. 2. Les tnurs de Troie. 3. Le malade. 4. Sauter. n. HOW TO EXPRESS SOME ENGLISH PREPOSITIONS. Above. Above, when it expresses time or number, so as to signify more than or longer than, b rendered in French by plxts de Kx. : — The fight lasted above four hours. Le comUit dura plus de quatre heures.. It is above twenty miles from here. fl y a plus de vingt lieues d'ici. About. 1. About, in the sense of around, is to be r«^ tiered by aufour de. 2. In the signification of concerning, it ts touchant, concer- nant, sur, or simply de. 3. In speaking of things which people Tarry about them, it is translated with sur. Ex. : — 1. All thronged about the prince. Tout le inoiule se pressa antour da prince. 2. 1 will speak to him al)0ut our afTuir (business). Je Lui parlerai toucliaiit (or sur or de) notre affaire. 3. I have no money about me, je n'ai pas d'u/t^ui sur moi. d02 XVI. SEIZIEMB LEgOM. At. 1. At IS most commonly rendered by a with or without an arti- cle. 2. After nouns or verbs denoting derision, anger, surprise, sorrow, etc., at is rendered by de. 3. It is translated chez when, in English, it precedes the word hovLSCy either expressed or unde^ stood. Ex. : — 1 . We were at dinner, nous ilions a diner. Do you play at cards, jouez-vous aux cartes t 2. She laughed at him, elte se moqua de lui. I am surprised at what you say. Je suis surjms de ce que vous dites. S. We were at your aunt's, nous Aions chez voire tante. By. 1. By denoting the agent or cause is translated de or par (see p. 135, 2). Ex.: — Mr. Bell is respected by everybody. M. Bell est respects de tout le monde. Troy was destroyed by the Grecki. Troie fut detruite par les Grecs. 2. In affirmations and swearing by is translated par: He swears by his honor, t7 en jure par son honneur. 3. By, after the verbs to sell, to buy, to work, etc., preceding n noun of weight or measure, day, week, month, or year, is rendered in French by a with the definite article. Ex. : — I sell the tea by the pound, je vends leth€ala livre. We work by the hour or by the day. Nom travaillons a I'heure ou a la joum€e. 4. When preceding a numeral immediately followed by an adjec- tive of dimension, by is rendered in French by. sur. Ex. : This room is fifteen feet long by ten wide. Cette chambre a quinze pieds de longueur sur dix de largeur. 5. By, immediately following the verbs to kill, to wound, etc., is translated in French by d'un coup de, when it expresses the blow, wound, firing, etc., of an instrument by which a man was wounded, killed^ etc Ex.: — RZMAEKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 303 The ofliccr was wounded by a hullct. L'officier fat hless^f d'un coup de fusil. Achilles was killed at the siege of Troy by an arrow. Achille fut tu€ an siege de Troie d'un coup de Jleche. Note. If the blows have been repeated, a coups de is used. Id which caw ft is most commonly rendered in English by mth. Ex. : — They knocked him down with a stick. Hi I'assommererU a coups de baton, THEME 30. 1. My father was not above twenty-two years old when he was married.^ 2. My uncle's country-bouse* is very handsome ; but it cost him above eighty thousand francs. 3. It is above a year since my friend set oflf for* America. 4. Rome was built by Romulus. 6. The poor man has been driven out* of his house by his creditors.' 6. I will get up to-morrow at six o'clock. 7. Were you at Mrs. D.'s ball last night? 8. I will pay you at the end of this month. 9. I rejoice greatly at your good luck.' 10. She always smiles' at everything that is said. 11. WTacre was your sister this morning? 12. She was at her aunt's. 13. ^ly box* is a foot and a half deep by two wide and four long. 14. IIaro!d was wounded by an arrow.' 15. William the Second was killed by an arrow in the New- Forest. 16. He is so strong that with his fist^" (5, Note) he could knock down" an ox. 17. They killed the dog with stones. 18. The sol- diers kill one another with bayonets.^ 1. To be married, se marier. 2. La nuiison de campagne. 3. Pour. i. ChasBi. 6. Criancier, m. 6. Bonheur. 7. Sourire. 8. Le coffre. 9. FUche, f. 10. Le poing, 11. Abaitre. 12. La balonette. From. 1. From, preceding the name of a person, or a possessive adjoo- ttvo, or a personal or interrogative pronoun after the verbs to go, to some, to send, etc., is generally rendered by de la part de. Ex. : — Many compliments from Dr. O. Bien des compliments de la part de Afonsieur le dodeur Q, I come from him or her (from them), etc. Je liens de sa part (de leur part). 304 XVI. 8EIZIEME LE^ON. 2. From, meaning jfrom some one's house, is m French dt chaz. Example : — I come from ray uncle's, aunt's, etc. Je viens de chez mon oncle, — de chez ma tante, etc. 3. From — to is rendered by de — en. Ex. : — He went from street to street, from town to town, etc. U alia de rue en me, de ville en ville, etc. Note. When two names of towns or villages are mentioned, to is ren- dered by a. Ex. : — From Paris to Rouen, de Pajns a Rouen. 4. From is rendered by depuis, and to hjjtisqu'a^ when speak- mg of extent or time. Ex. : — From Easter to Christmas, depuis Pdques jusqu*a NoSl. In. 1. j5i — dans or en, see these words in the first part of this Les- son. 2. In, after words denoting pain, hurting, etc., and preceding a possessive adjective with any part of the body, is to be rendered by a with the definite article. Ex. : — I have constantly a pain in my head. J'ai toujours mal a la tete. 3 In adverbial expressions of time, in is not expressed in French. Ex. : — In the morning, le matin. In the evening, le soir. On or upon. 1. On or upon is most generally sur. Ex. : — He climbed upon the tree, il grimpa sur I'arbre. 2. After the verbs to play, to live, to depend, and the like, on CT upon is rendered by de. Ex. : — You play on the violin, and I play on the flute. Vous jouez du violon et moi, je joue de la Jlute. A good end often depends on a good beginning. Une bonne fin depend souvent d'un ban commencement. The prisoner lives on bread and water. Le prisonnier vit de pain et d'eau. REMARKS ON SOME PREPOSITIONS. 306 3. The preposition on, before the days of the week and with dates, is dropped in French. Ex. : — Come on Sunday, lyenez dhnnnche. On the twelfth of Maj, le doiize mat. 4. On, denoting time, m other cases is translated hy en. Over. This preposition is commonly rendered in French by sur, but ii must be expressed by the Part. Past of the verbs passer, Jinir, achever, when it denotes an action ended. Ex. : — As soon as the rain will be over. Des (/lie la pliiie sera pass^e. Is dinner over, U diner est-il Jinif With. 1. With is rendered by de after such verbs as, to die, to meddle, to do, to dispense, to load, to cover, to fill, and after some adjeo- tivcs, as : pleased, contented, -etc. (see p. 250, § 1 and 2). Ex.: — He died with cold, il mournt de froid. The wagon is loaded with goods, la voiture est charg€e de marchandises. 2. With is expressed by a and the article before nouns denoting in what manner a thiag is done or made. Ex. : — To draw with a pencil, dessiner au crayon. To fight with pistols, se battre au pistolet. Note. Charger takes a, and se battre, au, a la, a I' (as the norm may require), before the names of materials or weapons generally used for loadiug fire-anns or for ii]^hting ; othcnvise, with is rendered by avec. Ex. : — Clia'ger an fusil a balles, avec des pierres. Se l>attre a l'€p€e, an pistolet, avec des luiches, avec des martaux. The araltiguous English sentence, lie struck the raau with a wooden Isg, would be translated into French by II frappa I'homme a lajambe de hois, if the man was crippled ; but if the wooden leg is the weapon of attack, arec is used. 3. With must not be expressed after the following verbs : to meet with, rencontrer ; to trust with, conjier qch. a qn. ; to supply 306 XVI. SEIZlfiSTB LEgON. witli, fotimir qch. a qn. ; to reproacli with, rcprocher qch. h qn. Examples : — We ^ill supply him with everything. Nous lui foumirons tout. I reproached hira with his ingratitude. Je lui reprochai son ingratitude. Remark. Prepositions are placed in French before the words they gov em, though in English they are sometimes placed after. . Ex. : — Whom do you speak to, a qui parlez-vous f What's that for, ponr quoi cela f The man whom you are interested in. L'homme pour qui vous vous int^ressez. THEME 87. 1. Go from me to IMr. S., and tell him that I am expecting him. 2. From whom do you come ? 3. I come from Miss B. 4. Charles was wounded in his arm, and not (now) in his leg. 5. I have very often a pain in my teeth. 6. I will call upon you in the afternoon, and in the evening (I will) go to the play. 7. Upon what instrument does your sister play? 8. She plays the piano. 9. That happened^ on the 12th [of] March. 10. I am in the habit^ of taking a cup of coffee as soon as dinner is over. 11. Do not meddle^ with my affairs ; attend to your own. 12. Is that house covered with slate* or tiles?* 13. It is covered with tiles. 14. This picture seems to be done with chalk.' 15. When you meet a poor man, never reproach him [with] his poverty. 16. France extends' from the Rhine to the Atlantic® Ocean. 17. What does he complain' of? 18. We have travelled from Switzerland to Italy. 19. You spend all the day in going {a alhr) from house to house, from street to street, from place to place. 20. Those labor- ers^° work from {depuis) morning^* to night.^ 21. I walk every day from twelve (midi) to three. 1. Se pasaa. 2. To be In the habit of, avoir Vhabitride de. 3. Se ntHer. 4. Ar. doisz, in singular. 6. Tuile, in plural. 6. Craie,{. 7. S^etendre. 8. VOciaai 4i lanltfque. 9. Se plaindre de qch. 10. Ouvrier, m. 11. Put the artioltf. 08ES OF THE CONJUNCTION QtJB. 301 XVII. DIX-SEPTlfiME LE9ON. DIFFERENT USES OF THE CONJUNCTION QUE. I. QUE WITH THE INDICATIVE. 1. The conjunction que is used 1. to join the two terms of a comparison ; 2. in a restrictive sense for but or only, as : Elle n'a que deux /reres, she has only two brothers. 2. The que of admiration or excla'nation expresses wonder 01 surprise; it answers to the English words how, how much, how many. Ex. : — Que vous etes heitreux I how happy you arc I Que la terre est petite en comparaison avec le scieil! How small is the earth compared with the son I Que de peine vous prenez pour moi ! How much trouble you take for me 1 3. In short exclamations que is inserted afler the noon when the verb is omitted. Ex. : — Quel beau pays que Vltalie / What a beautiful country Italy is I Quxl homme que ce F€n€lon I What a man that Fenelon is {or was) I 4. It stands for pourquoi in negative exclamations, as : — Que ne puis-je vous aider I why can I not assist you 1 5. The French periphrase of a sentence with c^esi is followed by quBf whereas in English this is not expressed. Ex.: — Vest une belle chose que la discrAion, Discretion is a good thing. C'est une chose d/lestahle que la haine. Hatred is a detestable thing. If, however, an Infinitive follows, ^ need not be used : — 308 xrn. t>ix-septieme LEgoN. Cest une honte (que) (Tignorer sa langue matemeUe. It is a shame not to know one's mother tongue. 6. Que must be inserted after c'est-a-dire, that is to say, wnen a verb follows. Que is also frequently used after voila and peut-etr* Example : — Vous serez par/a itement Uhres, c'est-a-dire que vous ne d^pendrez de persortne, Yoa will be perfectly free, that is to say, you will depend upon nobody. 7. In the expressions : que oui, yes ; que si! yes ! qus r^on, no ; ^'Me is used ploonastically. Ex.: — Je dis que oui, I say yes. 8. Que stands for since instead of depuis que: Combten y a-t-il que votre soeur est mortet How long is it since your sister died 1 9. Que is used for when after a peine, scarcely, and in the sig- nification of as or when, after the specification of a time, in which case the use of lorsque would be incorrect. Ex. : — A peine €lait-il sorti, que la maison s'^croula. Scarcely was he gone out, when the house fell. Un matin que je sortais de tres-bonne heure. One morning as I went out early. Maintenant que vous etes en France, etc. Now that you are in France. ... 10. Que corresponds to the English that after all verbs of think- ing, feeling, saying,* as : dire, affirmer, repondre, declarer, croire, penser, sentir, etc. , and usually takes the Indicative when these words are used afiirmatively. In English the that is oft«D omitted, but in French it must always be employed. Ex.: — Dites-lui que je V attends. Tell him that I am waiting for him. H nCa r€pondu qii'il n'en savait rien. He answered mo that he knew nothing of it On croit qu'dle est tres-riche. She is supposed to be very rich. •"VTuurc lu Latin the Aco.Ib used with the Ii\fimiiV8. t!8fiS 01' TflE CONJtJliC'riON OttB. SOd NoTB. Que is not only always expressed in French, bnt repeated before each member of the proposition. Ex.: — Je crois que vous vous trompez et que vous ne r€ussirez pcu. I thiiLk jou are mistaken, and that yon will not succeed. 11. In many cases where the conjunction is repeated in English, the French, instead of repeating it, put que in the place of it. This IB the case with lorsque, qv^nd, pendant que, tandis que, parcc que, tant que and des que. Ex.: — Lorsque I'empereur fat revenu et qu'il (and when he) eiU visits le camp, U risolut de livrer bataille. Tandis que Charles XII donnait un roi a la Pdogne soumise, que le Dane- nvirk n'osait le troubler, et que le roi de Pmsse recherchait son amiti€, le czar de- vaxait de jour en jour plus redoutable. THEME JW, 1. I am much younger than you. 2. Caroline is only seventeen years old. 3. How pretty she is I 4. How I hate flatterers !^ 5. How small is the part of the world which we inhabit ! '^ 6. What [que de) misfortunes you have undergone ! ^ V. If you are [avez) cold, why (§4) don't you put on your cloak ? 8. It is a very dif- ficult thing to know (§ 5) [how to] keep what one has. 9. Look, itraius! 10. Perhaps he will conic. 11. 1 believe (that) you are right. 12. He told me that he had not yet received a letter from his uncle. 13. Are you ready? 14. O no! (§7) T cannot finish before an hour. 15. Have you not been there ? 16. O yes ! 1 1. How long is it since you lost your father ? 1 8, One day when the two sparrows' had flowu out,^ the childi*en took away^ their nest. 19. Tell me the day (on which, § 9) you think " of leaving. 20. I think he is not at home. 2 1. Scarcely is he out of bed be- fore he begins to work. 22. Why (§ 4) did you not tell it ? 23. When you have acknowledged yom- faults, and (§11) have repair- ed^ tham, I will forgive you. 1. Flatteur. 2. UaUter. 3. ^prouves. 4 Le moincau 6 jStaierU eortii. Q. Eiilever. 7. Vou9 comptez paHir. 8 Repares SIO XVn. DIX-SEPTlfiME LEgOM, n. QUE WITH THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. Que, in a conditional sense, is used in the beginning of a sen- tence for the word whether, and in the middle, to avoid the repeti' don of si ; in both cases it governs the Subjunctive mood. Ex.: — "Wlicther he come or not, I do not care. Qu'il vienne ou non, je ne m'en soucie pas. If soirrbody calls and I am out, send for me. Si queJqu'un vient vie voir et que je sois sorti, envoyez-moi chercher. If you meet her, and (if) you have time to speak to her. Si I ous la rencoiUrez et que vous ayez le temps de lui parlor. 2. For tiUf instead oi jusqu'a ce que after attendre^ to wait. Example : — Wait till it gets less cold. Attendez qu'il fasse moins froid. Tou must wait till I am back. JX faut atiendre que je sois de retour. 3. For the English tlurd person of the Imperative, let him or let them. Ex.: — Let him come, qu*il vienne. Let them do it, qu'iU {qu'elles) le /assent. 4. For ihatf instead of pour que^ afin que : — Come here that I may speak to you. Venez ici que je vous parle. 6. Que is used with ne for the English hut (or hut that) after verbs expressing doubly fear, etc. (see p. 293, § 15). Ex.: — I don't doubt but that you are right. Je ne doute pas que vous ii'ayez raison. 6. In the same manner que is used for hefore^ instead of avant que ; for unless, instead of a moins que ; for without^ instead of sans quCf and for yet, instead of el cependant. Ex.: — I shall not go out before you are in. /« ne iortirai pas que vous ne aoyet renM, U8EH OF THE CONJUNCTION QUE. 311 I ahaH not pardon you unless you acknowledge your faulta. Je ne vous pardonnerai pas que vous ne reconnaissiez vos JatUet. He takes no trip without some accident befalling him. // ne fait pas de voyage qu'il ne lui arrive quelque accident. Though he should have all the gold in the world, yet he would not be satisfied. // aurait tout I'or du monde, qu'il ne serait pas content. (For the use of que instead of repeating compound conjunctions, and af- ier verbs governing the Subjunctive, see Lesson 19, on the Subjunctive Mood, § 12). THEME 39. 1 . Whether it rain or not, I must go out directly. 2. If I were rich and had children, I would give them a good education. 3. Whether you be rich or poor, you should {devez) be a man of prob- ity. 4. He had not a doubt {did not doubt) but that this was hia pursuer.^ 5. Wait till the rain is over. 6. A miser* might have ill the gold in the world, he would never be satisfied. 7. You shall not go out before it is light.' 8. Let him have his share.* 9. Come that I may tell you the reason of that thing {en). 10. May heaven bless* you I 11. May the earth lie lightly on him {be light^ to liim). 12. Let him employ his time well. 13. I shall not leavt the house {go out) before you pay me. 14. He cannot play but he hurts' himself. 15. If you go to Paris and (§ 1) will take me with you, I shall be most happy.* IG. My friend says he will not pay the bookseller* before he has received all the books (which) he (has) ordered. 17. I shall put off'" my journey ; I shall wait till your time allows you to accompany me. 1. Persicuteur. 2. Avare. 3. To be light— /aire Jour. 4. Part,i. 5. Binir, d. JAg^re. 7. Se /aire mcU. 8. Most h&ppy — £nchant4. 9. Lt libraire. 10. Remettre. reading lesson. Lb Conn£table de- Bourbon et Bayard. (Fin.) Le Connet. Mais ma patrie a 6t6 ingrate apres tant de servicefl .pe je lui avals rendus. Le roi m'a fait uue injustice dnorme. En 312 ' XVn. DIX-SEPTIEME LEgON. me d^pouillant* de mon bien, on a d^tach^ de moi jusqu*^ (even) mos domestiques, Matignon et d'Argouges. J'ai ^t^ contraint, pour sauver ma vie, de in'euf uir presque seul. Que voulais-tu que je fisse ? Bai/, Que vous souffrissiez toutes sortcs de maux, plutot que de manqucr a la France ct a la grandeur de votre maison. Si la per- secution etait trop violente, vous pouviez vous retirer : mais il va- lait mieux etre pauvre, obscur, inutile a tout, que de prendre les armes centre nous. Votre gloire edt ote au comble'^ dans la pau- vrete et dans le plus miserable exil. Le Conn. Mais ne vois-tu pas que la vengeance s'est jointo k Tambition pour roe jeter dans cette extrdmit^ ? J'ai voulu que le roi se repcntit de m'avoir traits si mal. Bai/. U fallait Ten faire repentir par une patience h toute ^prcuve, qui n'est pas moins la vertu d'un heros que le courage. Le Conn. Mais le roi, dtant si injuste et si aveugle* par sa mere, mdritaib-il que j'eusse de si grands dgards pour lui ? £ai/. Si le roi ne le mdritait pas, la France entiere le mdritait. La dignity meme de la couronne, dont vous etes un des heritiers, le mdritait. Vous vous deviez* k vous-m^me d'epargner* la France, dont vous pouviez etre un jour roi. Le Conn. Eh bien I j'ai tort, je Tavoue ; mais ne sais-tu p;is combien les meilleurs coours ont de peine k register k leur ressenti- ment? Bay. Je le saia bien : mais le vrai courage consiste k r^sister. Si vous connaissez votre faute, batez-vous de la rdparer. Pour moi, je meurs, et je vous trouve plus k plaindre dans vos prospdritds, que moi dans mes soufirances. Quand Tempereur ne vous trompe- rait pas quand m6me il vous donnerait sa sojur en manage, ct qu'il partagerait la France avec vous, il n'effacerait point la tache^ qui deshonore votre vie. Le connetable de Bourbon rebelle ! ah ! quelle honte ! ficoutez Bayard mourant comme il a vecu, ct ne ccssant de dire la verite: 1. strip. 8. The highest. 8. Blinded. 4. To owe. B. To spare. 6. The Btain. 0SB OP THE TENSES OF THE INDICATirE. 31S XVIII. DIX-HUITIEME LE9ON USE OF THE TENSES OF THE INDICATIVB. I. PRESENT TENSE. 1 . The Present of the Indicative corresponds to the English pres- ent. In French there is only one form of this tense, as : Je lis, I read ; faime, I like. The English forms : I am reading, I do read, etc., must therefore always be translated as if they were : I read,y# Hs. Ex.: — The children arc playing in the garden. * Les en/ants jouent au jardin. Nous dinons toujours a deux heures. 2. The Present tense is sometimes employed for the Future, when speaking of actions which are to be done at a time proximate or near, as : — Je pars demain, I (shall) set out to-morrow. 3. It is also used in a narrative, instead of the Preterite, in or- der to give more vivacity to the description, and to make the event, as it were, present. For this reason it is called also the historical or narrative Present. Ex.: — A ceete nouvelle, qu'il repousse avec irritation, Napoleon descend de la mm- lagne da Saliit et s'approche de la Moskiva et de la porte Dorogomilow. B s'arrete (stops) encore a I'enirtfe de cette barriere^ mais inufilement. Murat h presse, etc. Here repousse, descend, s'approche, s'arrete, presse are historical Presents ("in- stead of repoussa, descendit, s'approcJia, s*arreta, pressa). It is particularly liked for euphony, when several Preterites of the first conjugation would be used. Example : — Mentor range les soldats, il marche a leur tite et s'avance vers Us ennemis (Id itead of rangea, marcha, ^avanga). 4. The Preseru tense must also be used for the English Perfect, 314 xriii. Dix-HuiTiEME L^goii. when a duration of time is expressed in wliich the condition is still continuing : — How long have you been here ' Depuis quand etes-vous id f Ha ye you had this dog long 1 Y a-t-il longtemps que vous avez ce chien t I have had him these two years. Je I'ai depuis deux ans. If the Compound of the Present were used in these sentences, it would imply that the condition no longer existed. H y o, deux ans qu'il a M mort, would be absurd in French, as it would imply that he toas alive again. THEME 40. 1. Do you speak French? 2. Yes, sir, I do. 3. Is it raining? 4. No, it does not rain. 5. I do not like lazy boys. 6. I cannot* write with a bad pen. 7. I see a man who is asleep.^ 8. What are you doing ? 9. I am reading a very amusing book ; you must read it also ; to-morrow I shall send it to you. 10. I set out to- morrow for Germany. 11. I shall be ready in a moment. 12. How long have you been (§4) in Paris? 13. I have been here for (depuis) three months. 14. Have you had this stick' long? 15. I have had it for more than {de) four years. 16. Has your fiather known that gentleman long? 17. I think he has known him for a year or two. X, Quidort. 2. Canne,f. n. PAST TENSES. -'^. The Imperfect tense denotes continuity of an action or ooncU- tion, in past time. It is therefore used to express what was custom- aiy Of habitual. It is also used in descriptions of persons and of things, in expressing physical and moral qualities, traits of charac- ter etc.* Ex.: — * Hence it is called by some grammarians tbe Hmultaneou* piut^ and by >omL tlie tUtcriptive tense. USB OP THE TENSES OP THE INDICATIVR. 315 Henri TYAait un bon prince^ U arxiit de belles qual'd€s, il aimait sun peKfile o m &ait aim€. Je ne savais pas cela. Pendant mm s^jour a la campagne je me Icvais tous les matins a cinq heuret a je faisais de loncjues pivmenades. Cali/pxo ne pouvait se consoler du depart d' Ulysse. Sa grotie ne rCsonnait plus de son chant. Les nymphes qui Ux servaient, n'osaierU lui purler'. Eile st promenait souvent seule, etc. Lorsque j'f^ais en pleine iner, je m'amusais quelqrie/ois a dessiner les beaux nuages, semNalJes a des groupes de montagnes, qui voguaient a la suite les uns-des autres, sur I'azur des cieux. La grotte de la d^esse €lait sur le penchant d'une colline: de la on d^couvrait la mer ; d'un autre cotton votjait une riviere oh se montraient des ties bord€esde hauls peupliers qin portaient leurs teles superbes jusque dans les nues. Les divers canaux qui fnnnaient ces ties, semhlaient se. jouer dam la camjHigne: les uns roulaient leurs catix claires avec rapidit€; d' autres avaient une eau /Hiisible et dormante. On apercevait de loin des collines et des montagnes qui se perdaieni dans les nues. Les montagnes voisinrs Aaient couvertes de pamjrres verts qui pendaient en festons: le raisin, plus ^clatant que la pourpre, ne pouvait se cacher sous les feuilles, et la vigne €tait accabliie sous son fruit. 6. When two occurrences take place, that which is interrupted by the other and which was lasting before the other happened, must be in the Imperfect tense : — Je dormais (I was slcepinf?) lorsqu'il entra. Je le surpris pendant qu'il €crivait. From this we see that whenever in English the Tmperfect, I was, with the Part. pres. is used (I was sleeping, I was writing, etc.), in French the Imperfect tense must he employed. 7. In longer narrations, all those parts which do not form the thread of the narratix^e, but serve only to illustrate the principal facts, and which are only explanatory additions or observations of the writer, are in the Imperfect tense. Ex.: — Au temps que Vltalie Anit franc^aise, une sedition €clata (broke out) dans wk des regiments en gamison a Livoume. C'^ait une affaire grave: c'dait bean- coup plus qu'une mutinerie de soldats. L'empereur parut extrememcnt irriU, lorsqu'il apprit cette nouvelle. Ses ordres ^aient precis et terriUesj il ne voulaH pas de oonseils Je guerre, etc. 316 XVm. DTX-ETTITlfiME LEgON. Etait, itaient and vonJait serve as illustrative additions and explanatory observations of the writer on the facts expressed by the verbs parlerai, je ferai^ etc.) denotes in genera] future events or circumstances, as : — Charles partira demain. 20. It must sometimes be used in French after adverbs of time (jquand, lorsgue, etc:) where the English use the Present, when the idea is one of future time. Ex. ; — VcruM pouvez venir quand voris voudret. You may come when you like. 21. It is used as a softened form of the Imperative, implying the expectation of fulfilment. Ex. : — Vou3,m'^crire2 deinain, (do) write to me to-morrow. Vous tie tuerez jfoint, thou shult do no murder. Quand tx)us viendrez, vous apporterez mon livre. When you come you will bring my book. NoTB I. When shall and wiU imply determination, they are rendered by voukir, as : — I will do it, je veux le /aire. Tou nball do it, je veux que vous le fusiez. 21 B22 xnn. dix-huitieme LEgoN. 22. It soraetinaes has the sense of the Imperative in sent^n^. like the following : — Croira qui voudra Vhlstorien CapitoUn et qudques autres ^crivains qui font danser les €l^pliants sur la corde. Believe who will the historian Capitolinus and several other writers, who make elephants dance on a rope. Note. To be on the point of doing something is expressed in French by aUer, which corresponds precisely with the English to be going, etc. (See Part I., Lesson XL VI.) Ex. : — Are ,^ou going to write to him ? aUez-vous lui Retire f I am coming, je vais venir. Na}tol€on dit a ses soldats, " Nous allons entreprendre la conquete de VEgypU. [jes peuples avec lesquds nous allons vivre, sont Mahometans" etc. 23. The Compound of the Future indicates an event which is to precede another future event specified. Ex : — Quand j'aurai terming mes affaires^ je partirai tout de suite, Aussitot que je serai arrive, j'irai le voir. 24. When the conjunction si signifies whether, expressing llnce^ tainty, the future can be used after it, in French as in English. Si is never followed by the future, unless it means whether. Ex- : — Je ne sais si mon frere viendra. I do not know if my brother will come. 25. When si signifies on condition that, the English Future must be rendered by the Present. Ex. : — Vous deviendrez savant, si vous €tudiez hien. You will become a learned man, if you will study. 26. The Future is sometimes used to imply surmise. Ex. : — Oil est mon argent f L'aurai-je peut-elre pc'du ? Whsre is my money "? Have I perhaps lest it ? 27. The Conditionals, je parlerais, faurais parte, are used in French as in English, in conditional sentences : — Je serais heureux si j'ai^ais des amis. I should be happy if I had some friends. Note. The English I wish, when it docs not relate to something past. Is often 'aranslatcd by the Conditional of vouloir, je voudiais. Ex. : — I \i'ish he would come soon, je voudrais qu'il vint bientOt. USB OF THE TENSES OF THE IKDICATITB. 323 28. After si, when it means mppose that, the English Condi (ional must be rendered by the Imperfect (see § 8). Ex. : — Si J€ contimijis mon commerce, Je deviendrais riche. If I should coDtiuue my trade, I should become rich. But when si means whether, the Conditional is also used in French : — Je ne sais si mon oncle inendrait, en cos que vous I'invitasstez. 29. The compound Conditional of devoir, pouvoir, and votdoir, followed by the simple Infinitive, must be used when, in English, the auxiliaries should, ought, could, might, are followed by a com- pound Infinitive Ek. : — Vous auriez du €crire une lettre. You ought to have written a letter. J'aurais pu lui donner de rargent. I could have given him some money. THEME 46. 1. T shall go to London. 2. The bookseller will send you the book to-morrow. 3. When I am in the country, will you come to see me ? 4. I shall play as soon as I have finished my lesson. 5. There will always be wars among men, as long as they are (§20) ambitious. 6. I hope you will not refuse me this favor. 7. When you are ready, we will go and take a walk. 8. I do not know if my sister will consent to it (y). 9. If your person were as gigan- tic* as your desbes, the whole^ world could not contain you ; your right hand would touch the east^ and your left the west* at the (en) same time, said the Scythian' ambassador to Alexander. 10. I could have kept" the book ; nobody would have known it. 1. Oigantesque. 2. Entier (after the noun). 3. Vorient, m. 4. IPoccident, la S. Vambasmdeur des Scythes. 6. Oarder. THEME 46. 1. My country has been ungratefuP to me, although I have ren- dered it (/mi) great service {pi). 2. The king has done me groat injustice ; he ba& robbed^ me of my entire fortune, bo has ovod 324 xnn. Drx-HUiriEMB le^on. , taken* from me my two servants. 3. 1 have be^n compelled to flee, in order to preserve* my life, which was seriously threatened. 4 What was to be done V 5. You should rather have endured' (§ 29) all injuries than to offend' against France and the greatness of your house. 6. If you were persecuted, you could have retired ; * it would have been (valu) better to be poor and unknown than to take up^° arms against your country. 7. Even in poverty and in the most wretched^ exile, your fame^^ would not have been lost. I. Ingrat. 2. Privi. 3. JlTa dipouilU jusqu^dt. 4. Pour sauver. 5. Qiie voU' iieahrnms que je fisse 7 6. SovffHr. 7. Que de manquer d. 8. Vous relirer (refleo- Ovo verb). 9. Obscur. 10. Prendre le$ armes. 11. Miserable. 12. Gloire, f. READIXG LESSON. ALEXANDRE SELKIRK. Pendant la guerre pour la succession d'Espagne, quelques parti- cmliers^ ^quipercnt en Angleterre deux vaisseaux armateurs, destines k faire des prises^ dans la mer du sud. Le capitaine Rogers fat nomm^ pour les commander. lis leverent' Tancre de Bristol le 2 A-out, 1708. Au mois de Janvier de I'annee suivante ils se trou- vaient du c6t6 du pole antarctique.* Rogers doubla le Cap-Horn sans prendre terre en aucun lieu de ces parages* jusqu'k File de Juan Fcmandes, situde dans la mer du sud, a la distance de cent- dix lieues du Chili. II y envoya une pinasse,* qui revint au vai&- seau avec quantit<5 d'dcrevisses,' et un horame vetu de peaux de chevres" qui paraissait plus sauvage que ces anunaux memes. C'dtait un Ecossais, nommd Alexandre Selkirk, qui avait dte maitre k bord du vaisseau *' Les Cinq-Ports," et que le capitaine Stxadling avait abandonne sur cette ile depuis quatre ans et quatre mois. Voici le recit que ce malheureux fit de ses aventures au capitaine Rogers. *' Des mon enfance j'ai it4 dlevd' dans la marine. Ayant suivi le capitaine Stradling dans eon ezp^tion, j'eus un d^mel^" aveo THE SUBJUNCTTVE MOOD. 326 fui, ce qui Tengagca h me debarqner snr cette lie. Je rdsolua d'abord d'y rester, plutot qne^^ de m'exposer k de nouveaux cha- grins, d'aubrnt plus que le vaisseau etait en mauvais ^tat. Cepen- dant revcnu k moi meme, je soidiaitai d'j retoumer, mais le capitaiue u'y voulut pas consentir." (To be continued. ) 1. Private men. 2. Captnre. 3. To weigh. 4. South. 5. Parts of the sea. 6. Pinnace. 7. Crab 8. Goat-skins. 9. Brought up. 10. Quarrel, il. Rather than. QUESTIONNAIRB. Que firent quelques particuliers angljds pendant la guerre de (a succession d'Espagne ? Qui commanda les deux vaisseaux? Oil prit-il terre pour la premiere foist Oil est situ^e cette ile? Qui trouva-tK)n 1^ ? Qui 6tait cet horame ? Comment y ^tait-il venu ? Combien de temps y ^tait-il rest^ ? Pourquoi avaitril ete debarqu6 par le capitaine? XIX. DIX-NEUVli:ME LE9ON. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 1. The Subjunctive is in most cases dependent, and is therefore used in fiHjbordinate clauses. Whenever in French a subordinate clause is depcnd- Cbt upon a leading clause which contains the idea of something not ye( b&nng an actual existence for the spcalccr, consequently of something pos- sil/e or uncertain, its verb \rill be in the Subjunctive. This unreality can apply as well to something external, i. e. to actions and events, an to somo- thLig internal, i. e. to conceptions and emotions. This is the gcuera] 326 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. ground of distinction in the application of the French Subjunctive. The two languages hy no means agree in this point. Many verbs in English are put in tlie Future, the Conditional, or the Present Indicative, which, in French, must be in the subjunctive. Thus for instance : — Ji ne pense pas qu'il soil si dg€. I do not thinlc he is so old. Nous craignions qu'il ne s'en cdldt. We feared he would go. 2. But before passing to the rules concerning the use of the Sub- junctive, it will be indispensably necessary to understand the relation of the tenses of the Subjunctive to those of the Indicative and Conditional, without which the clause, dependent upon them, cannot be properly trans- lated. The following rules are here applicable : — 1. If the verb of the leading clause is in the Present or Future Indica- tive, that of the dependent clause will be in the Present or Compound of the Present of the Subjunctive. Ex.: — Je veux qu'il vienne,* I wish him to come. Connaissez-vous quelqu'un qui sache /aire cela f Do you know anybody who knows how to do this ? Je ferai en sorte que tout soit pret. I will have everything ready. J'attendrai que mon pere soit parti. I will wait till my father has departed. 2. If the verb of the leading clause be in a past tense of the Indicative, or in the Conditional, the Imperfect of the Subjunctive must follow in the subordinate clause ; or if the subordinate clause contain an event which has already taken place, the Compound Imperfect of the Subjunctive must be employed, according to the following scheme : — Je craignais Je craignis Xai craint J'avais craint Je craindrais J*aurais craint qu'eUe n'arrivdt demain — aujourd^hui, — trop tard, trop tot, etc. •Observe that the Present and Future are the same in the SubjuncUTe Mood in French J the context alone shows of whicJi of the two we speak. Ex.: — Je ne crois pas qxi'elle menne. I do not think she is coming. Je tie crois pas qu'elle viemic I do sot think ehe will coioi«i. THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 827 qu'ils nefuanent amv€$ hier — avcmth:a — la demiere, etc. Je crmgntiit Je craignis J*ai craint ♦ J'aoais craint Je craindiais J^aurais craint ' 3. There are a great many verba which govern the verb of he subordinate clause in the Subjunctive mood ; they may be div^ided into four classes, viz. : — 1. Verbs of wishing, willing, desiring, commanding, or permitting. 2. Verbs of thinking, believing, and saying. 8. Verbs expressing fear, doubt, sorrow, astonishment, denial, daty, Qccessity, joy, or delight. 4. Impersonal verbs which do not express certainty or probability. 4. Verbs of wishing, willing, commanding, etc. Such are : — Aimer, to like. permettre, to permit, allow. aimer mieux, to prefer. prier, to beg, to ask. d^fendre, to forbid. recommander, to recommend. demander, to ask. souhaiter, to wish. d^sirer, to wish for, to desire. souffrir, to suffer. exigtr, to demand. supjUier, to beg, request. ordonner, to order. voidoir, to be willing, etc Examples ; — fordonne q»*il. sorte, I order him to go out. J*aime qn'il soit courageux, I like him to be brare n veut que je dise la v&it^ { Pres. Subj., § 2, 1 ). He wishes rae to say the truth. n txmlait qite je lui disse la v€rii€ {Tmperf., § 2, 2). He desired me to tell him the truth. Le rot exigea qne je partisse tout de suite. The king demanded that I should leave directly ♦As the Compound of the Pre.sent belongs to Present as well as to Pas* time, it can bo followed also by the Present of ttieSubJunctive, when the dependcuc olansa Tefers to Present time. Ex. :— Dieii nous a doniU la raison vour que noun nous en acrvlons Qod bas given us reason that we may malLe use of It. 328 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LE^ON. 5. Verbs of thinking, believing, saying, etc. These verbs, and, in general, all those which express the intel- lectual faculties of the muad, govern the Indicative when they are afinnatively used, and most commonly the Subjunctive when they are used negatively, interrogatively, or are preceded by the conjunc- tion si. If I say, for instance : Je crois que Charles est rnalade, I represent Charles's illness to myself as a reality, and consequently the Indicative is required. But in the sentences : Je ne crois pcu que Charles soit malade, or, croyez-vous que Charles soil malade ? an uncertainty is expressed in regard to Charles's illness, and the Subjunctive must be used. Ex. : — Je ne crois pas que le concert ait lieu ce soir. I do not think that the concert will take place to-night. Pensez-vous qu'il puisse apprmdre tout cela. * Do you think he can learn all that ? Je ne dis pas qu'il ait tort. I do not say that he is wrong. Partons, si vous pensez qu'il fasse beau temps. Note 1. If however we ask a question, less to be informed of a thing than to inform others of it, the second verb (having the sense: Do you know?) is put in the Indicative, and not in the Subjunctive. Ex.: — Vous ai-je dit que mon frere est arrive f Note 2. Observe that the verbs of knowing, being sure, resolving, etc., are not comprised among those which govern the Subjunctive. They gen- erally require the Indicative, even when used interrogatively or neg- atively : — Je saixxis ") Jenesavaispasi^''''^'^'''*'^' Je ne sais s'il le /era, I do not know if he will do it. THEME 47. 1. I wish him to come (that he c). 2. The law requires that thieves^ [should] be punished. 3. I demanded that he should pay me. 4. Has he demanded that you should pay the bill?* 5. I forbid that he should go there. 6. God wills that we love our enemies. 7. Caligula wished that the Romans should render him divine honors.* 8. Yo^r father expects that you should give ^ an ao- THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 329 ootmt of wbat yoa have done. 9. Mj aunt wishes thai I should sot out to-morrow. 10. Tell him to wait. 11. Auguotus com- manded in his will* that they should not seek to® extend the empire. 12. Allow me to tell you (allow that I tell y.) the truth. 13. f will be obeyed (that one ob. me). 14. Do you think your aunt will come by herself?' 15. If I find that you frequent bad oom* pany, you will lose my friendship. 16. Do you hope they (^ori) will make peace ? * 1. Les voleiin. 2. Le compte. 3. Des Iionneurs divina. 4. To give an aocoanti rendrecon^fte. 5. TatameiU, m. 0. A^Tidre, 7. SeuU. 8. La paix. 6. The Subjunctive is used after verbs of fear, doubt, sorrow joy, denial or hinderance, astonishment, etc. Such are : — Avoir peur, ") s'Aonner, to wonder. craindre, > ^^' empecher, to hinder, prevent. douter, to doubt. ^ nier, to deny. And likewise afler : l^tre hien aise, to be glad. itre affllg€, to be aflSicted. itre charmi, ) itre fachi, to be sorry. Are enchants, | ^ ^ ^^^ ^lad. ^^^^ ^o/m^, to be astonished. Stre content, to be satisfied. etre surpris, to be surprised. se r€jouir, to rejoice. regretter, to regret. trembler, to tremble. ie plaindre, to complain. Examples : — Je crains que ma mkre ne soit malade. I fear my mother is ill. Je ne doutais pas qu'il n'arrivdt avant voxts. I did not doubt that he would arrive before you. ,Pempecherai qu'il ne * sorte. I will hinder him from going out. J* regrette qu'il soit venu trop tard. Man pere est fdchff que je ne Ini aie pas €crit plus Uk. Je suis chann€ que vous soi/ez venu me voir. Je m'Oonn^ qu'il v'ait pas regu ma lettre. * Conoeming the particle ne, aee L. XY. ( 16- If. 330 XIX. dix-neuviSme L^goir. Note 1 . The ver')S avoir peur, appr€liender, craindre and trembler reqtiire the particle ne before the verb in the Subjunctive mood, but only when these verbs themselves axe afiinnative or negative-interrogative. Ex.: — Je crains qu'il ne vienne. Ne craignez-vous pas qu'il ne viennet Bn I if the sentence be simply negative or simply interrogative, ru is ao» used, as : — Je ne crains pas qu'il vienne. Craignez-vous qu'il vienne ? Note 2, If after those verbs mentioned in § 6, we wish to express our selves with definiteness, de ce que is used instead of the simple que, and thu is followed by the Indicative : — U est fa,cli€ de ce que vous ne lui avez pas €crit. Je me plains de ce qu'elle m'a ouhU€. Note 3. If the second verb is negative in English, ne — pas must be used in French, as : — Je tremble qu'il n' arrive pas a temps. I tremble lest he may not arrive in time. 7. Subjunctive after Impersonal verbs. A verb preceded by que is always put in the Subjunctive aft«r the following Impersonals : — H est surprenant, it is surprising. il plait, it pleases, suits. i7 convient, it is proper. tV est fdcheux, it is sad. t7 faut, it must. il est juste, it is just, right. i7 importe, it is important, it matters, il est difficile, it is difficult it coi:cems. il est possible, it is possible. il suffit, it is sufficient. il est naturel, it is a matter of course ii vaut micux, it is better. il se peut, il peut se /aire, it may be And likewise after : — U est temps, it is time. c'est dommage^ it is a pity (/est un malheur, it is a misfortune, etc., etc. Examples : — J7 faut que vous partiez tout de suite. You must leave directly. n est possible qu'il revienne. It is possible t^jat he co^ie b^i< THE StTBJUNCTlTE MOOD. 331 C*est dommage que vous ne soyez pas venu plus tdt. It is a pity that you have not come earlier. II suffit qu'il ait avou€ sa fault. It is enough that he has confessed his fault. // esU juste, que vous soyez puni. » It is right that you be punished. Further, after il y a, and all impersonal verbs with an adjective denoting evidence, certainty, or probability, when they are used in a negative, interrogative, or conditional manner. Ex. : — Ya-t-tl un mortel qui puisse dire qu'il est toujours hcureux 1 Is there a mortal who can say that he is always happy ? Est-il siir qu'il ait tort t Is it certain that he is in the wrong? H n'est pas stir qu'il ait tort. It ia not certain that he is in the wrong. THEME 48. 1. I doubt whether that is true. 2. I doubt whether your uncle mil arrive to-morrow. 3. The Egyptians did not doubt (see Les- 3on XV., § 15) that certain plants and animals were divinities.' 4. We question whether riches can afford'* happiness. 5. I did not know that you were to come. 6. Do you doubt that I am your friend? 7. I do not doubt that you are my friend. 8. He denies that he had been told that. 9. He does not deny that he has been told that. 10. It is time for us to go (that we go) home, for it begins to (a) rain. 11. It is evident that Greece could no more defend herself, so much was she at that time sunken.* 12. It is sufficient if you tell him this. 13. It is a pity that you did not go with us; you would have enjoyed* yourself much. 14. It is not Iffobable that they will do it. 15. I must go to (en) town. U Des divinitis, 2. Accorder. 8. Dichue. 4. S'amu^er, 8. The Subjunctive is used in relative dependent clauses begin- ning with qui, que, lequel or ou, which depend upon a leading olause in which a wish, doubt, or condition is implied, especially iiior an Imperative Ex. : -— 332 XIX. Dli-NfiUVlEMB LEQOlSt. Liscz des ouvrages qui puissent former votre govt. Read such books as can form your taste- Choisissez un apparteinent oil vous soyez a votre aise. Choose an apartment where you may be comfortable. lis envoyerent des d€puMs qui consultassent ApolloiX. They sent deputies who were to consult Apollo. If, however, no such requirement or expectation is contained in the lead I'ng clause ; if, on the contrary, the matter is rather regarded as something which is actual, or which has already taken place, then, of coarse, the Indicative is used. Ex, : — J'ai lov€ un appartement oil je suis hien a mon aise. lis envoyerent des d€put€s qui consulterent Apollon. 9. A verb preceded by the relative qui or qtte is put in tbe Sub- junctive after the Superlative, when the relative clause only express-, es an opinion, as : — C'est le plus beau jardin que je connaisse. This is the most beautiful garden I know. C*est une des demieres lettres que St. Paul ait €crites. This is one of the last letters St. Paul has written. La meilleure garde qu'un roi puisse avoir, c'est le coeur de ses sujets. The best guard a king can have is the hearts of his subjects. If, however the thing is represented as certain or as a matter of fad, the Indicative follows. Ex. : — Souviens-toi que je suis le seul qui t'a drplu (displeased). N^ron est le premier empereur qui a pers^cut^ I'^glise. 10. The Subjunctive is used further after the ordinal numbers (as, le premier, le second, le dernier y etc.), and after unique^ smd, peu, rien, and personne. Ex. : — Votis etes le premier ami que j* aie rencontri "it Paris. You are the first friend I have met with in Paris. C'est I'unique espoir qui me soit rest^. r- This is the only hope that remains to me. Jl y a peu d'hctmmes qui sachent supporter I'adversit^. There are few men who know how to bear adversity. Je ne connais personne qw soit aussi keureux que lui. I know nobody who is so happy as he is. Note. Qui and que do not govern the Subjunctive, when th^y aie pre- ceded by de and its object, to which they refer. Ex. : — Ne dites rien de ce que je vous at cmJU (Ind.). 1?HE SUBJtJNCTIVB MOOD. 333 THEME 49. I. You are the most learned man I know in this town. 2. Rob- ert is the only friend on whom I can depend.^ 3. Nero was the first emperor that (has) persecuted the Christians. 4. I seek a servant who is faithful. 5. The diamond is the most valuable* stone vro know. 6. You are the first German I have met with in China. 7. There is no one who does it more easily* than she. 8. Is this the first time you have been mistaken ? * 9. I wish it were the first time. 10. Lucretius' and Pliny were the only natural philosopher^ whom the Romans had. 1. Compter. 2. Pricieux. 8. Aisiment. 4. Se tromper, 6. Lucrice et PUne, 6. Ifaturalistes. II. Subjunctive after conjunctions. A verb is put in the Sub- junctive after the following conjunctions : — Avant que, before. non que, , ^ ,, ^ ^ ' ^ ' ^ not that. ,.! ^ ' f^ if ever so little. a mains que (ne), unless. non pas que, ajin que, in order that pour que, in order that. bien que, although. pour peu que, de peur que (ne), lest. si peu que, de crainte que {ne), for fear that pourvu que, provided. de maniere (sorte) que, so that que — ne, till, before. en aMendant que, tm. quel — que, ) howerer. (Seep. en (au) cos que, in case. quelque — que, ) 282.) encore que, although. quoique, although. jusqu'a ce que, until. sans que, without. loin que, far from, sinon que, but that. nudgri que, for all that, notwith- « tant est que, if so be that. standing that soit que — soit que, ) whether— or. nonobitani que, notwithstanding. soit que — ou que, > be it that — or suppM^que, suppose that EXAMPLES. Bentrons aixint qu'il fosse nuit. Let us go home before it gets dark. A/in que {pour que) vous le sachiez. * That you may know it. . , Je ne sortirai d'ici que je ne sois pay€. I shftll not go away from here before I am paid 334 XIX. OIX-NEUVIEMB LfiCON. QuoiguHl me Vait promU. Althou<^h he has promised me. Paarvii quHl y consenie. Provided he consent to it. Quelque effort que /assent les kommes, leur n€ant parait partout. Whatever eflFort men may make, their nothingness appears eyerywhere. A moins que vous ne me demandiez pardon. Unless yot ask me for pardon. Au {en) cos qu'il mourut. In case he should die. Note. The Indicative can sometimes be nsed after avant que, jusqu*h a que, sinon que, de sorte que, si ce n'est que, tellement que, and de maniere que, when all doubt and uncertainty are excluded, and the clause expresses a fact. Ex. : — Je gardai mon sang froid, jusqu'a ce que je Ventendis calomnier mon frere. H s'est occupy de cette affaire de maniere {de sorte) qu'on n'a pu le bldmer. 12. In the same manner the Subjunctive is employed after the simple que, when used instead of one of the conjunctions mentioned in §11. Ex. : — Je ne puis vous pardonner avant que vous me fassiez Vaveu de vos fautes et que vous me promettiez de vous corriger. I cannot pardon you before you confess your faults and promise me to improve. Venez que (instead of aj^n que) je vous en dise la raison. Come, that I may tell you the reason of it. Son esprit est toujours actif, quoiqu'il soit malade et qu'il ne puisse travaiUer. His mind is always active, although he is sick and cannot work. 13. The conjunction que, used to avoid the repetition of si, gov- erns the Subjunctive. Ex. : — Si je ne suis pas rentr€ a quatre heures et qu'on vienne me demander, etc. If I am not at home at four o'clock, and somebody comes for me, etc. 14. The Subjunctive is also used after attendre ; tiU is translated by que, and not by jusqu^a ce que, as : — Attendez qu'il revienne, wait till he comes back. 15. Aside from the instances above-mentioned, the Subjunctive also occurs in a few expressions which appear either the expression of a wifih or as a kind of third person Imperative. Notice espe- THE SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD, 385 cially: Dmse-je I should I! Puissiez^ous I would that yoal Puissent-ils ! may they .... 1 Further : — Dim vexiiUe or pliit a Dim, would to Hearen. "*^y« le rot, long live the king I Puissiez-vous etre hmrmx, may you be happy ! Qu'on amene Vaccus€, let the culprit be brought htra ! Qu'ils viennent, let them come 1 Que Dim vous b^nisse, God bless you 1 Que la terre lui soit l€yere, maj the earth lie lightly upon Urn I A Dieu ne plaise que, may hearen not permit, etc. THEITB 60. 1. Before war wafl declared, the Carthaginians sent onoe more ambassadors to Kome. 2. I cannot depend on your promise, unless you give me the necessary security.^ 3. Caesar went by forced' marches to Vienne, on the Ehone, before the enemy (^plur.) became aware' of his approach. 4. Get up early to-morrow morning, that we may start* in good time (a temps). 5. I shall not yet pass to the perusal* of this author, imlcss you adrise* me to do it. 6. Keep a strict watch' over all your senses, Jest intemperance get? the better of you. 7. Though he is lazy, yet he improves a little (fait quel- ques progres). 8. I shall wait until (§ 14) you have done. 9. Wait till the ram be over (passee). 10. Although Homer ,• ac- cording to^ Horace, slumbers" at times,^* he is nevertheless (il n^en est pat moins) the first of all poets. 11. You will succeed," pro- vided you act with vigor. 12. I shall soon speak French, though I am convinced that it is a difficult language 13. I shall not Icaro the house before {que — ne) you sign" this paper. 14. May Qt)d protect" you. 15. May Heaven preserve us from war. 1. Oaravt{e,t, 2. A marches forcita. 3. S^apercevoir de, 4. Partir, 6. LtO" tare, f. fl. Consetller, 7. VeiUez avec soin. 8. To got the better of, maitrlM^ qn. 9. Homtre. 10. Selon, 11. SommdUer. 12. Quelqu^oit. 13. £iiu$ir, 14. Slffner. 16. Protiger. THEME 61. 1. A thoughtless^ man knows nothing, though he have read a great many books ; m the same manner a great many porsoiur^ le- 336 XIX. DIX-NEUVIEME LEgON. main ignorant, thougli ttey have travelled through the most civilized countries. 2. She will forgive you, provided you make her an apology.' 3. K somebody comes, and I am not at home, send for me. 4. I shall be obliged* to do it. 5. We should be obliged to do it. 6. I feared you would have complamed of me. 7. Our cousir set out without our knowing (w. that we knew) [of] his intent ioni 8. I do not believe he has studied history. 9. Do you think thej would refuse me, if I requested it of them (si je les en priais) 1 10. May all nations be convinced" of this truth ! 11. I do not think he is so old. 12. Get in" without his seeing you (w. that he B. y.). 13. Go gently,^ lest he should hear you. 14. Make haste,* lest they should set off without you. 15. I do not deny that it may be so. 16. We do not fear that it will give you pain." 17. Do not let^'' that child ride this horse ; I am afraid he will throw" him off. 18. We ought to practise what the gospel^^ teaches us. 19. Shall* I read the letter aloud ? 20. Yes, if you please. 21. I doubt whether the young man would have succeeded, had it not been for^ your assistance. 1. Insouciant, 2. Oens. 3. Vos excuses. 4. Falloir. 6. To be convinced, te convnincre. 6. Entrez. 7. Doucement. 8. D^pichez-^ous. 9. Faire de la peine, V>. Psrmettre' 11. Jeter ^ bos. 12. I/6vangUe,ta. 13. Sans, Beep. SOO, BEADING LESSON. ALEXANDRE SELKIRK. (Suite.) " Abandonn^ sur cette ile d(^serte avec mes habits, un lit, ul fiisil,^ une livre de poudre, des balles, du tabac, une hache, un ecu- tcau, un chaudrpn,^ une bible et quelques autres livres ; je m'amusai et pourvus' k mes besoins* le mieux qu'il me fut possible. Mais darant les premiers huit mois j'eus beaucoup de peine k vaincre la m^lancolie et k surmonter Fhorreur que me causait une &i affieuse Bolitude. " Je fis deux cabanes* k quelque distance Tune de I'autre, aveo fflij SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. i^) dn bois de piment ;• je les couvris d'une espece de jono^ et les doub- lai" de pcaux de chevres que je tuais h mesure que j'en avais besoin, tant que ma poudre dura. Lorsqu'elle approchait de sa fin, je trou- vai le secret de tirer du feu avec deux morceaux de bois cjue je frottais^ Tun centre I'autre. Je faisais la cuisine^*' dans la plus pe- tite de mes buttes, et dans la grande je dormais, chantais des psaumes et priais Dieu. Le malbeur m'avait fait conniutre le prix de la religion. *• Accabl^ de tristesse, manquant de pain et de sel, jo ne man- geais qu'k Textr^mit^, lorsque la faim me pressait, et je n'allais me coucher que lorsque je ne pouvais plus soutenir la veille." Le bois de piment me servait k cuire la viande, et k m'^clairer, et son odeur^ aromatique r^cr(5ait^' mes esprits abattus. " Je ne manquais pas de poissons, mais je n'osais en manger sans §el, parce qu'ils m'incommodaient, k la reserve ^* des ^crevisses de riviere, qui sent ici d'lm gout exquis, et aussi grosses que celles de mer. Tantot je les mangeais bouillies, et tantot grillees," de m§me que la cbair des chevres, qui n'a pas Ic gout si fort que celle des notres, et qui donne un excellent bouillon.^' J'en avais tu^ jusqu'k einq cents. Quand ma poudre fut finio, je les prenais k la course. Par un exercice continuel je m'^tais rendu si agile que je courais h travers les bois, sur les rochers et les collines avec une vitesse in- croyable. Peu s'en fallut un jour quo mon agilite ne me coiitat h vie. Je poursuivais une cbevre avec tant d'ardcur que je la pria sur le bord d'un precipice que des buissons*' me cachaient, et je culbutai" de haut en bas avec elle. Cette chute ^^ terrible me fit perdre toute connaissance. En fin revenu a moi-meme, je trouvai la ohevre morte sous moi, et j'eus assez de peine k me trainer* d ma oabane, qui en etait k un mille,^ et k en sortu* au bout de dix jours." {To be continued.) 1. Gan. 2. Kettle. 3. From pourvoir, to provide. 4. Need, want. 6. Hat. 6, Plmenta. 7. Rush. 8. To line. 9. To rub. 10. To cook. 11. Watch, watching. 12. Smell. 13. To revive. 14. Exception. 15. Broiled. 16. Broth. 17. 18. To tumble. 19. FaU. 20. To drag. 21. A mUe. -^■■^ 888 II. VINGTT^ME LBgON. QUESTIONNAIKB. Quels effets (things) Ixii ayait-on laiss^B ? N'avait-il pas de nourriture spirituello ? Quel fut le premier soin de Selkirk ? De quoi couvrit-il les cabanes ? D'oii tira-t-il ces peaui? Bst-ce qu'il priait aussi Dieu ? . Avaitril de quoi faire du pain ? Que mangeait-il done ? N'avaitril pas de poisson ? N'y avait-il pas d'^crevisses ? Comment les mangeait-il ? Eutril toujours assez de poudro ? Comment prenait-il alors les chevres ? Etaifc-il done si agile ? N'eufc-il pas d'accident facheux ? N'avait-il pas remarque le precipice ? Se blessa-t-il par suite de cette chute ? Quand il revint k lui, dans quel 6tat so trouTab^l ? XX. VINGTifiME LE9ON, THE INFINITIVE. 1. The Infinitive sometimes takes the place of a noun. It h used as the subject of a sentence, where in English the Part. Pres !a often found. Ex.: — Secourir les pauvres est une action louabU. To relieve the poor is a praiseworthy action. Midire est une infamie. CaluBUiiatiiui if ihwrMtftil THE INFINITIVE. 339 NoTB i In some instances it becomes properly a noun and takes the Article with it, as: le manger, le boire, les vivres (victuals). If such an In- finitive is amplified by means of other words, it is better to write c'«8< of <^aait instead of est or &ait, and sometimes also voila. Ex. : — N'aimfr que sot, c'est ainier peu de chose. To love no one but one's self is to love very little. ' NoTB 2. When this amplification is somewhat long, the Inflnitivo oan- not remain at the beginning of the sentence, but must be placed after tht predicate, and takes de before it. In order, however, not to confuse the sense and the construction of the sentence, ce or il is employed as a merely introductory subject ; c«, if a substantive follows, U, if an adjective. Ex- amples:— Cest un honneur d'itre utile a $a patrie. II est glorieux de mourir pour sa patrie. Note 3. If this antecedent predicate have several or long amplifltations Ihe subject-infinitive is commonly introduced by an expletive que. Ex. : — CAait une grande nouveauU pour le roi que d'entendre parler si naturelle- mmt. 2. Where two imperatives are connected in English by and, if the first is a verb of motion the second must be translated in French by the Infinitive, and the conjunction omitted. Ex.: — Go and see my brother, allez voir mon frhre. Go and do it, AUez le /aire. 3. A verb immediately preceded by and depending on another verb (auxiliaries excepted), or following a preposition, other than en, must be put in the Infinitive : — Je vow le ferai savoir, tans itre press€. 4. Comment, how ; que, what ; oii, where ; paurqiwi, why, and a few other words similarly used in interrogations, are often followed by the Infinitive instead of the Indicative, when the sense will not thereby be rendered obscure. Thus '* Pourquoi alter 7 " may mean " Why do you go ? " " Que faire7 " " What is to be done ? " " Que dire ?*' " What shall I say ? " 5. Hie Infinitive without a preposition is used in French after 340 XX. VINGTIl^MB LEgON. verbs of motion, as : oEer, envoyer, etc. ; after verbs tbat denote i perception of the senses, as : entendre, sentir, voir, etc., and aftei the following verbs : — Affirmer, to affirm. jurer, to swear. assurer, to assure. laisser, to let, to permit. 2V0uer, to confess. jiier, to deny. ccmpter, to reckon, intend. oser, to dare. croire, to believe. paraitre, to appear. daigner, to deign. penser, to think. declarer, to declare. . pr€tendre, to pretend. d€sirer,* to wish. pouvoir, to be able. devoir, to be obliged. reconnaitre, to acknowledge dire, to say. savoir, to know. esp&er,* to hope. sembler, to appear, to i faillir, to miss. souhaiter,* to wish. faire, to do. soutenir, to maintain. /i//oer (i7 ./auf), it mnst. t€moigner, to testify. B'imaginer,* to imagine. vouloir, to be willing. Examples: — Fcn«z no«s voir demain. • Come and see us to-morrow. Je cours lui apprendre cette rwuveUe. 1 hasten to tell him this news. H faut envoi/er cherclier le m^decin. We must send for the doctor. Vous osez, — daignez, — d^sirez, etc. lui porter I You dare, — deign, — wish, etc. to speak to him ! Je croyais — , je d€sirais, etc. lui rendre un service. I thought — , I wished — , etc. to render him a Je compte — , j'espere, etc. oiler a Paris. 1 intend — , I hope, etc. to go to Paris. Je ne sais pas nager. I cannot swim. Croyez-vous avoir raisonf Do you believe you are in the right ? Je Ventends venir. X hear him coming THE INF^nTIVE. 341 NoTB 1. After the above four verbs marked,* de is sometimea used, especially when they themselves stand in the Infinitive. Ex. : — Peut-on esp€rer de vous voir demain t Personne ne doit s'imaginer de tout savoir. Note 2. The verb faire is used for to doy to make and to get, to cause ; io all these cases it is immediately followed, in French, by the Infimtive activt without a preposition : — Je ferai bdtir une maison. I will cause a house to be built Voulez-vons faire laver vo$ gants f Will you have your gloves washed 1 Je lui ferai faire un theme. I will make him write an exercise. 6. The simple Infinitive is governed further by the verbs: aimer* when used in the Conditional, I should like ; preferer, to prefer ; aimer anlant, to like as much ; il vaiU mieua:, it is better. Examples : — Taimerais le wir, I should like to see him. Jl vaut mieux c^der, it is better to yield. Je pr€fer^ rester a la maison, I prefer staying at home. NoTB. When, however, in the second member of a comparison a second Infinitive follows que, this latter takes de before it. Ex.: — Jaime mieux mourir que de trahir mon secret. I will rather die than betray my secret. 7. The Infinitive is used afber every prepoffllion except en. Examples : — Au lieu de jouer, instead of playing. Sans oiler, without going. Puur voir, for the purpose of seeing. THEME 62. 1. To speak too much is dangerous. 2. To clothe* the poor is a good work.* 3. To lie is to disregard ' God and to fear men. 4. To purchase peace of an enemy is to give him the means of cany" * In regard to aimer with d consult ^ 16 of this 342 ZX. VINGTI^ME Lf}90N. ing on* war. 5. Can you inform me wbether the ooorier has arrived ? 6. He has not yet arrived. 7. One must know [how] to keep* a secret. 8. This man thinks he knows (i^i/*.) everything. 9. We hope to see the queen. 10. When do you intend to re- tarn? 11. I do not know precisely ;• but I hope to see you again ■oon. 12. The king caused the brave soldiers to be rewarded. 13. It is much better to keep silent^ thaa to say such things. 14. The most unfortunate of men is he who thinks himself to be such (r). 16. He assured us that he had been there. 16. To yield" to ne- cessity ifl not to be [a] coward.' 17. Eating, drinking, and sleeping were his only occupations. 18. I hastened to communicate^'' to him thifi intelligence." 19 He came to tell me that he had won noth- mg in the lottery. 20. Who would not rather (like to) be poor than possess unjustly acquired wealth?" 21. Bayard said to the Constable de Bourbon : ** It is better to perish fighting (c» combat- Umt) for one's {sa) country," than to conquer and (to) triumph " orer it {d\Ue). 1. ntir. 2. (Mtvre, f. S. Mifpri$er. 4. ConHtmtr. 6. Taire. •. Au jutte, 7. 8e Udre. 8. Ced^r d. 9. Ldche. 10. Communiguer. 11. K*wmXU, f. 18. Dee rich4$$umalacqui»es. 13. Patrie. 14. Triomphm'. THE INTINITIVE PRECEDED BT DE. 8. After a substantive which the yerb limits, the English prepo- sition of with a Pros. Participle (of going, of seeing, etc.) is gen- erally expressed by de with the Infinitive. Ex. : — Lt d£iir de vous voir, the desire of seeing you. Sa maniere de penser et d'agir (of thinking and acting). H est tempi de partir, it i» time to set out. JTai VhcumeuT de vcus tcdtier. 9. The preposition de is placed before a verb in the InfinitiTC, after the adjectives: avide, content, mecontent, las, digne, capaJMe, incapable, etc., and in general after an adjective, whenever, by inverting the sentence, the clause containing the Infinitive mighi THB LNFLNWIVB. S43 be made the leading terc^ of an assertion expressed as subjeot to ■ome tense of to be. Ex.: — Je suis cwieux de savoir. I am anxious to know. Et€$-vous las de travailler t Are you tired with working 1 Cet homme est capable de vous trvmper. That man is capable of deceiving you. Vou9 etes tre$-adroit d'avoir si bien riussi. You are rcry clercr to hare succeeded bo well. 10. De is used before the Infinitive after impersonal verbs, such as : %l convient, it is proper ; il importe, it concerns ; il t'agtt, it is the question ; il suffit, it is enough ; il me tarde, I long, and after il est, il etait or il temhle followed by an adjective, as : il est facile, il 4tait necessaire, etc. Elx.: — n m*vnporte beaucoup de lui dire cela. It concemi me much to tell him thii. n eat beau de pardonner h $on ennemi. It is a good thing to pardon one's enemy. n suffira de lui parler. It will be enough to ipeak to him. 11. Deia used after que, than, in a comparison of predicates. See Note, § 6, of this lesson. THEME M. 1. You have no cause* to bt angry with (^contre) me. 2. Were you at the concert yesterday ? 3. I did not hare thft pleasure of seeing you. 4. The way* to be happy is to bo virtuous. 5. Have you the intention of selling your horse ? 6. Not at all ; I intend to keep it. 7. I fear losing (to lose) your confidence.* 8. It is too late ; it is time to go to bed. 9. The art of dancing was known to the ancients. 10. It is disgraceful* to obey (a) one'a passions. 11, The desire of appearing clever often prevents one becoming so.* 12. We rejoice greatly to see you. 13. It is i^reeable to hear the fcwitttt' of the birds. 14. It in useless to warn' him. 15. It is a 344 XX. vingtiBme LEgON. beautiful thing to for^ve one's enemies. 16. It is pleasant to live with one's friends. 17. It is the fate* of all human things to be of short duration.' 18. The gi-eat secret of being happy is to work and to be virtuous. 19. I don't approve [of] your project of going to Europe. 20. Gentleness^** is the surest means of escaping every 21. It is sad to have no fiiends and to be forsaken." 1. Avoir si^et. 2. Le moyen. 3. Confiance, f. 4. Honteux. 5. De le devenir, 6. Le gazouillement. 7. Avertir. 8. Le sort. 9. De n'avoir gy?une courte dur^. 10. La douceur, 11. AhandomU. 12. De is further used before the Infinitive, when the latter is immediately preceded by any of the following verbs : — Abstenir (s*), to abstain. accuser, to accuse. achever, to finish. ^ affecter, to affect. agir (a') (unip.), to be the question. ambitionner, to aspire to. appartenir, to pertain, to become. applaudir (s'), to rejoice, exult. appr^hender, to apprehend. avertir, to warn. aviser (s'), to determine. hlamer, to blame. hrvler, to wish ardently. censurer, to censure. cesser, to cease. chagriner (se), to grieve. charger, to commission. choisir, to choose. commander, to command. conjurer, to entreat. conseiller, to advise. convenir, to become, to suit. convaincre, to convince. corriger, to correct. craindre, to fear. d^courager, to discourage. d6daigner, to disdain, scorn. d^endre, to forbid. d€f€ndre (se), to decline. d€fier, to challenge. d€pecher (se), to hasten. d€saccoutumer (se), ) . ^ d^shabituer (se), > d^sesp€rer, to despair. d^sirer, to desire. De is often omit* ted after this verb. d^soter (se), to be grieved. d^tester, to detest. De may be omit- ted. d^ourner, to dissuade. devoir (se), to owe it to one's self. diff€rer, to put oflF. dire, to tell. disconvenir, to disown, deny. discontinuer, to discontinue. disculper, to exculpate. dispenser, to excuse from. dispenser (se), to forbear. dissuader, to dissuade. dotiter, to doubt. ^crire, to write. efforcer (s'), to endeavor. effrayer (s'), to be frightened. empecher, to hinder. empresser (s'), to hasten. enraffer, to be enraged. THE INFINITIVE. mtr'ifjrendre, to nndertake. ^!H)uvanter (a'), to be frightened. essayer, to try. itmner (s'), to wonder. ifoiter, to avoid. excuser (s'), to excuse one's wlf. feindre, to feign. fifliciter, to congratulate. Jinir, to finish. Jlatter (se), to flatter one's self. frimir, to shudder. garder (se), to take care. gemir, to moan, lament. glorijier (se), to pride one's self. hasarder, to hazard, to risk ; se hasar- der requires a. hater (se), to hasten. imputer, to impute. indigner (s'), to be indicant. ing^rer {a'), to intermeddle* inspirer, to inspire. jurer, to swear. manquer, to fail. mfditer, to contemplate. meler (se), to concern one's self. menacer, to threaten. m^ter, to deserve. moquer (se), to laugh at mourir (fig.), to long. nigliger, to neglect m«r, to deny. o^V, to offer. - omettre, to omit. ordonner, to order. oublier, to forget. pardonner, to forgive. parler, to speak. pa&s«r (se), to do without permettre, to permit. penuader, to persuade, pt^ucr (se), to take pride in. plaindre, to pity platndre (se), to complain. prescrire, to prescribe. presser, to urge. press&r (se), to hasten. pr^sumer, to presume. />ncr, to pray, entreat. promettre, to promise. proposer, to propose. proposer (se), to purpose. protester, to protest. punir, to punish. rassasier (se), to be sated. rebuter, to discourage. rebuter (se), to be weary. recommander, to recommend. refuser, to refuse. regretter, to regret. r€jouir (se), to rejoice. remercier, to thank. repent ir (se), to repent reprendre, to censure. r€primandeT, to reprimand. reprocher, to reproach. reprocher (se), to reproach one's self. r€soudre, to resolve. When active, followed by (fe ; passive, by i. ressouuentr (se), to remember. nVe, to laugh. risquer, to venture. •eoiV, to be becoming. rougir, to blush. acandaUser /se), to take offence. Bommer, to summon. souffrir, to suffer. aouhaiter, to wish. Z^ may bA sup- soup^onner, to suspect. gouvenir (se), to remember. »w^r« (unip.), to suffice. sugg^rer, to suggest. ntpplier, to beseech. tatJier, toeadctt^v^r 846 XX. YIHGTIEME LEgON. tarder, (unip.), to long. w trouver bien, to derire benefit tenter, to attempt. u trouver mal, to fare ilL trembler, to tremble. vanttr (se), to boaat. EXAMPLES. n cute de pUuimr, it ceases raining. Je wus eonseilU de partir, I advise jou to get oat J* trains de voua d^anger, I fear to disturb you. II e$t d^fendu de Jumer id, smokimg la forbidden here Dites-lui de venir, tell him to come. Vous m&itez d'etre puni, you deserve to be punished. 77 risque de tout perdre, he risks losing ercrything. La forteresse Jut somm^e de se rendre, the fortress -n&a summoned to sur- render. 13. After the following prepositions and conjunctions: — /w«, hors, avant, au lieu, loin, afin, a moint, de crainie, or de peur, d force (by) faiUe (for want of) , plutot que (rather than) . Ex. : — Avnnt de partir, before departing. Au lieu de pleurer, instead of crying. Lsin de se corriger, far from amending himself. A f&rcs de prier, by much entreaty. Dieu nous afflige ajin de ntus urriger, God lendi uf afflictloBS (in order) to amend ut. Je SOTS J de crainte (or depeur) de vous d^rmnger, I go for fear of disturbing you. TH£M£ M. 1. I adyise yon to stay here and (to) begin your studies. 2. I beg you to come at ax o'clock. 3. The first step^ towards good (vers le Hen) is to avoid evil. 4. It is {c^est) the duty of a Chris- dan* to please God, to hurt nobody, and to do good, even to his enemies. 5. He is not able to go so far. 6. You are very amiable in having come to pay* us a visit. 7. It is dangerous to trust* every- body. 8. The law of nature forbids us to do injustice (tort) to others. 9. A simple and temperate diet* lays the foimdation* of firm health, [which is] capable of enduring' the greatest hardships.* 10. I oannot help® recognizing in the laws oi miuie a wooderfiil THE UMFmi T lVg . 347 art ; and I hesitate not to say, in the language of Scripture,^ that every star hasteneth^ to go whither the Lord sendeth it. 1. Lt pat, 2. Chritien. 8. Faire, 4. Se fler d. 6. Nourriiure. fl. ;. Supporter. 6. Lea /cUigties. 9. M^empicher. 10. VEcrUurt SairUe, 11. 8e i^picher, THEME 65. 1. I was astonished, after such news, to see the man so quiet. 2. Before one writes (^Inf.)j one must know what one wishes to say. 8. Instead of working, ho went to walk that day. 4. I longed^ to see my native country^ again ; accordingly* I determined to embark* for Europe. 5. By much entreaty, I induced' my friend to accom- pany me. 6. For fear of offending him, I preferred to remain* silent. 7. The enemy retired,' in order* to make believe that he had given over* the siege. 8. When one advised Philip to expeP" from his dominions^ a man who had spoken ill of him ; "I will take care^ not to do it," replied Philip; "he would go everywhere and speak ill of me." 1. lime tardait. 2. Pay$ natal, t. Cest pcurquoi. 4. Fembarquer p^ur. 6. Engager d, f . M* iaire. 7. Eeflcctlye Terb. I. JJtn d*. f . Btncmetr 4. la Cha$$0r, 11. Etat. 12. Se girder bien. THl INIINITIVl WITH O. We place the preposition a before the Infinitive of a verb : — 14. When the English Infinitive is passive, or can be changed to the passive without altering the sense. Ex. : — La moiuon h. tsp€T€r^ the harvest to be hoped for. CeUe maison est a vendre, this house is to be sold. Je n'ai pas de temps a perdre, I have no time to loio. 15. After a substantive, when the following verb is or may be expressed by in with the Pres. Part. Ex. : — J^aurai beaucoup de plaisir a vcus voir. I shjdl have great pleasure in seeing you. 16. After any adjectives which take a verb in the InfinitivQ to complete the sense, provided the verb preceding the adjeotive ii not used impersonally. Espocially after : — 348 zz. yingtiSme LsgoN. Aocesnble, accessible. lent, slow. ai8€, easy. pret, ready. attentif, attentiye. prompt, quick. ban, good. propre, fit, proper. dispose, disposed, inclined. sensible, sensible. difficile, difficult, hard. sourd, deaf. docile, obedient. titHe, useful. habile, skilful. inutile, useless. facile, easy. (See also L. VHI., Gov. of Adj,) EXAMPLES. Cette legon est facile a apprendre, this lesson is easy to learn. Ce fruit n*est pas bon a manger, this fruit is not good to eat. Ce theme est-il difficile a traduire f is this exercise hard to translate ? Nous sommes disposes a croire que, etc., we are disposed (inclined) to believe that, etc. Soyez prompts a faire le bien, be quick to do good. Note. Compare the following sentences, in which the verb preceding the adjective is used impersonally (see L. XX., § 10). Ex. : — n n'est pas facile de prononcer ce mot, it is not easy to pronounce that word. n est difficile de vaincreses passions, it is difficult to conquer one's passions. n semble difficile d* apprendre cette kmgue, it seems difficult to learn that language. The other way would be : — Ce mot n'est pas facile a prononcer, Cette langue parait difficile a apprendre, etc, THEME 66. 1. This ^ood is to be sold. 2. These rooms are to let. 3. We have not a moment to lose. 4. There is much pleasure in taking a a walk. 5. Is this house to sell or to let ? 6. It is to let. 7. I perceived in him a kind^ of repugnancy to learn Greek.* 8. Ycm know his courage in facing'* dangers. 9. This girl spends all her dme in playing. 10. There is more glory in dying like Nelson than in living in unmerited* honor. 11. Is German easy to learn? 12. It is not so easy as French. 13. That is easy to say^ but not so easy to do. 14. That forest* is dangerous to pass. 15. I am ready to follow you, but I fear that you are not fit to goide' m. THE INFINinVB. 349 16. Be attentive to seize the opportunity.' 17. The just man ie slow to punish but quick to reward. 18. Are you dispose rl to do what I tell you? 19. I shall be quick to perform what you command me. 1. Une sorte de repugnance. 2. L« Grec. 3. Affi^onter. 4. Au sein des hon^ news gu'on n'a pas vUrites. 5. Foret, f. 6. Ouider, conduire. 7. IPocoasion, 17. The following verbs also govern the Infinitive with a: — Aha{s8er{s'), to stoop. abmttir, to end in. accorder(s'), to agree, to coincide accoutujner, to accustom. acharner(s' ) , to strive furiously. admettre, to admit, to permit. aguerrir(s'), to become inured. aider, to help. governs the Infin ilire with rfe. Ex.: — n me tarde de le revcir, I long to see him again. 21. The following eleven verbs may take either a or «fe;— Consentir, to consent. s'enteter, to be obstinate in. contramdre, to compeL essayer, to try. demander, to demand. cbliger, to oblige. forcer, to force. oublier, to forget. t'emjyresser, to be eager. tacheTf to try. 8'engager, to engage, agree. Examples : — n ne demande gu'a manger et a hoire. He demands nothing but to eat and drink. EUe demanda au del de lui pardonner sa faute. She prayed to heaven to forgive her fault. Le banqiuer s'engagta a (or de) payer la somme de mUle franca. The banker agreed to pay the sum of a thousand francs. THEME 67. 1. When the captain began to speak, all the soldiers listened' attentively. 2. In the spring the trees begin to cover themselves with leaves. 3. They continued to live in peace. 4. We have continued to write to him, but he has not yet answered us. 6. The unfortunate never fail to complain. 6. I have failed to do what I had promised you. 7. I will endeavor to satisfy him. 8. It is long before he comes (he delays to come). 9. I long to bavt finished my work. 10. At last I longed (i7 me tarda) to see again my native country. 11. That woman is occupied only with iron- ing.^ 12. Do not fail to be here at a quarter to six. 13. Come (md see us this evening. 14. Is your brother at home ? 15. No, 38 364 XX. vmoTiiMB LBgoM. he has jtist gone out. 16. We have just received your letter. 17. He agreed to inform you of the result.' 1. ifcottter, 2, Bepasser, 8. RimUat. INFINITIVE WITH THE PREPOSITIONS POUR, PAR, APRES, SANS. 22. Pour. Whenever the English to before an Infinitive expresses a design or purpose, and can be changed into, in order to, pour must be used. Ex.: — iZ attend de I'argent pour payer sea dettes. He is expecting money to pay his debt*. J'ai fait mon possible pour les r€concilier. I have done all in my power to reconcile them. Je Vai fait moi-meme pour ne pas vous d&anger. I did it myself not to disturb you. 23. The preposition pour is also used after the adjective follow- ing assez, trop, suffisant, or after the verb suffire. Ex.: — M. R. est assez riche pour acfieter cette campagne. Mr. R. is rich enough to buy that estate. Caroline est trop jeune pour /aire cet ouvrag: Caroline is too young to do this work. 24. The French usage differs from the English in employing the Infinitive instead of a separate clause, when the dependent olause has the same subject as the principal clause : — Je crois etre hless€, I think I am wounded. J'espere m^riter votre conjiance, I hope I deserve your confidence. Je voudrais etre riche, I wish I were rich. THEaiE 68. 1. I travel to see the world. 2. The army was too fatigued to renew^ the attack. 3. I will do everything to oblige you. 4. God has not given us hearts to hate one another. 5. He is going into ^Jbe country to shoot* 6 Some people are hated without deservip.g' THE INFLNlTlVa. 356 H. 7. It is necessary to know the human heart to judge well of others.* 8. After having terminated some affairs at home, I shall begin by paying* some visits. 9. Nobody can be happy without practising" virtue. 10. If the emperor Titus passed one day with- out doing good' to (a) anybody, he used' to say: "I have lost this day." 1. BenouveUr Vattaque, 2. Chasser. 8. Mirittr. 4. Dt$ cnUret, 6. Faire» «. ^xxUgpier, 7. Du bien. 8. H avait coutume. BBADING LESSOW. ▲LlXANDBl 8KLKIBK. (Suite.; ** Une longue habitude me fit manger la viande sans sel et sans pain. Dans la saison j*avais quantity de bons navets^ qui avaient &t6 sem^s par T^quipago* de quelque vaisseau et qui couvraient plusieurs arpents* de terre. Je ne manquais pas non plus d'exoel- lents choux* que je cueillais sur une espece de palmier et que j*a&- saisonnais avec le fruit du piment, qui est le meme que le poivre de la Jamai'que, et dont I'odeur est ddlicieuse. ** Mes souliers et mes habits fiirent bientdt us^s ^ force de courir k travers les bois et les broussailles.* Cependant mes pieds s*endur- cirent* si bien k la fatigue, que je courais partout sans peine. " Revenu' enfin de ma m^lancolie, je me divertissais quelquefois a graver mon nom sur T^orce* des arbres avec la date de mon exil, ou bien k chanter et k dresser* k la danse des chats et des chevreaux. Lorsque je n'eus plus d'habits, je me fis un juste-au-corps" et un bonnet (cap) de peaux de chevres que je cousis ensemble avec de petites courroies ; " un clou" me servait d'aiguille. Je me fis aussi dos chemises d'un morceau de toilo que j'avais. Quand mon eou- fceau fut us^ jusqu'au dos, j'en forgeai d'autres avec quelques cercleti de fer que j'ayais trouv^s sur le rivage, et je les aiguisai" sur des pierres. '* C'est ainid que la n^cesait^ m'apprit k pourvoir k tous mes 356 XX. VINGTIEME LEgON. ** Pendant mon s^jour** dans cette ile d^serte, j'ai yn plusieurs fois des vaisseaux qui passaient, mais il n'y en eut que deux qui vinrent y mouiller." Incertain de quelle nation ils etaient, je m'en approchai pour les examiner. Mais quelques Espagnols qui avaient dejk mis pied k terre, ne m'eurent pas plutot aper9u qu'ils tir^rent^^ sur moi et me poursuivirent jusque dans les bois, ou je grimpai snr un arbre. Je ne fus pas decouvert, quoiqu'ils rodassent^' dans les environs et qu'ils tuassent quantity de chevres sous mes yeux. Eufin j'aperpus vos navires que je pris aussitot pour anglais. J'al- Inmai un feu sur un rocher pres du rivage pour vous donner le sig- nal de ma d^tresse.^® Vous me comprites et, graces k voire huma- nity, je puis esp^rer de revoir ma patiie." 1. Turnips. 2. The crew. 3. Acre. 4. Cabbage. 6. Brushwood. 6. To harden. 7. Eecovered. 8. Bark. 9. To train. 10. Jacket. 11. Strap. 12. A nail. 13. To sharpen. 14. Stay. 15. To anchor. 16. To fire or shoot at. 17. To run about, ramble. 18. Distress. QUESTIONNAIEE. Comment mangeaifc-il la viande ? N'avait-il pas autre chose h manger ? Manquait-il de choux ? Oil les cueillait-il ? Avee quoi assaisonnait-il ses choux? Avaitril toujours des souliers et des habits ? Comment se divertissaitril quelquefois ? Lorsque ses habits furent uses, que fit Selkirk ? De quoi se servit>il pour coudre les peaux de chevies? De quoi se fit-il des chemises ? Quand son couteau fut us4, que fit>-il ? N'a-t>il jamais vu de vaisseaux qui passaient? De quelle nation ^taient-ils ? Que firentrils lorsqu'ils I'eurent apcr^u ? Fut-il decouvert? Qu'aper9utril enfin? Pourquoi allumart-il un feu sur le rivago ? C© signal fiit-il remarqu6 ? THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. S57 XXI. VINGT ET UNIEME LEgON THE PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 1. The Present Participle is invariable in French. Bz. : — Une femme mourant de soif, A woman dying of thirat. Une preuve convainquant tout le monde. A proof convincing everybody. Une mere consotant sa JUle. A mother consoling her daughter. Une pluie ficondant la terre. A rain fructifying the earth. 2. When the Present Participle loses its verbal nature and be« comes a participial adjective, it follows the noun, and agrees with it as an adjective. Ex. : — Une femme mourante. A dying woman. Une preuve convainquante. A convincing proof. Des paroles consolanteM. Consoling words. 3. The Present Participle is often nsed in English as a substan- tive, which is not the case in French. It can sometimes be rendered by a noun, in most cases by the Infinitive (see Lesson XX., § 1). Examples : — La lecture est un passe-temps agrgahiU, Beading is an agreeable pastime. Sa passion dominante est la chasse, ilis ruling passion is hunting. I like dancing, j'aime a danser. 4. When an English Present Participle has reference to a sub- gtantive which is not in the Nominative Case, it is rendered in French 358 Xn, VTNGT ET UinfiMB LEgON. by the Present or Imperfect of the Indicative, with the relative pronoun qui before it. Ex. : — II portait une houteille qui contenait du poison. Ho carried a bottle containing poison. 5. An English Present Participle preceded by any preposition but by and o« (§ 7), such as, of, from, before^ after y for, without, l3 rendered in French by the Infinitive with de, a, pour or sans (as wo have seen before) , Ex. : — Uart (T^crire est tres-ancien. The art of "vmting is very old. Je connais sa maniere de penser et d'agir. I know his maimer of thinking and acting. Ne Vempichez pas de /aire du lien. Do not prevent him from doing good. Je Vai rencontrtf avant de partir. I met him before leaving. On ne pent pas trakir la v€rit€ sans se rendre coupaUe. One cannot speak against the truth without being gniltf. 6. Sometimes the English Present Participle is used substantively with a possessive pronoun before it; then it must be rendered in French by the conjunction que and the Indicative or Subjunctive, according as the case requires. Ex. : — Je doute qu'tl soil un honnete homm§. I doubt his being an honest man. Nous avons appris qu'il s'est fait soldat. We heard of his becoming a soldier. THEME 69. 1. Miss Mary is an obligmg young lady. 2. I listened^ [to] her encouraging words. 3. He has given us consoling news. 4. These, 'iooks are very interesting. 5. That mother, in her supplicating* attitude, would have appeared touching, even without the surprising eloquence of her discourse. 6. The young soldier, precedmg all the others, seized' the standard.* 7. That mountain, commanding an extensive' view, was very well calculated* for our observation*. 8. Caroline, weeping bitterly,' threw herself into her mother's armB. THE PEESENT PAETICIPLB. 35^ 9, T have seen your brother (§ 4) playing in the garden. 10. Alexander asked the physicians standing* by {autour de) him if he should die of (de) his illness. 11, The soldiers of Alexander, for* getting then- wives and children, looked upon* the Persian gold as^ theur plunder." 12. It ceased raining. 13. He risked losing his life. 11. I am afraid of losing her confidence. 15. The desire of appearing clever often prevents one from becoming so. 16. He left^ without paying his debts. 17. I heard of his being (S 6) married. 18. We noticed" his looking at it (le). 19. He wrote to me without" his father's knowing it. 1, ^couter qch. 2. To Buppllcate, supplier. 3. S'emparer de qch. 4. Le dra- peau. 5. ^tendue, f. fi. Propre A. 7. To weep bitterly, fondre en larmet. 8, Se tenir. 9. To look upon, regarder qch. 10. Comme. 11. BtUiUt m. 12. Par- Zir. 13. Bemarquer. 14. Sans que with the Subj. THE GERUND,— PRESENT PARTICIPLE WITH EN, 7 The Gerund is the Present Participle with the preposition en prefixed. It generally denotes 1, either a means by which the ob- ject of the leading clause is attained, or 2, a simultaneous action, that is, an action during the transaction of which another is acted by the same subject. It is always invariable, and corresponds to the English Present Participle preceded by the prepositions 6y, in, and on or while ; or is sometimes rendered by the simple Participle with- out preposition. Ex. : — 1. Denoting a means : — On se forme Vesprit en Itsant de bons livres. We form our minds by reading good books. Nous avons ohtenu la paix en faisant de grands sacrificea. Wc have obtained peace by making great sacrifices. U se sauva en sautant par la fenetre. lie saved himself by jumping through the window. 2. Denoting a sunultaneous action : — La d^esse sourit en voyant Td^maque. The goddess smiled on seeing Telemachus. // me (lit cela en treinhlant. He trembled as he told me this. 360 XXI. VINGT ET UNlfiME LECOfi. J« Vai rencontre en allant au chateau. I met him in going (as I was going) to the castle. Je lis le journal en d€jeunant. I read the paper while breakfasting. Note. The English by with a Participle is rendered in two cases only by par and the Infinitive, viz., with comi„jncer, to commence, b^in, and Jinir, to terminate with, to do something at last. Ex. : — Je veux commencer par reciter ma legon. I will begin by saying my lesson. II finit par me demander pardon. At last he begged my pardon (he ended by asking) 8. To enforce the simultaneousness of the two actions, taut is often placed before the Gerund. Ex. : — Tmit en pleurant il ne put s'empecher de rire. Whilst crying he could not forbear laughing. THEME 60. 1. We learn the news by reading the newspapers. 2. By observing these rules, you may avoid mistakes. 3. By studying much, you will become learned. 4. More glory is^ acquired by defending one's fellow-citizens^ than by accusing them. 5. In going ^ this way we shall meet him. 6. I met my friend as I was going to the post-office. 7. By paying aU his debts, he reestab- lished * his credit 8. He told me, trembling, that he had lost all his money. 9. You may easily get* praise, by complying* with the {avx) wishes of the people' with whom you converse, and by pre- ferring others to yourself. 1. On acguiert. 2. Concitoj/en, m. 3. Prendre. 4. R4tablir. 5. Obtenir d ont r€pondu a noire lettre. Thoy have answered oar letter. Mes /reres avaient dormi. My brothers had slept. 4. In reflective verbs, as etre takes the place of avmr, the par ticiple agrees with the second pronoun, if that is a direct object, JExamples : — lis se sont present^s. They presented themselves. Elle s'est bless^e. She wounded herself. But when the second pronoun is an indirect object, the participle remains unchanged, unless the direct object precedes, as in verbs conjugated with avoir. Ex. : — Us se sont presents des Jleurs, They presented flowers to each other. Us se Sfmt ecrit deux lettres. They wrotet letter to each other. But the participle must agree if the du-ect object (Jleitrs, lettres) precedes. Ex.: — Lies Jleurs qu'ils se sont presentees- Xfe» lettres qu'ils se sont Sorites. THE PAST PARTICIPLB* 365 APPLICATION OF THE ABOVE RULES. As the application of the above rules may present some difficulty, special rules will be given, though all that follows is really embraced Id §§ 2 and 3. 5. The Past Participle of a neuter or intransitive verb conju- grited with avoir never agrees, when conjugated with etre it always agrees with the subject. Ex.; — Les deux heures que fat dormi. The two hours during which I slept; que is equivalent to pendant lesquelles. lis sont tomb^s, they fell. Elles sont tomh^es. Hence also the Past Part, ete is always invariable : EUe a etS, Elles onf ete. 6. The Past Participle of an impersonal verb is always invari- able, as : Les pluies qu'il y aeu cet hiver. The rains we have had this winter. 7. A Past Participle does not agree with en (of it, of them, some), because en is not considered as a direct object. Ex. : — Avez-vous des fleurs ? — Oui, il nous en a donni. But the presence of en does not prevent the participle from agreeing with the real direct object if that precedes. Ex. : Jja bonne opinion qne fen avais conque. The good opinion I had conceived of it. 8. A Past Participle between two que's is invariable. Elx. ; Les livres que vous avez cru que je vous donnerais, the books you thought I would give you. The first que is not the object of em, but of donnerais. 9. The Past Participle followed by an infinitive agrees when ^he object that precedes is governed by the participle, if the object de- pends on the infinitive the participle is invariable. Ex. : La dume gtte fai vup petndre, the lady I saw painting. La dame que fai vu petndre means, The lady whom I saw painted^ that is, whose' 366 XXn. VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON. portrait I saw taken. La dame que f at entendue chanter, tlie lady I heard singing ; but, La chanson que fai entendu chanter, the song I heard sung, — because que is governed not by entendu but by chanter. For the same reason Je les ai laisses partir, I allowed them to go ; but, Us se sont laisse surprendre par Vennemi ; ihey allowed themselves to be surprised by the enemy. In this last sentence se is the object of surprendre, as it is equivalent to, They allowed the enemy to surprise them. 10. The past Participle of the verb faire followed by an infini tive never agrees, because faire thus connected with an infinitive is considered for all purposes of government as forming but one verb with it. Thus mJele fais passer, le is the object of faire passer ; in Je lui fais passer le pont, le pont is the direct object, and lui and not le must be used, as faire passer cannot have two direct objects. Hence fait is invariable in the phrase : Une femme s'esi presentee a la porte, je Vai fait parser, a woman presented he^ self at the door, I let her pass. 11. After the Past Participles du, pu, and voulu an infinitive may be undei-stood, in which case they remain invariable, as : Je lui ai rendy. tous les services que fai du . . . que fai pu (that is lui rendre), I rendered him all the services I should ... I could (render him). But, Les sommes quHl nCa dues; the sums he owed me — dues agrees with its object que which precedes. 12. The Past Participles attendu, excepte, passe, suppose, and vu are sometimes employed as prepositions. They then precede the noun they govern, and are invariable. Other instances might be adduced, but a strict application of §§ 1, 2, 8, and 4, will be found to covei all cases of doubt. THE31E 61. 1. She is loved. 2. We are satisfied. 3. My sisters are satis- fied. 4. My aunt has arrived. 5. My cousins {fern.) have arrived. 6. This house is sold. 7. The two houses are sold. 8. Piese letters are written very weU. 9. My mother has gone out, THE PAST PARTICIPLB. 367 and my sisters have also gooe out. 10. !Mary*8 grandmother ap- pears afflicted. 11. The trees have been felled.^ 12. Virtuous people are esteemed, and the impious'' (ai*e) despised. 13. The rule' whi^h I have learned is very easy. 14. The woman I have seen b very handsome. 15. Where is the letter which you have received? .16. Here it is (la void) ; it is written in (en) French. 17. The horses which we have sold were very old. 18. How many horses have you sold ? 19. We have sold them all. 20. Which house have you taken?* 21. How many books has he bought? 22. Where is my pen? 23. I have not seen it. 24. Where are my sisters ? 25. I have not seen them. 26. Here are the apples (which) you have given me; I have not eaten them. 27. The young ladies have been much amused* in your company. 28. Gen- tlemen, you are mistaken.* 29. She has repented of her neglect fulness.' 30. I saw (have seen) them play before my house. 31. The singers* whom I heard singing yesterday were Tjrrolese.* 1. To foil, couper, 2. Impie. S. Regie, f. 4. Louer. 6. S*amu»er, 0. iSir trom^ per. 7. Nigligence. S. CharUeur, m. 9. TyrolieM. THEME 82. 1 . That ^1 has run too fast ; she is out of breath.^ 2. My aunt has travelled in Italy. 3. His mother (has) lived* in this house foi (pendant) two years. 4. These young men (gens) have studied French and German. 5. We (have) met some ladies in the street. 6. Miss Eliza has brought a bunch' of flowers. 7. For whom has she brought them ? 8. She (has) brought them for you. 9. Have you read these two books? 10. No, sir, I have not yet read them. 11. I have read another book which your brother has lent me. 12. The carpenter* has built a new house, and he has sold it this morn- ing to Mr. B. 13. The rain which has fallen this morning has spoiled the roads. 14. We have bought twenty acres* of land.* 15. The excessive heat which we had' last summer has occasioned diseases.' 16. There came a person that I did not know. 17. Why are these plants to wot?' 18. I (have) ordered^^ them to be 368 XXn. VINGT-DEUXIEME LEgON. watered.^*^ 19. The measures" T was obliged^^ to take have not had the expected effeet.^^ 20. The landlord" caused" them to be paid. 1, ff->rs (Vhalcine. 2. Demeurer. 3. Bouquet. 4. Le chnrpentier. 5. Arpent, m. 6. Terre. 7. Put the Corap. Pres- of the impersonal form it fait. 8. Maladie. 'i . Mouill/es. 10. Fairearroser, 11. Mesure, f. I'Z.Paxi. of devoir. 13 ^e<, m. lit Uaubergiste. 15. Faire. THEME 63. 1 . Where is your gold watch ? 2.1 have sent it to the watch- maker.^ 3. I thought you had allowed^ it to be stolen. 4. The two horses which I (have) advised you to buy are worth (valent) a thousand francs. 5. Happy the princes who have always used' their power* for the good* of their people. 6. You must {il faui que vous) finish the letter which you have begun to write. 7. The apples which I have forbidden you to eat are not ripe. 8. How many men^ commit the same faults which they had resolved to avoid. ^ 9. We have showed^ him all the honor {pi.) it was our duty [to show him]. 10. My friend rendered me every service® he could. 11. Have yuu bought some cigars ?^'* 12. Yes, I have bought [some]. 13. Are not these trees very high? 14. I have seen higher ones. 15. The ship which we saw launched" has now the name of Arion. 16. The play^'-^ I saw performed^' last night has been very much applauded. 17, Imitate the virtues which you have heai'd praised {Lif.}. 18. We used" all the means we could. 1. Horloger. 2. Laisser. 3. Employer. 4. Pouvoir, m. 6. Le bien. 6. Qui (fluvinTii^s. 7. Eviter. 8. Fait. 9. Tous les services qu'. 10. Cigare, m U. Ian- Qsr, Vi La pidcc. 13. Jouer, 14. Employer. THE PARTICIPLE ABSOLUTE. 369 XXITI. VINGT-TROISIEME LEyON THE PARTICIPLE ABSOLUTE. 1. Tlie Participle Absolute is used, as in Englisli, instead of accessory and subordinate clauses beginning with a corjunctioD whiob have the same subject as the leading clause. Ex. : — FUgulus s*€loigna de Rome, tenant les yeuxjixis a la terre, et laissant sa/emme et ses en/ants. Vennemi, voyant (as he saw) noire petit nombre, recommen^a le combat. N€o]ttolcnw., pour^suivant son discours, me dit, etc. he charjtKutieT , laissant son ouvraije a moiti(f fait, alia diner. L'einftereur Conrade, ne voulant plus tenter la fortune, abandonna subitemeni la TnreSainte, etc. Ne sofJiant wxf. faire, il prit ce parti. 2. When the accessory sentence expresses an event which has taken place before another expressed in the principal sentence, the compound form of the Participle Absolute {ayant vu, ayant fait, etc. ) is used. Ex. : — Le comte de Toulouse, ayant s(mm€ (having summoned) la viUe de se rendre, la d^clara sa jwssession. Le Toi ayant hut sacrifi€ pour le bonheur de son peuple, fut enfin la victims de scs bonnes intentions. Lysandre ayant fait un ricJie butin (booty) dans la prise d'Athines, envoya h LobC^demone tout I'or et I'argent qt/il avait pris. THEME 64. 1. As the two combatants would not yield,^ they were pioroed with wounds.* 2. As Mentor heard the voice of the goddess who was calling her nymphs into the wood, he waked' Telumachus. 3. Crant-or, seeing that I was already very near him, redoubled his zeal, and attempted* to barricade my way. 4. That mountain, command- ing ao extensive* view, was well calculated* for our observation* 5. I cannot adcompany you into the country, having some business 24 370 XXin. TINGT-TROTSIEME LEQON. that requires my presence here. 6. How many people do we see, who, knowing the value of time, waste' it improperly.** 7. Wishing to make something of my son, I have put him into your hands. 8. Newton, having taken the average^ of years during which the king? of the various^" countries have reigned, reduced each reign to ahont twenty two years. 9. Napoleon, seeing that the battle of Waterloo was lost, drew his sword and wished desperately^^ to fling himself into the tumult of the battle. 10. FrankHn, [after] having looked everywhere for employment,^^ reentered at the printer^^ Keimer's. 1. Ceder. 2. De coups. 3. Eveiller. 4. Chercher A barrer. 6. Etendu. 6. Propre d. 7. Perdre. 8. Mai d propos. 9. Le terme moyen, 10. Different. 11. En ditespiri. 12. De V occupation, 13. Chez Vimprimeur K. 3. The Participle Absolute can also be used in the place of sub- ordinate sentences beginnmg with a conjunction, if they have a di5 fereut subject. Ex. : — Le roi €tant mort, son Jils lui succ€da. The king being dead his son succeeded. La ville ayant qch. a qn., to teach one permettre a qn., to allow one. enseigner ) something eonseiiler qch. a qn., U> advise. convenir a qn., to suite any one. d€p'mre a qn., to displease one. d(Ssofj^ir a qn., to disobey one. dire a qn., to tell some one. /aire tort a qn., to wrong one. 80 Jier a qn., to trust one. nuire a qn., to hurt, injure one ob€ir a qn., to obey one. ordonner a qn., to order. pardonner a, to pardon, forgive one. parvenir b qch., to attain. plaire a qn., to please one. rem^diera qch., to remedy. renoncer a qch., to renounce, ahdicarc something. r€signer a qch., to resign something r€slster a qn., to resist one. ressembler a qn., to resemble one. subvenir a, to relieve. succ^drr a, to succeed. 86 soustraire a, to keep out of Lne way. survivre a, to outlive, survive. toucher h qch., to touch something. 874 XXnr. VmOT-QUATElfME LEgON. Examples : — Pouvez-vous enseigner le latin a mon Jih f Can you teach my son Latin t H faut ob€ir a vos parents. Yoii must obey your parents. On ne peat pas pi aire a trntt h monde, Y"ou cannot please everybody. Ne xfous Jiez pas a lui. Do not trust him. THEME «e. 1. Who teaches your brother French? 2. Mr. R., who is a very good teacher. 3. This ribbon does not please my sister. 4. You have wronged your neighbor ; you have hurt his credit;^ at least he says so (Je). 5. A good christian forgives his enemies. 6. Miss Mary resembles her mother [very] much. 7. Will you allow your pupils to to take a walk this afternoon ? 8. Yes, I will allow them to go with you. 9. Children must obey then: parents. 10. The ofiBcer disobeyed the orders of the king. 11. The son succeeded his father. 12. The riches of the count would have relieved the wants' of the poor. 13. He who wishes to please everybody, runs the risk* of pleasing (rfc ne plaire) nobody. 14. Louis the Fourteenth survived his son, the dauphiTi, and his grandson.* 15. Do not touch anything. 1. CrMit, m. 2. JJesoin, m. 8. Courir risque. 4. PetU-fiU. 3. Verbs which require in English the prepositions of and from are generally followed in French by de. Besides these, the follow- ing also require de : — Accabler de, to overwhelm. approcher de, ) t'acquitter de qch, to discharge. s'approcher de, ) *° apP«>ach. ^qffliger de, to be afflicted at. s'armer de, to arm one's self with. t^apercevoir de,* to remark, to per- avoir besoin de, to want, to require, ceive. avoir piti€ de, to pity. • Apercevoir, when not a pronominal verb, gOTerns the dttroot ollject and, applies to vMUe tbings, as : J'aptrfus une fiamme. GOVERNMENT OF 7ERB8. 376 aw>tr or prendre soin de, to take care of. hruler de, to bum with. chaiger de, ) ambler de, I ^^''^^'^'^^- se cmtenter de, to be satisfied or con- tented with. oouvrir de, to cover with. te defter de, ") de,\^^' distrust. K vi^fier d^pendre de, to be dependent on. envelopper de, to wrap up in. Jaire de, to do with (to make use of). /aire present de, to present with. f€liciterqn. deqch., to congratulate on. fourmiller de, to swarm with. honorer de, to honor with. jouir de qch., to enjoy. m^dire de qn., to traOuce, to slander. 86 tneler de qch., to meddle with. Be moquer de qn., to laugh at. mourir de, to die of. munir de, to furnish, provide with. se passer de qch., to do without. p^rir de, to perish or die of. pro /iter de qch., to profit by. pourvoir de, to provide with. punir de qch., to punish for. r€compenser de qch., to reward for. regarder de, to rep:ard with. te rfjouir de, to rejoice at. reinercier de qch., to thank for some* thing. remplir de, to fill with. te repentir de, to repent. rire de, to laugh at. se souvenir de, to remember, to recol lect. sourire de, to smile at. trioinpher de, to triumph over. St tromper de, to mistake. Examples : — Approchez-vous du feu, come near the fire. Je me suis d€fi€ de ses promesses. I distrusted his promises. On m'accabUi de reproches. They overwhelmed me with reproaches. EUe sourit de notre emharras. She smiled at our embarrassment. THEME C7. 1. He was overwhelmed with reproaches.^ 2. You must dis- charge that obligation. 3. Death pities nobody, neither rich not poor. 4. Come near the window. 5. Nature wants few things. 6. She is contented with little. 7. Have you not perceived this mistake? 8. No, sir, I have not perceived it {en). 9. The ground ^ was oovered with snow. 10. The general honored me mih 376 XXIV. VINGT-QUATRIEMB LE^ON. his friendship. 11. Your brother presented me with this silver pen- holder.^ 12. The impious* mock at virtue and religion. 13. Dc not meddle with my affairs. 14. Distrust that man ; he will laugh at your benefits* when he no longer requires them. 15. Never trar duce (slander) anybody. 16. Mr. A. is a very strong man ; he enjoys good health. 17. If he repents his faults, I will pardon liim. 18. I cannot do without his help.* 19. I hope (that) you will profit by this experience. 20. Remember your promise. 21. I remember that story very well. 22. Everybody rejoices at that victoiy.' 1. Reproche, m. 2. La terre. 3. Porte-plume, m. 4. Impie, 5. Bierifait, m. 6. Secoursj m. 7. Victoire, f. 4. Verbs with different governments. The following verbs have different governments according to their different significations : — 1. Abuser qn., to deceive. abuser de qch., to abuse, to misuse. 2. Assister qn., to assist, to help. assister a qch., to be present at. 3. Changer qch., to change, to alter, to exchange. changer de qch., to change, to change one thing for another. changer en, to turn into. 4. Convenir de qch., to agree (construed with etre), convenir a qn., to suit. 5. Croire qn., to believe some one. croire qch., to believe something. croire a qch., to believe in something. croire en, to believe in. 6. Demander qn., to ask or inquire for some one. demander qch., to ask for somothing. demander a qn., to ask a person. demander qch. a qn., to ask something of some one or to ask some one for something. 7. Echapper and s' ^chopper de, to escape from, i. e. out of. €chapper a, to escape from, i. e. to avoid, to be preserved from. 8. Se facher de qch., to be sorry for. *' " contre qn., to be angry at. 9. Insulter qn. or qch. (dir. obj.), to offend by insults. insulter a qn. or n qcL, to deride, to scorn, to insult. 10. Jou«r a qch,, to play at a game. GOVERNMENT OF VEBB8. 377 jowr de Varr/ent, to pfey for money. jov^r d'un instrument, to play (on) an instrument. «! jouer de qn., to laugh at, to deceive. 11 Manquer (neuter verb without a government), to be wanting or miss- ing. manquer qr , or qch., to miss, to fail in. nianqucr de qch., to be wantiug in, to be short of. manquer a qn. or a qch. (also contre qch.), to fail in, to omit 12. R^f>ondre a qch., to answer. r€}X)ndr€ de qch., to answer for. 13. Satisfaire qn., to satisfy, to content. satisfaire a qch., to fulfil duties to . . . , to satisfy. U. Sermr qn., to serve one, to be at one's service. servir de qch., to serve as something, for some one. 15. Souscrire qch., to subscribe, to sign. souscrire a qch., to approve of, to subscribe to. 16. User qch., to use up, to wear out. user de qch., to make use of, to use. Examples : — On a change les conditions, they have altered the conditions. J*ai change de logevient, I have taken other lodgings. Que demandez-vous, what do you ask for ? Demandez a votre mire, ask your mothen J'ai demands mon argent a mon ancle, I have asked ray money of my uncle. Rfpondez a ma question, answer my question. Pouvez-vous r^pondre de sa probity, can you answer for his honesty? 5. Special remarks on some verbs. 1. Acheter qch. a qn., to buy something of some one. 2. Aider qn., to succor, to 8ui)port, to give means of doing. aider a qn., to help, to aid physically in doing something. 3. Applaudir, to applaud something, governs the dir. obj. applaudir, to applaud a person, governs the ind- obj. 4. Ayprocher qch. (active verb', to approach, to advance, to bring pr push near. approcher qn., to approach — to have free access. approcher de qn. or de qch., to approach some one or something; to Jjc «*• draw nearer (see § 3). 6. Emprunter, to borrow, governs the indirect object of the person when S78 JXrV, VINGT-QUATni^MB LEgON. represented by a personal pronoun (such as lui, leur, nous, etc.). Bui it requires a or de when the person is expressed by a noun las: a or de mon frere, of ray brother. 6. En croire qch., to trust, to depend upon. 7. H€riter qch. de qn., to inherit something from some one. If, however, no person is mentioned, the thing follows the preposition de. 8. Persuader qn. de qch., to convince a person of the truth of a thing. persuader qch. a qn., to persuade one to do something. 9. Redoiibler qch. (dir. obj.), means to redouble, i. e. to reiterate. redoubkr de qch., to redouble, i. e. to augment in force. 10. Penser h means to have one's mind upon. penser de, to have an opinion of. Examples : — Approekez la table, approach the table (bring it nearer). Tout le monde pent approcher notre prince. Everybody has free access to otxr prince. iVc vous approchez pas taut du bord. Do not go so near the edge. Pensez a moi, think of me. Que pensez-vous de cela, what do you think of thati 6. On the verb faire. The verb faire when followed by an Infinitive with a dir. obj., requires the person in the ind. obj., the two verbs being considered as one verbal expression the sense of which is is always active. The reason of it is that an active verb cannot have two direct complements (see L. XXII, 10). Ex. : — Je lui at fait €crire cinquante mots. I have made him write fifty words. Sa mere lui a fait raconter cette histoire. BQs mother caused him to relate that story. But if there be no direct object after the Infinitive that foUowF fjire, the person stands in the direct object. Ex.: — Je les ai fait partir, I have made them depart. Nous les avons fait renoncer aleur prdentions. We have made them abandon their pretentions. 7. The verbs ecouter, entendre, laisser and voir also, are some- iamos used in this manner, as : — GOVERNMENT OP VERBS. 379 Je lui ai vu maltraiter son chien. I saw him ill-treat his dog. But this is not generally adopted, and it is better to say : -— Je Vai tm maltraiter son chien, J* at vu le petit gargon (dir. obj.) maltraiter son chien. 8 Wlien the Infinitive is followed by a subordinate sentence with que, the indirect object is preferred, as : — Je lui ai entendu dire qu'il partirait. I heard him say that he was going to leave. Jai entendu dire a son pere qu'il lui pardonnerait. I heard his father say that he would forgive him. THEME 61. 1. The jailer* has deceived the prisoner with respect to (sur) the lot* which awaited him. 2. Have you not abused our patience ? 8. We have abused it {en). 4. The hour from 10 tx) 11 does not suit my sister. 5. We have agreed on the price.' 6. Let us always assist the poor. 7. I could not be present af the funeral.'* 8. I have changed my opinion. 9. Could you change me this napoleon? 10. Industry is the true philosopher's^ stone that changes all metals into gold. 11. Whom have you asked for ? 12. I inquired for my eldest' brother. 13. Have you asked your friend for money V 14. I have not asked him for any. 15. Do not be- lieve that man, he is a liar.' 16. I do not believe in his promises. 17. We believe in God. 18. The little bu:d has escaped from his cage. 19. Can* you play at chess?* 20. No, Sir, but I will play at cards with you, if you like.^'' 21. I play (on) the violin and my sister plays on the piano. 22. We often play together. 23. I was too late, I missed the train." 24. A soldier must {doit) not fail in courage. 25. The pupil redoubled his application, when he heard that a prize' would be given. 26. The man is too poor, he cannot satisfy his creditors." 27. Do you make use of specta* cles?^ 28. Yes, I always wear spectacles; I am short-sighted.^' 29. Make him read a chapter" or two. 30. I made him relate' t>80 XXV. ViNGT-CINQUi:lME LECON. the story a second time 31. Charles the XII made all that mul titude cross ^' the river, without retaining^® a single soldier prisoner. 1. Le geolier. 2. Le sort. 3. Prix, m. 4. Funiraillea, f. pi. 5. Phi'osophale. 6. Ain4. 7. Afenteur. 8. Savoir. 9. Aux tehees. 10. Vouloir. 11. Le convoL 12. Criancier. 13. Lunettes, f. pi. 14. J'ai la vue basse. 16. ClutpUre^ m. Ul Baconter, 17. Rt^^ser. 18. Sans en retenir. XXV. VINGT-CINQUIEME LEgON IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. Idioms are modes of speaking peculiar to one language, Tvhicb oannot be literally translated into another Avoir, to have. Avoir vingt am, to be twenty years old. Avoir malaux yeux, to have sore eyes. Avoir mal a la tete, to have a {or the) headache. J^ai /void aux mains, my hands are cold . Vous avez beau parler, it is in vain for you to talk. Xax de la peine a le croire, I can hardly believe it. Avoir froid, to be cold, — chaud, to be warm. Avoir Jwnie, to be ashamed. Avoir raison, — tort, to be right, — in the wrong. Avoir bonne mine, to look well. N^ avoir que /aire de, to have no occasion for. Avoir grand soif, — faim, to be very thirsty, — hungry. Avoir quelque chose, to have something the matter with OBft Avoir pew to be afraid. Avoir sommeil, to be sleepy. Avoir soin, to take care. Avoir besoin, to have need, want. Avoir sujet, to have reason. Avoir regret, to regret. Avoir enrie, to desiie. IDIOMATICAL EXPRESSIONS. S8l Avoir cMtume^ to bo accustomed. Avoir lieu, to take place. Avoir heau, to be in vain. L'avoir belle, to have a favorable opportunity to do it. A MrCj to bo. Etre en Oat de, to aflford. Eire a son aise, to be in good circumstances. Etre mal avec quelqii'un, to be out of favor with some one. Etre de moiti€, to go halves. Pltre a la porUe, to be within reach. ktre mr le point de, to be very near to, to be going to. II en est de . . . , it is with, it is the case. Etre riche de, to be worth, to possess. When a person is the subject valoir is never used in this sense. H est riche de douze milk piastres, he ia worth twelve thousand dollars. Etre en retard, to be late. Etre a meme de, to be able to. Etre en peine de^ to l)e uneasy about Etre en me, to be alive. Etre en chemin pour, to be on the way to. Eire au fait, au courant de, to be familiar with. Etre a la veilfe de, on the eve of. Etre de trop, to be in the way. Etre bien avec, to be on good terms with. Etre brouill^ avec, on bad terras with. ■ Etre aux prises avec, to be in open rupture, quarrel or battle with Etre d'avis, to be of opinion. Y etre, to be at home. Etre d'accord, to be in tune. Ce piano n'est pas d'accord, this piano i^ not in tone. Nous sommes d'accord, we agree. Vom n'y etes pas, that is not it. Faire, to do, to make. Faire savoir (jn., to let one know, to send word. Faire chaud, faire froid, to be warm, — cold (of the weather). Se faire des amis, to get friends. Faire faire, to get made. Faire aemblant de, to pretend. 382 XXV. VmGT-CINQUIBME LECON. Faire attention^ to pay attention. Faire cas de, to value, to esteem. Faire un tour de promenade, to take a walk. Faire voile or mettre a la voile, to set sail. Faire de son mi&cx, to do ono.'s best. Ne faire que, to do nothing but. Cen est fait de moi, I am undone, it is over with me. Vims feriez mieux de rester, you had better stay. Faites-moi grace de tons ces details, spare me particulars. Faire raccommoder, to have mended. Faire la cuisine, to cook. Faire tort a, to injure. Faire bouillir, to boil. THEME 69. 1. How old was your father when he died ? 2. He was seventy. 3. And your mother? 4. She was almost^ eighty. 5. I do nol remember to have ever been so* thirsty as T was yesterday. 6. Wami yourself, if you are cold ; my feet are not cold, because I have walked much, but my hands are so cold, that I cannot write. 7. There are some walks' in our park which are three hundred feet long. 8. You are in the wrong, and he is in the right. 9. It is in vain for you to ask money from a miser, he will never give you any. 10. Is it cold this morning? 11. Yes sir, it is very cold; however, I do not think it is quite so cold as it was yesterday. 12. The weather is very inconstant; it was hot yesterday, it is cold to-day ; it rained this morning ; it is fine weather now, but perhaps it will rain again before (it be *) night. 1. Prit de. 2. Si. 8. AUie, f. 4. Paire (Subj.). Donner, to give. Dormer dans le pi^ge, to be caught in the snare. Donner sur le jardin, to look out on the garden. Donner carte blanche, to give full powers. Donner sur I'ennemi, to fall upon the enemy. JVe savoir ou donner de la tete, to know not what way to tam. Oe vin dotuie h la tete, that wine flies np to the head. IDIOMATIGAL EXPRESSIONS. 383 Dortntr un coup de main, to help. Donner a jdeines mains, to ^ive largely. iSe donner des airs, to take a jj^reat deal on one's self. Se donrter la peifte, to take the trouble. Jouer, to play, etc. Jotuv (Tnn instrument, to play (upon) an instrument. Jouer a({ud(ine jeu, to play at some game. Joua une piece de theatre, to a<-t a play. Jouer un tour a qn., to serve (play) oue a trick. 3e porter, to be (in reference to health). // se porte bien, he is well. Aimer viieux, to have rather, to choose rather. AlUr a fn-ede afxtttue, to go at full speed. Donnir la yrasse matinee, to sleep very late. Prendre en miuoalse p^irt, to take amiss. S'lf hien /yrendrt, to go the righi way to work. JS'i/ ftrendre mid. to 1:0 rhe wrong way to work. iSV fXisHt^r f/e, to e in a person's power. // ne tient /km a mni ifne, it is not my fault. S'en terur h, to stand to. fat re teiur, to forward. Venir a fxfut de, to bring about, to aectimplish. En vouloir k, to have a spite against, to be vexed with* Je ijottdi-ais /mnroir, I wish 1 eould. // y tHi de iH)tre vie, your life is at stake. Verxir de, to have just done somethmg. ' En veftir aux maim, to comu to blows. TIlHiME 70. 1. llow do yoii do thi.s» morning? 2. I am very well, T tbauk yr>u. 3. And how does ycmr sister do? 4. She is not well ; she has been ill for these tw<» months, and I fear she will never be well ^ again. 5. And your brotbera, how are they V 6. The youngest is SM XXV. VINOT-CTNQUIKMB LEgON. very well, Init ! fin oot kmm how fh« oldest «loe8. because we have not hoani* of him for^ the.se two uion^^hs; he wu*> very well when he wrote t/» uj- last ' 7 It is with the diseases of the heart as with .hose '»f t,h»* hodv. some are real/ aiul some iiiia;j^nary 8. It is Fith men of l(^'l^liIl^!: as with ears* of corn ; they raise their* he'i U while they are I'inpty. ancj when they are full, they begin to «iri»op/ 9 It is with your s(»n as with other ehiUlreu. 10. I do nut think it will lie with my son a» it was with yours. 1. Avitir de se» tuHirelleA. 2. Fur these — dr^ou. 3. La derniere /oU, i. JMbL 5. Epit de bit. 6. ihit. Art. 7. /'e/M-Aer. THKME 71. 1. I have gieat pain' in my side. '2. He h;is sore eyes. 3 He has a sore fo<»t 4. My lips are s«>re. 5, She had the toothache yesterday, rujw she has a ln*adarhe ; t^Muorrow, |>erhaps, she will have the ear^-ache. H When 1 was youn«», ( of^fm had the lu'ad- aehe. 7. Why do you not eat, if you are hunc.lii. rcl. pron.. relative pronoun, pro* no in relatif. 8., substantive, Hiibxtantif. sing., siniuUng to. — moi (toi), *fcc,. to me v>r viynelf, ridn.e. of my oipn. iS:c. abaisder. v. a tti lowir. to humble; k'- ■. V r t^> xto'i'i). to liH'liite. abandon, s.in. ohainhnnnen.t. abundonu , e, adj. Kbituxloned, de- Kfited. abandonncr, v. a. to abandon, to lence^ to gioe up. abattement, s.m. depreasum, despon- dency, low »piriU abattre, v. a. to fell, to cant d/>wn, dlH-tearten : a' — . v.r. to fall, to break down, dexj'ond. abattu, e, adj. depr€.ifrt. accomplir, v. a. to accomplish. accord, s.m. agreement. aryC(yrdtnr. v.a. |9()) to buy. achever. v.a. tf/Ji/ofsh. to end^ \ A(rhille. s.m. ArhUle.^. ao(iuerir, v.a. ir. (187) lo acquire^ to I yidn. VOCABULARY. 387 ftcqnitter, v. a. to pay, to receipt, to ncfjnit ; s' — , v. r. to acquit, one- kdf, to perforin, to fvlJiL acte, 8.m. act, action, deed, bill. ac teur, trice, s.m.f. actor, actress. acti-f, ve, adj. active. action, s.f. action, act, deed; — s, pi. ^tock. actuel, le, adj. present, real. actaellement, adv. at jyresent. addition, 8.f. addition, bill. adieu, adv. 8.m. goodbye, fareiceU. adinettre, v.a, ir. ( 1 80) to admit, to aU/rin of. admirer, v.a. to admire, wonder at. adresse, s.f. nA-ill, clererii&fn, ad- dresH ; a 1' — de, addretiH d to. adresser, v. a, to address ; a' — , v. r. tfj apjdp, to sjieak. adroit, e, adj. dexterous, skilfvl. adroitenieut, adv. .ski! fully, ciecerly. adverV)e. 8.m. adverb. adversaire, 8.m. ndversary, fjqyjto- uent. adversitc, s.f. advei'sity. affuiblir, v.a. to weMken ; s' — , v.r. (o grow weak. aflfaiblisseinent, s m loettkening. affaire, 8. f. ajfuir, thiiif/, bu.nuess, job, bargain. engagcnitiU ; — a, buidnesn, trade, cjfVctM. affocter, v.a. to a feet, to attach. afTectiou, H.t. ajftclion ; prendre en — . to take a Liking or a fancy to. affcctueu x. se. ailj, af'ecti<'ii old are you f ag , e, adj. (252) clmnge, to impair, to i/i/nre ; s' — , v r. (of the voice) to falui'r, to tremble. amasser, v.a. to heap up, to gather. ambas.sadeur. s.m. a/nhanxador. ambitieii-x. .se, adj. oinhiti/noi. ambition, s.f. amhituHL. wUl. ambitionner, v.a. to be dijibitiov^t of. ambre, s ra. amber. ame, s f. on. ftpirit. ghos*. life. amoner, v.a to bring, to bring in^ to cause. am-er. ere, adj. bitter, md. amer, s.m. bitter. Americain, e, adj. s. American. Amcrique (L'), s.f. America. ami, e, s.m.t. friend, dear. amical, e, adj. friendig. amicable. amicalement. adv. in a friendly way, amicably. amiral, s.m. admiral. ami tie, s.f. friendship, lore; — 8, pi. (kiud) regards or compliments, amour, s.m. lore. ample, adj. aynple, fvll. large. amnsant, e. adj. amudng. amuser, v.a. to amuse, to entertain, to please ; s' — , v. r. to aniu-^e or enjoy one^eJf; to be amused or pUMsed. an, s.m. year, year old; jour de r — , premier de 1' — , new-year''^ day. ane. s.m. ass. donkey. ancOtres, s.m. pi. anceMors. ancieu, ne, adj. ancient, old. ancre, s.f. ano\or. Angleterre iL'), s.f. England. animal, s.m. (81) aninud, beast. animer, v.a. to animate, to enliven, to give life to; s' — , v.r. to be- com£ animated or excited. aniraosite. s.f. ani/n/mty, excitement. aunales, s.f.pl. an)t,als. auu6e. s.f. year ; souhaiter la bonne — , to wish a happy new-year. annoncer. v.a. to aniunince, to indi cate, to advertise. Antarcti*) f^ P^'' reire. to see ; s' — , v. r. f^' perceive t/f bf aware {of}, to notice. Apollon. s.m. Aj^tlJ^K aptKiratre, v.n. ir. {]7S) t^f appetir. appart(;meiit, s.m. apartments apparten r, v.n. ir, (187) to belong, to bec'niie. appoler, v.a. (J)')^ U) call, to ajrpeal, .s' — . v.r. t/> be c, filed ; commeol vous appelez-vous ? what is youi name? applaudir, v.a. to applaud, to cheer applique, e, adj. diligent, attentive. fftudiouxly, adapted. appliquer, v.a. to ajr^^ly ; s' — , v.r to a^yply. apporter, v.a. to bnng, to produce to cause. apprehender, v.a. to apprehend^ U fear. apprendre, v.a. ir, (1S1) to learn, to hear, to inform, to teU. appro ter, v.a. to prepare, to gtt ready. apT)roGhe. s.f. ajyproarh. approciier, v.a.n. to aj)2)roaeh. VOCABULAUr. 3«9 approf ondir. v. a. tn deepen, to inves- tif/ote. t(> fathom. approuver, v. a. t/> approve, of. appui, s.m. lorjtport, prr^j). appuyer. v.a.n. tr, xnpjyort^ to ie/tn, to rent. apres. prep. adv. nfter^ iie.it to. 'il)out. behind., -iru^rroiD. apr.s-iuidi, s.m.f. afternoon. arbre, H.m. tret. arbuste. s.m. bnsh. arc, s.m. boin. arclt^ arc arc-en -ciel, s.ra. (21.")) raiitlHnn. archer, s.m. archer. archevoque, s.m. arrhbifhov. ardeur, s. f. anior, heat, eajjernettg. argent, s.m. silver., mouey, e^oth. argiier, v .n. to argue., U) infer. Aiinste (L'), 8.m. Ariosto. arin.uenr. a.m. privateer. arme, s f. weapon; — s, pi. finn.x, tro ^t-at, to set ; k' — , v.r. to fit down, to st. as.sez. adv. einnigh, rather, pretty ; — bien. prttty well; bien — , (pii'e eiioiir/h. a-ssidn, e. ndj. assiduovs. a.-ssidui{H3. 8.f. ax.Hd.vity. dose appli- cation . apsiette. K f. pUite. pl.ateft/1. fassigner. v.a. #/> a.H,ngii, to xummon. assis, e, adj. .seated, xittiny. assLster. v.a.n to oxxitt, t/f help, to attfiul, to be prrxent. ass<>ci»5. e. s. m. f. axmH-iate, partner. a^sonimer, v.a. U> kiutck down., to /.•ill. to pliifjiie. assoitir. v a„n. , to match, to assort., to Hort. asHoupir, v.a. to make drowxy ; s' — , v.r. to gtt dro-irxy or uleej'y. awourdir, v.a. to deafen. assnjettir. v.a. to mtbjcct. toxttbdiie. assnro, e, a(lj, s. secure, xure., cer- tain. assurcment, adv. assuredly. assuror, v.a. to axsiire. Athcnes, s.f. Athens. atlas, s.m, atlffs. attacher, v. a. to attach, to fasten ; s' — , v.r. to attach one-self , to en- deavoi; to strive. attaquer, v. a. to attack, to assault. alrt-eindre, v.a.ii. Ir. (175) to reach, to attain. attendant (en), in the meantime, meanwhile, till ; — que, xiniil. attendre, v.a.n. to wait for, towaity to expect, tjo await ; faire — , to keep waiting ; s'— , v. r. to eiepeot., to rely. attendrir, v.a. to affect, to move. attetidu, prep, considei'ing ; — quo, cormdtiing that, irliereas, as. attenti-f. ve, adj. attentive. attention, s.f. attention, care, notice; faire — , to pay attention, to con- siller. attester; v.a. to attest, tovouoh. 390 VOCABULARY. attirer, v. a. to ntfract, to draw. attrapCv, v. a. to catrJi. au [coittractjon of a le, art. (34)]. aube, fe.f. ddwn. auberge, s.f. in/i. aucun, e. adj. (57, 76, 275) any, no, none^ iwt any. au(;unement, adv; not at aU. audace, s.f. audacity., daring. audience, s f. audis/ice. auditeur, s.m. hearer. augm enter, v.a.n. to increase, to en- large, to raise. Auguste, s.m. Avgiistvs. auguste, adj. august. aujourd'hui. adv. to-day., this day. aumone, s.f. i dins., charity. aune. s.m. alder. aune, s.f. ell., measure, yard. auparavant, adv. before, formefrly, first. aupres, prep. 7iear, by., 7iext, about. aupres, adv. ne((/r, close by. au(juel [contraction of a lequel]. aurore. s.f. dawn, light. aussi, adv. conj. also, too^ likewise, so, as, as much ; — bieu, as well. aussitv/t, adv. prep, immediately, di- rectly, iinmediatdy after ; — que, as soon as. autant, adv. as much, as many, so much, so many ; d' — moins, all the less; d' — plus, all the more. auteur, s.m. author. automne, s.ra,f autumn. autoriser, v. a. to authorize. autour, prep. adv. (301) around, about, le«- queilesj. auxquels [contraction of alesquels], avance, s. f . advance ; a 1' — , d' — , en — , par — , in advance, before- hand. avancer, v.a.n. to advance, t/) jyrO' mote, to -project, to get on, to go on; s' — , v.r. to advance. avant, adv. far, deep ; en — , for- ward, in front. avant, prep. (298) before, ere; d' — , before ; — que, — de, before ; — -garde, s.f. van-guard; hier, adv. the day before yesterday. avantage, s.m. advantage. avaut-bras, s.m. forearm. avare, adj. avaricious, stingy. avare, s.m. miner. avarier, v a. to damage. avec, prep. adv. (37, 300) with, by, among, against, besides; d' — , from. avenir, s.m. future ; a 1' — , in fu- ture, hencefarth. aventure, s.f. adventure. avertir, v. a. to inform, to warn. aveugle, adj. 8.m.f. blind, blind man or iDoman. aveugler, v. a. to blind, to dazde. avide, adj. greedy, eager. avilir, v. a. to degrade; s' — , to de- base oneself. avis, s.m. opinion, advice; changer d' — , to alter on^s tnind ; etre d' — , to be of the opinion. aviser, v.a.n. to perceive, to inform y s' — , v.r. to think, to venture. avocat, s.m. barrister. avoir, v. a. (48, 58) to have, to feel, (51 ) to be ; qu'avez-vous ? qu'est- ce que vous avez ? (52) wliat is the matter with youf Ilya(imp. ), (14(5) there is, there are, the matter is. since, ago ; qu'y a-t-il ? wliat is the matter ? (idioms, 380). avouer, v.a. toavcw, to confess y to own. f Avril, s.m. April, azur, sm. azure. VOCABULARY. 391 Bade, s.f. Baden. bague, s.f. Hng. baguette, s f . wand, switch, drum- stick. bain, s.m. bath. baiHser, v. a. to lower ; se — , v.r. to St/M/p. bal, s.m. boU. balaneer, v.a.n. tostroing, tohentate. balbutier, v.a.n. to stammer, to stutter. balle, af. ball, bitUet. balsamique, adj. balmy. banc, s.m. bench. banquier, s.m. Ixinker. baptcme, s.m. bivptism. baril, s.m. barrel. baroune, 8.f. baroness. barouche, s.f. baroncfie. barque, s.f. bnrk, boat. barriere, s.f. barrier, gate. bas, se, adj. low. bas, 8.m. stocking. ban, adv. low, in a low tone, softly, in a whisper ; ici — , here bdow ; la — , below, over titer e^ jptnder / en — , down, below, dftwnstairs ; tout — , very hw, in a whisper. base, 8 f. base. basse, s.f. bass, base. f bataille, 8.f. battle ; livrer — , fight a battle. fbataillon, s.m. battalion. bateau, s.m. ImmU ; — a vapeur, steamboat. bateli-er, hre, s.m.f. Ixxitinan, wa- terman. b'lter, v.a. to saddle. bati, e, part, built, made. b'ltir, v.a. to build. battre, v.a.n. (107) to beat, to strike, to defeat, to thrash ; se — , v. r. to fight. bavard, e, adj. s. talkative, talker, gossip. beau, bel, m., belle, f., adj. (41) deattt^idj finSy handsome, noble ; do pins belle, more than ever* avoir — . . . , to ... in vain . . . y Tavoir belle, to have a favorable opjKn't unity ; vous avea — dire, parler, or faire, say, or dk>, what you will. beaucoup, adv. much, many, a great deal, a gre^it many. bean-frere, s.m. (215) brothjr-in- law. beautc, R.f. beauty. bee, s. m. benk, bill. bog^ayer, v.n.a. tf* stammer, to lisp. bel, le, adj. V. beau. Belgique (La), s.f. Belgium. bellu-sueur, 8.f. (215) sister-in law. benediction, s.f. blessing, benediC' tion. . •fbonin, m., b'nigne, f., adj. benign. bonir, v.a to blt'ss. bergor, 8.m. shepherd. besoin, s. m. n^ed, want ; an — , if h£ce^viry ; avoir — de, to want, to need. bestial, e, adj. beastly. bestiaux, s.m. pi. ('51) cattle. bctail, s.m. (:{l) c extremities, to put out of patience ; venir a — de, to succeed in, to get the better of. fbouteille, s.f. bottle. bouton, ft.m. bud. boutonner, v.a. to button. braire, v.n. ir. (197) to bray. bras, «.ra. df'ni. brave, adj. brave, honest, good, worthy, courageous. braver, v.a. to brave. brebis, s.f. sheep. bref. brove, adj. sliort, brief. Brosil (Le), s.m. Brazil. j-Bretague (La;. 8.f. Brittany; La Grande — , Great Britain. bride, s.f. bridle; a — abattue, h, toute — , at full speed ; tenir en — , Off keep within, bounds. briser, v. a. n. to break, to shatter, to daJi ; se — , v.r. to break, to dash. broc. s m. can. tbrouillard, s.m. adj. fog ; il fait dii— . it u foggy. fbrouiller, v.a. to throw into con- fusion ; se — , v.r. to f
//). why. what. commerce, s.m. commi^rce, trade, biitiiiejtH. commettre, v.a. ir. (180) to commit, to compr(/mixe. coiiimis. .s.m. derk. commission, s.f. commission, mes- sage, errand. commode, adj. convenient, comfort- «Me, eagy. commodement, adv. conveniently c^nnfortably. commun, e, adj. common, mututi^ vulgar. commun, s.m. gener'ility, bulk. communcmeut, adv. Cy,mnMnly, gen- eraXiy. fcompagne, s.f. companion, partner. fcompagnie, s.f. coinpaity, society, troitp. fcompa^on, s.m. companion, part- ner, fellow. coraparaisou, s.f. comparison. comparaitre, v.n. ir. (178; toappear. complaire, v.n. ir. (178) to please; se — , v.r. to delight. compl-et, ete, adj. cunt, U) calcidate. V> inrdudft. to contain, to rely. comte, s.m. count, earl. comtesse, s f. counti-ss. concemer, v. a. to cuicorn. concert, .s.m. concert. coucevoir, v.a. ir, (189) to ccncdve, to understand. conclure, v.a.n. ir. (107) to condude. Concorde, s.f. concord. concourir, v.n. ir. (184) to compete. ooncours, a.m. concourse. 8'J6 VOCABULARY. condamner, v. a. t/) condetnn^ to sen- tence. condescendre, v.n. to condescend^ to comply. condition, s.f. condition., state; — H. pi. te/Dns. conduire, v. a. ir. (172) to conduct, to lead ; se — , v. r. lo beluvre. condnite, s.f. conduct, behavior, leading. conftance, s.f. confidence, trvfit. couiier, v. a. to corifide, to tn/H. coufii-e. v.a. ir. (171) to preserve, to pickle. confirm er, v.a. to con firm. conti tu re , h.L ja m . confornioment, adv. conformably, suitably. contort, a.m. comfort. confus, e, adj. confused. conge, s.rn. leave, discJiarge, holi- day, congedier, v.a. to discharge, dismiss. coujugaison, s.f. conjugation. conjurer, v.a. toco/ispire, to entreat. connaissance, s-f. knowledge, ac- gu/ii/itance, senses ; - s, pi. know- ledge, learning, le, adj. pritj/er, hecoiaiiiy^ Hijht, due., su/tuhle. convenir, V n. ir. (1H7) to agree, to suit, ttt be expedient. coiivertir, v. a tn on cert, tuchi(uye. convier. v. a. toinoite. copia. s.f. C'^7/. coij, H. in. rot'k. fci)quiJle, s.f. ff/tell. fcorweiil . s.f buj^kft. corile, M.f. .Htiiiiy c-orrl. rojie. , conlon, 8. in. ttrixt, s^tring, hand; — blen, Jii!tt-ntt<' c4Ht!:. Coriuthicu. ne. sulj. CiniutitUin. oorpM. H. rn. h()iy r/trpH. correct, e, adj. cttntrJ. corriger, v a. t<> r^'iTect. cort.-^e, s. m. retinue, nttendautif, jrrtM:ejO(i//ii. c'te. s.f. Cf'iijit, nhore. cOt(3. 8.m. Hklc 'ffify pffrt. cotoH, 8 tn. c/4too. cotonnier. a.m. cotton trt-e. cotoyer, v. a. to count, to go at the ante of. con, 8 m. neck. couohe, e, part, adj lying down, in bed. coa< her, to Uig domii, to put to bed ; ee — , v.r. to lit lUfwn, U) g(» to bed. coudre, v.a u. ir. (174; Ot neuo. coaler, v.n. tojioir,, to run. conleur, s.f. color, jutcut. coup, s.m. hlfno, stroke, knock, rajt, hit, HtAtb, thrust, wound, tri;k ; — de rteche ('{O-S), arrow ; — de foudre, thu mler-xtroke ; — de fusil (308), bulUt ; — de main, sudden attack, hel/p ; — de soleil, xuu- stroke ; a — s de (308) d'uu — de (302) by, with a, with ; tout a — , tout d'un — , all of a sadden, suddenly, all at once. x)upable, adj. 8.m.f. guilty, coupe, s.f. cutting, cup couper. v.a.n. t^ cut, t. cut off oi out or up or doica, to « lip ; se -, V. r t/) cat one.^elf. couple, s.m. f. couple, brace. cour. s f . yard, court, court-yard. courage, s.m. courage, cheer. courjigeusement, adv. ourayeouHy. courageu-x, se, adj. courageoujt. cour. lilt, 8 m. Ktreani, cur rent ^ cour.He ; au — de. acquainted or ciai versa nt with; mettre au — (de). (o inform (of). conrljer, v.a.n. to bend, to bow do'wn. ciuirir. v.a.n. ir {\ii4:) to run. couronne. .s.f. crown,. cuurroie. s.f. xtrap^ bet. cDuis, s.m. ctur.se, current. course, s.f. run, race, a/ursc, career: a la — , running. court, e. adj. short. court, adv. sho.t; tout — , ^h/rt, simply ; deiiieurer or roster — , to st"p ts/t/'/'t. cousin, e, s. ni.f. cousin. couteau. s.m. (30) knife. c<)i;ter, v. n. a. to cody to be expensive. coutd. s.m. ticking. couLume, s.f. custom, habit ; comme de — , //.•« Wiuai; de — , u.s>oally ; avoir — de, to be in the habit of. convert, e, adj. covered, sheltered. couvrir, v.a. ir. (185) to cover, to hide, Uf protect ; se — , vr. to cover oneself, to grt cloudy. craiudre. v.a. ir. (175, 326, 330), to fear, to be afraid of, to dre^td. crainte, s.f. fear, dread; de — de, for fear of ; de — que. for fear^ lent. crainti-f, ve, adj timid. cra3()n, s.m. pencil, crayon., sketch. croateur, s.m. creator, maker. crcme, s. f . cr&im. crier, v.n. a. to cry, to shout, to scream, to r,aM out. to prorZaim. crime, s. in. crime, offence. crimiuel. le. adj, s. criudnai, cal.jrrit. crin, s ra. Iior.se luiir. croire. v.a.n. ir. (177) to beliece, to think. croitre, v.n. ir. (136, 178) to grow. 398 VOCABULARY. croix, 8.f. croH^, cru, e, adj. raio, crude. cruaute, s.f. cr cruche, s.f. pitchei' cniel, le. adj. cruel^ Hore. cruel) ement, adv. cruelly^ sordy, fcueillir, v. a. ir. (184) to gather^ to pick. fcuiller, cuillere, s.f. spoon; — ^ cafe, tea-spn. cuir, s.m. akin, leather. cuire. v a.n, ir. (172) to cook, to bake., to boil. cuihine, s.f. kitchen, cooking ; tuire la — , t4) cook. cuLsini-er, ere, s.m.f. cook. cuivre, s.m. cojyper, branx. culbuLer, v.a.n. to tumble head over heeU. cupidite. s.f. cufyidity. curac^-ao. s m. eanK^'oa. curieuseinent. adv. cwionsly. curieu-x, se, adj. s. curi(.un, singu- lar, curious part, inquisitice per- son. curiosite, s.f. curiosity. D. fdeigner, v.n. to deign. daim, s.m. deer, buck. damner, v. a. to damn. Danemark die). s.in. Denmark. danger, s.m. danger, fear. dans. prep. (2.)(), 2'.)7) m, into, withiu. danse, s.f. dance. daiiser. v.n. a. t/> dance. dausciu r, .se, s.m.f. dancer, partner. dard, s.m. dart, xtiug. davantage, adv. ut^e>i, defterted dosesporer. v.n. to dcsjioir. desespoir, s.iu, dexjuiir. doshaintuer, v. a. to brettk of the; Ik I hit. i deshouorer, v. a. to dishonor^ to din yntce. f designer, v. a. to dmgnnte^ topoinU out. dosir, s.m. denire, wish. ddHirer, v. a. (192) to desire, to iniffh. dcsobeissanoe, s.f. disobedience. dcsoler. v. a. fo dintre.t!* ; se — , v.r. to ijiiere. dosordre, H.in. disorder, confimon. d6sorni!iis. adv. heiicef(rri}i. desquel!es | con traction of de les- qmillesj. dessquels [contraction of de les- qiiels]. dcBsein, s.m. d^myn, intention, j)l(fn. pvrpone ; a — , 07i jiurpose ; a — de. in order to ; avoir — or le — de, io intend. deHsert. s in. desert. desservir. v.n a. ir (^188) to take atcai/, to re/nme the cl^-th. des.-in, 8.m. dra>rin(/. pattern. dessiner, v. a. to draw, to .sketch. deBsous. adv. prep, under, below ; an — , under, below ; de — , from. under ; par — , nnder. dessous, s.m., under part, bottom, inrong dde. dessus, adv. i)rep. on, upon, over, above, uppermost ; par — , upon, bejfidej(. dessus, 8. m. v]yper part. destiner, v. a. to dextine, to intend. Ictycher. v. a. to detach, to untie. ^detail, s.m. detail, particular. doteindre, v. a. ir. (175) to takeout the odf/r (f; — v.n. to lose its dye or color, to fade. d. tenir, v. a. ir. (187) to detain., to withhold. determiner, v. a. to determine, to settle ; se — , v.r. to resolve. detoster, v. a. to det'St. tft hate. dotour, s.m. winding, rerundahoui way. drtourner, v. a. to tnrn aside, to dissuade. dotresse, s.f. distress. dctroit, s.m. strait. d6trnire, v. a. ir. (172) to destroy, to ruin. detfce. s.f. debt. deux, adj. s.m. two. both; tons lea — , botJt, every other. deuxieme, adj. sm.f. second. deuxiemeraent, adv. secondly. devant. prep. adv. (298) before, in front of, before them. devant, s.m. forepart, front ; aller or venir au- — de, to ^ piit off. ^ i dittio.le, ;uij. ilijfirnlt, liard^ hard to \ j'U-.itse, pnrtiddar. '■ ditKc; lenient, adv. irilh di^U'iilty. \ dilli«;ulthtiinie. t.- Un 'c off. di.sconvenii. v.u. ir. (187. 2S);i) tn diHDiru. tit deny. disconrii*. v.u. ir. (lS4i to ilu dixtiugt ish onene^'. dJRtraire, v.a. ir. (174) to awert^ to ohxtroct. distrait, e, adj. inattentive, absent. di.stribner. v.a. to dixtribute. dit e, adj. Slid, socalUd. divers, e. adj. different, several. divertir. v.a. to amuse, to divert divijiito, s.f. divinity, deity. diviser. v a. to divide, to part. di.x.. adj. s.ra. ten, tenth. dix huit, adj. s.in. eighteen. dix-huitiume. adj. eighteenth, dixionie. adj. s.m. tenth, dix-neuf, adj. s.m. nineteen. d:x-neuviome, adj. nineteenth. dix-sept, adj. s.ra. seventeen,. diA-septieme, adj. seventeenth. dizaine, s.f. ten. doeilH, adj. docile, manageable. dominant, e, adj. ruling^ prevail- ing. doni ucr, v.a.n. to rule., to get over^ t(t fredominate. domniage, s.m. damage, injury^ wroug ; c'est — , it is a pity. doiupter. v a. ^ subdvc^ to tame. don. s.m. gift, jrresent. done, couj. (1G4) then, therefore^ accordingly, so, do, now, con- xequfntly. donner, v.a.n (88) to give, to grant y to eavse, to make, to look., to open ; " (idioms, 382). dont, pron. (12(>, 268) w?u?se, of wlu/m, from whom, of which, from which, with or by wlu/m, with or by which, in which, wfiom^ which. dorenavant, adv. Iienceforth. dorer, v.a. to gild. dormant, e, adj. sleeping, stagnant, dull. dorniir, v.n. ir. (183) to sleej)^ to h4 asleep. dos, s.m. back, bridge. dose, s.f. doxe. portUm. dot s.f. dfncry, poi'tion double, s.m. adj. double, d-eceitfvl. doubler. v.a. to double, to line. doiiceraent, adv. sweetly, noflly^ gently 402 VOCABULARY. douceur, s.f. sweetness^ gentleness ; — s, pi. sweet things. douer, v. a. to e}id the right. du. art. m. [contraction of de le, art. (34, 39)]. du, due, part, of devoir, adj. due, owing, &c. due, s m. duke. duchesse, s.f. duchess, couch. duquel | contraction of de lequel] . dur, e, adj. hnrd, firm, tough, rough, sharp. duree, s.f. duration. durement, adv. liard, harshly. durer, v.n. to Uist. durete, s.f. hardness, harshness. duvet, s.m. down, featJier-btd. E. eau s. f . (30) water ; — x, pi. water- ing-place. 6chaj)])er, v.n. (136) to escape, to get out ; s'— , v.r. to escape. ^chauffer, v. a. to heat to warm; s'— , v.r. to get warm, to get re- cited. 6choir, v.n. ir. (136, 189) to fall. eclair, s. m. lightning, fash ; f aire des — 8, to lighten. eclaircir, v. a. to clear, to clear up. eclairer, v. a. to light, to enUg/iten^ to thrmo a light upon ; v.n. to give light. eclat, s.m. loud sound or noise^ flash, scandtd. eclatant, e, adj. bright, bnlliant^ splendid, blooming, glorious. eclater, v.n. to shiver, to break out ; — de rire, Uf hurst out laughing. eclore, v.n. ir. (135, 198) to hatch, to open. ^cole, s.f. sclwol, college. ecoli-er, ere, s. m.f. pupil, student. economic, 8.f. economy, saving, sys- tem. ecorce, s.f. bark, rind. Gcossais, e, adj. s. Scotch, Scotch- man, Scotchwoman. ^cosse (1'), s.f. Scathmd. ecouler (s'), v.r. to elapse, to pass. ecouter, v. a. to linten, to mind. ecraser, v. a. to crush, to acerwhdm. ecrevisse, s.f. crab. eerier (s'), v.r. to cry out, to ex- claim. ecrire, v. a. ir. (175) to write; s' — , v.r. to wHte to each other ; to be spelt. ^crit, s.m. writing, written agree- ment; par — , in writing. 6criture, s.f. writing^ handwriting. ecrivain, s.m. imiter, author. ecrouler (s'), v.r. to fall in or down. focueil, s.m. rock, reef, sand-bank, danger. 6cumant, e, adj. foaming. ecumer, v.n. to foam ; v. a. to skim. edifice, s.m. edifice, structure. education, s.f. education, training^ breeding, effacer, v. a. to efface, to era.se, to blot out. effet, s.m. effect, intent, show, bill ; — 8, pi. eff'ects^ things, luggage ; A OCABULARY. 403 h cet — , for thift purpose ; h V — | de, in m'ckr to ; en — , iti reality^ j indeed. effile, e, adj. slender, tapering. \ eftorcer (s')^ v.r. to exert oneself, to e/ia&ivor, to tri/. effort, s.m. exertion, endeavor effrayer, v. a. (97) to fricjhten, scare.* 6gal. e, adj. s. equal, even, level, re- gular. ^galement, adv. equally, alike, also, likeirise. 6gard. s.m. regard, respect, a4i'/)vnt; a cet — , in tlm or that resj)ecf ; a r — de, regarding, with regard to, as for; a mon — , ((/wards me. ^gare, e, adj. atniy, Umt. egarer, v. a. to mislead, to disorder ; s' — , v.r. to l«)se one's way. egayei, v. a. to fidicen, toc/ieerup. egiisc, p.f. c/it/rch. elancer. v.n to sfujot ; b' — , v.r. to rux/i, to .-^jirifig. ^lecteur, s.m. ele^^tor. elephant, s.m. elejthont. elevo, e, adj. part, rained, high, ele- vated, bred. elever, v. a. to raise, to build, to bring up, to rear, to elevate. elire, v. a. ir. (177) to elect,to cJioose. Elise, 8.f. Eliza. elle. pron. (110, 114, 258) she, her, it; — 8, pi. they, them; — -m<"'me, herself, itself ; — s-memes, Viem- selces. elegance, s.f. elegance. f oloigne. e, part. adj. distant. {eloigner, v. a. to remove; s' — , v.r. to go away, to leave. eloquerament, adv. eloquently. eloquence, 8.f. eloquence. embarras, s.m. encumbrance, em- barr((ssment, confusion, difficulty, scrape. embellir. v.n. s' — , v.r. to improve, to jrorp /uindsome. emblem*!. 8 ra. emblem, embras.scr, v. a to eiibracs. to hug, *o hiss. femen^H. s.f. riot. einmuuer, v. a. to take away. emoudre, v. a. ir. (175) to grind. emouvoir, v. a. ir. (11)0) tx) move, to agitate^ to stir up, to rouse, to affect ; s' — , v.r. to be moced or agitated, &c. emparer (s'), v.r. to seize, to takt j)ossejfsion, to take up, emp'cher, v. a. (2i)4) to prevent, to hinder. emperenr, s.m. emperor. empire, 8.m. empire. empirer, v. a. (iJiO) to make worse. emploi, s.m. use, employment. employer, v. a. (97) to emptloy, to use ; s' — , v.r. to apply oneself. emporter, v. a. to carry away, to bUyw off, to take ; s' — , v.r. to fly into a passion, empresser (s'), v.r. to be eager ^ to hasten. enipi-unter, v. a. to boii'ow. emu. e, adj. moved, affected, agi- tated. en, prep. (236, 297) in, into, to^ in, trith, by, at, for. en, pron. m *f . (114. 120, 194, 241, 258) of him, of hei; of it, its, of them, theirs, fnmi him, from her, from it, from them, from tJiere, by him, for ity on that account, with them ; c' — est or — voila assez, trop, it or that is enough^ too much. en-cas, s.m. sun-shade. enchanter, v. a. to enchant, bewitch, encombre, s.m. hindrance. encombrer, v. a. to obstruct, to en- climber. encore, adv. conj. still, yet, as yet, again, also, too, more, stiU inore, another. encourager, v. a. to encoder age, to incite. encourir, v. a. ir. (184) to incur. en ere, s.f. ink. encrier, s m. inkstayid. endormi, e, adj. adeep. endormir, v. a. ir. (18:^) to send to sleep ; s' — , v. r. to fUl asleep, to go p> sleep. endioit, s.m. place, part. 404 VOCABULARY. enduire. v. a. ir. (172) to lay over, to pl/iffter. endurcir, v. a. to harden, to inure. enfant, s.m.f. child, infant. enfer, a.m. 7ieU. enferraer, v. a. to shut, to shut up or i>i. entin, adv. lastly, in sliort, at last, at length. en f oncer, v. a, to sink, to thrust, to stick, to drive in. eiifreindre, v. a. ir. (175) to infringe. enfuir (s), v.r. ir. (183) to flee, to ran away, to fly. engager, v. a. to pledge, to engage, to induce; s' — , v.r. to pledge, &c., oneself. enhardir, v. a, to embolden. enivrer. v. a. to intoxicttte. enjoindre, v. a. ir. (175) to enjoin. *^nlever. v. a. to lift, to raite. to take nicay. to remone, to take or carry aioay or off. ennemi. e, s.m.f. enemy. ennerai, e, adj. hoxtile. of the enemy. ennui, s.m. tedhasness, weariness, d'/lr^esM. fenorj-ueillir, v. a. to make proud. enonne, adj. enormons. huge. dnorinement. adv. enornioudy. enquarir (s'), v.r. ir. (188) to in- quire, to link. enrage, e. adj. rnad. enraged. enrager, v.n. to be mad or enraged. enrharaer is'), v.r. to catch cold. enrichir, v. a. to enrich; s' — , v.r. to get rich. •{•enseigne, 8.m. ensign. fenseigne, s.f. sign, sign-board; — s, pi. cohrs. fenseigner. v.a, ^ teach, instruct. ensemble, adv. together, at the same tifue. ensalte, adv. after, afterwards. thfit. next. ensuivre is'), v.r. ir. (174) to folk>w, to eiixae. entendre, v. a to hear. ^/ listen to. to uiider>iiiih,d ; din-;, to henir it Haid ; faire --. to i/ire to ander- atoiid ; s' -, v.r. ti> hear each «tlier, to understand, to come to or U) have an understanding ; s'entend, or cela s'entend, that i% understood, of coiir.se. entendu, e, part. adj. heard, binder- sPjod. agreed ; bien — , of crn. cj)ingle, s.f. 'pia. cpocpie, s.f. epoch, era, time. epouse, 8.f. s]}oii.te, wife. fepouvautail, s.m. Kcurecroio. e]^ouvant«r. v a. to friyhte/i. epoux, s.m h'tMhiiud, /fpome ; — , pi. hiiitbaud nt. mind, in- teilrct. braiim ; — fort, frte- thin ker, neeptic ; bel — , mit ; homme d' — . witty or clever vuiu. esquiver (s'^ v.r. U> xteal awity. p'*'^ai, 8.m. triid, titte/npt. bfsn liin, s.m. swarm. etinnyeif v.a.n. to try, to try on, to attempt ; s' — , v r. to ti'y one^i hand or skill or strength. essentiel, le, adj. essential. easuie-maius, 8.m. towd. essuyer, v.a. (97) to wipe, to wipe of. estimer, v.a. to value, to esteem. estomac, s.m. stomach. et. couj. a/id ; — . . . et, both . . . and. 6tablir, v.a, to establish, to lap d(npn, to set up. dtablissement, s.m. establishment. ctage, s.m. story, floor, flat. etat. 8.m. state, condition, predica- ment, calling, trade ; en — de» in a couditUm or able to; hors d' — , untible; faire — de, f/> value; mettre-eu — de, to enable to. Etats-Unis (les), pi. tlie United States. t'to 8.m. Hammer. eteindre, v.a. ir. {170} to extinguish, to put out. etendre. v.a. to extend, to stretch; s' — , V. r. to lie doiPn. etendu, e, adj. extennice, lying down. oternel. le, adj. eternal, crerlasting. etotfe. s.f. xtujf, materials. etoile. s.f. tttar. etonn6, e, adj. lutonished. etonnement, s.m. astonishment^ wonder. ctonaer, v.a. to astonuh: s' — , v.r. to be astonished, to wonder. dtoiiffer, v.a. to suffocate, to stifle^ to smother, to choke. 6traugler, v.a.n. P^ strangle. etre, v.n. (54, 58) to be, to exist, to ?uioe, to belong ; ce qui en est, aU about it; m' eat que, it is or was because, the fact w / ce n'est pas que, not th'it; comme side rien n'otait. as if nothing had happened ; en — de . . . c-omrae de. pj be with . . . a.s iQith ; esb-ce que, \^^^) is it {true or a factt Umt ; il e.st. there in, there are; n'est-tso pjisV is it not (Hit) ? y — , to luivi hit it. to see it ; (idioms, 38J' itre, .-.m. being. 406 VOCABULARY. etroit, e, adj. narrow^ straight^ tight. etude, s.f. study ; salle d' — , school- roo7n. eiudiant, s,m. student. eludier, v.a.n. to study, to practise; s' — , v.r. to etideaTor. eux, pron. m.pl. {\U)) they, them; — mt'mes, themaelve^'i. f cveiller, v. a. to awake, to awaken, to I'ouae. evenement, s.m. ment. fcventail, s.m. (31)/c7W-. evertuer (s'), v.r, to ntrive, to exert onenelf. tviter, v.a. to avoid, to shun . exact, e, adj. exacts nccurate. examiner, v.a. to examine, look at. excellent, e, adj. exoeUeni. exceller, v. n. to excel, to surpass. fxcepti'. prep, exceft, xare. exciter, v a. ta excte, to roune. excuser, v.a. to e.rcvHe. U> apologize for ; s' — , v.r. to excuse o'lte^^e'f^ to apologize, to beg to be excuHnl. executer. v.a. to execute, to carry out, to perform. execntion, s.f. execution. exempie, s.m. example, copy ; par — . fo7' instance, indeed. exempt, e, adj. exempt, free. exempter, v.a t^} exempt. exercer, v.a. to exercise, to practise, to drill. exercice, s.m. exercise, practice; faire 1' — , to drill. exhaler, v.a. to exhale, to breathe out ; s' — , v.r. to coine out, (872) take flight. exhorter, v.a, to exhort. exhumer, v.a. to exhvme, to disinter. exigeant, e, adj. too difficult to please, too particular, expecting too much, exacting. exiger, v. a. to require, to demand, to exact. exil, s.m. eaile. exiler, v.a. t(* exile, to banish. existence, s. f. existence. exister, v.n. to ea-ist. to be. to lire. expier, v.a. to expiate, to atone for. exposer, v.a. to expose, to exhibit, to explain. expros, se, adj. s.m. express. expres, adv. purposely, on purpose. expressement, adv. expressly. exqiiis, e, adj. exguinte. extraire, v.a. ir. (174) to ext/ract, to .select. extraordinaire, adj, extraordinary, unc^yintnon. extraordinaire, s.m, extraordinary or unusuid thing. extremement, adv. extremely. extremite, s.f. extremity ; a 1' — ,to extremity, to the last mo7nent F. Fable, s.t. fable, story. fac^ade, s.t front, face. fuche. e, adj. ( — centre) angr^ {with) ; ( — de, en) sorry (for, for it). facher, v.a. to make angry ^ to offend, to vex ; se — , v.r. to get or to be angry, to take offence. fdcheu-x, se, adj. grievous, sad, troublesome, unpleasant, vexa- tious. facheuy. s.m. intruder, bare. facile, adj. easy. facilement, adv. easily. facilite, s.f. ease, facility. fayon, s.f. workmanship, fashion, shape, manner, way, cet'emony, fuss. faible, adj. weak, feeble. faible, s.m, weak side, weakness. faiblesse, s.f. weakness. ffaillir, v.n. ir. (198) to err, to be nmtaken,, to fail, to be near or on the point of. faim, s.f. hanger ; avoir — , to bt hungry. faire, v.u.n. ir. (180) to make, P) d/>, to go. on, to be, to a^k, to give, to VOCABULARY. 407 play, to act, to cause, to get, to Jidve, to pay ; avoir a — de, ^ wanU to haoe occasion for ; — dire, to send word; il fait chaud, doux, froid, jour, it is warm or hot, mild, cold, daylight; cela fait du bien, tJmt does (one) good; cela ne fait rien, that makes no difference, neoer mind ; ne — que (304) -to do nothing but; ne — que de (sortir, &c.) to Jmve or be bat juxt [gone oat. icta.hle, proper ; s'en — , v.r. to be ntar; j)eu s'en faut, tiery near, very lu'urly. fameu-x, se, B.d'] . f ambits , first-rate. ffamille, s.f. family. faon, s.m. fawn. fardeau, e.m. burden, load, wdght. farine, a.f. Jtour. fat, adj. B.m. (25) foppish, fop. fatal, e, adj. fatal. fatigue, B.t. fatigue, we/irine^s. toil. f atiguer, v. a. to fatigue, to tire, to wear out, to worry; se — , v.r. to get tired. faute, s.f. fault, error, mistake; — de, for want of. ffauteuil. s.m, easy -chair. faux, Bse, adj. fase, deceitful, f urged, out of tune. faux, adv. fdxely, wrong. favoris^r, v. a. tofavoi'. fxicopd, e, i}/!]. fruitful, teeming. fccondfjr, v. a. to fecundute, fertilize feindre, »a.n. ir. (175) to feign, to pretend. foiiciter. v. a. to congratulate, f emolle, s. f . {idj. female. femme, s.f. woman, wife; — de chambre, lady's-maid. fendre. v.a.n. to cleave, to split. feuotre, s.f. window, fer, s.m. iron., sword; — s, pi. chains, fetters ; fil de — , wire. fer-blanc, s.m. tin. * forir, v.a. ir. (198), sans coup — , 'witlout striking a blow. ferrae, adj.. /i>//i, steady, strong. ferme, adv. fa^t, /lard, firmly. ! fermer, v.a.n. to. shut, to close, to I fasten, to spyp. I fermete, s. f. firmness. '. feroce, adj. ferocious, wild. I f orocitc, s. f . ferocity. fertile, adj. fertile, fruitful. fertilito, s.f fertility, fruitfulness. fe«l,on, B \n. fextoon, scdlo^p. f(jtc. R.f. feast, holiday, birthday, I saints' day ; jour de — , holiday. f "te-diea, s.f. Corpus Christi. feu, s.m. (?}()) fire, light; au — ! i fire ! faire du — , to make afire. feu, e, adj. ('247) late, decdised. ffenille. s.f. leaf, sheet. i feve, s.f. bean. Fevrier, s.m. February. fid'le, adj. fadthfal, true. fidelement, adv. faithfuUy. fidclit'-, s.t fidelity, loyalty. fier (se). v.r. to trust, to rely. fievre, s.f. fever. figurer, v.a. to figure; v.n. to match, to make a figure ; se — , v.r. to imagine, to fancy. fil. s.m. threiui, yarn. filer, v.a. to spin. ffille, s.f. girl, daughter ; petite — , granddaughter. fils, 8. m. son, boy ; petit , grand- son. fin, s. f . end, close, aim ; h, la — , at last. fin, e, adj. fine, thin, refined, excel.' lent, keen, shrewd, sly; — es herbes, sweet herbs. 408 VOCABULARY. Bui. e, adj. finished, d&ne, over. finir, v.a.n. (100) to finisli^ to end, to hate dime. fixe, adj. fixed, firm, steady. fixer, v.a. to fix. to stare at. flannne, s.L flame. flatter, v.a. to fi.itter, to caress; se — , v.r. to flatter oneself , trust. fldtterie, s.f. flattery. flatteu-r, se, adj. s. flattering., flat- terer. fleche, s.f. arrow. flegme, s.m. pUegm. fljtrir, v.a. to wither. fleur, 8 t. flower, blossom, bloom. tieuri, e, adj. florid, in hloftaom. Jlenrir, v.n. to flower, to blossom. lieuve, s. m. (great) river, stream. florin, s.m. florin. florir, v.a. (102) to flourish. flot, a. m. 'wave, tide, fi/ood, torrent. flute, s.f, flute. foi, s.f. faith, belief, trii-nt, creed ; ajouter — a, to give credit to, to believe. foin, s.m. hay. fois, s.f. time; une — , once, once upon a time ; deux — , twice ; a la — , tout a la — , at a time, at the same time. fol, le, adj. V. fou. follement, adv. madly, foolishly. fonco, e, adj dm-k, deep. fond, s.m. bottom, depth, farthest end or part, background ; a — , thoroughly ; au — , dans le — , on the whole, in one?s heart. fondement, s.m. foundation. fonder, v.a. to lay the foundation of , to found. fondre, v.a.n. to melt, to cast. fontaine, s f . fomitairt,, spring. force, s.f, .streagth, might, power, frrce. energy ; — s, pi. strength, troojis ; a — de. by .strength of, by 7nuch, by many, by dint of. forcer, v.a. to farce, to compel. forot, s.f. fm-est. forger, v.a. to forge. forme, s.f. shape, figure, manner, former, v.a. tQfu, fol, m. folle, f. adj. mad, fool- ish. fou, 8,m'., folle, s.f. madman, mad- woman. fourcbette, 8.f. fork; dejeuner a la — , lunch. fourmi, s.f. ant. ffourmiller, v.n. to swarm, tobefvR. fournil, s.m. bake-house. fouruir, v.a. to furnUh, to supply. f ourrure, s. f . fur. fracas, s.m. crash, uproar, din^ noi' cross. Francois, s.m. Francis. f rapper, v. an. to strike, to knacky to rap, to imprej obtain. gai, e. adj. gay, lively, c/ieerful, merry. gaiete, sf. gaiety, mirth. gant, s.ra. gl>/c€, gauntlet. garantie, s f. guarantee^ security. garautir, v. a. to gimraatee, lo mar- rant. gar<,on, s-m. Ixpy, f>fic/wU/r, waiter. garde, s f. guard, icatGli ; n'avoir — de, to be far from ; prendre — , (291 J to take. aire, he careful. garde, s.m. guard, kee^^er, watch- man; — -fous, s.m. rail. garder. v. a. to keejt. to guw d; se — , v.r. to shelter oaeaelf, to beware, to take care not to. ganiir, v. a. to furninh, to trim. gamison, 8.f. garri.'ion. g teau, s.m. cake. g ter, v.a to ^oil, to corrupt. gauche, adj. left. gauche, s.f. left hand, left (tide, left; h — , on or to the left. g'^ler, v.a.n. to freeze. gemir, v.n, to yrtMin., to lament. gfcmissement, s.m. groan, lamenta- titja. 4fene, s-f. inconvenience, const/raint; s&ns — , free, eatty. 18 gt'ncr, v.a. to inconvenience, to trouble, to be in the way of ; so — , v.r. to HtAind on ceremony. general, e, adj. general. genereusement, adv. generously^ nobly genereu-x. se. adj. generous. G.nes, s.f. Genoa. Geneve, s.f. Geneva. gt'uie, s.m. genius^ spirit. genou, 8. m. knee ; — x, pi. knees^ Itip. genre, s.m. kind, sort, style, gender. gens, s.m. pi. f. (207) people^ per* HotM, men. servants. gentil, le, adj. nice, pretty. gcographie, s f . geogra/phy. gosir, v.n. ir. def. (198). V. git, geste, e.m. gesture, gibet, 8.m. gaUoics. gibier, s.m. game. g.t (19>), lien ; ci , here lies, glace, s.f. ice, looking -glaSs. glace, e. adj. frozen, icy. glapiHsant, e, adj. i220) shriU. gliaser, v.n.a. to dip, to slide. gloire, s.f. gl(^ry. glorieu x, se. adj. s. glorious, proud. glorifier, v.a. to glorify ; ae — , v.r. t he obliged, or tluinkful or grafeful for, to take kindly; savoir mauvais — de, to take ill or unkindly ; se savoir bon — de, to be pleased. Grec, que. adj. s Grecinn, Greek. Groce (la), s.f. Greece. gr ler, v.n. to hail. gril, 8.ni. gridiron. fj^rriller, v.a.n. tt^ broil,, to tonM. griraper, v.n a. to climb, to creep. fgrogner. v.n. to grunt, to g ramble. gronder, v.a.n. ttf grnndde, to .scold. gro.s. ae, adj. big, large. gros, adv. much ; en — , wlMlesale. fgro.seille, s.f. currant, gooseberry. gross- ier, lire, adj. coarse, rough. grotte, s.f. grotto, grot. groupe, s.m. group. guore, adv. (57) (ne . . . — ) jhot much, ftot very, nothng, hat little, hardly. giierir. v.a.n. to cure, to heal, t^o re- guorisoa, s.f. cure, recovery . [cover. gu^'rre. s.f. war. warfare. gui'l<'.. s m. t guide, rein. gnider. v. a. t> guide, to direct. ^Gu.Uriume. « in. WUliain. i>«iiu»;e, !* i. gai.nece. 'hameau, s.m. hamlet. •hanche, s f. hip. 'hangar, s.m. shed. 'hanneton, s.m. cockchafer. 'Ilanovre (le). s.m. Hanover. 'hauter, v. a to frequent. 'harangue, s.f. speech, address. 'haranguer, v. a. to harangue, bo addre^ss. 'haras, s.m. breeding-stud. 'harasser, v. a. to harass. 'harceler, v. a. to harass. 'harde, s.f. herd, leash. 'hardes, s.f. pi. cMhes. 'hardi, e, adj. bold, d nuike huste. 'hausser, v.a. to raij, xummit^ de — en bji8, (ltnrnw. 'horisso. e. aiur; tout a 1'- -, prexently, hy on.d hy. acur»Mi8«'meut, adv. fortaiuhidy. 1 heureu-x, se. adj. hajrpy. I 'heurter, v.a.n, to ML I *hibou. s.m irm. 'hideu-x. se, adj. hideous. bier, adv ycsterfbiy. ■^ •liicrarchie. s.f. hierarchy. ) 'hissei-. v.a. t<> hoi,st. , histoire, s.f. history, tftf/ry. historicn. 8.m historian. hiver. 8.m ic inter. 'Hollande (la), s. f. Holland. •honiard, s.m. lobster. honiniiige. a.m. homage. bomnie, s.m. )na.n. h()n)i"to. adj. hoiteM. m/tdcM, cioiL honneur. s.m. /u^nor, rejfjtect. honorer, v.a. tf* honor; s' — , v.r. to (fo oneself ho/tor. U/ jtride onemif. •honte. 8.f. nhinne; avoir — , Ut be ashamed. "bouten X. se. adj. shameful, dis- gni rtfiil . ashain i;d. 'bonle. 8 f horde. horioge, s.f. diH'.k. horloger. H.m. matrh-maker, dock' maker. hormi.'*, adv. ejxq^i, but, mne. horreur. H.f. horror, fright. horrible nient, adv. hjtrribly. 'hors. prep (21/".)) oiil . heyuud, patit^ ititay. o^f\ besidiK eoriu-pt. sace. h'te, s.m. landlord, host. hCitel. a. in. ludel, town-mansion, hou^e. 'hotte, s.f, basket. •boublon. a;m. htyjys. f •houille. 8.f. C(^al. 'houlctte, a.f. tn^wel. 'houp}»e. a. f. tuft. 'housse. s.f. corer. 'b(mx, a.m. holly. •huche, s.f. kneading-trough. *huer. v.n. a. to hoot. huile, s.f. oil. hnia, a.m. h. — clos. with doMd d>orH. huit. adj. a.m. eight; — jours, {fi) aicek. buitaiiie. a.f. ^ght days, eight. buiticnie, adj. s.m. eighth. buitr«, ».f. oyster. 412 VOCABULARY. humanii^, s.f. hnmamtp. humblement, adv. humbly. burner, v. a. to .mck in. humeur. s.f, Jmmor, temj)er. humide, adj. damj)y 7noist, wet, watery. *huppe, s.f. crest. 'hure, s.f. head. 'hurler, v.n. to /i/)wl. 'hussard, s.m. husmr. 'hutte, 8.f. hvt, .shed. hydrogene, s.m. hydrogen. ici, adv. here^ hither^ now ; d' — , JiCfice. id4e, s.f. ide(f, thoiight, mind. igiiorance, R.f. ig/iannice. il, (.ron. m. (78, 114) he, it, there; -8, pi. they. lie. R.f. Mnnd, ide. illisible, adj. illegible. illustre, adj. iUv.sfri disagree with. inc(mcevable, adj. inconceivable, xtrange. inconnu. e, adj s. unknown. stranger, inconstant, e. adj. inconstant, Jickle. incroyable, adj. incredible. Iiide, s f, hidia ; — s, pi. Indie.s. inrlccis. e. adj. nnd(cidfd. doubtful. indeinuiser. v. a. to indemnify. indcpendamment, adv. inde])endent' ly. indifF rent, e, adj. indifferent, im- materiid. indigence, s.f. want, poverty. findigne, adj. unworthy, undeserv- ing, worthlejis. tindigner, v. a. to make indignant ; s' — , v.r. to be indignant. indiquer. v. a. to indicate, to show., to point out. indubitable, adj. beyond doubt. induire, v. a. to induce, to lead, t4 ^ infer. industrie, s.f. skill, industry. inexpugnable, adj. impregnable. inf. i me, adj. infanums. infamie, s.f. infamy. informe, adj. shapeleM. ingerer (s' ) v. r. to in termeddle {with) ingrat. e, adj. ungrateful. inhabile, c. adj. unskilful, inhumain. e, adj inhuman, cruel. initier, v. a. to initiate. injuste, adj. unjust. injustice, s.f. injustice. innocent, e, adj. innocent. dmpU. inoui', e, adj. unheard of. VOCABULARY. 413 inserire, v.a. ir. (176) to inscribe^ to enter. insecte, s.m, insect, inseusible, .adj. imennible^ uncon- scioas, uufeeling. inspirer, v.a. to inspire, instant, s.m. i/iMfint, moment; a I' — , ifiMnnfli/, imme.di teach ; s' — , v, r. io instruct or im- prore one-self. Instruit, e, adj. well-informed.^ learned. insu (a 1' — de), prep, inikiunon to. insulte, s.f. inMult, affront. insiilter, v.a. to i>iJhL laisser, v. a. to let alone, to allou), to let. to let go ; (352) to cease, to ab- stain ; laisser faite, to lei alone^ not to disturb; se — , v.r. to let or sujfer onese'f. lait, s.m. milk. lampe, s.f. lamp. lance, s.f. lance, spear langxie,s.f. tongue language, (geog.) neck. lapin. am rabbit. laquelle, proa. f. V. lequel. larcin. s.m. birceny. theft. las, se, adj. tired, weary. laver, v. a. t) Ag, him., her, it., to or at or for or with or in or from him, etc., itself; memo, himself, itself. luire, v.n. ir. (171) to shine, gleam. lumiore, s.f. lighty knowledge, in* formation. lundi, s.m. Monday. lune. s.f. moon. lunettes, s.f. pi. spectades. luxe, s.m. luxury; objets de — , fancy goods. Lycurgue, s.m. Lycurgus. Lyons, s. Lyons. M, ma, adj. poss. f. V. men. machine, s.f. machine, engine. machoire, s.f. jaw. raadame, s.f. Madam, Mrs., this or the lady ; — votre mere, yov/T' mother. mademoiselle, s.f. Miss, the young lady ; — votre soeur, your sister. magasin, s.m. W((rehifuse, store. msigi.ster, s.m. (24) country school' nut^ter. magistrat, s.m. magistrate. fniagnitique, adj. magnificent. mahomctan, e. adj. s. MaJu»netan. mai, am. M<(y. raaigre, adj. lean, meagre, thin. main, s.f. hand, quire; k la — , hindy, in hand; en venir aux — 8, t)) ; a — de, for lesn titan., ■uide.^H. except in case of ; a — que (202) ■iirdeKH ; au — , at least, at all events ; du — , at least ; le — , the leant. mois, s.m. month. Moi«e. s.m. Moses. moisson, s.f. harvest, reaping. moitii-!, s.f. h(df ; a — , Jiatf ; ctre de — , to go halves. mol. le. V. mou. mollement, adv. softly. mon, ma, pi. mes, adj. poss. (64, 239) my, 7ny own. monarchie, s.f. monarchy. monarque, s.m. monarch. monde, s.m. world, men, people, so- ciety, company ; du — , of or in the world, fashionable ; le beau — , fashionable peo^ile or society ; beaucoup de — , many men or pexyj)le ; peii de — , few people ; tout le — , ereryhody. monuaie. s.f. coin, moriey. monosyllabe. adj. s.m. monosyllabic, monimjllahle. monsieur, s.m. gentleman, this or the gentleman. Sir, Mr., Esq , Master ; — votre pore, your father. mont, s.m. mount, mountain. fmontagne. s.f. mountain. moriter, v.n.a. (1-J6) to ascend, to go or come up, to get up or in. montre, s. f. icatch ; — a repetition, repeating icatch. moutrer, v. a. to show, to point out, to let see, to teach. mo(iuer (se), v.r. to laugh (at) to nuike game of.^ to mock, to joke morceau, s.m. piece, bit, moi gel. mordre. v.a.n. to bite. mort, s.f. death. mort, e, adj. s. dead ; ctre — ^ (pers.) to be dead, to have died. mortel, le, adj. s. mortal, deadly. mot, s.m. word, xaying, motto; — a — , word for loord, literal trans- lation ; bon — , smart or witty Haying. motif, s.m. motioe, reason, cause. mou, mol, m., moUe, f. adj. soft^ vcumche, H.f. Jly. [?neUow. mouchetles. s.f. pi. snujfers. moudre, v. a. ir. (174. to grind. fmouiller, v.a.n. to wet, to water, to noak) to^a.Ht) anchor ; se — , v.r. io get wet. monlin, s.m. mill ; — a vent, wind- mill ; — a poudre, powder-mill. mou rant, e, adj dying. raourir. v.n. ir. (KJo, 186) to die, (H45) to long ; se — , v.r. to be dying, to be dying out. mousse, s.m. cabin-boy. mousse, s.f. m/ws. froth, lathe^ moiitarde, s.f. mustard. mouton. s.m. sheep, mutton. mouvement. s m. irmtu/n, movement. mouvoir, v. a. ir. (100) txj move, to stir, to prompt. moyen, s.m meams, way, medium ; — s, pi. abilities. muet, te. adj dumb, mute. rauct, te, s. ru.f. dumb person. mule, s.f. she-mule., mulet, s.m. male. muuir, v. a. to supply^ tn provide. munition, s.f. ammunition, stores. liMur, s m. iritll. mur, e, adj. ripe, mature. fmuraille, s.f. ivall. murier, s.m. mulberry-tree. murir, v.a.n. to ripen. murmure, s.m. murmuT, gruir^ bllng', whisper. murmurer, v.a.n. to murmur, t4 grumble. musicien. ne, s.m.f. musician. musique, s.f. music, band. matiuerie, s.f. mutiny, sedition VOCABULARY. 419 N. nacelle, s.f. hont, nacr«. s.f. inother-of-petirL uager, v.u. t«f sioim. nay:uore, adv. but lately. naiu. e. 8.m.f. adj. dwarf. naiasance. 8.f. birth., descent, ex- tracthit. na tre. v.n. ir, (135, 181) ^> *e born. narval, am. (214) udnchd. natuie, s f . not 'ire, kind. uatiirel. le, adj. natural, native, plain. natnrellemeiit, adv. nataraUy, of c^nu'i^e. navet, a.m. tnrnij)^ roat. navij^er, v.u. U) narigate., to sail. navire, s.m. .s/iip, vcMHci. ne, n', adv. (57 ; with conj. 58, 151) ; syntax, 28S) ; used alone, 291 ; not as negative, 293) not ; — pas or point, not ; — ... que, (57) o)dy, but. no, e, part, borny by birth. neanmoins, adv. nevertheless, how- eoer. neant, s.m. nothing^ nothingness, necessite, 8.f. necessity, need. negliger, v. a. to neglect. negociant, s.ra. merchant. negre, s.m. negro. nC^resse. s.f. negress. neige, s.f. snom. neifirer, v.n. (140) to snow. nerf, s.m. neroe. Noron. s.m. Nero. uet, te. adj. dean, neat., plain. not. adv. entirely, clean., frankly. nettoyer, v. a. to clean, to scour, t/) inive. neuf, adj s. nine. ueu-f, ve. adj. nem, fresh; a — , adv. anew, again. neuvicme, adj. s.m. ninth. neveu, s.m. ne])hew. nez. H.m. nose. ni, couj. (57, 58, 163) neitheVj nor, or. uid. H.m. ne^st. niece, s.f. niece. nier, v.a. (29") tod^ny to disijw/i. noblesse, s. f. nobility. Noel, s.m. Christmas. noir, e, adj. black. noix, s.f. wamut, nut. notu, 8. m. Mime. noun. fame. nombre, 8.m. number, quantity. nombreu-x, se, adj. numerous, many. nomuier, v.a. to name., to call, to noniin.iite. non. adv. (289) no, not ; — pas, nM, no, not so ; — plus, neither, either, on the other hand ; que — , no. nnt, nonohalamment. adv. carelessly. uonobfstant, piep. notwithstanding. uord. s.m. north. nos, adj poss. pi m.f. ((J4, 239) our^ our own. note, s.f. /wte, mark. bill. notre, adj. poss. (()4, 239) our, our oiDn. nOtre, pron. poss. (125) ours, out own ; le — , la — , les — s, ours. nourri, e, adj. fed. uourrice, s.f. wet-nurse, nurse. nourrir, v.a. to feed, to nourish, ti nurse, to maintain. nourriture, s. f . food, nourishment. nous, pers. pron. (110, 114, 138, 25(j) we, us, to or at v^, for ot with or in or fnun us, each other ; m /'uies. ouraelues. nou-veau, vel. in., velle, f. adj. adv. new, recent, novel, fresh. nouveautu, s.f. noveUy, new thing, new publication, latest fanhUtn. lion velle, s.f. news, intelligence, tki- in-gs, story. nouvellement, anU off. ou. conj. or, either^ or eltf ; — bieji. or due, r.T. oil, adv. (270) tohrre, in or int/f or at or to which, ir/ien ; d' — , w?ferwe. oublier. v.a. (98) to ff/rgft. on est. R.Tn. wrH oui, adv. 8. pex, at,. ouir, v.a.n. ir. (198) tf> hear. ours. 8.m. /'ear. outil, 8.m. foftl^ iTn]lew.e)it. outrnyer, v.a. t) ot/fnii^fi.. outre, prt'p. adv. bej/z/id, farther, h/'M/'ffe-K : (H — , iiuni-orfr. Iiexidex. on vert, e. julj. open, fro uk. ouvrH^e. R m. irntrk, trorkinanxhip. ouvrir. v.a.n. ir. (18.")) Uj ojen. to viilork. ovale, adj. s,m. tfE'/i. oxygcue, K.m. oaeyjen. page, s.m. page. page, B.f. J>age {of a. hook). paien, ne, adj. a. paga)h. ■paillasKe. B.f xtra in-vKittress. •paillasse, H,m. domn. •paille, B.f: xtrati). pain, B.m. bread, l/nf, cake. paire, s f. pair, ro'iplc. paisible, adj. peace-at>le. peaceful. paitre, v.a.n. ir. (178) to graze, to pvtture. paix, B.f. peace, rext, hash/ palaiB, B.m. palace. palmier, s m. palm-tree. pampre, 8.m. vine-hrancfu panier, B.m. banket. paon, B.m. pe^'Hujck. pape, B.m. pope. papier, s. m. paver / — S lettres, note-pajier., letter-paper. fpapillon, 8.m. bntterjly. pilqne, s.f. pa.4)vt there ; — oCi, irhich way, how. parrige. s.m. part^, latitnde. paraitre, v.n. ir. {\7f>) to ajjpear, to fwmte in /tight, to xeern, to lec- go or ran, or look orer. pardon, s.m. pardon, forgiven esn ; — ! excuse nie! I beg yoiij par- don- ! pnrdonner, v.a. to forgire., to par- d/ai, to excuse. fpareil, le, adj. alike^ similar^ like, like it, frach. fpareil. s ra. equals match. parent, e, s.m.f. relation, relative ; --8, pi. parenU, relations. parer, v.a n. to adorn, to deck, to dreM, to parry. paresse, s.f. idlene^H, laziness. paresseu-x, se, adj. 8.m.f. idlji, lazy; idler, Uizy person. parfait. e. adj. 8.m, perfect, finished. parfaiteraent. adv. perfectly. parfum, s.m. perfume, scent. parisien. ne, adj. b. Parisian. parlemont. s.m. parliament. parler. v.a.n. to speak, Ut talk. partni. prep. (2f'8; among, amidst, with parole, s.f. word, speech. part, 8. f . part, share, portion ; de — (!t d'autre, mi both sides ; de la — de, (oO;J) on thepartof, from ; de ma — , fr, 183) to depart, to H('.t out, to go off ; a — de, from. partoat. adv. everywhere, any- where ; — oil, triherecer. parure. s.f. di'e>ts, finery, ornament. parveiiir, v.n. ir. (l-M, 187) to ar- rive {at), to reach, to succeed. pas, 8 m. .step, pace, foot-step, strait; faux — , mistake. pas. adv. (57, 159, 280) any, no, n.ot any ; — du tout, not at all. passableraent, adv. tolerably, so so. pass6, e, part. adj. T)rep, past, gone^ oner, faded, last, after. passo, s.m. time past, past. pa.s.se-p;irtout, s.m, inaster-key, I, itch- key. passer, v.n. a. (l-''^)) ^ pass, to pass by ox away, to be over, t^fade, to Jiand, to crceed, to sui'pass ; — chez, to call upon or at {. . . '«) / — pour, to he connidered ; faire — , to paxx, to hand round., to while ainiiy ; se — , v.r. to pass away, to happen ; — de, to do loithout. passe-teini)8, s.m pasfime. pavssiou, s.f. passion, lace. pa.s.siontiameiit, a weigh, to ponder. petit, e, adj. little, small. petit, e, s.m.f. little ox young one. peu, adv. little, not peri/, few, soon, 7wt ; — a — , by degrees, gradu- ally ; avant — , before hmg ; dans — , shorily ; pour — que. hoioerier little ; quelq\ie — . a little, some- what * si — que, liowerer, little ; sona — , shorUtf., peu s.m. small amount, a little^ lit- tle time ,' un — , a little. fieiiphi, s.m. pefyfAe, nation. prill pier, v.a.n. tr/ pcoide. peuplier. 8.m. poplar. peur, s.f. fe/tr, fright, dread; de — de, for fear of ; de — quo, for fear, lent ; avoir — . to be afraid; faire — a. P> frighten. peureu-x. se. adj. timid. puut-itre. adv. perhjips. philosophe. s.m. a(ij. philr>snp?ier. piano. .s.m. piano ; — droit. ChJagi piano ; — a queue, grand piaiw. piastre, s.f. jriti-stre. piOce, s.f. pifxe. bit, room. pied. s.m. ff>^>t ; pointe du — , tip- toe ; a — . on foot ; sur un bon — , upon a go* >d footing ; mettre — ^ terre, to alight. picge, s.ra. snare, trap; donner dans le — , to be catight in the trap. Pierre. H.ra. Peter. pierre.. s. f. atone. piofc';, s.f. piitg. pien-x, se. adj. pi^ms. pij;«on. s.ra. j)fgeon. f pi Her, v.a. to plunder. pilotis. s.m. piles, pile-work. pilule, s.f. ■j)ill. piraent, s.m. Jamaica popper^ aU S])ice. pin, s.m. ]iine. pine-tree. piuasse, s.f. pinnace. piquer, v.a. to prick, to sting, bite, to goad, to stick ; se — , v r. to prick oncielf, to be offended, to pride or plume oneself [on). pire, adj. worse, worst; de — en — , worse and worse. pis, adv. worse, worst. piatolet, s.m. pistol. pitic, s.f. pity, compassion,; avoir — de, to pity. place, s. f . place, room, square, situa- tion, (272) fortr&is. placer, v.a. (97) to place, to put ; m — , v.r. f/t place or put oneself. plaider, v.a.n. to plead. plaie s.f. wound, sor^. plaindre, v.a. ir. (175) to pity, to regret ; a — , to be pitied ; se -, to complain. l)laine, s f. plain, h^'ath. plaire, v.n. ir. (.178) to pleuie ; plAt 424 VOCABULARY. i Dieu or an ciel ! would to Heaven ! a Dieu ne plaise, Ueaoen forbid ; s'il vous plait, if yon fleane ; plait-il ? what did foil K(iy? whiitf to delight or takepUnHure {in). plaisanter, v.a.n. to jeH, to joke. plaisanterie, n.i. jest in,g. joke ; — ^ part, Herionsly ; par — . in joke. plaisir, s.m. yleasure, nmuneiiieid., fdvar. plauche.r, s.in. flom\ ceiling. p3aute, s.f. plant. planter, v. a. ^> plants to set. platine, s.m. ^'/^tina. plein, e. adj. fuU [of), filled {with), whole, replete, o-pea, blight ; tout — . (pdte piU ; tout — de, much, many. pleurer, v.a.n. to weep, to cry. pleurs. s.m. pi. tearn, (of vines) bleeding. pleuvoir, v.n, ir. (190) to rain, to pour in or nhower down,. pli. 8.m. foid. plait. plier, v.a.n. to fold, to bend, to give way. plomb, s.m. lea,d ; a — , perpendi- calarly. plonger. v,a.n. t^ plunge, to dive. pluie, s.f. rain. stJi/rioer. plumage, s.m. plumage, feathers. plume, f^.i. feather, pen. plupart, 8.f. 127^) most part, gerter- ality ; la — du temps, qeneraUy. plus, adv. (57, 290, :)01) more, the \ more, most, aho ; (with negative) i any more, any longer, no morCy \ no longer, not any more or longer, ' no . . . left ; au — , tout au — , at : most, at be.'it ; — de, more than I abore ; bien — , mvch more ; de — , j more, besides, moreover ; de — en I — , more and more ; le — , the \ most; deux fois — , twice cts much ; deux fois de — , twice more. plnsieurs, adj. pi. several, some. plutot. adv. (2.S()') rather. poclie, s.f. pocket, pouch, bag. po le, s ni. stove. pov'le, s.f. pan, fj'yi?t>j-pa7i. poeme, s.m. poem. poids, s.m. weight, yravHy. poindre, v.n. ir. (j75) to datt^, t9 break. point, s.m. point, dot, stitch, degree^ full stop; au — de. so far as; sur le — de. to be very near. point, adv. (159) not., no, any., not any. noT at all. points, s.f. point., head., tip., dawn^ break, sting. poire, s.f .pear. pf)iH, s.m. pea. poisson. s. m. fish. fpoitrail, a.m. breast., chest., breast- poivre. s.m. pepper. [plata. pnlaire, adj. polfir. pOle. s m. pole. poli, e. adj. polished, polite. poliment. adv. civilly, politely. polir, V. a. to polish. pomme, s. f . apple ; — de terre, po- tato. ponctuellement, adv. punctually. pont. s.m. bridge, deck. populaire, adj. popular. port, s.m. port, luirh/r. fportail, s.m. (31) front, door-way, portal. porte, s.f. door, gate. porte-erayon. s.m. pencil-case. portefeuille, s.m. portfolio, pocket- liook. portemanteau, s.m. portmanteau. porte-monnaie, s.m. parse. porte-plume, am. penholder. port> e, 8.f. compass, range; a or & la — de, within reach of. porter, v.a.n. to carry, to bear, to take, to bring, to wear, to induce ; se - , v.r. to bear, to be inclined, to do, to be; comment vous portez- vouz ? h/>w do yoH d/)^ iow are youf portion, s.f. portion, share portrait, s.m. portrait, picture. portugais, e, adj. s. Portuguese. poser, v.a.n. to place, to put, to set, P> lay or put (dxnvn). to 7'est, to lie. to po.se ; se — , v. r. t^} perch^ to oliyM, to tcike a position. VOCABULARY. 425 pomti-f, ve, adj. p>MtJirp, posscder, v a. to ^J'av.vc-v.v, to hare. posfiihle, af . iitinjnt, R.m. jttt,JM/, r/en-. pou, s.m. lnt/.<J\ for the xokr r/f, tufnt-rdit^ (854) iti order t"^ o.i. thot/f/h, per ; — que. in ort/er thot ; comnie — , '"< if, 'fx luncJt O.H. pouqjre. R.ni.f. pt/rjiie. puiquoi, conj. adv. tnhj/ ; c'ost — , therefore. pourri. e, adj. R.m rottv.n. pourrir. v. an. t» rot. poursuite, «.f p'tmuit. ^ursuivre. v.a.n. ir. (lH) to pur- sue^ to foiitno^ to go on. with, to profifcafe. pourtanfc, adv. yet, though, h/tm- ener, xtiil. pourvoir, v.a.n. ir. (190) to provide, to .suppiff ; se — , v.r. to proriile oneself. pourvu. part. conj. prorided. pousser, v,a.n. to pu.ih, to dnce^ to urge, to grmo. poussiore, 8. f . dmt ; il fait de la — , it i» di/Mi/. pouvoir, v.a.n. ir. (190, 291, 32:j) to be able, turn, to be able to do, may; n'en — plu8, to be eac- houtfted ; cela se pent, f/oit nmy be ; il se pent que, it niay be that ; je u'y puis rien, f eaimM help it; pnisHicz-vous ! may ytm! on ne peut raieux. oa well tat jKMtsible. pouvoir, 8.111. jxt'ixr. pratique, r f. practice^ cimtom^ cus- tomer. pratique, adj. practieM. precaution, s.f. precaution, caution, precepteur, s.m. tutor, preGept(Tr. ]>rccieu-x, se, adj. jyrecious, vol- "obi,e. pr piter, v.a. to precipitate^ tokuri oi- (Ltxh down. prOcis. e. adj. precise, formoL. pi-.jcisoniciit, adv. precisely. prudire, v.a. ir. (173) to foreteU, to ]tredicL prcforableraent, adv. (180) prefer- oMy. pr cither, v.a. to prefer. projudiciable, adj. prejudicial, in- jnruniJi. prein-ier, iere, adj. first. premier, a. m. firsL premiorement, adv. first, firstly, in the firxt pUice. prendre. v.a.n. to take, to seize, to eMitrh, to take up; se — , v.r. to be cdof/ht, to catch, to set about ; s'y — , proceed, to go to work. preparer, v.a. to prepare, to get rendy. pres. prep, near, by, close, to., al- mo.xt ; tout — , Tiery near, clos% by ; {\\ ) — de la, ii'i theneighbor- hood ; a peu -%, nearly. presbytcre, s.m. parsomige. prescrire, v a.n. ir. (17(5) prescribe, present, s.m. present, gift, present tense ; h. — , at present., now. prcsentement, adv. nmjo. presenter, v.a. to present, to offer. preserver, v a. to preserve, to keep, president, 8.m. president. pr. sider, v.n. to preside. presque, adv. abnost, neaAy ; — pas. scarcely, scarcely any. presqu'ile, s.f. penimula. presse, e. adj. in haste, in a hurry, anxious. pressentir, v.a. ir. (184) to haee a presentimeM of, to foresee. prcsser, v.a.n. to pre^s, to squeeze^ to urgf^ to hurry. presumcr. v.a. to presume, suppose* prct, e, adj. ready, disponed. prctendre, v.a,u. to claim, to pf& €26 VOCABULARY. tend^ to lay elnim to, to prefitime, to jyrofe yield, to Jtear, to show, to bring. produit, 8,m. jn'oduce, proceeds, pro- duct. professenr, s.m. professor, teacher, profil. s. m. profile. [master. profiter, v.n. to profit, to take ad- vanta(.'3, to avail oneself profond. e. adj. deeq^. profound. profoudoment, adv. deeply., pro- foundly. pro^rcs, s.m. progres'^. prolonger, v. a. to prolong, toextcndy to protract. promenade, s.f. promenads, loalk- ing. It) ft Ik ; — a cheval. ride ; — en bateau, sail, row ; — ^ pied, walk ; — en voiture, drive. promener, v. a. to take out, to ta>ki far a walk, to tarn; se — , v.r. to take a walk, take an airing^ to wander. proinHsae, af. promise, word. i proaiettre, v.a.n. ir. i.180) to pro- i nme. \ promis, e, adj s. engaged, promised. j prompt, e, adj. prompt, quick^ j speedy. ' prompteraent, adv. promptly^ quickly. . prononcer, v.a.n. ti profwunce, to utter. prophc'tie, s.f. prophecy. propos. s.m. talk, speech, d'lsconrse ; a — , tAt the purpose, proper, in good time ; a — ! by the bye .t a. — de. with regard to. proposer, v. a. to projiose, to offer. pro'ire. adj. own, proper, peculiar^ di-an. tidy. proprement, adv. prfrperly. proprictaire, s.m.f. owner, proprie- tor. proprictc, s. f. property., peculiarity^ pnriwiety. prospcritc, s.f. prosperity. protec-teur, trice, s. adj. protector^ protectress. protection, s.f. patronage. proteijfer. v. a. (07) to protect. protester, v.a.n. to protest. proue, s.f. jyrow. .^teni. provenir, v.n. ir. (l;J5. 187) to 'pro- ceed, to arise. providence, s.f. Providence. provision, s.f. provision, sxqyply^ xtore. provoquer, v. a. to provoke. I)rudonieut. adv prudently. prudence, s.f. pradence, discretiun.' prudent, e. adj. prudent prune, s.f. plum. Frusse (la), s f. Prussia. psaume. s m. psalm. publi-c, que, adj. pabfic. VOCABULARY. 427 pniB. adv. tJien^ afterwards, hmdes. puiser, v. a. t(j draw. puisque, conj. aince. jmissamment, adv. p&tJDerfuUy . puissance, s.l paicer. puuir, v.a. to puiiuh. punition, 8.f. '})iuii) whatever, any. quelque, adj. CZ^-l) some, any, a few. w/uitccer ; — chose, some- thing, anything ; avoir — cho.se, ^')2) /«/ be the matter with. qnoltjue, adv. (26\) however, aboutj sfHiie. qu«4(iuefois, adv. sometimes. quelf) fortnight : d'au- jourd'hui en — , this day fort- night. quiuziciue, adj. s. fifteenth. 428 VOCABULARY. quitter, v. a. to quit, to leave, to part with. ♦quoi, pron. (122, 125, 255, 270) which, that, wJiat; de — , of which, of what. ♦quoique, conj. (163) ciUhougL, though. raccommoder, v. a. to mend, repair. raconter, v. a. to relate, to tcU. radoub, s.ra. (22) reptiruj. repair. rafraichir, v.a.n. to cool, to refresh. rage, s. f. rage, inadaesta. Kiisin, H.m. grapes, raiitin. raison, s.f. reason, sense, judg- ment, satlsftctioa; a — de, raze, to raxe. rasHHsier, v. a. f" khUhU.. to pM, to surfeit : ^-Xi^i xin^ix^xd de, to be tired of. rassembler, v. a. to assemble ; se — ^ v.r. to asse/nble, to meet, tocrtnod. rayer, v. a. to scratch, to erase. rayon, s.m. 7'ay, beam, shelf. reb.itir, v. a. t(/ rebuild. rebattre, v.a to beat again. rebelle, adj. s. rebelli*/us. rebel. rebut, 8.ia. repubte. rebuff, refuse. rebuter, v.a. to reject, to disccmrage; se — . v.r. to be disheartened. reception, s.f. reception, draiDing- room. recevoir, v.a.n. to receive, entertain^ to adiTut. reci ercher, v.a. to seek again or after, to sea reft. rocit, s.m recital, account. recommender. v a. lo recommend ; se — -. v.r. to rrOft'ntnend oneself . rccompen.se, s.f rnrard. rccoinpeasor, v a., fo reward, to r-'frnpen-sate. reconduii-e. v.a. ir. (\TZ) to lead oi take back, to ^iccompany, to S66 home. reconnaissance. 8.f. gratitude, rt- Cf>gniVu>n, nckrbowledgment. reconnaissaut, e, adj. grateful, thankful. reconnaitre, v.a. ir. (179) to know again, to recognize, to acknow- ledge, P> admit, to reconnoitre. recouqu6rir. v.a. ir. (188), to recon- quer, to regain. recoudre. v.a. ir (174) to. Hero again. recourir, v.n. ir. {\'^\)to run again^ to have reamrse. recours. 8.m. recourse, refuge. recouvrir, v a. ir. (185) to cover again or over, to cover. recreer, v. a. to create anew, revive. rccrire, v.a. ir. il7(>) t(/ write again, to answer. recroitre. v.n. ir. (178) to grow again. re(^:u, e, acij. rerHved. re»^*u. s.m. ncelpt. frecueillir, v.a. ir. (184) to gather, to reap, to cxjllect. recuire, v.a. ir. (172) to ... to cook again. VOCABULARY. 429 redescendre. v.n.a. to descend a gain ^ to go d/jinn agnin. redevenir, v.n. ir. (187) to become agdin. redevoir, v. a. ir. (189) lo owe ntUl. redinj^ote, s-f. ocerc/xit. redire, v.a. ir, (172) fe 7'epent, to say or tell (igai/i, to object; trouver a — , frri dire, to Jind fault. redoubler, v.n.a. to redouble, to in- crease. redoutable, adj. fonnidable. redresser, v. a. to straighten, to set right. roduire. v. a. ir. (172) to reduce, to coaxtrain, to compel; ee — , v.r. to be reduced. reel, ie. adj. /v/t/, true. rcolire. v. a. ir. (177) to re-elect. roelleuient, adv. r&iUy. refaire, v. a. ir. {IHO t to ina/ce again, to ineiid. rcfugier (se), v.r. to take refuge or s?ieiter. refus, a.in. refusal, denial. refuser, v.a.n. to refuse, to decline ; 86 — , V. r. to deny oneself. r%al, 8.m. entertainment, feast. regard, s.m. look, glance; — s, pL eytn, altentioTi, notice. regarder, v.a. u. to look at, to behold, to see, to consider., to concern. regiment, s.m. regiment. rdgle, s.f. rule^ ruler. regler, v.a. to rule, to regulate, to settle. regret, s.m. regret, grief, sorro^w. regretter, v.a. to regret. rogul-ier, icre, adj. regular. reiue, s.f. queen. re Jeter, v.a.n. (90) to throm again, to throw back. rejoindre, v.a. ir. (175) ^ join \ again. \ rejouir. v.a tf rejoice, to cheer ; se --, v.r. (i;}9) njoice. f/t delight, Vf be glad. j lelever, v a.n. to raise, to take up, ^ gire a reU-fh, to retort, to re- lit .re. religion, H.i. reliyioa. relire, v.a. ir. (177) to read {oxer) again. reluire, v.n. ir. (171) to shine, to glitter. reraurquable, adj. remarkable. remarquablement, adv. remark- ably. remcde, s.m. remedy. . remedier, v.n. to remedy, to help. reraener, v. a. (90) to take or carry or lead back. remettre, v.a. ir. (180) to put back {again), to restore, to put off, to remit. remonter, v.a.n. to go up again or back, to wind up, to remount. remoudre, v.a. ir. (175) to grind again. remplir, v. a. fc fill {again or up), to perform, tofuljil. remporter, v.a. to carry or taka back, to obtain, to gain, carry oJ)\ remuer, v.a.n. to mooe. renaitre, v.n, ir. (181) to be bt/rn again, to come to life again, to spring up or rise again. renard. am. frx. rencontre, s.f. meeting, encounter; aller or venir a la — de, (242) to go or come to meet. rencontrer, v.a.n, to meet (with), to fiad, to en,couuter ; se — , v. r. to meet. rendormir, v.a. ir. (183) to lull to steep again ; se — , v.r. to fall asleep or go to sleeji again. rendre. v.a. to return., to give back, to surrender, to make, to render, U) translate, to pay ; se — , v.r tpear. reparer. v. a. to rrpoir, to mend, to rnoke ameiuh for. lepartir, v.n. ir. (183) to set out again , to reply. lopartir. v. a. to divide, to distribute. re] 'as. s.m. meal, repaxt. repasser, v.a.n. to paxn again, to rrfxiHs, to iron, to go or kxfk over. repcindre, v a. to paint again. repoiitir (se), v.r. ir. (184) t/) repent. repentir, s.m. repe/itance. repcter, v. a. to repeat, to reheai'ne. repetition, s.f. repetitio)/, rehearxal. replacer, v. a. to replace, to pvthack. repliquer. v.a.n. to reply, toanawer, to rejoiji.. repoudre. v.a.n t^ answer, to reply, to corieypond^ to reapond, to be rex]>oii,sibie. reposnr (se). v.r. to rent. refjousser. v a.n. t<>»imrn, U> reject. repreudre. va.n. ir. (181) to take or catch again, to reprove, t • ceaxare, to hlatne. reprosenter, v.a.n. to represent, to perform. reprimander, v. a. to reprimand, to /•' ] trove. roprimer, v. a. to repress, to restrain. rcproeb'i, s.m. rewoach ; sans — , blanidess. reprocher, v. a. to reproach, to up- braid. reproduire, v. a. ir. (172) to repro- duce ; se — , v.r. to reappear, to occur again. reprouver, v. a. to disaqyiyrove of. frepugner, v.n. to be repugnant, to feel reluctant. requorir, v.a. ir. (188) to request, to claim. reserve, s.f. reservation, reserve., reserves ; a la — de. except. fresigner, v.a to resign ; se — , to reingn. oneaelf^ to nubniit. rcsister, v.n. to res:,»t, to (/j>j>o.s-f\ rosolut'oii, 8.1. rcsol/ition. re^oloe. roauiiuer, v.n. Lo resound, to tclut. resoudre. v.a. ir. (175) to resolve^ U solve ; se — , v. r. to resolve, to ■make up one^s mind. respect, s.m. respect, awe. respecter, v.a. to re^pe/it, to rerere, respectueu-x, se, adj. respectful. ressemblant, e, adj. alike, similar. ressembler, v.n. to 7'esem^le, to be or h/ok like ; se — , v r to be alike. resseutiment, s.m. resentment. ressentir, v.a. ir. (184) to feel, inex- perience. ressort, s. ra. spring, lock, elasticity^ strciiglh, means. ressortir, v.n. (184) to go or came out again, to resort. ressouvenir (se), v.r ir. (187) to re- member, to recollect; faire — , to reniiruL ressouvenir, s m. remembrance., re- collection. reste. s.m. rest, remainder, re- mains, remnant ; au — , du — , , besides, hoicerer, yet. rest^r. v.n. (l;>()) b* remain, to be Ufi, to stay {b(hind), to keep. restreindre, v.a ir. (I7i)) to restrily, sacred. saisir, v. a. to seize, to grasp, to catch, to lay hold of, to under* stand. 432 VOCABTTLATIY. saison, s.f. aenunn, time. Balir, v.a. to soil, to ninke. dirtif. saJle, 8. f. hnll, room ; — a manger, dirdttg-room. salon, s.m. drnmiiiy-rooin^ saloon, parlf/)'. B-vIut, s.m. >*t(fMy. xalodtioii, salute^ hoiD. henedlcturn Balutaire, adj. aalntavy, wholesome. samedi. s.m. Stiturday. sang, s.m. f>I/>od. sunglant, e, adj. hhxnJy. Bans, prep. (287, 800) tcithoiit, were it not ftrr. but for ; — que, intJi- out ; — cela, — quoi, other wine. sansonnet, s.m. atdriing. sant'-, s.f. health. satisfaire, v.a.n. ir. (180) to satisfy, to j/leasfi. to (jvbe satisfaction, to., to gratify, to meet. sau-f, ve. adj. spared. sauf, prep. xa.ce. racing, eo'eept. Baut, s.m. leap, jump, fall. Bauter, v.n. to leap, to jump. sanvage, adj. loild, savage, shy. sauver, v.a. tosave^ ta rescue ; se — , V r. to escape, to nave oneself, to flyaway. Bavant, e, adj. s. learned^ scientific m, to know, to be aware of, to be atquaiiited with, to nnder^itand, to know how, to he iiiform.''d of to learn, can, to be able ; f aire — , to let know, to inform ; a — , — , viz. , name- ly, that is ; je u'en sais rien, 1 donH know at all. Mvoir, a.m. knowledge, leaiming. eavon, s.m. soa,n. Saxe la), s.f. Saxony. Saxon, ne, adj. s. Saxon. scandaliser. v.a. to scindalize ; se — , v.r. P) be scandidized. pcolorat, s.m. villain,, scoundrel. BC3ue, s.f. scene, stage. Bcbisme, s.m. schism. science, s.f, science., knowledge^ learning. WMilpter, v.a. to sculpture^ to cane. sculpteur, a.m. scuii)tor, caroer. sculpture, R.f. scvlpture, earmng^ carred work. se, s', pers. pron. (188) oneself, him- self, herself, itself, themsdves, each other, one another, to oneself, to himself, to herself, &^c., to or with each other, in or within or with or from (uieself, &c., between ot among them or themselves. see, m., scche, f. , adj. dry. hard, sccher, v.a.n. to dry, to wither. second, e, adj. second, other. second, s.m. seco)id. seconde, s. f . second, second class. secondement, adv. sec/)ndly. secouer, v.a. to shake, to toss. secourir, v.a. ir. (184) to succor^ to rdieoe, to assint. to help. secours, s m. sncctrr, relief, helpj rescue / au — ! help ! secr-et, ete, adj. secret, reserved. secret, s.m secret, secrecy. see]>tember. septieme, adj. K.m. seceutk. fpcrail. s.m. iseiagiio. serieu .k, se, adj. serimm., grave., eartiext. serpent, s m. serpent., snake, Bcrvante, s. f. (mold) yer rant. service, s.m. xcrclce. attendance, dulij ; rendre — , to do a faror. serviette, s.f. napkin. eervir, v.a.n. ir. (1»S'{) t(i «crce, to Willi vfx)n , to be of xervlce or use to, to xerce up, tfi hel/^j ; le diner est servi, dinner Is ready ; se — , V. r. ti> help onendf to he served up; — de, V* 1/se. to (wail onenelf of. serviteur. s.m. mrrant. servitude, s.f. sercitnde. ses. adj. poss. pi. m.f. (()4). V. son. fse.uil. 8.m. thrcx/oM. sill. seal, e. adj. ah/ie, by onesdf lonely., oidi^. nliujle. sen I, e. s.m.f. ne. senlement, adv. (290; only, merely, Xtllclf/. pevcre, adj. severe, xti-irt. Bovcreraent, adv. severely, sternly. so vo rite, s.f. severity, strict/iess. si, s\ conj. (16;{, HIG, 320, 32;{), if, whether, tJtough, sujypose ; que — , and if. 8i, adv. so niiich^ (201) yes ; — bien que, so mad) so Hint. siecle, s.m. century, age. Bieg^G, s. ra. nent. siege. Bleu, ne, pron. poKs. (241) le — , la — lie, les — s. les — nes. his, his own, hers, her mon, its, its own, mn^s own, of his. of hers. sitrlement, s.m. whistling, hissing^ hiM. sitaer, v.n.a. tf? whittle, to fUss. siriier, a.m. whistle, hiss. signal, s.m. dgMd. silence, s.m. siU-n^e, pa/fise. simple, adj. simple, single, plain^ sUly. sill core, adj. sincere, true. sinccrement, adv. sincerely. sinccritc, s.f. sincerity. singe, s.m. ape, monkey. singularite, s.f. singularity, pecuU- arity. aingul-ier, icre, adj. singular, pecu- liar. sinon, conj. otherwise, or else, if not, except. sirop. s.m. sirup, syrup. sitOt, adv. .w soon, as soon. situe. e, adj. situated. six, adj. s.m. six. sixth. sixieme, adj. s.m. sirth. sixiemement, adv. sixthly. Sixte, s.m. Sixtiis. sooiote, s.f. Hociety, company. soeur. s-f. .tister. soi. pron. (111.257) oneself itsdf^ Idniscif, lirfisi'lf, themselves; — -mime, o/oeself itself, etc. soi-disant. adj. leuiM-be, so-ca'led. soie, s f. siik. soif. s f. fJdrat ; avoir — , to bB thirsty. fsoigner, v. a. to take care of, to at- tend, to nurse. fsoigiieiinoineiit, adv. carefully. .fsoigncu-x. se, adj. careful. soin, 8. m. care ; — s, pi. attendance; avoir — de, (52) t" tiike are of ; donner des — s a, to attend. soir, s.m. evening, night. soiree, s.f. evening, evening party. soit, int. he it s>r, soixantaine, s,f. sixty. soixante, adj. sixty; dix, seveitjf, soixantiJme, adj. s.m, sia^ieth, sol, 8.m. soil 434 VOCABULARY. fsoleil, s.m. ^un. Bolennel. le. adj. sdemn. Rolide, adj. s.m. solid, substantial^ strong, yxxl, rml. eolidement, adv. soiidly, strongh/, finitly. golidite, s.f. solidity, strength. politaire, adj. s dreniiK to think^ to rnitmdrr soiiner. v.a.n t>> ntfiiiid. P> ring, to strike ; oa «i>ime, tJie hdl riitgs. sonae.te. s.f. heU. sort, ».xn. fate, lot, fortune, chance, eorte, ». f. sort, kind, manner ; de la — , thus St) ; de '/r en — que, so that, s(j as; de telle — , in snch n tnnnner ; en qnelque — , in n yntmner. sortie, 8.f. going ont, sally, exit. sortir, v.n. ir. (1;3(>, ISl) to go out, t*> leave {the room), to luioe but just left. sot, te, adj ftwUsh, sUly. Bot, te, &.n\.L fo(Ay bU/ckkead. sottise. s.f. foUy. foolish thing. son, s.m. fenny. souci, s.m. care, anxiety. soucier (se), v. r. to care, to mind, to iHsh, to like, to want. Foudiiin, e, adj. sudden. soiul.iia, soudainemeut, adv. s^id- «ouffrance. s-f. suffering. \de)dy. »4»uii"r:mt, e. adj. .suffering. sonfh-ir, v.a.n. ir. (185) to suffer, to ht',ir. to a(k>LP. to be pained or yriet-ed,. «uu]iait^r, v. a. to winli, to desire, to w£»h for. soul, adj. &m. (24) satiated, JUL soulever, v. a. to lift, toiaise. Soulier, s.m. shoe. soumcttre, v. a. ir. (180) to subdm to submit. soup(^on, s.m. suspicion, toud taste. soui)yonner, v. a. to stispect. soup(^onneu-x, se, adj. swijncimis. soupe, s. f . soup ; — au lait, mif/ porridge. source, s.f. spring, source. sou roil, s. m. eye-brow, brmo. sourd, e, adj. deaf, insensible. sourdre, v.n. ir. (11)8; to spring {vp gufih (forth.) sourire. v.n. py smile. souris, s-f. mouse. 80UH. prep, under, bdoio, beneath. son.scrire, v.a.n. ir. (176) to sul xcrlbe, to xign, to consent. soustrure. v. a. ir. (174) to tah away, to Hubtract ; se — , v.r. i escape, to avoid. soutenir, v.a.n. ir, {\S7) to smyport to sustain, to -maintain, to kee up, to npJiold ; se — , v.r. to su% jyort oneself, to bear iip. soutenu, e, adj. supported, kept uj. unjlugging. unremitting. soufcerrain, e, adj. underground:^ '^nhterraneao. souvenir (se), v.r. ir. (187) to n ■ member, to recollect, to bear i mind; faire — , to remind; : m'en souvient, / remember it. souvenir, .s.m. remembrance, reco lection, keepmke. souvent, adv. often ; le plus — , mot frequently. souverain, e, s. adj. sovei'eign, su i preme. j spectacle, s.m. speetade, s7iou ' theatre. spirituel, le, adj. spiritual, inteSi ' 'ji nt. witty. stairnant, e. adj stagnant. strict, e, adj. .strict, ri(/orf>u». style. s.m. style. subir, V a. to suffer, toeudart, . subitemeut, adv. suddetUy. VOCABULARY. 435 fiubsister, v.n. to subsist^ to exist, to I live, to continue. j Bubvenir, v.n. ir. (187) to supply, to \ promle, to relieve. succeder. v.n. to sricceed, tofoUow. succes, a.m. success. succession, s.f. succession, inheri- tance. Sucre, s.ra. sugar. Sucre, e, adj. sugared, honeyed. sud. s.ra. south. Suede (la), s.f. Sweden. Bucdois, e, adj. s. Swedish, Swede. sueur, s.f. perspiration. suffire, v.n. ir. (171) t^) suffice. suffisant, e, adj. s. xiiffident. enough. fiuggerer, v. a. to nugge.'st, to intimate. Suisse (la), s.f. Switzerland. Suisse, s.ra. Smiss. suite, 8.f. rest, attendants, continu- ation, sequel., succes.sion, can- sc(/uence, result ; a la — de, with, after ; de — , cotixfcutindy. iinme- diately ; par — de, in c<)nnequence of ; tout de — , immediately, di- rectly, at once. duivaut, e, adj. s following, nejrt. fiuivaut. prop, according to ; — que, iin^ according as. suivi, e, adj. folhwcd. fiuivre, v.a.n. ir. (174) to follow, to go or comf- after, to pursue. sujet, te. adj. Hubject. lifihlf;. inclined. sujet. te, s.m.f. subject, felhw. sujet, s. m. subject, cau^e, reason. snperbe, adj. proud, su,perb. Bupcrieur, c, s. adj. superior, above. suporiorito, s.f. superiority. 8uppl6er, v.a.n, to sufrply, to take the plitce of. Bupplice, 8.m. executifjn. Bupplier, v.a. to supplicate, to be- seech, to entreat. supportable, adj. supportable, toler- aJM. supporter, v.a. to support, to sus- tain, to Mtajtd. suppose, e, adj. supposed; — que, supposing. Buppo.ser, v.a. to supjKMc, to imply. ouppuHJtion, «.f. suppoHitian. supprimer, v. a. to .mpprcss, to omit. supreme, adj. supreme. sur, e, adj. sure, certain, safe, con- fident; pour — , for certain, surely. sur, prep. (JiOl, 303, 804) on, upon, abate, about, iDith, by, concerning^ on account of ; — ce, thereupon. Bureau, s.m. elder, elder-tree. Bureau d'Bspagne, s.m. lilac bush. surement, adv. surdy, certainly. stlretc, s.f. safety, security. surf aire, v.a.n. ir. (180) to ask too much for. sunnouter, v.a. to surmount, to over- come. sumommer, v.a. t^ surname. surprendre, v. a. ir. (181) to surprise, to take by surprise, to catch, to overhear. surpris, e, adj. surprised, of sur- prise. Hurseoir. v.a.n. ir. (1S)8) to suspend, Ut put off. surtont, adv. particularly, above aU. surtout, s.m. overcoat. f surveillance, s.f. superintendence » watch. survenir, v.n. ir. (135, 187) to com^ une-rpectfidly. to happen, to bcf st as or like ; — a fait, adv. quite, a,'-e me alone. tranquilleineut, adv. quietly. trauHcrire, v a, ir, (176) to Iran- scribe, to copy. transjjresser. v. a. Ut tranjigress. transiti-f, ve, adj. transitive. transmettre, v.a, ir, (180) to trans- mit, to convey. transport, s.m. transport, convey- ance, rapture. transporter, v.a. to ti'anspoi't, to enrapture. jtravail, s.m. (31) labor, toil, pains, work. ftravailler, v.n. a. to work, to labor, to toil. travers, s.m. breadth, whim, caprice; a — , acrjss, tJwrougJi ; au — de, through. traverser, v.a.n. to cross, to go or pass or run through. treize, adj. s. m. thirteen, thirteenth treizicme, adj. s. thirteenth. trembler, v n. (330) to tremble. tremper, v. a. n. to steep, to soak, to temper, to wet. trentaine, s.f. thirty. trente, adj s.m. thirty, thirty^ treuticme, adj. s.m. thirtieUi. 438 VOCABULARY. trcpas, s.m. deat?i, d^cefme. trcs, adv. very, very miLcli^ most. trcHor, s.m. trerM/ire. ftros.saillir, v.n. ir. (185) to start, to thrill. tribun, s.m. tribune. triomphe, s.m. triumph. triomphei, v.n. to triumph, to ex- ult. triste, adj. snd, melancholy, duU, sorrowful, dixmal, po//r. tristerneut, adv. Sddly. sorrowfully. tristesse, s.f. sadness, dulness, sor- row. Troie. s.f. Troy. trois, adj. s.m. three. troisieme, adj. s.m.f. third, third floor. troisi6mement, adv. thirdly. trorape, s.f. horn, trumpet^ (253) trunk. tromper, v. a. to deceive, to cheat, to disappoint ; se — , v.r. to make a mistake, to be mistaken. trompette, s.f. trumpet; — 8.m. trumpeter. trone, s.m. throne. trop, adv. U)o. too much, too many ; — peu, too little, Um few ; de — , too much, too many, over, in the way; par — , too, too much ; je ne sais (pas) — , / hardly know. trou, s.m. hole, gap. troupe, s.f. troo]i, band, company, flock, herd, soldiers. troupeau, s.m. flock, herd. trouver, v. a. to find, to meet with, to think ; se — , v.r. to find or meet each other, to be, find ®r feel one- self, to be found, to hapypen ; se — avec, to meet ; se — bien, to de- Hce benefit ; se — mal, to fare iU. tu, pers. pron. (114) thoai, you. tuer, v.a. trhood. voiture, s.f. vehicle, c-irridge. coach. voix, s. f . voice, vote ; i haute — , loudly. vol, s.m. stealing, tlteft ; au — , fiying, on the wing. voler, v.n. to Jfy ; — , v.a. to steal, to rob. voleu-r, se, 8,m. f. thief, robber ; au — ! stop thief! volontiers, adv. willingly, gladly. vos, adj. poss. pi. m.f. (64, 240) your, yyur oion. votre, adj. poss. (64) your^ your own. votre, pron. poss. (125) yours, your own ; le — , la — , lea — s, yours., your own. vouer, v.a. to vow, to devote. » mloir, va.n. ir. (191, 828) to wUl, to be willing, to desire, to like, to icish, to want ; en — a. to bear ill-will, to he angry loith ; que voulez-vous ? what do you want? veuillez, please. Tous. pers. pron. (110, 114, 138, 25!)) you, ye, to or at you, for or with or in or f mm you ; — m 'me, yourself; — -memes, yourselves. I voyage, s.m. travelling, journey^ I <^"U'''''ff<^ / de — , travelling. ' yoyager, v. n. to travel. voyageu r, se. adj. s. travelling, tra- velier, passenger. vrai, e, adj. true, real. vriii, vraiment, adv. truly, really, indeed. vraisemblable, adj. likely, probable. vn, e, part seen, considering. vue. s.f. sight, eye-night, view, pros- pect /a — d'ceil. visibly ; de — , by sight ; avoir la — basse, to be .fhort- sighted; perdrede — , tolosa sight of. J, adv. there, here, at home, in; il — a, FI avoir ; — otre, V. otre. y, pers. pron. (120, 258) to him. him, to her, her, to it, it, to or on the subject, to them, them, in him, in Iter, in it, in them, about.it, of it^ for it. yeux, pi. of oeil (81). zele, s.m. zeal. zelo, e, adj. zealoifA. zero, s.m. nought, cypher. zone, s.f. zone. ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY OP THE WORDS THAT OCCUR IN THE THEMES. A. a, art. (28, 34, 45, 220, 222, 244) WTi, m. , une^ f . , le, m. , to, f . , les, pi. , par. able, adj. capable (dfe), en etat {(ie); to be — to, pouvair (ir. 190), avoir la force de. a")out, prep. (301), (round) autour rfd, (near to) auprSs de, (with, on one's person) sur, (concerning) 8ur, au svjet de, couceriiant, t/yft chanty (nearly) em^roii, d peu prh^ (on the point of) pr^s de. above, prep. au-dessuf< de, par- des8U8, sur, (before, 298) avant, (more than, 301) plus de, plus que ; — , adv. en haul, (beyond) au-ddd ; — all, sur tout. absence, s. absence, f. absent, adj. absent. absolute, adj. absolu. absolve, v. a. absoudre (ir. 175). abstain, vn.«V/ft.<*i^/aV (rZc) (ir. 187). abundance, s. abondance. abuse, v.a. (misuse) abuser de, (ill- treat) mnltraiter, (revile) dire des injures. accept, v.a. a/^cepter, agreer. accompany, v.a. nccnnpaqner. according to, prep, selon, couforme- meiit d. accordingly, adv. d&ne, c'est pour- qtioi. account, s. compte, m., (narrative) recit., rapport, m., on that — , pour cette raison ; to give an — , rendre compte. account, v.a. compter; — , v.n, rendre compte (de). accurate, adj. exact. accuse, v.a. accuser. ache, 8. mal, m., dovleur, f. acknowledge, v.a. reconnaltre (avow) aroucr. acquaintance, s. connats.'tance^ f. acquire, v.a. ftcf/u'rir (ir. 1-87), unjustly acquired, in^d acquit. acquirement, s. acquisitif/n, f. acre, s. nj-pent, m., demi-hectare, m, across, i)rep. a travers. act, v.n. agir. action, s. action, f. active, a&i.-^ctif. admirable, adj. admirable. admirably, adv. admirablement^ A merveiUe. admiral, s. amiral, m. admire, v.a. admirer. admit, v.a.. admettre (ir. 180). adorn, v.a. oruer, parer. advantage, s, avantage, m. adversary, s. adceisaire, ra. adversity, s. advcrsite, f, advise, v.a.n. cnseiUer (de or que). affable, adj. affuble, grade U4C. affair, s. affair/", t. attlict. v.a. affliger. afford, v.a. (to give) donner, ac- corder, (to have the means) acoif le moyeu (de). afraid, adj. effraye ; to be — o?, avoir peuT de, craindre (ir. 175, 329). Africa, s. VAfrique, f, after, prep. «pr^, (-when followed 442 VOCABULARY. by a verb) aprh que, (in imitation of) d'dpres^ (according to) stlon^ »umird, d, hut. after, adv. ttprea^ ensuite. afternoon, s. apre.s-nddi^ in.f. afterwards, adv. apren, ensuite. again, adv. (once more) de rutuveau., encart^ encore uue fois^ (further) ensuite, de plus ; not — , (not any more) ne . . . plus ; never — , ue . . . plasjinmiis. against, prep, contre., (towards) imrs. age, s. age, m., (old age) meiUesse, f. ; middle — s. moyea age; ten years of — (252), dix (ins. aged, adj. age (252). ago, adv. (147) il y a. agree, v.n. s'accorder., (admit) con- 'cenir de (ir. 187), (promise, 353) s'engager. agreeable, adj. agreahle. agreed, adj. d'accord^ (things) can- mnu. agriculture, s. agriculture^ f. aid, v.a. aider, assister. aim, v.a. viser ; — , v.n. tendre (d). air, s. air^ m. ; in the — , a I' air. Alcibiades, s. Alcibiade, m. Alexander, s. Alexandre^ m. Al,u;iers, s. Alger, m. alike, adj. semblahle, pareil. alive, adj. en He, tivant. all, adj s. (70, 279) t, m. blue, adj. bleu. blush, v.n, roiigir {dc). boarding-house, s. pem^'on, t. boast. 8. rnntene, f. ; to make a — of. ne canter de. body. 8. co/7).s, m. bo\l, v.n. boiiUUr (ir. 187), v.a. faire boidllir (ir. Ib7). bold, adj. hardi. bone, 8. OH, m., (of fish) arSte, f. bonnet, s. chnpeau. book, 8 llvre, m. bookseller, s. librnire, m. boot, s. botte, f.. (low) bottine, f. ; maker, s. boftii'r, ra. bom, part, ne,, (by birth) de vnis- mrtce ; to be — , naitre (ir. 181), etre ne. both, adj. de?fx, le^ deiix^ Cva et r autre (278) ; — of us, iy)U8 deux. ^ottle, 8. (2:58) bonteille, f. bow, 8. (of the head) »iilut, (for shooting) arc, ra., (of ribbon) Tta^ud, m. box, B. boite, f . , (for packing) caisxe, f., (for money, precious things) cassette, f., coffre, m. boy, 8. gar(^on, ra. brandy, s. eau-de-vie. f. brave, adj. (83) i/-au^, couragenx, valliant. brave, v.a. braver. bray, v.n. braire (ir. 197). bread, s. patti^ m. break, v.a. eassej; 'asunder) with an effort, and fig. isilence, etc.) rompre (107). destroy, briber. brer.kt'just, s. dejeuner, m. breath, s. haleine.^ f. ; out of — , liorn dlutleiiie. bridge, s. (230) pont, m bright, adj. brilUiht, clair. bring, v.a. (by carrying, and fig. news, etc.) a.j)j>orter, (without carrying) amener, (fig. lead) coh- du'trc (ir. 172). (induce) avieihcr. broad, adj. (2r)2) large., de largeur. broiher. s. frere, m.; — -in-law, I bedu-frere. Brassels. a. Bi'uxelles, f. build, v.a. n. bdtir {XO'Z), comtruire (ir. 172). bunch, s. (of flowers) bouquet, m. Burgundy, s. la Binirgogue, (wine) H)i de Itourgogue. burn. v.a.n. bn'd-•>' upation^ f.. ajfairej^, f. pi., con>merce, m, (calling) Hat. metier, m busy. a*lj. oec'upe, actij. but, conj. mais ; — that (JilO), que. but, adv. prep, (that, than) que, (only) seulcment, n" . . . gue^ (l')O. 307); — for, sam. butter. 8 bevrre, m. butterfly, s. papill^m, m. biiy, v.a. acheter {d) (9()V by', prep. (135. 302). par (3(i0). ds (2.">2>. d. en (359). »'.)t measure) a, (after a compar'.Tive, and after *• too ' ) de, (in comparing several dimensions), sur. cabbage, s. chou, m. Cajsar, s. Cesar, m, cage. s. cage, f. calculated, adj. propre (d). calf, 8. oeau. m. 446 VOCABULARY. call, sr.a.n. appeler (96). rn/ppder ; — on, upon, aller or venir voir. called, adj. dit. cuinel, 8, cfuimeau^ m, can, v.n. pouGoir (ir. 196, 291), siixoir (ir. 191, 291). candle, s. chandeUe^ f. cane, s. canue, f. cap. s. cxifquette^ f. cjipa'.ile, adj. capable {de). capacity, s. cfipacite, f., qualite, t. capital. 8 (town) capitale^ t. cjiptaia, f. cnpit(tine„ m. card, s. carte, t ; playing — , carte djouer. care, s fioin, m. ; to take — , (be- ware) prendre garde (291), se garder hien (be raiTxdfol, 52), avoir or prendre hoiii {de). careful, adj. aoigiieux. carele8.s. adj. negligent. carnival, s. carnaval. m. carpenter, s. charpentier^ m, carricTfge, n voitare, f. carry, v.ii..n. porter, emporter ; — on, continuer. Carthaginian, s. adj. (Jartliaginois^ e, ra.f. cast, v.a. (thTow) Jeter ; — down, ^lig. ) a a ait re. castle, 8. cliAteau, m. cat, 8. chat ja., chatte, f. catch, v.a. >i!,iraper, saisir. Cato, 8. Ca.'Ajn. ra. cattle, 8. 66: ■;..•■.'. -pi. be-stianx, pi. cause, s. n/i-c'c;, f., ^//jet, m. cause, v.a. C' tuner, (before an infini- tive) faire. cautious, adj. prudf.nt. cavern, s. carer ne, f. cease, v.a.n. (291) cean&r. celebrated, adj celebre. certain, adj s. certain, ra. certainly, adv Cfi'tainenient. chain, s. chaiae, f. chair, s. chaise, t chalk, 8. cntie, f . , (draw) crayon, m, chamber, 8. chambre^ t. ; maid, Jille de chainbre, f. change, v.a.n. changer, changer de. change, s. changeinent^ m. I chapter, s. chapitre, m. character, s. caractSre, m. charge, v.a.n. charger, demander, charity, s. charite, f. chase, s. chasse, f. chastise, v. a. clidtier, punir, cheap, adj. d bon marclie. cheese, s. fromage, m. cherry, s. cerise, f. chess, s. echecs, m. pL child, 8. enfant, m.f. China, a. la Ghine, f. choice, 8. choix, m. choose, v.a. ' cJwinr (102); — , v.n. vouloir (ir. 191). Christian, s. adj. chretien, m. church, s. eglise, f. Cicero, s. Ciceron, m. cigar, 8. cigare, m. city. 8. ville, t. civilize, v.a. civiliser. claim, v.a. redanier, exiger. class, 8. classe, f. clean, adj. propre. clean, v.a. nettoyer (97). clear, adj. dair. clear, adv. clairement, dair. clever, adj. habile, adroit. clip. v.a. rogner. cloak, s. manteau, m. clock, 8. horl'.'ge, ra.., (for apart- ments) pendicle, f., o'clock (73, 244, 296), heure, f. sing,, heures^ t. pi. close, v.a. dore (ir. def. 198), fer- mer. cloth. 8. drap. m. clothe, v.a. oetir (ir. 188). clothes, 8 habits, m. pi. cloud, 8. Ullage, m. cluster, 8. (of fruits) grappe., L couch, s. voiture, t. coast, s. cote, f. coat. s. habit, m. cock, 8. cog, m. coffee, 8. cafe, m. cold, adj. froid ; to be — , a/coif froid (;580) ; it is — , ilfait froid (147). color,. 8. mideuT. f. combatant, s. combattant^ m. VOCABULARY. 447 come, v.n. venir (ir. 135, 187), ap- procher; — 4>ack, revenir (ir. 187); — down, descendre; — in, entrer; — in again, r entrer ; — near, 8'a]yprocher. comedy, s: comedie^ f. comfort, v.a. consoler. comfort, 8. bien-etre, m., agi'e- ment^ m. comfortable, adj. comfortable^ com- mode. command, v.a. commander (327), dominer. command, a. ordrcs^ m, pi. commence. V. begin, commerce, s. commerce., m. commit, v.a. commettre (ir. 180). communicate, v.a.n. communiqaer. company, s. compagnie^ f., aociete. f. compel, v.a. contraiiidre (ir. 17.1). complain, v.n. ae plaindre (ir. 175). comply, V. n. se conformer {d). comrade, s. ctimarade. m. conceal, v.a. cacher ('from')"^, conceive, v.a. concevoir (ir. 189). concert, 8. concert, m. conclude, v.a.n. conclnre (107), (finish) terminer, Jinir (100), condemn, v.a cr^ndnmner {d mort). condition, s. condition^ f., (state) et*it^ m. ; in a — to, en etat dc ; on — , d condition. conduct, v.a. condidre (ir. 172), mener (1)6). conduct, s. conduite, f. confess, v.a. confesser, avouer. confidence, s. confinnce, f. conflagration, s. incendie, m, conformity, s. C(niformite ; in — with, conformement d. conquer, v.a. vdincre (ir. 174), (a country, and fig. to gain, to win) coii,(juerir (ir. 188). conqueror, s. oainqneur^ m. coiKiuest, 8. Citnqae.ie, f. con.scnt, v.n, connentir (d). consequence, b. comtequfiuce, suite, f. consider, v.a.n. Cf/miderer^ (think) rejlechir. consist, v.n. (in) consister ()f'leurer, (exclaim) x"* eerier. cucumlier, 8. cmcombre., m. cultivate, v.a. cnlticer. ca\K 8. (2."3:^) tnsne. f. curse, v.a mundire (ir. 17:^). custom, s. coiitiime. hihittide, t. cut, v.a. c*. damp, adj. humide. dance, v.a.n. datiHeT. dancing, s dan.fte mou- rir ft^. diet, 8 diete, (food) iwurriture, t different, adj. dlffet-eut, dicers. dillimilt, adj. difficile. dlifioulty, s. difficidte, L diligfwit, adj. dlligeut, appUqiie. dine, v.n. dliur. diniujj-room, s. gaUe d rntiugftr, t. dinner, s. dliter^ m. ; — -time, a, {heure du) dln^r., f. direct, v. a. adre^er. direction, s. (idre-tfe, f. directly, adv. direeteinent., tout de suite. disagree, v.n. dijferer, ( — in opin- i(in with), n'etre p((M de Cac^ (de). disappear, v.n. disjxinutre (ir. 178). diKippointinent, 8. return., m. di.sji.ster, h. desHAtre., m. dif?charg«, v.a.n. (dnties) rempUr, x'iii'tfit.lttei' (de). discontented, adj. tnecouUiU. discourse, 8. ditC'turn. discover, v. a. d^^omcrir (ir. 185). discretion, 8. di'^ciHUttc, f. disea.se. 8. mnladie., t. disembark, v.a.n. deborqtter. disgraceful, adj. Jufhtexx, dislocace, v. a. (/«?) demeMre. diaobey, v.a. de.^oheir d (\02). display, v.sl depJ/fyer. displea-se. v.a. depbiire d (ir. 17S). disposed, adj. di^]x/!se id) ; well — , hieu iiilfulwitue. dissatisfied, adj tnecoiiteiU. dissatisfy', v.a. meconteuter. dissolve, v.a. diwo'tdre (ir. 175). distmjfuish, v.a. u. dintircguer. distress, v.a. nffiiyer. distribute, v.a. di-strifmer. distrust, v.a. fie djejier, ne mefier de. ditch, 8. foHse. ra. divert, v.a di-s/raire. divine. aarra.<in.. far, adj. ehigne. Lointnin. fashion, s. focon, in/>d^,, f. f.-ist. adj. (swift) oite. fast. adv. (swiftly) vite. fat. adj. gros. fate. s. deMin, .sort, ra. father, s. pere, m. ; — -in-law, heao-pSre. fatigue, v.a. fatiguer. fault, 8. faute^ f. , defaut., m. favor, 8. fatenr, grace, i. favor, v.a. pmoriser {de). fear, v.a.n. craindre (ir. 175, 293, 82G). fear. s. crninte, f . , peur, f . ; for — • of, de peur de, de crainte de (346). feather, s. plume, f. February, s. fevrier, m. feed, v.a, nourrir (102). feel, v.a.n. sentir (ir. 184). feeling, s. sentiment, m. feign, Y. a,.n. feindre (ir. 175). fell, v.a. couper. fellow, 8. compagnon ; — -citizen, 8. concitoyen; — -traveller, s. compagnon de voyage^ m. fertile, adj. fertile. fertiVity, s. fertilite, f. festivity, s. fete, f. {^21), joies, f. pL fetters, s. fers, m. pi. fever, s. Jiem^e, f. few. adj. peu (de), (small in num- ber-), petit nmndre, (some) quel- 452 VOCABULARY. a — , qudques; but — (57), ite . . , gu^re. fickle, adj. inconstant. fiction, s.Jietion, i. field, s. champ, m. fifth, adj. dnquUine, cinq ; Charles- the- Fifth, Charles- Quint. fiftieth, adj. cinquantieme. fifty, adj. cinqaante. fight, v.a.n. combattre. fill, v.a.n. rempUr (102), ('with,' de) empUr, ramisiei\ Gomhler. find, v.a n. trouoer. fine, adj. (beautiful) ^^aw. fing-er, s. d.oigt, m. finish, v.a. finir (100). fire, 8. feu, m. ; arms, 8. armeJ^ a fen, f. pi. firm, a^. ferme, tiolide. first, adj. s. /tre/nier. lir»t, a(iv. (Puhord ; at — , d^ab(/rd. fish, 8. jH)i.'4f(on, m. fist. 8. pfHtiy. m. fit, adj. pr)re, bon (a), five, adj. 8. cinq. flag, 8. drap&iu, m. , (nav.) pavil- hn, m. flatter, v.a. pttter. flatterer, 8. Ji/itteur, m. flattery, s. pitlerle, t. flee, v.a.n. //«';• (ir. 183), s'enfuir (ir. 183). flight, 8. fnite,, f. fling, v.n. H'eluncer. flock, 8 troupeau, m. florin, 8. florin, m. flour, 8. farine, f. flourish, v.n. fleurir (102). flower, s. ^dwr, f . ; pot, s. pot d fleur, m. fly, v.n. voler, s'envoler; — out, s'envoler, Hortir (309). fly, 8. rnovche. f. fog. 8. bnmiUnrd. m. follow, v.a. Hulcre (ir. 174). folly. 8. y^^fo'e. f«>Uise, hotixp., f. fool, 8. .w^ ra., -le, f. , imbecile, m. f. , /o^^, m. foolish, adj. .sot, bete, ridicule, ( thoughtless. li<)fou. foolishness. V folly. foot, 8. pied, m. for, prep, pour, (during) pendant, (since) depuis, (to) d (250), (be- cause of) a cause de, (for the sake of) par; but — (300) sa/ts. for. conj. car. forbid, v.a. defendre {de) {\Q^, 327); God — ! a. Dieu ne pla>'se. force, v.a. forcer {a). forced, adj. force. forehead, .s. front, m. foreign, adj. etranger. foresee, v.a. preooir (ir. 192). forest, s. foret, f. foretell, v.a.n. predire {\xAl^). forget, v.a. ouhlier. forgive, van pardonner. f.)rk, s f'fUrcJttttf, f. former, adj. premier ; the — (119) rMn.i-hl, m., relle-Ul, f., ceux-ld, m pi.. ceUe-^-hf, f. pi. fonnerly. adv. autrefois. forsake, v.a. ahaitdonner. fortnight, .s. quiiiz- jours, m. pl.^ qulmaio,e, i. ; to-day — , d'axi' jourd'hui en quime. fortunate, adj. heureux, fortune. fortune, s. fortune, f. forty, adj. quarante. forward, forwards, adv. en avant. found, v. a. f/ader. foundation, s. fondation, f. ; lay the — (340) prepare. four, adj. quatre. fourteen, adj. quaprrze. fourteenth, adj. quatorzieme, qudh torze fourth, adj. quatrieme, quatre. fox, 8. renard, e. France, s. hi France, f. Francis, s. Wmnco^s, m. Fraulcfort. s. Frankfort, m. frankly, adv. frauvhenient. Frederick, s Frederic, m. free. adj. lib re, exempt (de)\ — -way. s. piUixuqe, m. freedom, s Uherte. f. freely, adv. fnmvJtement. freeze, v.a.n. gder (97). French, adj. fnni.caU. de. France. Freuchman, s. Fran^ahi., lu. VOCABUIARY. 453 frequent, v. a. freqii enter. frequently, adv. frequeiament^ sau- ve/d. fresh, adj. frais Friburg, s. Fribourg.^ m. Friday, s. oeudredi^ m. friend, s. ami, e. friendly, adj. amical. friendship, s. amitie, t. frig-hten, v. a. effrayer (97). from, prep. (2:^6, 250, 303) de, (far from) U/iit, de, (of time) dejiulx, (commencing on) d pnrtir de. (out of) par. (at) a. (reason) dciusede (237). (on the part of. as coming from, of messages, etc. ) de Ui part dr; — under, d^ dcM(/fis. fruit, 8. fniit, m. fruitful adj. fertile, fecoud. fulfil, v.a. rempUr, (satisfy) satM- fmre{iT. 180). full. adj. piein. funeral, a. fniieraiUes, f. pi. furnish, y.SL. four/ur. furniture, s. meubles, m. pi. fuLure, 8. ave/iir, m. ; in — , for the - , a Vaceuir. G. gain, v.a.n. gngner, (a victory) remporter. (make, 310) Jaire (ir. 180). game, s.jeit. m. (hunt.), gibier, m. garden, B.jnrdin. m. gardener, s. jdrdtnier, m. garment, s. cetuinettt, m gate, 8. porte, f. gather, v.a. rucement. geography, s. geograpMe, f. George, s. Georges, m. German, adj. cdlemand, d^AUemagne, German, s. Allemand, m. Germany, s. VAUemagne, f. get, v.a. obtertir (ir. 187), amasser (2GU) ; — v.n. (become) devenir (ir. 187), He f aire (ir. 180) ; — in, eatrer ; — over, pasxer^ reiioncer {(i) ; — up irise) se lecer. gift, 8. d/?ii. m. gigantic, adj. gigantesgue. girl, s Jiile, f. give, v.a.n. donner (d) (89). (plea- sure, pain, etc.jfaire (ir. 180); — back, rendre {d) ; (idioms, 382). glad, adj. aife (de), content. gladly, adv. aveo plai.sir. glass, s. verre^ m. (233). glitter, V n. briller, reluire (ir. 171). globe, s. gl^ibe, m. glory. 8. gl/nre, f. glove. 8. g.ur, m. heat, 8. chaleur, f. heaven, s. del, m., cieitx, pi. heavy, adj. l&urd, pesant. heighten, v.a. relever. helm, 8. gouvernail, timon, m. help, v.a.n. aider, assister, (for- bear) s*empecher (de). help, s. aide, f . , secours, m. ; to cry for — , cner au secours. hen. s. fxnile. f. hence, adv d'ici, dans (298). henceforth, henceforward, adv. d^ sormau, dorenavajnt. Henry, a. Henri^ m. VOCABULARY. 455 her, pron. pers. (110, 114) elle, (obj. of a verb) to, (to her) Lui, (pos- sessive, 64) son, m, ses, (demoa- strative) cdle. here, adv. iei ; — is, — are, vdci, voild. heretofore, adv. juxqui'ci, autrefois. herew^ith, adv. d joint. hers. pron. poss. (12o) le xien, ia sienne, leu nie/ut, lesniennes, (pron, pers, ) d elle. tVelle. herself, pron. (Ill) eile-in^.me. die, soi-imme (257), mi, .(in a reliect. verb, 138) se ; by — , %e\ile. hesitate, v.n. hhiter. hide, v.a. cacher. high, adj. haut (252), eleT£, grand. highway, s. grand e/iemi/i, rotUe, f. hill, 8. eoUi/ie, I. him, pron. pers. (1 10, 114) le, lui ; of — , en ; to — , lui, (demonstra- tive) cehii. himself, pron. (Ill) lui-mejne, Ivi, noi-irveine (2.">7), tm, (in a reliect. verb, 138) •»«€. hinder, v.a. empecAer {de) (2!)4), his, pron., poss. ((>4, 125; U aien. la sienne, les siens, lea siennen (pron. pers. ) a lui, de lui. history, s. /r'stoire, t. hit, v.a.n. frapjier, (a mark) at- teindre (ir. 175). hoard, v.a. anuiHHer. hold, v.a. tenir (ir. 187). holiday, s. jonr de fete, m.^fite, f. homage, s. liormnage, m. home, 8. cliez soi, m.. mavion, f. ; at — , chez soi, (57) d la mainon., (225) par nai-mfrne. Homer, s. Iloinere, m. honest, adj. (H'6) Ivonriete, honey, s. rniel, m. honor, v.a. honorer ('with.' de). honor, s. honneur, m., /lonneurs, pi. hope, 8. esperanee, f., enpoir, m. hope, v.a.n. esperer ; — for, esperer (97, 827). hor»j, 8. cheval, m. hot, adj. chaud; it is — (147) il fait c/iuud. hour, 8. heure, f. house, s. movion, f,, in or sA, or Ui the — (dwelling) of (37, 299), ckez ; . . . my, his, your — , ehez vioi. chez Ini, chez voua, etc. how, adv. cuinjuent, {excla,m.) que (307). comme : — much, — many, Minblen. however, adv. (yet) cepeiidant toute- fou<, poartant, (before an adj., 281 ) qaelqiie . . . que, d . . . que. human, humane, adj. humain. humiliate, v.a. hamilier. humming-bird. s. oiseaa-mouche^ m. hundred, adj. cent. hunger, s. faim, f. hunger, v.n. amir f aim. hungry, adj . affaine ; to be or feel — (51) a coir f aim. hunt, 8. cliUHHe, f. hunter, s. chaasear, m. hunting, s. chauHe, i. (232). hurt. v.a. faire inal. (wrong) nuirs d (it. 172). /aire tort a, gdter ; to — oneself, . . ., se faire inaL hui-tful, adj. nuisible. husband, s. mnri. hypocrisy, s. /igpocriaie, t. I, pron. je (29, 114), moi (110, 255) ; it is — , c'estinoi (111), idea, s. idee, f. idle, adj. O'islf, {Waj) paresaeux. idleness, s. oisicite, pareMe, f. if, conj. si (103, 310, 320, 322, 323). ignorance, s. igwrrance, f. ignorant, adj. ignorant. ill. adj. (sick) inalade. ill, adv. Tnal ; — -treat, v.a. wjoi traiter. illness, s. maladie, f. illustrious, adj. iUiistre. iraj^finary, adj. imaginaire. 456 VOCABULARY. imagination, b. imagination. iraajj'iue, v.a.n- iniaginer^ se figur- er. imitate, v. a. imiter. immediately, aermi)*i(io/i, f. , (of absence) leave, v.a.n. quitter, IniAtter, (not to take away, not to go to) Itiinser, (depart) poitir left, adj. gniwhe ; to the — , fi ytitiche. leg. s. prmbe. f. lend. v.a. pretext: length, s. hmynrvr. f. ('jr»2. 30^. lest. adj. mtdmlrt. pl^nx petit. lesrt. a«lv moihx, ^ (before a noun) nioihx lie: the — ."^'*/#*. le^HOU. s. I'e^oh. f. ^\. lest, «'onj. 'If- penr qin- ox eKinettre (\r. ISO), (cuu.se to . . .)f) qiru vienrie. letter, s. lettre, f. liable, adj. xKJet {d). liar, s. mtitleur. m. liberal, adj. Uhenih enrers. liberty, 8. W^erte. f. lie, v.n. (speak false) mentir (ir. 184). lie, v.n. etre »itue ; — down, se couch er. life, B. vie, f. lift (up) v.a. lever (96), elecer. light. 8. Ivmiere, f . , (day) ^"owr, m. ; to be — , /aire jour. light, adj. le(/er. lighten, v.a eclairer ; — , v.n. f aire de^H echtirs. like, adj. pardl (iX) ; to be or look — , remtembler (^), atwir Vair (de). like. adv. cmmne., tel que. like, v.a.n. aimer {d), {yi\&h) vmilmr (ir. 101) ; I should — to, je vou- drais. lily, B. lis^ m. limit, v.a. Umiter^ horner^ restrei die (ir. 175). line, s. llgne, f. linen, a. toUe, t. lion, 8. li — , trup^ (before a noun) trter, a' emparer {d£) . niaLhematics, s. mo t/ie/nn liquet, f.pl. rintter. a. mntiere, f., nffnire, ch'iae^ f. ! what is the — V qirext-ce qtCil y n f what is the — with you (52)!' qiCei^i-ce que voils itrcz. qti'eM-cc qiCil a. maxim, a. innxime, f. may. v. auxil. pourmr (ir. 190, S'i^y) ; you - have seen, voaa avez pu voir. May, 8. (month) moi, m. me, pron. me (114), 7noi {IW). meadow, s. p?vnrie, f., yi,''e, m. meal, s. 7-qvi.\, m., (Aonx) fa rirtt^ f, mean, a. mUieii. m. ; — s, pi. moyen^ m. (pecuniary) ynoyena^ m. pi., resxouriu'ti, f. pi. ; by — s of, au moyen de. measure, s. memfre, f. meat, s. vinnde, f. medal, s. mednille, f. meddle, v.n .*e meler (de). medicine, a. medecine^ f. meet, v.a. (i)er». ) rencoittftr. member, a. Incinhre, ni. memory, s. me moire, f. mend. v.a. nrc^ymimoder. reparer^ (a pen) talllir. mention, v.a. mention ner, parler de. merchant. ». ne(fj>ciiint. (retailer) mnirJiiind {de . . .). merciful. a) ; — more, ne . . . plus {2S9). nobility, s. noblesse, f. nobody, s. (57, 180) personne, ne . . . personne, personne . . . ne. noise, s. bruit, m, noisily, adv. hruyamment. noisy, adj. bruyant. none, adj. pron. aucun, nid, pas un, aucun ne, pas un ne (275) ; I have — , je n'en ai pas. noon, 8. midi, m. nor, couj. ni, ni . . . ne, et . . . ne. Normandy, 8. la Normanciey f. nose, 8. nez, m. not, adv. (57, 58, 159, 289; without pas 291), ne . . . pas, ne . . . pmnt, non, pas. nothing, s. (57, 180) rien, ne . . . rien, rn',n . . . ne (adverb, in no way), nuUement ; — but, n^ . . . que. notice, v. a. remarquer, s^ wper&emir de. notwithstanding, prep, malgre; — adv. neanmoins. nourish, v^a. imurnr (103). novel, s. romaii. m. November, s. novembre, m. now. adv. inaintenant, d present^ &)nc. nowise, adv. nuUement. nowhere, adv. nulle part. number, s. (quantity) nombre, m., (sign of distinction) numero, m. nut, 8. (walnut) noix, f. nymph, s. nymphe, f. o. o, int. o7i, o! obedient, adj. obevisant. obey, v. a. obeir (101). object, 8. objet, m., but, m. obligation, 8. obligation, f. * oblige, V. a. obliger {d), (do a service) obliger (de). Qbliged, part. adj. (indebted, in duty bound) oblige ('to,' a, 'for,' de), (compelled) oblige ('to,' de)\ to be —yfaUoir (ir. 148, 190). observation, s. observation, f. observe, v. a. observer, remarquer. obtain, v. a. obtenir (ir. 187), acque- rir, remporter. occasion, v. a. causer. occupation, s. occupation, f., emploi. occupy, v.a. occuper ; to — oneself in or with, s'occuper d (352). ocean, s. ocean, m. o'clock. V. clock. ■ October, s. octobre, m. odious, adj. odieax. of, prep. (42, 285, 250, 342) de, (among) entre ; a brother — mine, unfrere d-moi. offence, s. offense, injure, f. offend, v.a. offenser, mawjiuor {d). 462 VOCABULARi^. offer, v.a. offrir {d) (ir. 184), pro- jtoser (a). officer, 8. officirr, m. oft, often, oftentimes, adv. Hovvent; as — as (241 ), toatea let* foin qae. oh. int. oh ! 6 I oil, 8. huile^ f. old. adj. (68, 79, 252) vieux, vidl, dge ; to be ten years — , nvfyi.r dix ans, etre age de dix itjis ; how — are you ? quel dge avez-oous f omen, s. augure^ ra. omit, v.a. omettre (ir. 180). on, prep. (804) >iur, (at, to, about) rt, (of, from, towards) de. on, adv. denfms. once, adv. uiiefois ; — more, encare unefoifi; at — , t/nd de ftuite, tout d Cffup, tout d'yin coup (28()). one, adj. un^ nne, un neul, uneseuie; not — (70) aucuH, md. one. pron. (man, people, they, 129) o/i, (somebody) f/veh/u^un, m., (the — ) celiii, m., ceUe. f. ; any — , quelqu'un ; (neg. 275) persoii/w ; some — , qiteLqn^un; the — , V. \ that ; — another, V. each other. . one's, ffton. soit^ m. , .sa, f., .S'<5.<*, pi. | oneself, pron. soi-msine., soi, (in a reflect, verb, 138) xe. only, adj. ne^U^ unique. only, adv. -seulement, ne . . . que, (57, 100. •■507), rien qu»/mn.e. etnpoi'te. pfwt. prep, mi-deld, de, (of age) jtl'/x de, (of time) panne, npren ; half- — two (7;5) deux heures et demie.. patience, a. pntience. t. pafieut. a malade., m.f. pay. v.a. pat/er (Ji7;, (v-isits, re- spects) rendre, faire (ir. IbO). peace, s. puia'. f. peach, 8 peche, f. pear. s. ihdre, f. peasant, s. pat/snn, m. , -ne. t. pe////i,'«, f. pi., (inhabitants) haM/tan/n, m. pi., 2)ff])djtitMm, f., (common folks, lower class) pevple, m. , (they, one, 129, 274) on; — say, on dit. perceive, v.a.n. (see, with the eye or mind) aperc.rvoir (ir. 189i, (find ou>t, notice, by the mind only) ^operottoir de. perform, v. ». n. fafW, executer, s^a^ quitter de. (theat., mu8.)^'0Mcr. perhaps, adv. peut-Hre. perish, v.n. penr^ deperir. I>ermit, v.a. permettre (ir. 180). pernicious, adj perniaieux. {persecute, v.a. perxeeuter. Persian, s. a3). praise, s. louange. t, eloge., m. pray, v.a.n. prirer. repeat, v. a. repefi^,/\ (by heart) re- nter. repent, v. n.a. xe repciitirde{iT. 184), reply, v.a.n. repondre,. report, v. a. rlev. (deprive) /^mer (tie). Roman, adj s. roriudn. Rome. 8. lioine, f, roof, s. f/)it, m. room. 8. ehnmhre, f. rose. a. roxe., f. , round, adj. rond. round, adv. V. around, adv. roj-al. fidj. rofi7 satisfy, v.a.n. HollMfaire (ir. 180), Satunlay. s. :<»iiii(i'liei\ elere, m school. 8. ea>it-^ f ; at — , d Vecole. pcieiioo, 8. licience^ f. Scii)io Afriiuiuns, s. Scipion i' Afri- ca/ n.. m. scissors. 8. civfiitx, m. pi. scold, v.a.u. f/ro/idcr. scripture, s. Fcritiirenainte^ f. Bciilpt'ire. 8. HCid/ptiire. f. Scytliiaji, adj 8. acytke^ des Scythes. sea. s. iii.er. f. season, 8. .viiton, t. secoml. adj. xecond^ detixieine^ (of the month) deux. secret, adj. s. secret., m. ; to keep a — (:543), (se) tnire (ir. 178). security, s. surete., f., garaiitie. see, v.a.u. voir (ir. 1^3), (under- 8tand) ct/mpren-dre (ir. 181). seek. v.a.rL chercher, (ask) deman- der. % seem. v.n. Mmihler^ parmtre (ir. 178). sei/ie, V. a.u. .H/tmr (103), s'emparer. sfldom, adv. ntreinent. sell', proa. s. (Ill, 3o7) 8oi-mSme, soi, xe,. sell, v.a. vendre (105); — v.n. se oendre ; to be sol, niettre (ir. 180) ; — off (start) /w'v p*ir- tir ; — out, V.n. (of the suu, etc. ) He Goncher ; — off oi out, 'piirtir (ir. 18:J). seven, adj. sept. seventeen, adj. dix-sept. seventh, adj. sepli&jne., scqit. seventy, adj. soixnnte-dix. several, adj. phtsieicrs. sew. v.a.n. coudre (ir. 174). shade, shadow, s. onihre., f. shall V. p. 04. 90, 301. shame, s. hontt, f. share, s. pdi't, f. share, v.a.n. partager (97). she, pron. adj elle\nO, 114, 225), c^^fe (110, 370). shed, v.a rerser. repandre (108). sheep, 8. nioiiton. ra. , brebis., f. sheet, a. (of paper) /g/^i^e, f. shepherd, a. bfrger. shine, v.n. Inirc. (ir. 171), briller. shining. brill,(tnt, beuu. ship, s. (chietiy for war) vm.tf^fnn, (chiefly for trade) nrivire. (^cntTul terra) bdtimenU ra. shirt, 8. chemise., f. shoe, s. Koulier., m. ; — maker, s. cordonnier.m.. shoot, v.a. (fire arms) tirer., (go out shooting) c/uf„sser. shop, 8. >n>ijpisin, boutiqite {de . . .). short, adj. ov.rt. petit ; to be — -sighted, avoir la nne basse. should. V. p. 54. 90 201, 3;J5. shoulder, a. epaule, f. yhow, v.a. irymtrer. shun, v.a. eniter^fniy (ir. 183), shut, V JI.U. fenner; - in. enfeimior shutter, a. cflet. Sicily, s In Sicile, f. sick, adj malnde. side. 8 (',<'>fe. m. siege, 8. siege, m. sight, s. one, f. si.nu. a. signe. m. sign. v.a. signer. signify, v.a.u. signijior. silence, s. sileftce^ m. 468 VOCABULARY. silent, adj. sHen^auux ; to be or keep — , se taire (ir. 178). Biik, s. xoie,, f. Bilk, adj. de soie. silly, adj. niais, ftot. silver, 8. argent, ra. silver, adj. cT argent simple, adj. s. nimpk^ m. sin, s. ])eche, ra. since, conj. dfi'puU que (292), que (308), (inasmuch as) puisqae. sincere, adj. ainrj/r. sinceritj', s. sincerite, f sing, v.a.n. chanter. singer, s. ehantear, m. single, adj. neal. sink. v.n. {H')eaf oncer ^ (decline) d^- choir (ir. 189). sir, s. monfiieitr, m. sister, s. s(£ur^ f . ; in-law, helle- smur. sit, v.n. (seat oneself) H^asseoir (ir, 192); — d.'jwn, n'oHHe/dr ; (to din- ner, to table) He inettre (ir. 180) a table. situated, adj. dtm. situation, s. situalion., place^ f. six, adj. 8. dx. sixteen, adj. seize. sixteenth, adj. seizieme^ seize. sixth, adj. sixie/ne, six. sixty, adj. s. soixante. size, 8. grandeur., f. skate, 8. patin., ra. skate, v.n jxitiiier. skilful, adj. haMle, adroit. skin, 8. ]ieau, f. sky, s. del, m. ; skies, pi. (clouds) aaes. f. pi. slander, v. a. medire de (ir. 172). slate, 8. ardoiKn, f. slave. 8. e^clare, m f . slavery, s. esclarage, m. sleep, v.n. dor mi r (ir. 183). sleep, s. sommeil, ra. sleepy, adj. ; to be — . avoir sormneil. slow, adj. lent. slumber, v.n. somineiller. .small, adj. petit. smell, v.a a sentir ; — sweet (285) 9tntir b(/n,. sraile, v.n. souHre (ir. 107, 194), ('at,' pers., d ; things, de). smoke, s. fnmee, f. smoke, v. n. a. fmner. snow, 8. neige, f. snow, v.n. neiger (146). snuffers, s. rnouchetteM, f. pi. so, adv. oinsi, (therefore) done, (to such a degree) si, tellement, tant^ au.m, (used after an adj. &r a verb) le, en. que oai, (provided that) pourvv que ; — that, — as to, de sorte que, de maniere que. soap. 8. savon. m. society, s. societe, f. Socrates, s. Socrate, ra. soft, adj. (yielding, not hard in sub- stance) 7nou, mol, (not rough, and fig. not hard or harsh or strong) donx, dMicat. softly, adv. (gently) doucement. soil, v.a. salir {\02>), souiO£r. soldier, s. soldat., m. solid, adj. so/Me, (not hollow) massif. some, adj. art. adv. (some or other, a small amount of, a short . . ., a few), quelqxe, qnelques, pi , (an in- definite quantity or number, 89) du, ra., de l^i, f., des, pi., (of it, of thera, 120) en, (about) environ^ d pea pres ; pron. qnelques-nns. somebody, s. pron. (129) quelqu'im., on. something, s. pron. quelque cJime^ m. ; — else, autre chose, m. sometimes, adv. quelquefois., (when repeated) tantot. somewhere, adv. quelque part. son, 8. fils, m. soon, adv. hientot, tot, (early) cee bonne heure, tot ; as — as, ausd- tot que, des que (820). sooner, adv. plus tH (286). sore, adj. (tender) douloureux, sen- sible ; to have — eyes, throat (53) avocr nnii aitx yeux, d la gorge. sorrow, s. chagrin, m., douleur. sorry, adj. fdcJie ('for,' 'to,' de)^ afflige. sort, s. sorte. esp^e.^ f. VOCABULARY. 4G9 eoul, 8. dme, f. source, a. smiree, t. Fouth, 8. i^i/d, midi. m, pow, v.a.n. semer {\)^). epaoious, adj. grand, vaste. Spain, 8. V Rls^tngne, f. Spanish, adj. e-^pf/gnoL d'Espngne. sparrow, s. mm/teou, m. speak, v.n.a. parlt^r, dire (ir. 172). 8I)t'aker. r. oi'ntrirr, m. Bpectacles, s. luHeUfx. f. pi. spell. V a. D. e'}>el.er. (write) ecrire, (is spelt) n'ecril (ir. Mu). 6]>end; v.a.n. deyeiiner^ (tinie);ww.s-6?'. spirit, 8. exj^rits ni. spite. 8. de}4f,.xr\., mnlke, f . ; in — of. en dr-jiit de, rmdgre. splendid, adj. sylendidf^ mcignifiqiie. ppoil, v.a. an'Ttnnyre (107), gdter^ (ibiiner, detruire (ir. 172). spoon. 8. ci/iUer, f., (for salt or ice; pel/^, f. Bj)read, v.a. etendj-e, (scatter, pxxh- liRh)repa/idre (107). spring. v.a.n. (leap) xtn/fer. spring. 8. (season) prlnte^npM. m., (elastic body) retfsort, ra. ; in the — , au prill IfDips. stair 8. — 8, pi. . esc^die/r, m. ; down — 8, en ban ; up — s, en hnut. stand, v.n. ne tenir (dehout) (ir 187), (be placed) etre pl), (that is to say) c'ext-()-ttire (oOS). that, pron. relat. V. who, whom, and which, that (conj., 103; with indicative, 308; with subj., 825) que, (in order that) nfin que (333), 'pour que. que (310). the, art. (28, 34, 218, 221) le, m., la, f., len, pi. theatre, a. theatre, m. thee, pron. pers. ^^* (110), te (114). their, pron. posa. leur, leurs ((54, 241). theirs, pron. poss. (125) le leiir, la leur, les leurs. them, pers. pron. eiix. m., elles, t. (110), (obj. of a verb) les, (to them) leur{\\'i)\ at — , bj — , for — (of thin^) y, en (120). theme, h. tJieme, sujet, m. themselves, pron. (Ill, 257) eux- mernes, eUeit-memeK. evx, eU,es, (in a reflect verb) ae (138). then, adv. (at that time, in that case) olfn'H. (afterwards) enaaite, puis, (therefore) ^fA/ic; since — , (lepiiiK r,e te)np>i-l(i. dqiuis. there, adv. (place not mentioned before) Id, y. t place mentioned before) y. (emphatically) W / — he or she is {or goes) le or la voild; — they are, les voild ; — is or are, V. be. these, pi. of this ( V. this), pron. dem. (62) ce-i, ces . . . -ci^ ceux-ci, celle.s-ci (il-y-a. 147). Theseus, s. The..^ee, m, they, pron. ;Z<<. m., eUen, f. (114), eux, m., eUes, f. (110), (those) ceux. m., ceUes, f. (119), (people, anyone) on (119, 274). thick, adj. (252) epaifi, d'epameur. thief. 8 vof^ur. m ■ thine, pron. poss. (125) le tien, la tieniifi. I,ej< tiens. l/'.s tieaneti, d toi, di' iol. V. mine, think, v.a. n. peiixer, (believe) crytVe (V'/r* (ir. 177, 327). tliird, adj. trouiem^. trvis. thirst, 8. 8(jiJ\ I. thirsty, adj. ; to be or feel — , avoir ""if. thirteen, adj. treize. thirty, adj. trente. this. pron. dem. ce,.cet, m., cette, f., ce. . . -ci. cet . . . -ci, cette . . . -ci (02), (this one) Cfhii-ci. m. , CtW • ci, f. (119). (this thing) ceci, cela^ c^(120). K that, those, pi. of that ( V. that), pron. dem. ((j2) ces. c.es . . . -Id, cmx, celles. ceux-ld. eeUes-ld ; — are, ce sont. ce nont Id, voild. thon, pron. tu (114). toi {UO). though, conj. (1<>3, 333) quoique^ hien que ; quelque . . . que (281). thought, 8. pennee, f. thouirhtlesa, adj. iicsou riant. thousand, adj. (08) uiille, (of the (late) inU. thread, s. fil. m. threaten, v.a. meuacer. three, adj trois. throat 8. yn-fje. f. ; " a sore — , nn mat (le (/orqe (230). twd d la qorge r>2). through, prep, d ti-avem, par, (in the middle, in) dMiitu, (by means of) ]>ar. throughout,prep. d^un bout dC autre. throw, v.a. jeter (90) ; — off, jeter d baft, thunder, v.a.n. tonner. thunder, s. tonnerre, m. ; — -storm, 8. oi'age, m. Thursday, a.jeudi, m. thus, adv. ainsi. thy, pron, poss. (05) ton, ta, tea. thyself, pron. (Ill) toi-meme, toi, (in a reflect, verb, 138) te^ toi. tile, 8. tuile, i. till, prep, conj, V. until. time, s. temps, m., (of the clock, keiire. f. , (with regard to repeti- tion, 100) />w, f. ; a long — , long- ti'^rnps ; at one — (at once, formerly) antrefoU, tout d'?tn coup (28<)) ; at the same — , en w/ine teiupn ; at — s, parfoin. quiiqiiea fois ; in" good , rt tempa ; it is — , i\ c^t iempf (;>30). 472 VOCABULARY. timely, adv. o VTopos. timid, adj. tiinide. tire, v.a.ii. [sfi) fatiguer. t-o, (panicle used before an infini- tive) a (847) de (842), (in order to) poiir (854), (ijin de ; (some- times untranslated). to, prep, a (485, 282, 250), en (286), (into) eii, (towards, of behavior, u^ith reg-ard to. 250, 299) envers, (towards, of direction) rern (299 >, (as far as, till) jii.s(/t''d, (about, 244) vers, (of the hour, 72, 244) nifd/is. to-day. adv. avjonrfPhni. tog-ether, adv. en-seinble. tolerably, adv. p/tf<,sifMem,e7d, attftez. to-morrow, adv. denwin ; the day after — , aprh deniiairh. ton, s. tonne, f. too. adv. IrijqK (also) avunL de pluK. tooth, 8. dents f. ; ache, b. imd de dent, ni- (380), mal aux dents (52). touch. V a.n. toucher {d). towards, adv. (250, 299) ters., en- vern, pour. towel. 8. essuie-tniiinfi^ m. town, 8. viUe, f. ; in — , en viUe. tradesman, s. marchmid, m. traduce, v. a. V. slander. train, s. (rail) train, ra. tranquil lit}', s. tranqiiiUite, t. translate, v. a. tradf/ire (ir. .172). translation, s. trndu-ction^ version., f. travel, v.n. voi/ager. traveller, s. rfn/m/eur., m. treasure, s. tresor, m. treat, v.a.n. trailer, regaler., ('with,' 'to,' de). treatment, s. traitement, m. tree, s. arbre, m. tremble, v.n. trembler, tribute, a. tribut, m. triumph, v.n. trioinpher (de). troop, 8. troupe, f. trouble, v. a. trouMer., toiirmenter ; to — oneself, ae dernnger, (be uneasy about) xHnxpiU'ter {de). trouble, 8. trouble, m.. (alUiction) peine., f., (auuoyauce) ennuiy in. Troy, 8. Troie, t. true, adj. vrai. truly, adv. waiment, dncerement. trunk, 8. malie, f., coffre, m., (of ele phants, insects) trompe, f. trust, v.a.n. (rely on) sejier d, avoir con fiance en, (in trust) confier d. trusty, adj.^r/^fe, constant. truth, 8. veHie., f. truthful, adj. rrai. truthfulness, s. teracite, f ., verite., f. try, v.a.n. essay er, (test) eproiiver, (endeavor) tdcJier {de), (tire) fa- tiguer. Tuesday, a. mnrdi., m. tumult, 8. tumnlte, m. turn, v.a.n. tourner., (change) changer, canveriir {en), (direction) {s(^ diriger or tourner (vei's), (move toward) se diriger {vei's). turn, 8. to7/r, m., (service) service, m. ; by — a. in — , tonir a tour. tutor, a. precept&ur, maltre, m. twelfth, adj. dovzUme, dome. twelve, adj. a. dovze ; — o'clock (noon) midi, m., (midnight) m- nuit, m. twenty, adj. (67) tingt. twitter, a. gazouiUeinent, rcu two, adj. deux. tyrant, a. tyran, m. Tyre, s. Tyr, f. Tyrian, a. Tyrien, m. Tyrolese, a, adj. Tyrolian, adj. Tyrolien,, m., -we, f. u. ugly, adj. laid, vilain. umbrella, a. parapluie, m. unable, adj. incapable {de). unanswerable, adj. santt replique. uncertain, adj. s. incertain, m. uncle, 8. onde. ra. uncomfortable, ad j gene, vuUdson mse, (things) incommode. V VOCABULARY. 473 nncommon, adj. rare^ extraordi- naire. under, prep. adv. «^ire,r. want. 8 W((nqiie,, (need) bewin, m. ; for — (A, ja/ite de. war. s. (/1/rrre, f. warm, adj chaud ; to be — (51), tirolr cjittud. warm, v.a.n. chauffer , iCechauff'er. warn, v.a ai-ertir (de). wasp. 8. yu^pe, f. waste, v.a u. (lose) pei-dre. wat<-.h. v.a. t-eiUer (Kur). watch, s (tiiue-{)iece) in/nifre, f., (at night) reiiU-, f. , (guard) y((ide, f. ; to k«ep a strict — , veiller avec win (nur) ; maker, s. hor- ioyer, in. water, s ean, f. . water, v.a. arroner. ^ way. 8. cli<-m/in^ m., route, f., voie^ f.. (direction, side) cote, m., (means) nioyen, m. ; which — ? de quel cote ? par od ? this — , par-ci ; that — , par-Ul. we, pron. nous (110, 114, 255), (anyone) on. weak, adj. fail)le, deMe (129, 274). weakness, s. ■faible.i'irH, m. pi. ; this day — , d^itujonrdluil en knit; yesterday — , il yen hier huitjoiint. j weep, v.a.n. pleurer ; to — bitterly, yiVy'i^) fniidre en Innne.'i. welfare, s. bien-elri\^ m. well, adj. hle.n. f>oti, bien portant / to be — , xe jxtrter bien. well, adv. bien. West, s, oiteal , accident, m. west. adj. de I'mieM, ouest, occiden- tal. West Indies, lea hideji occidentales. Western, adj. K west. wet, adj. inoidlle. what. pron. rol. adj. que, y?///i(122, 2(i5. 270). qtCext-ce qui, qu'eMce qae t2;»4). qnel, m.. qmlh, f., qaelx, m.pl., qaelle.t. L pi. ((52), (ex- clam. ) qael . . . qne (^~>()7). ce qui. ce que (12o, 270), (that of which, what . . . of) re (hnit. (as) coniiae, (how much) Cirmbien. whatever, pron. rel. (7(), 2«2. 28:}) toot ce qui, tout ce que, quelque, quelctjuque. quoi que ce st/it. quoi que. (when used adjectivcly) qneJ que. quelle que, q'ieh que. qudicM que., Umt ce qui, Omt ce que (2S0). when. adv. (28(), 'MYd) quandhntqu^, \U8ed for in or 09) et que. whence, adv. d^uil. whenever, adv. tauten le^sfois que. where, adv. :5. 2(>7) qui {noxw.). que (ohj), (after a prep.j lequel, in., laquelU, f. , lje^'ie [de), brave (83). won Id (sign of the conditional). K p 54, 90, 201, 235. wound, v.u. blesser. 476 VOCABULARY. wouad, B. hHrnre, f., eoiip, m. wretched, adj. miserable, wrist, 8. poignet, m. write, v.a.n. ecn^'e (ir. 175). writing, s. ecritu7'e, f. ; master, maitre (Vecriture^ m. wrong, adj. fanx^ mal ; to be — (pers. ) avoir tort {de). wrong, 8. mal, m., injtistice, f., tort, m, ; to be in the — , avoir tort. wrong, v.a. faire tort d. yard, s. coitr, f., (measure) Wf^^r*?, m. year, a. mmee, f., an., m. ; last — , ran/iee (ieriilere or paasee ; next — , CdJiJiee yrochaine ; new — , nouveUe annee, nouvel an; N^iw — 's Day, jour de Van, m. ; New — 's gift, etrennes, f. pi. ; to wish a happy New — , souhaiter la bonne annee. yellow, adj. s. jaune, m. yes, adv. oui, ai (201), que oui, que si (808). yesterday, adv. hier ; the day be- fore — , avant d'fiier. yet, conj. cependant, que . . . ne (310). yet, adv. encore. yield, v.a.n. ceder (d). yonder, adj. ce, cet, cettc, MS, ce . .% 1(1, etc. ; adv. Id-bas. yon, pron. (110, 114) vous. young, adj. jeune ; — men, — peo* p\e,jeunes gens, m. pi., la jeun- es.se, f. younger, adj. plus jeune. your, pron. posa. (G4, 65) votre, vos, pi. yours, pron. posa. (125) le votre, la votre, les votres, (pron. pers.) d vous, de vous ; a friend of — , un de -^os amis ; — truly, sincerely, or faithfully, tout d vans, votre tout deooue. yourself, pron. (Ill) wms-mime^ (in a retlect. verb, 188) vous. 3'ourselvt!s, pron. (Ill) oous-nienes^ (in a retlect. verb, 188) vou^. youth, 8. jeunesse, 1, (ladj jeant lu/mme, m. zeal, 8. z^le, m. zealously, adv. avec aUt, zero, 8. zero, m. Bone, & zon^j t THIS BOOK IS DUE ON THE LAST DATE STAMPED BELOW AN INITIAL FINE OF 25 CENTS WILL BE ASSESSED FOR FAILURE TO RETURN THIS BOOK ON THE DATE DUE. THE PENALTY WILL INCREASE TO 50 CENTS ON THE FOURTH DAY AND TO $1.00 ON THE SEVENTH DAY OVERDUE. MAY 27 1036 i- . iAY 29 1937 S EP i 183^ J l IN 25 19 4 1 iyAp i '5CGB MV?^19S6l.U i/i&\^t4 SEP 1 ^ 1958 gyp ^ 195H -24^ aoBl F^^C .IUN7 1960 LD 21-100m-7,'33 YB 01205 /^ f 3(^3^ I UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA UBRARY